Home

1 - Omni Ray AG

1. a Special adapters j Connector I Mainuit Input output extension blocks g adapter p p FX3U 4AD ADP FX3G 14MR ES FX2N 8EX ES UL FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX3U 4DA ADP FX3G CNV ADP FX36 24MR ES ron gt FX2N 8EX FX2N 8EYR S ES UL EX3U 3A ADP FX3G A40MR ES FX3c 40MT ES S FX2N 8EX UA1 UL FX2N 8EYT ESS UL FX3U 4AD PT ADP FX36G 60MR ES FX3G 60MT ES S FX2N 16EX ES UL FX2N 8EYR FX3U 4AD PTW ADP FX2N 16EX FX2N 8EYT FX3U 4AD PNK ADP FX36 14MR DS FX3G T4MT DS S FX2N 16EX C FX2N 8EYT H FX3U 4AD TC ADP FX3G 24MR DS EX3G 24MT DS S FX2N 16EXL C FX2N 16EYR ES UL FX3G 40MR DS FX36 40MT DS S FX2N 16EYT ESS UL FX36 60MR DS FX36 60MT DS S Input output EX2N 1GEYR i FX2N 8ER ES UL FX2N 16EYT LEXGU ABSADPCMB FX2N 8ER FX2N 16EYT C FX3U ENET ADP FX2N 16EYS FX Series terminal blocks can be connected to connector type units J Extension cables 359 Connector conversion adapter FXoN 30EC FXON 65EC e FX2N CNV BC EE B Input output powered B Special function blocks m Input output FX3U 4AD FX3U 16CCL M FX2N 32ER ES UL FX2nN 48ER DS l E FX3u 64CCL XAVABER UAM UL ASER D T gt FX2N a FX2N 2AD e FX2N 16CCL M CNCABER FX2N 32CCL FX2N 2DA FX2nN 48ER FX2N 4AD FX2N 64CL M EX2N 4AD TC DANSES FX2n 4AD PT FX2N 32ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET DSS E To Network gt FX2N ABET ESS UL FX2N 48ET D 2N e FX2N 8AD FX2N 32bE
2. 4 MRSS CES 8 3 EIS s TT D 1 M XO X2 X4 X6 X X2 X4 X6 Li hd id Xt XS X5 XT Xt XS X5 XT O 200000000 MITSUBISHI 85685884 Di z C POWER LO oO T T atm fo D b 01224887 O O MELSECGFXa 32ES QU eS vies TRIAC UNIT 66885886 co O Got y ya lcomal y T Yr looms y Ys oa Ys DL YET o UUUUUUUUUUU Sy essere essere ses XC c wa e 3 fes ea 9 e a es 3 9 es 69 63 140 5 52 mounting hole pitch 1 9 0 36 150 5 91 87 3 43 15 7 3 Terminal layout CET owl xo xz x4 xe xO x2 xa X6 PN 24 x4 x3 x6 x7 xi xo Xe x7 vo va Ya v6 vo v2 valve 242 cov Y1 vs oou vs v7 pone v vafo vs v7 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 8 FX2N 48ER UA 1 UL 15 8 FX2N 48ER UA1 UL SF 15 8 1 Product specifications The generic specifications are the same as those for the main unit 1 2 Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications O For external wiring refer to the following chapters E Refer to Chapter 9 for power supply wiring Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring a Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring 1 Power supply specifications 1 3 For the power supply specifications refer to Section 15 2 E c oQ 2 Input specifications 100V AC Input Ed o Item FX2N 48ER UA1 UL Input points 24 points 1 4 Connection type Removable t
3. w um um um um um um ey Ai LE g d LI umm um um um um um um Em M w um um um xm EM EM EM EE EE EM EE EM EM EM EM REM EM EM REM EE EM EM EE EM EM EE EM EM EM EM EM EE EM EM EE EM REM EM AS 1 The connector conversion adapter is required to use a special adapter 2 Included in the number of units connectable to the main unit when the input extension block including the FX2N 8ER ES UL and FX2N 8ER is used and the extension power supply unit is located on the upstream side 3 When using an input output extension unit select a power supply type that is the same as the main unit 4 Available when the main unit is the AC power supply type 67 UOnOnpoJjU NO SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee OO uononpoJu jonpoud suoneoyiods I Qi ov lt p OO 2 5 YL 5J O oo a gt QQ wa skS uoneJn6ijuo SON HUN SON jndinondu uonejesu OO BULA A ddng Jewog ue uonesedaid h Buum ndu CO p FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 1 Configuration of a Whole System 6 1 4 Expansion board connector conversion adapter memory cassette display module configuration The connection positions and number of expansion boards connector conversion adapter and memory cassette configuration vary depending on the number of points in main units For details refer to the description
4. Bleeder resistance Bleeder resistance OO 5 U PLC PLC zc sink input source input cS ej 4 i i 1 In the case of a type only for sink input 2 connect the device to the COM terminal si O 4 In the case of 2 wire proximity switch Use a two wire proximity switch whose leakage current IZ is 1 5 mA or less when the switch is off When the current is larger than 1 5mA connect a bleeder resistance Rb kx determined by the following Qi o U lt formula as shown in the following figure JE zi quomm 6 AE Rb kQ x T 14 1 5 Bleeder Bleeder oc resistance resistance e a 2 wire 2 wire a Rb proximity Rb proximity o PLC basin M PLC EIU sink input source input 7 mem O o oc Hoo EO 0 0 0 3c zB P 1 In the case of a type only for sink input connect the device to the COM terminal 8 ay i 3 ae o Q S Cog O O zel lt S Q 145 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 2 24V DC input Sink and source input type 10 2 3 Examples of external wiring sink input AC Power Supply Type Sink and source input type Main unit t Fuse 1 pm l mE OV LES Three ces im XO wire xo sensor RY a 1 aE Input Lt 5V ov 24V impedance L 31 Input extension block proximity Sink and source input type terminal 1 Ha
5. SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee OO 5 zo Odo u Connector on id These holes are designed to secure the connector conversion adapter with screws si connecting screw holes1 2 places 2 Nameplate The product model name control number and power supply specifications are shown j For details on the manufacturer s serial number refer to Subsection 5 1 1 3 DIN rail mounting groove The unit can be installed on DIN46277 rail 35 mm 1 38 wide 4 Co O s F D Qi seone Jeyeudueg pue uoISJ9A wasis uoneJn6ijuo SON Iluf SON jndinondu uonejeisu OO BULA A ddng Jamod ue uonesedaid h Buum ndu CO p 33 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 3 Introduction of Products User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 1 List of Products and Interpretation of Model Names 3 Introduction of Products 3 1 List of Products and Interpretation of Model Names The following system configuration is classified into product groups A to O in the product introduction sections given below Display module F Expansion boards Aq Battery Bj Memory cassettes amp FX3G 5DM Output FX3U 32BL ws FX3G EEPROM 32L FX3G 4EX BD FX3c 2bEYT BD 3 Communication Analog FX3G 232 BD FX3G 2AD BD FX3G 422 BD FX3G 1DA BD EX36 465 BD FXac 485 BD RJ L Analog volume FX3G 8AV BD
6. buttons to adjust the contrast To cancel the operation and return to the menu screen press Contrast ESC Button Operation Description ESC Cancels the operation and returns to the menu screen Lowers the contrast decreases the numeric value The value can be decreased to 5 Increases the contrast increases the numeric value The value can be increased to 10 T OK Registers the selected setting and returns to the menu screen 3 Press the OK button to register the selected setting and return to the menu screen 325 SJojunoo wh peedsg uBij Buum nding N 10 Buum OO s sN snoueA I JE oD Dn es Sy XL EN 090 2 2357 oo 2 0 5 Q mM US Aog O c gt Oo 2 oO Oak 2 s S a e uda syoolg UOISU9 X3 dnoandu C N yun A ddng Jamod UOISUS X3 co suondo pue sun UOISUS X3 JOUIO J 77 nes D lt ES o c D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM 19 10 Clock Menu Current Time Setting 19 10 Clock Menu Current Time Setting The ClockMenu menu consists of current time and the clock setting items The current time should be set before operating the system 19 10 1 Clock setting procedure 326 1 5 6 At the menu screen use the buttons to move the cursor to the ClockMenu item then press OK
7. eessseeesseeeee 343 19 16 3 Keyword and display screen protect function levels and corresponding restrictions 344 19 16 4 Relationship between keyword and display screen protect function 344 19 16 95 Keyword levels tcr Ic c ET 345 19 16 6 Relationship between specified device monitor function and display screen protect function sseeessessssssessssseseeeneennnne nennen nnn nnn nnn nnn rna 345 19 16 7 Pointers for using the display screen protect function eessessesseeeeeeeeeeeeree 346 19 17 Operation Button ON OFF Information sseeesssessssssseeseeeneenn enne nnns 347 19 151 vangus AD DIC AUIOINS seca cnt eue o ctas eate E Uup iSo a tue Pedusese cie ete mate dis 347 19 17 2 System information operation button ON OFF information eeseeeeeeeeeeeeee 347 19 18 Specifying a Hexadecimal Current Value Display Format ccccccccseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeens 348 19 18 1 System information specifying a hexadecimal current value display format 348 19 18 2 Program example 1 specifying a hexadecimal data display format 348 19 18 3 Program example 2 specifying a decadal data display format ssssessssse 348 19 19 Operation Error Messages and Corrective ACtIONS ccccccccseeeeeceeeeeesaeeeeeeae
8. 6301 Parity overrun or framing error 6302 Communication character error 6303 Communication data sum check error 6304 Communication data format error e Ethernet communication inverter communication computer link and programming 6305 Ensure the parameters are correctly set according to their 6306 Communication time out detected applications 6307 Modem initialization error N N network parallel link MODBUS communication etc Continues Check programs according to applications 6308 operalion N N network parameter error lt Pemo mantrane 6309 N N Network setting error Ensure modem power is ON and check the settings of the 6312 Parallel link character error AT commands Wiring 6313 Parallel link sum error Check the communication cables for correct wiring 6314 Parallel link format error 6321 MODBUS communication error 6340 Special adapter connection error Check connection of the special adapter Parameter error M8064 D8064 6401 Program sum check error 6402 Memory capacity setting error 6403 Latched device area setting error 6404 Comment area setting error 6405 File register area setting error STOP the PLC and correctly set the parameters Special unit BFM initial value setting positioning instruction 6406 setting sum check error 6407 Stops Special unit BFM initial value setting positioning instruction setting error operation 6409 Other setting error STOP the PLC and correctly set the s
9. Removal of the part B is not necessary when the connector conversion adapter is used together Raise the memory cassette detachment lever Raise the memory cassette detachment lever C 377 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 21 Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 21 3 Installation 378 Attach the memory cassette to the option connector of the expansion board connector conversion adapter Attach the memory cassette to the option connector E in the right figure of the expansion board connector conversion adapter Fix the memory cassette G in the right figure with provided M3 tapping screws F in the right figure to the expansion board connector conversion adapter Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 6 N m Caution Two types of M3 tapping screws are provided Use M3 x 16 longer screws Fixation is not necessary when using only the loader function and not always connecting the memory cassette FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 21 Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 21 4 Removal 21 4 Removal KJOW N 9jesse2 Be sure that the power is OFF when removing the memory cassette 21 4 1 Removal when the expansion board connector conversion adapter are not used together N apeg IND The FX3G 40MT ES is used as the main unit in this example Raise the memory cassette detachment lever Raise the memory cassette detachment lever A
10. co suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 13 FX2N 16EYS Triac Output 16 Points 16 13 FX2N 16EYS Triac Output 16 Points 16 13 1 Product specifications The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications For external wiring refer to the following chapters Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring 1 Power supply specifications Item FX2N 16EYS Product type FX2N extension block Rated voltage 24V DC supplied from main unit and input output powered extension unit 2 Weight and Other specifications External dimensions are described later Item FX2N 16EYS MASS Weight 0 3kg 0 66lbs The extension cable is already connected to the extension block Other Accessories Label for indication of input output number The DIN46277 rail width 35 mm 1 38 or direct installation 3 Output specifications Triac output type Item FX2N 16EYS Output Points 16 points Connection type Vertical terminal block M3 screws Output type Triac output SSR External power supply 85 to 242V AC Output circuit insulation Photo coupler insulation Indication of output operation Activation of the photo thyristor will light the LED indicator lamp on panel 0 3A point Resistance load The total load c
11. including basic and applied FX3UC instructions and various devices separate manual The manuals for FX3G Series will be available in or after September 2008 ze Structured Programming Manual For details on structured programming refer to the following manual separate MELSEC Q L F Structured manual Programming Manual Fundamentals SH 080782 Model Q FX KP KI E FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common JY997D26001 Model FX KP DK E FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Basic amp Applied instruction JY997D34701 Model FX KP SM E As for FX2N Series refer to individual FXCPU Structured Programming manuals Manual Application Functions JY997D34801 Model FX KP OK E Expansion board Special adapters eAnalog eCommunication OOOO sg oooooloooococooo OOOO Options eej User s Manual Analog Control Edition i rin iod JY997D16701 Model FX3U U ANALOG E eMemory cassette CE Eb FX3S FX3G petails of analog special function Ran ue FX3U blocks and analog special adapters 3UC separate The manuals for FX3G Series will be manual available in or after September 2008 User s Manual Data Communication Edition JY997D16901 Model FX U COMMU E Details of N N Network FX parallel link computer link non separate protocol communication and manual programming communication Manuals supplied with product Each produc
12. 4 M 8359 DEED UIS Ope COPS M 84024 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Send request D8402 YOO2 Pulse output monitor M 8360 4 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 ON BUSY OFF READY M 8403 Receivecompleie fidd D8403 Y 002 Clear signal output function M 8361 Ah ig utput functi IMIB404 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 i Carrier detection flag YOO2 Zero return direction Data set ready DSR flag M 8363 YOO2 Forward limit MI8406 M 8364 YOO2 Reverse limit M 8407 Noticed M 8365 Y002 DOG signal logic reverse M 8408 YOO2 Zero point signal logic M 8366 1 e M 8409 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 i Time out check flag VBG 4 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP or when M 8368 Y002 Positioning instruction RS2 instruction ch1 is OFF activation M 8369 Y002 Pulse output stop command 4 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP 394 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M851 1 Number and Correspond M Operation and function ing special device RS2 FNC 87 ch2 and Computer Link ch2 M18410 to M8420 M 8421 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Send wait flag M 84221 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Send request D8422 i RS2 FNC 87 ch2 1 M 8423 Receive complete flag ES RS2 FNC 87 ch2 passes Carrier detection flag i RS2 FNC 87 ch2 oaan Data set ready DSR flag M 8426 Computer link ch2 Global ON Computer link ch2 pona On demand
13. 8 6 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices This section explains the connecting methods for extension devices 8 6 1 Connection of extension devices The connecting method varies depending on the combination of the products i e the main unit expansion board special adapters input output extension blocks and special function blocks The connecting methods are explained with the following configuration examples Example of configuration Connector FX2N F X3U Special conversion Expansion Series adapter adapter board extension blocks FX3G Series main unit Connecting method D Connecting method E Connecting method C Connecting Connecting method B method A sT REM FX2N Series input output Be extension blocks powered extension unit extension blocks Extension cable FXON 65EC FXON 30EC FX2N Series Input output powered extension unit Ld Lo Lo Connecting Connecting Connecting method F method G method H 114 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 6 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices 8 6 2 Connecting method A connection of expansion board o This subsection explains how to connect the expansion board to the main unit z The FX3G 40MT ES is used as the main unit in this example j Remove the top cover A in the right 2 figure from the front face of the main SES u
14. Ses SNOEN I dE OD nV es Sy TE EN 090 2 erg O O 2 0 mo Q muvu gt aoe O c gt Oo 2 oO Ooc 2 s S r wn uda syoolg UOISU9 X3 dnoandu C o gt j yun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 co suondo pue spun 1X3 JeuiO eipojyy Aedsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 4 Seven Segment with Latch SEGL Instructions FNC74 BCD Instructions FNC18 2 Input output powered extension unit Example of program M8000 SEGL D100 Y020 Example of wiring 1 In the case of sink wiring When inputs are used for sink only and outputs are the transistor sink type in the used input output powered extension unit 7 segment display to be used for sink wiring in the case of transistor output Input output powered extension unit FX2N 32ET FX2N A8ET Transistor output sink eJ 10 Use a 7 segment display with a latch and a built in BCD decoder 2 In the case of source wiring When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor source type in the used extension unit 7 segment display to be used for source wiring in the case of transistor output Input output powered extension unit FX2N 32ET ESS UL PLC segment display FX2N 48ET ESS UL Transistor output Source n J2 Ja Use a 7 segment display with a latch a
15. fs e es e en z 06600006 2x Sx ex X OX 2x 9X 9x EX IX z jeX jeX eX dX 2X OX FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 5 FX2N 8EX FX2N 16EX and FX2N 16EX C FX2N 16EX C or When an input X number is assigned 8 points on side A will be used for the lower input numbers and 8 32 points on side B will be used for the higher input numbers CE With cover Without cover Input indicator amps LED lamps TRES a xo 1 11 xo Connector type 00000000 0 Rear line extension connector Buum nding NS d xa 5 15 pa XS 6 16 X5 X6 7 17 x6 Terminal arrangement X7 8 18 X7 tepe 24 10 20 ar FXav 16EX C BZ ec 0i com so Input indicator lamps LED lamps a CLU Ls r1 IES ooo0oo00000 a 10 buum OO s sN snoueA 16 5 3 External dimensions I FX2N 8EX Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1S9 Unit mm inches a 15 f O o mus FX2N 8EX Am a 9o owr 72 ENS E Oo SOs o c GE Go 3 5 a O Legi 43 1 7 FX2N 16EX 17 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches yu A ddng Jamod UOISUS XF T LO bx eo co co mounting hole pitch suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 259 FX3G Series Pro
16. 2 Contact protection circuit for inductive loads 13 An internal protection circuit for the relays is not provided for the relay output circuit in this product It is lt lt recommended to use inductive loads with built in protection circuits When using loads without built in ai protection circuits insert an external contact protection circuit etc to reduce noise and extend the product 2a life s 1 DC circuit Connect a diode in parallel with the load 1 4 The diode for commutation must comply with the following en Inductive load ce specifications gs O cr l PLC output 23 E Item Guide contact Diode 2g E Reverse voltage 5 to 10 times the load voltage for commutation I Forward current Load current or more 1 5 2 AC circuit Pon Connect the surge absorber combined CR components such as a surge killer and spark killer etc SSE parallel to the load 2 3 O Sas Select the rated voltage of a surge absorber that is suitable c iE for the load being used Refer to the table below for other zi PA Inductive load specifications 1 6 Item Standard ME Comani Surge apes Static electricity capacity Approx 0 1uF absorber m oS 2 O Resistance value Approx 100 to 2000 em c Reference Manufacturer Model name Manufacturer Model name 1 i Okaya Electric Industries Co Ltd CR 10201 Rubycon Corporation 250MCRA104100M B0325 earn as 3j 3 Interlock DS For loads such as forward reverse contactors etc where El Limit of normal
17. Appendix B 3 Applied Instructions in Ascending Order of FNC Number FNC No Program Flow 00 CJ 01 CALL 02 SRET IRET 04 E Function Conditional Jump Call Subroutine Subroutine Return Interrupt Return Enable Interrupt Disable Interrupt 06 FEND 07 WDT 08 FOR NEXT Move and Compare 10 CMP 11 ZCP 12 MOV SMOV CML BMOV FMOV O OO Main Routine Program End Watchdog Timer Refresh Start a FOR NEXT Loop End a FOR NEXT Loop e co Compare Zone Compare Move Shift Move Complement wo na 0j gt O Block Move Fill Move N 18 BCD Conversion to Binary Coded Decimal 19 BIN Conversion to Binary Arithmetic and Logical Operation 20 ADD Addition 21 SUB Subtraction 22 MUL Multiplication 23 DIV Division 24 INC Increment 25 DEC Decrement 26 WAND 27 WOR 28 WXOR 29 Rotation and Shift Operation 30 Rotation Right 31 ROL Rotation Left 32 Logical Word AND Logical Word OR Logical Exclusive OR SFTR 35 SFTL 36 WSFR 37 WSFL 38 SFWR 39 SFRD Bit Shift Right Bit Shift Left Word Shift Right Word Shift Left Shift Write FIFO FILO Control Shift Read FIFO Control Q R 410 FNC No IBF LEO eT Eiio g Function 40 ZRST Zone Reset 41 DECO Decode 42 ENCO Encode 43 SUM Sum of Active Bits 44 Check Specified Bit Status 45 Mean 46 ANS Timed Annunciator Set 47 ANR Annunciator Reset LM MEME 49 FLT Con
18. Co existence network route C24 CCIE Cont NET II CC Link Ethernet NET 10 H OK Accessing host station A display screen is the example of Ver 8 72A 4 Click the OK button to finish the setting 64 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 5 Cautions on using transparent port 2 port function of GOT F900 Series 5 5 Cautions on using transparent port 2 port function of GOT F900 Series UONnOnpoJjU When monitoring circuits device registration etc in an FX3G PLC from GX Developer Ver 8 72A or later using the transparent 2 port function in the GOT F900 Series make sure to execute the following setting If the following setting is not provided write to PLC read from PLC verify with PLC etc operate normally but monitoring ladder monitor entry data monitor etc cannot be normally executed GX Developer Ver 8 12N or earlier GX Developer Ver 8 22Y or later GX Developer Ver 8 72A or later Select RS 232C on PC side I F Select RS 232C on PC side I F NO SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee When directly Set COM port and Transmission eae eect j Map Serial setting dialog box and set Serial setting dialog box and set connecting GX Developer speed on PC side I F Serial b d NM b um se em COM port and Transmission COM port and Transmission to PLC setting d
19. The main unit must be installed before installing a special adapter or connector conversion adapter on the enclosure For the connection procedure refer to Subsection 8 6 3 and Subsection 8 6 4 Push out all DIN rail mounting hooks A in the right figure MITSUBISHI wase v Fit the upper edge of the DIN rail mounting groove B in the right figure onto the DIN rail Lock the DIN rail mounting hooks C in the following figure while pressing the PLC against the DIN rail MITSUBISHI MELSEC v MITSUBISHI Esse 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 107 UOnOnpoJjU NO SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee seone Jeyeudueg pue uoISJ9A uononpoJu uoneJn amp ijuo OO jonpoug suoneoyiods I ueisc CO DO N z5 a2 Gt co ZS O ZS o n BULA A ddng Jamod h Buum ndu CO p uonejeisu ue uoneJedaJg FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 4 Procedures for Installing on and Detaching from DIN Rail 8 4 3 Installation of input output powered extension unit block and special function block 108 Push out the DIN rail mounting hook A in the right fig erPane Rear panel ure of the input output extension
20. yoo g jJeuiuJe FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 Terminal Block 20 9 FX 16EYS TB 20 9 4 External wiring precautions 1 Protection circuit for load short circuits A short circuit at a load connected to an output terminal could cause burnout at the output element or the PCB To prevent this a protection fuse should be inserted at the output 2 Micro current load The PLC s internal Triac output circuit is equipped with a turn off C R absorber When connecting a very low current load of 0 4VA 100V AC or less or 1 6VA 200V AC or less please connect a surge absorber parallel to the load Terminal block Micro current load Surge Select the rated voltage of a surge absorber that is veges suitable for the load being used Refer to the table below for other specifications Guide Static electricity capacity Approx O 1uF Resistance value Approx 100 to 200 Reference Manufacturer Model name Manufacturer Model name Okaya Electric Industries Co Ltd CR 10201 Rubycon Corporation 250MCRA104100M B0325 3 Interlock e Forward For loads such as forward reverse contactors etc where Interlock limit a hazardous condition could result if switched ON Forward simultaneously an external interlock should be provided for interlocking the PLC s internal programs as shown to the right Ec 5c BESSER z limit U PLC output element 4 in phase PLC output contacts
21. PID operation is started The variation of the measured value PV is small compared with the output value Multiply the measured value PV by 10 so that the variation of the measured value will increase during auto tuning Auto tuning is finished KP 32767 PID operation is started gt The auto tuning time is longer than necessary Increase the difference ULV LLV between the upper limit and lower limit of the output value for auto tuning set a smaller value to the input filter constant a or set a smaller value to the PV threshold SHPV for auto tuning and then check the result for improvement Check servo wiring and parameter setting Also check ABS instruction Check to make sure the port is not specified by another instruction Check to make sure the input X as specified by DSZR or ZRN instruction is not being used for the following purposes Input interrupt High speed counter C235 to C255 Pulse catch M8170 to M8175 SPD instruction Check to make sure the pulse output destination is not being driven by another positioning instruction The number of times an applied instruction is used in the program exceeds the specified limit When the memory cassette is used check whether it is mounted correctly If the problem persists or if the memory cassette is not used something may be malfunctioning inside the PLC Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative The write protect
22. Remove the tapping screws B in the right fig ure which fix the memory cassette 0008d 0008IN sr uononJjsu UJ s n d jeloeds Proceed to the step 3 when the memory cassette is not fixed with tapping screws Grasp the detachment lever and pull it Grasp the detachment lever C and pull it vertically to remove the memory cassette sj pow penumnuoosiq Kieyeq 10 suonneo2aJd UJ uoneuodsueJ Remove the side cover Remove the side cover D in the right figure as shown in the right figure jo Buypuey TI Ssejejs JOquiow 13 ui seveyeq Caution The side cover is not attached when the memory cassette is installed under the top cover S of a 40 60 point type main unit Attach the top cover Attach the top cover E in the right figure as shown in the right figure 379 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 21 Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 21 4 Removal 21 4 2 Removal when the expansion board connector conversion adapter are used together 380 The FX3G 40MT ES is used as the main unit and the expansion board is used together in this example Raise the memory cassette detachment lever Raise the memory cassette detachment lever A Remove the tapping screws B in the right figure which fix the memory cassette Proceed to the step 3 when the memory cassette is not fixed with tapping screws Grasp the detachment lever and pull it Grasp the d
23. e Sequence program Extended file registers ERO to ER23999 24000 points e GX Works2 e GX Developer 1 This function is supported in FX3G PLC Ver 2 00 or later Do not connect a memory cassette with special parameters saved to any FX3G PLC earlier than Ver 2 00 2 This function is supported in GX Works2 Ver 1 87R or later 3 The maximum number of points for the memory capacity comments and file registers can be specified when the FX3G programming tool is selected The maximum number of points cannot be specified when a programming tool other than the FX3G is selected sj pow penumnuoosiq Kieyeq 10 suonneo2aJd UJ uoneuodsueJ jo Buypuey TI Ssejejs JOquiow 13 ui seuejeq 381 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 21 Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 21 6 PROTECT Switch 21 6 PROTECT Switch 21 6 1 PROTECT switch setting Reading from and writing to memory cassette operations can be performed by using the programming tool I MITSUBISHI Because sequence programs are written by an electronic format a special of ROM writer and ultraviolet eraser are not required m The PROTECT switch must be turned OFF to enable writing E IT T Switch 21 6 2 PROTECT switch operation 1 Preparing the operation tools Set the PROTECT switch knob by using the tip of a pair of tweezers a precision screwdriver or a tool with a tip width o
24. s syoo g UOISU9 X3 dnoandu C N yun A ddns Jewog UOISUS X3 co suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 3 External Wiring for Triac SSR Output Type 12 3 2 External wiring precautions 1 Protection circuit for load short circuits A short circuit at a load connected to an output terminal could cause burnout at the output element or the PCB To prevent this a protection fuse should be inserted at the output 2 Micro current load The PLC s internal Triac output circuit is equipped with a turn off C R absorber When connecting a very low current load of 0 4VA 100V AC or less or 1 6VA 200V AC or less please connect a surge absorber parallel to the load Select the rated voltage of a surge absorber that is suitable for the load being used Refer to the table below for other specifications Item Guide Static electricity capacity Approx O 1uF Resistance value Approx 100 to 2000 Reference Manufacturer Model name Manufacturer Okaya Electric Industries Co Ltd CR 10201 Rubycon Corporation 3 Interlock For loads such as forward reverse contactors etc where a hazardous condition could result if switched ON simultaneously an external interlock should be provided K for interlocking the PLC s internal programs as shown to m the right P
25. 266 The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications For external wiring refer to the following chapters Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring Power supply specifications Item FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX2N 16EYR ES UL FX2N 8EYR S ES UL Product type FX2N extension block Rated voltage 24V DC supplied from main unit and input output powered extension unit 2 Weight and Other specifications External dimensions are described later Item FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX2N 16EYR ES UL FX2N 8EYR S ES UL MASS Weight 0 2kg 0 44lbs 0 3kg 0 66lbs The extension cable is already connected to the extension block Other e Accessories Label for indication of input output number The DIN46277 rail width 35 mm 1 38 or direct installation 3 Output specifications Relay output type Item FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX2N 16EYR ES UL FX2N 8EYR S ES UL 8 points Output Points 8 points 16 points All points have separate reference terminals commons Connection type Vertical terminal block M3 screws Output type Relay 30V DC or less 240V AC or less 250V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE UL or cUL standards Output circuit insulation Mechanical insulation External power supply Indication of output operation Supplying power to the relay coil will light the LED indicator lamp on panel 2A point The total resistance load current per common shoul
26. 415 9jlesse2 NO Aiows h N apeg IND 0008d 0008IN Js uononJjsu UJ seoi e jeloeds 30 oO o0 Qao D 9 o 2 2 Cc D Qa 10 suonneoaug jo Buypuey TI Ssejejs Jequieu 13 ui seueyeq FX3G Series Programmable Controllers Appendix D Precautions for Battery Transportation User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix D 2 Transport guidelines MEMO 416 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers Appendix E Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built in Batteries in EU Member States User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix E 1 Disposal precautions 9jlesse2 NO JOUJOJN Appendix E Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built in Batteries in EU Member States N apeg IND This section describes the precautions for disposing of waste batteries in EU member states and exporting batteries and or devices with built in batteries to EU member states Appendix E 1 Disposal precautions In EU member states there is a separate collection system for waste batteries Dispose of batteries properly at the local community waste collection recycling center The symbol shown in following figure is printed on the batteries and packaging of batteries and devices with built in batteries used for Mitsubishi programmable controllers 0008d 0008IN sr uononJjsu UJ s n d jeloeds 1 This symbol to the left is for EU member states only The symbol is specified in the new EU Battery Directive
27. Circuit error M8066 D8066 x 0D o 6610 LD LDI is continuously used 9 times or more 2 2 6611 More ANB ORB instructions than LD LDI instructions za 6612 Less ANB ORB instructions than LD LDI instructions 1 5 6613 MPS is continuously used 12 times or more mos pet O 6614 No MPS instruction 25 2 oO 6615 No MPP instruction S 8 No coil between MPS MRD and MPP or incorrect S 6616 OW a combination Instruction below is not connected to bus line 1 6 6617 STL RET MCR P I DI El FOR NEXT SRET IRET FEND u or END IUE STL MC or MCR can be used only in main program but it is RRO 6618 m i oc used elsewhere e g in interrupt routine or subroutine 5 8 6619 Invalid instruction is used in FOR NEXT loop a i STL RET MC MCR interrupt pointer or IRET This oor occurs when a combination of instructions n Stops incorrect in the entire circuit block or when the relationship 6620 BR FOR NEXT instruction nesting level exceeded between a pair of instructions is incorrect 1 T 6621 P Numbers of FOR and NEXT instructions do not match Modify the instructions in the program mode so that their com 6622 No NEXT instruction mutual relationship becomes correct zi a QD 6623 No MC instruction i E 6624 No MCR instruction E 6625 STL instruction is continuously used 9 times or more 6626 Invalid instruction is programmed within STL RET loop 1 8 MC MCR interrupt pointer SRET or IRET oco 6627 No STL instruction 5 zi
28. High speed High speed counter input interruption pulse catch pulse width pulse period measurement speed detection a processing SPD instruction 4 6 TAE viso Input matrix MTR instruction digital switch DSW instruction inputs ee ey Oo 20 Other Absolute current value read ABS instruction a B Zo 8 3 The applications shown below are not supported Unsupported Applications Pulse Y output PLSY instruction acceleration deceleration setup PLSR instruction pulse width modulation PWM instruction DOG search zero return DSZR instruction batch data positioning mode TBL instruction Pulse outputs l eX absolute current value read ABS instruction zero return ZRN instruction variable speed pulse output PLSV 222 instruction drive to increment DRVI instruction drive to absolute DRVA instruction x D o F ees fc 5 us e Input matrix MTR instruction digital switch DSW instruction E Time division Seven segment with latch SEGL instruction output oo 4 A power supply for the input circuit is required when connected to the FX2N 16EX C suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO The current consumption is shown in the table below Power Supply Voltage Current Consumption FX2N 16EX C 24V DC 160mA D 5 e o 5 D e lt o a D yoojg jJeuiuJe 355 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 2 External
29. U o D CD c xe i lt UOISU9 X3 suondo pue shun 3X3 Jeujo ainpoyy Aedsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 295 FX3G Series Prog rammable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 2 Special Adapters 18 2 Special Adapters 18 2 1 FX3u A4AD ADP External Dimensions Terminal Layout 2 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches MASS Weight Approx 0 1kg 0 22Ibs y g e Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in cba T E width or screws 9 m Accessories Manual supplied with product Q 2 poles Terminal block European type n CZ E E 2 O E l 5 17 6 0 7 poles 18 2 2 FX3u 4DA ADP External Dimensions Terminal Layout e MASS Weight Approx 0 1kg 0 22lbs e Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws 2 64 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches e Accessories Manual supplied with product e Terminal block European type 18 2 3 FX3u 3A ADP External Dimensions Terminal Layout e MASS Weight Approx 0 1kg 0 22lbs e Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches Accessories Manual supplied with product Terminal block European type 98 3 86 mounting hole pitch 2 2 92 0 62 296 FX3G Series Prog rammable Controllers
30. With cover Without cover Output indicator lamps LED lamps ENDS OOooooooo FXn 16EYT C Output indicator lamps BS 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 10 LED lamps 16 11 3 External dimensions Side Side Connector type Rear line extension connector _ vale 16 V5 Terminal arrangement Y7 8 18 Y7 cono 19 CON P po o FX2N 8EYT 2 04 5 mounting holes FX2N 8EYT CD POWER 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch oTo 1 2 3 0000 4567 OOOO FX2N 16EYT 2 4 5 mounting holes 90 3 55 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch 278 Unit mm inches Unit mm inches FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 11 FX2N 8EYT FX2N 16EYT FX2N 16EYT C Transistor Output FX2N 16EYT C OI ES 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches d d Q C O 12 mo TE O 5 OD os FXan 16EYT C 0 E c 2 out o Oo e E p 4 13 lt lt 40 1 58 x O 5 S e H c 2 D en How to connect connector FX2N 16EYT C I Connection face of connector 3 so SS c O cr The polarity is shown in the following table 22 z od 2 0 Q UPE Ofc 2 0t 2g O 19 17 15 113 1 2g 20118116 14712 20 91g 74 gf 94 413 211 z z N Side B is for the higher input numbers 1 and side A is for the lower input numbers
31. e VCK FNC270 IVDR FNC271 IVRD FNC272 IVWR FNC273 IVMC FNC275 and ADPRW FNC276 instructions Instructions for falling edge pulse When write during RUN is completed for a circuit including an instruction for falling edge pulse LDF ANDF or ORF instruction the instruction for falling edge pulse is not executed without regard to the ON OFF status of the target device When write during RUN is completed for a circuit including an instruction for falling edge pulse PLF instruction the instruction for falling edge pulse is not executed without regard to the ON OFF status of the device that is set as the operation condition It is necessary to set to ON the target device or operation condition device once and then set it to OFF for executing the instruction for falling edge pulse Instructions for rising edge pulse When write during RUN is completed for a circuit including an instruction for rising edge pulse the instruction for rising edge pulse is executed if a target device of the instruction for rising edge pulse or the operation condition device is ON Target instructions for rising edge pulse LDP ANDP ORP and pulse operation type applied instructions such as MOVP Contact ON OFF status Instruction for Instruction for while write during RUN is executed rising edge pulse falling edge pulse OFF Not executed Not executed ON Executed Not executed 1 The PLS instruction is not executed Writing in RUN mode t
32. 1 In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic controller the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable logic controller device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi programmable logic controller has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the programmable logic controller applications In addition applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected such as in aircraft medical applications incineration and fuel devices manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices shall also be excluded from the programmable logic controller range of applications However in certain cases some applications may be possible providing the user consults their local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances solely at the users discretion FX3G S
33. 276 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 11 FX2N 8EYT FX2N 16EYT FX2N 16EYT C Transistor Output 16 11 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement QI FX2N 8EYT a With cover Without cover FXoN 8EYT C POWER O utput ni Gee indicator 4567 OOOO Rear line extension connector Buum inding NS lamps LED lamps 1 3 za 5 CAS lt Else E cda cS wn D o 14 S58 S25 o S 483 o2 e a FX2N 16EYT 15 When an output Y number is assigned 8 points on the upper side will be used for the lower output numbers mpg and 8 points on the lower side will be used for the higher output numbers S S gas With cover Without cover 3 Output indicator 3 z i 8 lamps 3 66 o lt i LED lamps i N Rear line F extension Lower connector d numbers lt 1g Output indicator f lamps 5 LED lamps 17 Syp E To oS Higher 8 Co lt lt numbers i9 lt 18 OCO 2925 NO o 9 oD D D o gt g i 2 o D ey 3 m UJ 9 o 277 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 Input Output Extension Blocks 16 11 FX2N 8EYT EX2N 16EYT EX2N 16EYT C Transistor Output FX2N 16EYT C When an output Y number is assigned 8 points on side A will be used for the lower output numbers and 8 points on side B will be used for the higher output numbers
34. Devices can be monitored and tested by operating the buttons on the display module The button operations can be inhibited by the user program Other functions On the display module you can set the time adjust the contrast and display the PLC version and error codes Refer to 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM in this manual Communication and network functions The expansion board special adapter and special function block for each communication function can be connected Kinds of communication functions Programming communication RS 232C RS 422 USB e N N Network e Parallel link e Computer link Inverter communication Supported in Ver 1 10 or later Non protocol communication Built in RS 422 RS 232C RS 485 Refer to Data Communication Edition e MODBUS communication Supported in Ver 1 30 or later Refer to MODBUS Serial Communication Edition e Ethernet Supported in Ver 2 00 or later Refer to FX3u ENET ADP User s Manual e CC Link Master station Compatible with CC Link Ver 2 00 and Ver 1 10 FX3U 16CCL M Master station Compatible with CC Link Ver 1 10 FX2N 16CCL M Intelligent device station FX3U 64CCL Remote device station FX2N 32CCL Refer to the manual for each product e CC Link LT Master station FX2N 64CL M Remote I O station Remote device station Refer to the manual for each product 5 Analog functions The expansion boar
35. FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of High speed Counters User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 3 List of Device Numbers and Functions 11 3 List of Device Numbers and Functions SJejuno2 peeds ubiH For details on the counter number OP refer to Subsection 11 2 2 Response Frequency Data length kHz Device No Counter type External reset input External start 1 terminal input terminal None None 32 bit bi directional counter 7 counter 1 phase 1 count input C246 C248 OP Buum nding N 10 Buum OO Ses snoueA I bz i O cr EB m 32 bit i ase P E oo bi directional counter ae Pu ag oe 8 S 15 C253 OP None None mos Aog C254 OP 25S 32 bit 2 30 epee eum put C252 bi directional counter Provided None E C253 SR C254 a C265 ee 16 1 When using multiple high speed counters make sure that the sum of used frequency does not exceed the overall frequency Sag For details on the overall frequency refer to Section 11 7 29 58 oh j yu A ddns Jewog UOISUS X3 co suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 161 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 Use of High speed Counters 11 4 Allocation of Device Numbers to Input Numbers 11 4 Allocation of Device Numbers to Input Numbers 11 4 1 Allocation table In
36. Power fuse 125V 2 5A 125V 3 15A Rush current 30A max 1ms or less 24V DC 24V DC service power supply 1 There power consumption values are maximum values which include consumption of all expansion equipment and input current 5 or 7 mA per point FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 3 Input Specifications 4 3 Input Specifications uononpoJu The main unit input specifications are explained below 4 3 1 24V DC Input sink source NO The input numbers in the table indicate the main unit terminal numbers X010 or more means the numbers from X010 to the largest number that the main unit has The input numbers for FX3c 14M are X000 to X007 For details on sink input and source input refer to Subsection 10 1 1 SOWeN ed pue seJnjee Specifications Item FX3G 14MLI FX3G 24MLI FX3G 40MLI FX3G 60MLI OO 5 U Input connecting type Removable terminal block M3 screw Input form sink source 7 Input signal voltage AC power supply type 24V DC 10 DC power supply type 20 4V to 28 8V DC X000 to X007 3 3kO Input impedance Input signal X000 to X007 7mA 24V DC ON input X000 to X007 4 5mA or more sensitivity current X010 or more 3 5mA or more suoneouioeds Qi OFF input sensitivity current 1 5mA or less Input response time Approx 10ms g D S zo l No voltage contact input p 59
37. QD Power consumption 1 92W 80mA 24V DC E e 1 This response time does not include the response delay at the PLC oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO D 5 w o 5 J 77 e lt Oo 2 e D yoojg jJeuiuJe 365 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 7 FX 16EYR TB 20 7 2 Internal circuit o00 1 2 3 004 5 6 4401 2 3 444 5 6 7 zs rr esp lel EHE es ES Cr Les JLo ETE TES TE T9 TE2 T ESTE 4 TES TE 1L 10 to 007 Lower numbers AAO to A A7 Higher numbers 20 7 3 Example of output external wiring O00 to 007 Lower numbers A AO to A A7 Higher numbers loads oo00 1 2 3 o4 567 AAO 1 2 3 444 5 6 7 Relay power supply HIS WH 5 Bale cues 3 5 T pss EHA 2 Teo aT eT eog Lo 2T eog 4 T 6 T pow d 3E li Fuse 24V DC 366 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 7 FX 16EYR TB 20 7 4 External wiring precautions oc 1 Protection circuit for load short circuits e A short circuit at a load connected to an output terminal could cause burnout at the output element or the PCB To prevent this a protection fuse should be inserted at the output Fuse Terminal block Buum nding N 2 Contact protection circuit for inductive loads 13 An internal protection circuit for the relays is not provided for the relay output circuit in the terminal block It is lt lt recom
38. SJojunoo wh peedg uBi Buum nding N 10 Buum OO Ses snoueA I zz oD Dn es Sy X 5 E 090 2 erg O O 2 0 Q mM US OS O c 2opc 2 oO Ooc 2 S E a o uda 490 UOISU9 X3 jnd noandu C N yu A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun UOISUS X3 JOUIO J 77 nes D lt ES o c D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 14 Specified Device Monitor Function 19 14 4 Program example2 when monitoring consecutive timers using operation keys In this program example the device type to be displayed on the specified device monitor screen is set to timer T The operation keys and in the display module are available to scroll device numbers TO to T10 during monitoring In this program example system information is assigned from D50 to D54 and from M50 to M64 M8002 l System information system No 1 is 83005 Set at D50 to D54 Initial pulse l l l System information system No 2 is posui set at M50 to M64 Sets the device type to Timer Resets the device number D51 Specified device monitor screen button ON displayed M56 M55 M59 eM NCP Specified device The timer number is scrolled using monitor screen the or button while the button ON displayed specified device monitor screen is M55 M56 M59 displayed eM DECP C e
39. The allowable number of writes is 10 000 or less for the memory cassette EEPROM and 20 000 or less for the built in memory EEPROM 19 7 Error Check The main unit s error status displays at the ErrorCheck menu 1 At the menu screen use the buttons to move the cursor to the ErrorCheck item then press OK The error check result then displays at the error display screen ErrorCheck refer to fig at right To cancel the operation and return to the top screen time display press ESC at the menu screen When no errors have occurred No errors 2 If multiple errors have occurred the keys can be used to switch between the error display pages Areni eroras cU Button Operation Description ErrorCheck ESC Returns to the menu screen 1 error or less Disabled 2 errors or more Displays the previous page s error screen 1 errororless Disabled 2 errors or more Displays the next page s error screen OK Returns to the menu screen Display Content Display Content 1 Active error flag 2 Error code 3 Number of concurrent errors displays only when multiple errors have occurred 3 To cancel the operation and return to the menu screen press ESC 322 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 8 LANGUAGE Menu Display Language Setting 19 8 LANGUAGE Menu Display Language Setting The
40. a 1 Power supply specifications For the power supply specifications refer to Section 15 2 Jo Buum OO 2 Input specifications sink input Item FX2N 32ER FX2N 48ER FX2N 48ER D Input points 16 points 24 points Ses snoueA I Connection type Removable terminal block M3 screw i o Input form sink E 5 c D Input signal voltage AC power supply type 24V DC 10 DC power supply type 24V DC 20 30 o g 5 o Input signal current 5mA 24V DC S G Input impedance 4 3 KQ E Input response Input ON current 3 5mA or more 24V DC time Input OFF current 1 5mA or less mos gt a Input response time Approx 10ms 226 oge T No voltage contact input 3 S P g NPN open collector transistor 5 2 62 Input circuit insulation Photo coupler insulation Indication of input operation LED on panel lights when input 1 6 AC power supply type DC power supply type mm Oo 2o Sink input wiring Sink input wiring a5 58 c N Input circuit diagram yun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 co 1 Do not connect with 24 terminals suondo pue spun 1X3 JeuiO eipojyy Aedsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 235 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 5 FX2N 32ER FX2N 48ER FX2N 48ER D 3 Output specifications relay output type Item FX2N 32ER FX2N 48ER FX2N 48ER D Output Points 16 points 24 points Connection type Re
41. ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 263 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 7 FX2N 8EX UA1 UL 100V AC Input 16 7 FX2N 8EX UA1 UL 100V AC Input 16 7 1 Product specifications The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications For external wiring refer to the following chapters Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring 1 Power supply specifications Item FX2N 8EX UA1 UL Product type FX2N extension block Rated voltage 24V DC supplied from main unit and input output powered extension unit 2 Weight and Other specifications External dimensions are described later Item FX2N 8EX UA1 UL MASS Weight 0 2kg 0 44lbs The extension cable is already connected to the extension block Other Accessories Label for indication of input output number The DIN46277 rail width 35 mm 1 38 or direct installation 3 Input specifications Item FX2N 8EX UA1 UL Input points 8 points Connection type Vertical terminal block M3 screws Input form AC input Input signal voltage 100 to 120V AC Input signal current 6 2mA 110V AC 60Hz 4 7mA 100V AC 50Hz Approx 21kQ 50Hz Approx 18kQ 60Hz ON input Input ON current 3 8mA 80V AC or more sensitivity current Input OFF current 1 7mA 30V AC or less Input impedance Input response time Approx 25 to 30ms
42. extended file register to a hexadecimal display format x 1 There is no test function for Input X 2 A sequence program is required to enable a hexadecimal display of the timer T counter C data register file register D 16 bit 32 bit extended register R 16 bit 32 bit and extended file register ER 16 bit 32 bit current values So A Refer to Section 19 19 for the setting procedure o 2 3 When no setting is made within a program the screen saver function becomes effective after 10 n minutes Refer to Section 19 15 for screen saver function co suondo pue sun UOISUS X3 JOUIO UJ 62 nex D lt o 2 D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO 311 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 4 Procedure for Accessing the Menu Screen from the Title Screen 19 4 Procedure for Accessing the Menu Screen from the Title Screen All operation explanations and display screen examples in this manual are in English When the menu display language is set to Japanese please convert the screen messages to their Japanese translations Refer to Section 19 20 for the Japanese and English display character correspondence table Refer to Section 19 8 for menu display language setting 19 4 1 Title screen The screen shown at right is displayed for 1 5 seconds after the power is turned on Content f 1 1 M
43. mounting hole pitch 75 2 96 8 0 32 75 2 96 e MASS Weight 0 4kg 0 88lbs e Installation DIN rail of 35mm 1 38 in width or screws Accessories Label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product Terminal block M3 5 screws The extension cable is already connected to the extension block FX3G Series Prog rammable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 1 Special Function Units Blocks 18 1 13 FX3U 16CCL M oc External Dimensions Terminal Layout 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches e 3 ss oS _ 5 4 0 16 9 0 36 cs 55 2 17 87 3 43 amp I e MASS Weight 0 3kg 0 66lbs e Installation DIN rail of 35mm 1 38 in width or screws Sele Accessories Label for indication of special unit block number o 5 Terminal resistor 2 resistors for CC Link dedicated cable 2 resistors for CC Link dedicated 2 2 high performance cable Dust Proof sheet Manual supplied with product im e Terminal block M3 screws for power supply terminal CC Link connection terminal 1 5 M3 5 screws for CC Link connection terminal block mounting screws black mos he extension cable is already connected to the extension block 28 S O Qc 18 1 14 FX2N 16CCL M z External Dimensions Terminal Layout d 2 04 5 mounting holes Ep B a i t
44. op uda 490 UOISU9 X3 jdnoandu C oh j yu A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 co suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO eipoyy ejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 3 Input Matrix MTR Instructions FNC 52 3 Input output powered extension unit Example of program M8000 Example of wiring 1 In the case of sink wiring When inputs are used for sink only and outputs are the transistor sink type in the used input output powered extension unit B D to to ub Le te Lo 0 1A 50V gt gt diode is gt A Ate y X061 X062 W X063 V X064 V X065 V X066 V X067 S ve Wee ges aa ae gue ie gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt N X061 X062 V X063 V X064 V X065 V X066 V X067 D ceo e c e oo e co gt gt gt gt gt gt gt i AN N i Input output powered extension unit FX2N 32ET FX2N 48ET Transistor output sink p 2 In the case of source wiring When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor source type in the used extension unit e N 99 St LO LO LO LO LO 0 1A 50V diode is gt y necessary X061vX062vX063vX064vX065VX066V X067 2 zs T V X061vX062vX063v X064v X065v X066v X06 7 o N eo Se co co co 3 2 S Y V Y Y Y Y Y Y pus Input output powered
45. should be used in an in phase manner 374 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 21 Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 21 1 Outline 21 Memory Cassette STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the memory cassette If the memory cassette is attached or detached while the PLC s power is on the data in the memory may be destroyed or the memory cassette may be damaged Do not disassemble or modify the PLC Doing so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions For repair contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative 21 1 Outline The memory cassette can be installed at the main unit and when installed the memory cassette s internal program is used in place of the internal EEPROM memory The loader function transfers reads and writes programs between the memory cassette and the internal EEPROM 21 2 Specifications 21 2 1 Electrical specifications Max PROTECT Loader Compatible Model Name Max Memory Capacity Memory Type Allowable Switch Function Veriora Write 32000 steps EEPROM 1st article FX3G EEPROM 32L 2k 4k 8k 16k selectable x 10 000 times Provided Provided Ver 1 00 21 2 2 Part names and External dimensions FX3G EEPROM 32L 1IRD key Units mm inches Reading PLC memory cassette P 2 RD LED 4 BwrsumsH EUR key 3 2 writing memory cassette PLC
46. 16 input points or PAOTR 16 output points 32 input points To be directly connected to the PLC input output connector FX 32E TB 32 output points or 16 input output points FX 16EYT TB pcd ef Transistor output sink FX 16EYT H TB ooe o ae Transistor output sink 2 input output cables Model name Function ja Single wire Wire color red Exe vee EEN Ie PLC side A 20 pin connector FX 16E 150CAB 1 5m 4 11 zan Flat cables with tube TA TOE duse bs Sm 9 d A 20 pin connector at both ends FX 16E 500CAB 5m 16 4 FX 16E 150CAB R 1 5m 4 11 ET Round multicore cables tee aes UID Ns A 20 pin connector at both ends FX 16E 500CAB R 5m 16 4 FX A32E 150CAB 1 5m 4 11 Flat cables with tube FX A32E 300CAB 3m 910 PLC side Two 20 pin connectors in 16 point units Terminal block side A dedicated connector FX A32E 500CAB om 16 4 One common terminal covers 32 input output terminals 3 Input output connector Model name Function FX2C I O CON Input output connector for flat cable FX2C Il O CON S Input output connector for bulk wire for 0 3 mm AGW22 FX2C l D CON SA Input output connector for bulk wire for 0 5 mm AGW20 3 1 12 Remote I O m For the remote I O of CC Link and CC Link LT refer to the manual and catalog of each master 3 1 13 Power supply unit 40 FX2N 20PSU 24V DC power supply 100 to 240V AC FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 3 Introduction of Products User s Manual Hardware
47. 19 2W or 4 output point common terminal 19 2W or less 24V DC less 24V DC 8 output points common terminal 38 4W or less 24V DC Open circuit leakage current 0 1mA 30V DC Min load j OFF ON 0 2ms or less 200mA at 24V DC Response time ON OFF 0 2ms or less 200mA at 24V DC Output circuit configuration A common number applies to the of COMU 15 6 2 External dimensions FX2N 32bET 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches 3 DE 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch MESEC FXov 32ET TRANSISTOR UNIT I 7 a z UUUUUUUUUUU 239 SJojunoo wh peedg uDi e Buum nding N 10 Buum OO s sN snoueA I eoueua ure N uny 1S9 4 O c D 62 p o o gt Q peJewog jndinogindu sun uoisuejx3 s syoo g UOISU9 X3 dnoandu C N yu A ddns Jewog UOISUS X3 co suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units 15 6 FX2N 32ET FX2N 48ET FX2N 48ET D FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition FX2N 48ET FX2N 48ET D an0naaaaaann U UUUUUUDUUU Unit mm inches youd ejou Gununouu GL 08 TRANSISTOR UNIT MITSUBISHI MELSEC FXan 48ET 2 4 5 mounting h
48. 2 4WR LED 5 Memory cassette fixing holes 1 2 3 2 Mounting holes 6JPROTECT switch 7 Detachment lever 35 1 38 9 6 0 38 8 Main unit connector 375 KJOW N 9jesse2 N apeg IND 00080 00081 S17 uononJjsu UJ s n d jeloeds sj pow penumnuoosiq Aseyeq 10 suonnedeld UJ uoneuodsueJ jo Buypuey TI Ssejejs Jequieu 13 ui seueyeq FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 21 Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 21 3 Installation 21 3 Installation 21 3 1 Be sure that the power is OFF when installing the memory cassette Installation when the expansion board connector conversion adapter is not used together 376 The FX3G 40MT ES is used as the main unit in this example Remove the top cover Remove the top cover A in the right figure as shown in the right figure Top cover 3 Attach the side cover Attach the side cover B in the right figure as shown in the right figure Caution Make sure to attach the side cover before the memory cassette However attachment of the side cover is not necessary when using only the loader function and not always connecting the memory cassette Attachment of the side cover is not necessary when installing the memory cassette under the top cover S of a 40 60 point type main unit Raise the memory cassette detachment lever Raise the memory cassette detachment lever C
49. 2 FX2N 48ER FX2N 48ET FX2N 48ER ES UL FX2N 48ET ESS UL AC power supply DC input type Example pese sie sos B sore no eo 70 58 2a 235 105 135 06 5s 16 210 280 210 veo llf eo 70 288 335 285 235 185 os 85 35 L4eo 1o 360 310 260 210 160 110 60 0 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 Number of added points Example When a 32 input and 16 output point extension block is connected to FX2N 48ER ES UL the current of 24V DC service power supply becomes 110mA or less gt Oo e Input 2 DC power supply DC input type 1 FX2N 48ER D FX2N 48ET D FX2N 48ER DS FX2N 48ET DSS 24V DC service power supply is not provided cm DC power supply DC input type FX2N 48EL DL Number of added points 0 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 gt Number of added points Example When adding 32 inputs to FX2N 48ER DS a maximum of 24 outputs are expandable Input 3 AC power supply AC input type 1 FX2N 48ER UA1 UL 24V DC service power supply is not provided AC power supply Output DC input type Em Example FX2n 48ER UA1 UL pv v Number of added points C2 N 0 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 Number of added points Example When adding 24 inputs to FX2N 48ER UA1 UL a maximum of 32 outputs are expandable Input 82 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 6 Expansion of
50. 4 7 3 FX3G 24MU AC power supply type HE TS SpxT XS X5 X7 Xa 1335 L TN Xo x2 x x6 K19x12x14 FX3G 24MR ES FX3G 24MT ES jov vo v1 Y2 Y3 Y5 Y6 Y10 FX3G 24MT ESS ov vol vt v2 v3 ve ve viq 2avivopvapVv2EVv3l v4 v4 Y7 v1 DC power supply type BD XO X2 x4 X6 X10X12X14 FX3G 24MR DS FX3G 24MT DS TT ZI ve ve vq Eowfeow eow cono Ya cou Y7 Y FX3G 24MT DSS C Tea T2 vs ve vig vopvipv2jvs 54 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 7 Terminal Layout 4 7 4 FX3c 40M0 3 O e AC power supply type S Fx esp x3 pe x7 pepe pp poa pos x27 LT N xo x2 x4 Xe xto xt2 Xt4 xte x20 x22 X24 X26 2 FX3G 40MR ES FX3G 40MT ES SOWeN ed pue seJnjee ovIvo v1 v2 Tv4 ve poa T3418 cup tivtgposv 18v 17 FX3G 40MT ESS OO jonpoud zy a S o e Q p o 2 DC power supply type LT JSS D TXS x7 KITS ToT pps SLO X0 x2 xa xe x1 12K 14K O20 K2zK2AK2 FX3G 40MR DS FX3G 40MT DS suoneouyioeds C Tp TZ E T4 TS T3912 T4 8 cowo cow cow2 Y3 com YS Y7 cona 1jY 13 cows Y 15 Y 5 FX3G 40MT DSS RE vo v1 v2L Tv4 ve Mom vi4lvte EE e vo vip V2 Y3 V3 YS Y7 e V4IY11 Y 1 S5 4 7 5 FX36G 60MLI 6 og AC power supply type 2s FE Terspa XS XS x7 i ais
51. A Minor Error m PLC Panel m Monitor Status LED Status Monitoring am PLC Information e RUN Th e L E D statu S Memory Type EEPROM Protect Status OFF ERROR of FX PLC is ALARM CPU Version boo displayed 212 Remote RUN Remote STOP Clear PLC Memory Set Clock Stop Monitor Close FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes 14 6 2 Operation and check on display module FX3G 5DM 1 Move the cursor to ErrorCheck pressing the or button on the menu screen shown right For the menu structure refer to Section 19 5 The buttons on the menu screen work as stated below gt gt Monitor Test Vr Gg og dd E ggg 0g 4 Pd ErrorCheck Button Operation Description rag ESC The screen returns to the top screen time display LANGUAGE The cursor moves upward When the button is held for Contrast 1 second or more the cursor moves quickly When the cursor is in the uppermost position the button is ineffective ClockMenu Keyword The cursor moves downward When the button is held for 1 second or more the cursor moves quickly When the cursor is in the lowermost position the button is ineffective Dann Cassette OK The flashing item at the cursor is selected 2 When the OK button is pressed an error check i
52. Connectable models FX2N 16EYT C sink output 1 2 e The applications shown below are not supported B Unsupported Applications E Pulse Y output PLSY instruction acceleration deceleration setup PLSR instruction pulse width modulation PWM instruction DOG search zero return DSZR instruction batch data positioning mode TBL instruction pulse outputs absolute current value read ABS instruction zero return ZRN instruction variable speed pulse output 13 PLSV instruction drive to increment DRVI instruction drive to absolute DRVA instruction lt lt CON Time division inputs Input matrix MTR instruction digital switch DSW instruction Eu Time division output Seven segment with latch SEGL instruction cg D 62 20 7 1 Specifications I T Eg Item Relay output 9220 O m Dw Ras o2 Oo ES Input output circuitry 1 5 CN1 mos Connector side gee 53 OS ne External wiring S 8 c amp Load voltage 250V AC or less 30V DC or less 2A point Max Resistance load The total load current of resistance loads per common terminal should be the following value 1 6 load 4 output points common terminal 8A or less zm Inductive load 80 VA Sag n Min load 5V DC 2mA Reference value E Open circuit leakage current Response time Approx 10ms 1 7 Circuit isolation Mechanical isolation com Operation indicators Supplying power to the relay coil will light the LED indicator lamp on panel oF
53. Conners Check whether special adapters special blocks are connected 904 Check that special parameters with unsupported settings are not set for connected special adapters special blocks 1 LILI indicates the following values for each special adapter special block where an error has occurred If an error has occurred in 2 or more special adapters special blocks LILI indicates the lowest unit number among the special adapters special blocks in which an error has occurred Value of UL decimal Special adapter special block where an error has occurred 00 Unit number 0 Special block 10 Unit number 1 Special block 20 Unit number 2 Special block 30 Unit number 3 Special block 40 Unit number 4 Special block 50 Unit number 5 Special block 60 Unit number 6 Special block 70 Unit number 7 Special block 81 Communication channel 1 Special adapter 82 Communication channel 2 Special adapter 221 SJojunoo wh peeds y6 q Buum nding N a 10 Buum OO S O c o c o D o uny 1S9 Bunoouse qnoy eoueua ure N pejewog adnoandu OQ sun uoisuejx3 s syoojg UOISU9 X3 indjnoa nduy C oh j yu A ddns Jewog UOISUS X3 co suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 7 Troubleshoo
54. D 8164 Not used D 8165 D 8166 D 8167 D 8168 D 8169 Access restriction status 9 E 6 Access restriction status Access restriction status Present value ing value Read change H 00 8 2nd keyword is not set E Write protection 08 i ee H 119 Read write protection v v ee irom protection 4 20 8 d T Accesses are restricted by the keyword setting status 8 indicates areas used by the system FX3G Series Programmable Controllers Appendix A Special Device List User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 SS Number and Correspond Number and Goirespond 2 z Content of register ing special Content of register ing special S name name D device device N N Network setting D 8170 D 8211 Code of communication error at master station D 8171 Not used D 8212 Code of communication error at slave station No 1 D 8172 5 D 8213 Code of communication error at D 8173 Station number slave station No 2 D 8174 Total number of slave stations Do Code of communication error at D 8175 Refresh range slave station No 3 M8183 to 22 m 8 D 8176 Station number setting D 8215 Code of communication error at M8191 D 8177 Total slave station number setting slave station No 4 D 8178 Refresh range setting M8038 D 8216 Code of communication error at E slave station No 5 S D 8179 Retry count
55. FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 7 Assignment of Input Output Numbers and Unit Numbers User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 1 Assignment of Input Output Numbers X Y UONnOnpoJjU 7 Assignment of Input Output Numbers and Unit Numbers NO 7 1 Assignment of Input Output Numbers X Y If input output powered extension units blocks have been connected when the power is turned on the main unit automatically assigns the input output numbers X Y octal to the units blocks Therefore it is unnecessary to specify the input output numbers with parameters Accordingly it is not necessary to specify input output numbers using parameters It is necessary to assign input and output numbers in the following special function blocks SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee OO a2 5 O e FX2N 64CL M E S 7 1 1 Concept of assigning When the power is turned on input output numbers X Y are assigned in accordance with the following rules 4 In the FX2N 64CL M input output numbers are assigned to connected remote input output stations e For details on assignment refer to the FX2N 64CL M manual 8 1 Input output numbers X Y are octal o Octal numbers are assigned as input output numbers X Y as shown below X000 to X007 X010 to X017 X020 to X027 X070 to X077 X100 to X107 YO000 to YOO7 YO10 to YO17 YO20 to YO27 YO7O to YO77 Y100 to Y 107 Qi Sas 2 Unused numbers 339 Note that unused numbers w
56. Fxwesct o 21 These cables are used to mount input output extension units blocks for FX2N cables 0 3m and special function blocks away from the main unit FXON 30EC 0 41 Connector conversion FX2N CNV BC Connector conversion adapter to connect input output extension blocks for FX2N and special function blocks with model FXON 30 65EC extension cable adapter This battery backs up the following data General devices Parameter setting is required M1536 to M7679 Battery FX3U 32BL 1000 to 4095 D1100 to D7999 RO to R23999 Time on clock Memory FX3G EEPROM 32L 32k step EEPROM memory with transfer switch cassettes 1 When the extension cable FXON 30EC or FXON 65EC is used use up to one cable for one system When an extension block is added use FX2N CNV BC in addition to the cable 39 A uononpoJu NO UT a D a2 Zz oO oO 3o D v nD 2 jonpoud uononpoJu suoneoyiods I oO seone Jeyeudueg pue uoISJ9A wasis O uoneJn6ijuo N SON UN SON jndinondu uonejesu OO BULA A ddng Jamod ue uonesedaid h Buum ndu CO p FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 3 Introduction of Products User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 1 List of Products and Interpretation of Model Names 3 1 11 FX Series terminal blocks cables and connectors 1 FX Series terminal blocks Number of Number of Model name Function input points output points
57. Input signal form Sink input NPN open collector transistor oo Source input PNP open collector transistor Input circuit insulation Photocoupler insulation Input operation display LED on panel lights when photocoupler is driven 6 e AC power supply type OW ox Sink input wiring Source input wiring ae S N SON UN SON jndinondu Input circuit configuration DC power supply type Sink input wiring uonejesu OO o FE e Li 1 Each value inside indicates the number of occupied points 2 Input impedance 1 0 3 The 24V and OV terminals are located on the output terminal side 2 For details on the terminal layout refer to Section 4 7 47 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 4 Output Specifications 4 4 Output Specifications The main unit output specifications are explained below 4 4 1 Relay output Relay output specifications Item FX3G 14MR O FX3G 24MR O FX3G 40MR O FX3G 60MR O Number of output points 6 points 8 10 points 16 16 points 24 points Connecting type Removable terminal block M3 screw Output type Relay 30V DC or less External power supply 240V AC or less 250V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE UL or cUL standards 2A point The total load current of resistance loads per common terminal should be the following value Resis
58. Keep a space of 50 mm 1 97 away between the unit main body and other devices and structure Install the unit as far away as possible from high voltage lines high voltage devices and power equipment To prevent temperature rise do not install the PLC on a floor or a ceiling or in the vertical direction Install it horizontally on a wall as shown below Arrange the extension cable in such a way that the left connectors of the input output powered extension units blocks or special function blocks are connected on the side closer to the main unit 8 1 1 Installation location in enclosure 101 A uononpodu NO SOWeN ed pue seJnjee OO uononpou jonpoug suoneoyioods I Qi seone Jeyeudueg pue uoISJ9A wasis CO uoneJn6ijuo j jndinondu Z O 2 2 Z O n uonejeisu Bui A ddng Jamod ue uonesedaid h Buum ndu CO p FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 2 Layout in Enclosure 8 1 2 Spaces in enclosure Extension devices can be connected on the left and right sides of the main unit of the PLC If you intend to add extension devices keep necessary spaces on the left and right sides 1 Configuration without extension cable FX2N 16EYT x lt LLI z x fh equipment FX3G Series main unit FX2N 16EYT F X3U AAD FX3G CNV Extension cable FXoN 65EC FXoN 30EC Other equipment
59. Luc epis vonlyet f m 164 11 5939 2 DNaSe2 COUNTE INPUT CE 165 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents 11 6 Timing of Updating of Current Value and Comparison of Current Value 166 11 6 1 Timing of updating of current value ien io aioe LU ots Desi esso aba ae rnc ded oce oet oo ats 166 11 6 2 Comparison of current value esseessssssssssesssseee seen nnnnn nn nnna nnn sesa nsn sas r sena sns n aen rese a nns 166 11 7 Response Frequency and Overall FreQuency ccccccecccessececeeeeceeeesaeeeeceecesseeeeseneesseeeeesanees 167 11 8 Examples of External Wiring Rotary Encoder seessesesesseseeenneenen nennen 168 112321 T phase T inpub 235 100 245 iii a tn eina tae st voie Suo ele Reed 168 11 8 2 2 phase 2 input C251 to C255 llsessesssseessseesssssenneenn nennen nnn nennen nis 169 11 9 Related Devices and Function Switching Procedures cccccsecececeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeeeens 170 11 921 Related device S xisscursver cure Decades iu lade dnd sods atu naso Eau aae a cov O Sdn ERN ER TE Riad 170 11 9 2 Function switching switching of allocation and functions of input terminals 171 TlO usn Nobblis t Tm 171 12 Output Wiring Procedures 172 12 1 External Wiring for Relay Output Type essssssssse
60. P poa tt te Monitor Testz ErrorCheck LANGUAGE Contrast ClockMenu Keyword Cassette LANGUAGE Japanese o 7 meng ish 323 SJojunoo wh peedg uDi Buum nding N 10 Buum OO s sN snoueA I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1S9 peJeMod adnoandu OQ sun uoisuejx3 s syoo g UOISU9 X3 dnoandu C N yu A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun UOISUS X3 JOUIO ginpoy e dsiq 2 yoojg euw CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 8 LANGUAGE Menu Display Language Setting 4 Use the buttons to move the cursor to Japanese To cancel the operation and return to the menu screen press ESC Button Operation Description ESC Cancels the operation and returns to the menu screen Moves the cursor upward Moves the cursor downward OK Registers the selected display language and returns to the menu screen 5 Press OK to register the selected display language and return to the menu screen 19 8 2 Changing to English menus Refer to 19 8 1 Changing to Japanese menus for the access procedure from the title screen 1 At the menu screen use the buttons to move the cursor to the LANGUAGE item then press OK to display the display LANGUAGE language selection screen j To cancel the operation and return to the top
61. Product during December 2009 or earlier Product from January 2010 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 n c e P e i Ner v Bones EEE TT 2 Control number T Control number Month Example Dec Month Example Jan 1 to 9 January to September 1 to 9 January to September X October Y November Z December X October Y November Z December Year Example 2009 Last digit of year Year Example 2010 Last two digit of year 2 Checking the front of the product The year and month of production of the product can be checked from the manufacturer s serial number LOT on the front at the bottom of the product Products manufactured in and after October 2008 and after pao Example Dec gem Example Jan 1 to 9 January to September 1 to 9 January to September X October Y November Z December X October Y November Z December Year Example 2009 Last digit of year Year Example 2010 Last two digit of year 56 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 1 Version Information 5 1 2 Version check method The PLC version can be checked iia the last three digits of device D8001 D8101 D8001 D8101 2 Bea PLC type and T Lu Version information Example Ver 1 00 version PL
62. SOWeN ed pue seJnjee 1 Differences between the sink input circuit and the source input circuit e Sink input common Sink input means a DC input signal with current flow from the input X terminal OO 3 When a sensor with a transistor output is connected NPN open 8 collector transistor output can be used 6 2 O g e Source input common si Source input means a DC input signal with current flow into the input o X terminal When a sensor with a transistor output is connected PNP open collector transistor output can be used Qi Sas 2 Method of switching between sink source input 6 To switch the input type to sink or source input wire the S S terminal to the OV or 24V or 3 terminal Ae SS Inthe case of AC power supply type eS Sink input 24V terminal and S S terminal are connected a Source input OV terminal and S S terminal are connected E Refer to Subsection 10 2 3 and Subsection 10 2 4 for wiring examples 7 e n the case of DC power supply type m Sink input terminal and S S terminal are connected 2g CO Source input terminal and S S terminal are connected Bg Refer to Subsection 10 2 5 and Subsection 10 2 6 for wiring examples 9 3 ae o E eo E O O zel lt S Q 141 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 1 Before Starting Input Wiring 3 Instructions for using e Mixed
63. TO END zl 61 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 2 Programming Tool Applicability 62 Item Circuit blocks which cannot be written in RUN mode Circuit blocks which require attention on operation after write during RUN Others Caution Avoid write during RUN to a circuit block including the following instructions during execution If write during RUN is executed to such a circuit block the PLC decelerates and stops pulse output e DSZR FNC150 ZRN FNC156 PLSV FNC157 instructions with acceleration deceleration operation DRVI FNC 158 and or DRVA FNC159 instructions Avoid write during RUN to a circuit block including the following instruction during execution If write during RUN is executed to such a circuit block the PLC immediately stops pulse output e PLSV FNC157 instruction without acceleration deceleration operation Avoid write during RUN to a circuit block including the following instructions during execution e PLSY FNC 50 PWM FNC 58 and or PLSR FNC 59 instructions Avoid write during RUN to a circuit block including the following instructions during execution of communication If write during RUN is executed to such a circuit block the PLC may stop communication after that If the PLC stops communication set the PLC to the STOP mode once and then set it to the RUN mode again
64. Thecriterion is shown in IEC61131 2 2 For more information on the dielectric withstand voltage test and the insulation resistance test of the terminals of each product refer to the following Refer to Subsection 4 1 1 3 Ground the PLC independently or jointly Other Other PLC Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed Refer to Section 9 3 Other equipment 4 The PLC cannot be used at a pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure to avoid damage 44 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 1 Generic Specifications 4 1 1 Dielectric withstand voltage test and insulation resistance test Perform dielectric withstand voltage test and insulation resistance test at the following voltage between each terminals and the main unit ground terminal Insulation Between terminals Dielectric strength i Remarks resistance Terminals of main unit and input output powered extension unit block Between power supply terminal AC power 1 5kV AC for 1min supply and ground terminal Between power supply terminal DC power supply and ground terminal Between 24V DC service power supply 500V AC for 1min connected to input terminal 24V DC and uononpoJu NO SOWeN ed pue seJnjee OO sv ground terminal 5MO or more zi P n e
65. Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices Failure to do so may cause device failures or malfunctions Peripheral devices display modules expansion boards and special adapters Extension units blocks and FX Series terminal blocks Battery and memory cassette WIRING PRECAUTIONS NWARN ING Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock 99 uononpoJu NO SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee Go uononpoJu jonpoug suoneoyiods I oO seone Jeyeudueg pue uoISJ9A wasis OD uoneJn amp ijuo j jndinondu Z O 2 c 2 Z O m uonejeisu BULA A ddng Jamod ue uonesedaid h Buum ndu CO p FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not supply power to the 24 and 24V terminals 24V DC service power supply on the main unit or extension units Doing so may cause damage to the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100Q or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit and extension units with a wire 2 mm
66. U p D GE euh oO to zs B v pue uoISJ9A 1 Calculate the current consumption of the built in 24V DC power supply 24V DC service power supply The value obtained by this calculation when the value is positive indicates the remaining capacity of 24V DC service power supply and the capacity can be used for external loads M ee corres Current consumption Calculation result Input output powered Total of current consumed by extension unit extension devices 3 aCe OMA T mA mA mA zs E Se 2 Calculate the current consumption of the built in 5V DC power supply o ZS See See Current consumption Calculation result Input output powered Total of current consumed by extension unit extension devices 2 HCE _ E If the calculation results for the current consumption of the 24V DC power supply and 5V DC power supply are negative values the current consumption exceeds the capacity of the built in power supply Reconfigure the system adding input output powered extension units or extension power supply units uonejeisu OO DUUM A ddnsg Jewog ue uoneJedaJg h Buum ndu CO p 85 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 7 Expansion of Extension Power Supply Unit FX3U 1PSU 5V 6 7 Expansion of Extension Power Supply Unit FX3u 1PSU 5V Select the extension power supply unit for adding special function blocks when extension is
67. X001 X003 and X004 can be used for high speed counter input interruption pulse catch speed detection SPD instructions and general purpose input Take care not to overlap the input numbers However overlap of input numbers is allowed for input interruptions 2 When the pulse width period measurement function and high speed counters are used together the overall frequency of high speed counters is affected For more details refer to Section 11 7 3 Make sure that the total frequency of four input channels is 50 kHz or less when using the pulse width period measurement function For details on programming refer to the programming manual 4 Cautions in wiring It is recommended to use shielded twisted pair cables for connection cables FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 6 Pulse width Pulse period measurement function Supported in Ver 1 10 or later 10 6 3 Examples of external wiring UONnOnpoJjU It is recommended to use shielded twisted pair cables for connection cables Ground the shield of each shielded cable only on the PLC side 1 Examples of pulse width measurement wiring using X000 When another input terminal is used wire it according to the following diagrams NO 1 When 24V DC service power supply is used SOWeN ed pue seJnjee OO Fuse M E A jonpoud uononpoJu suoneoyiods I The grounding resis
68. and fix it with provided M3 tapping screws D in the right figure li C 5 e Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 6 Nem iy vyg SL e3 Fix the connector conversion adapter E in the right figure with provided M3 tapping screws T D in the right figure to the main unit E3 Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 6 Nem o se uonejeisu Bui A ddng Jamod ue uonesedaid h Buum ndu CO p 117 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 6 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices 8 6 4 Connecting method C connection of special adapter 8 6 5 When connecting the special adapter it is necessary to attach the connector conversion adapter before the special adapter using the method described in the preceding subsection Slide the special adapter connecting hooks A in the right figure of the main unit When adding a special adapter to the special adapter that has been connected to the connector conversion adapter read connector conversion adapter as special adapter This applies to the following steps Connect the special adapter B in the right figure to the connector conversion adapter as shown in the right figure Slide the special adapter connecting hooks A in the right figure of the connector conversion adapter to secure the special adapter B in the right figure Caution When using the FX3U ENET ADP co
69. and remote inputs and outputs 128 points maximum of the CC Link can be extended to 256 points Program memory The PLC has a 32K step EEPROM memory Built in USB port The PLC has a built in USB port for the programming communication function to enable high speed communication at 12Mbps Built in RUN STOP switch The PLC can be started and stopped with the built in switch RUN and STOP commands can be given to the PLC through a general purpose input terminal or peripheral device Built in Variable analog potentiometers The PLC has two built in variable analog potentiometers available for adjusting the timer set time Writing during RUN The programming software for personal computer enables you to modify the program while the PLC is running Built in clock function The PLC has a clock function to control the time Programming tool Use a version of a programming tool supporting the FX3G Refer to 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability in this manual For peripheral devices not applicable to FX3G Series specify FX1N Series for model selection and you can program the sequence In this case use instructions and devices within the ranges common to FX3G Series and the selected model of PLC Remote debugging of program Use of programming software GX Works2 GX Developer enables you to remotely transfer programs and monitor PLC operation through a modem connected to
70. c E g 2 Special adapter B 2 5 0 1 W tk oi t T ige Bis i88 6i Unit mm inches Model name Mounting hole pitch W FX3G 14MR ES FX3G 14MT ES FX3G 14MT ESS FX3G 14MR DS FX3G 14MT DS FX3G 14MT DSS FX3G 24MR ES FX3G 24MT ES FX3G 24MT ESS FX3G 24MR DS FX3G 24MT DS FX3G 24MT DSS FX3G 40MR ES FX3G 40MT ES FX3G 40MT ESS FX3G 40MR DS FX3G 40MT DS FX3G 40MT DSS FX3G 60MR ES FX3G 60MT ES FX3G 60MT ESS FX3G 60MR DS FX3G 60MT DS FX3G 60MT DSS 82 3 23 122 4 81 167 6 58 Unit mm inches Model name Mounting hole pitch W FX3U 4AD ADP FX3U 4DA ADP FX3U 3A ADP FX3U 4AD PT ADP FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 15 1 0 6 FX3U 4AD PNK ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP FX3U 232ADP MB FX3U 485ADP MB FX3U ENET ADP 20 5 0 89 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 Installation In Enclosure 8 5 Procedures for Installing Directly with M4 Screws 3 Input output powered extension unit C or D 5 5 0 2 W 0 2 je IT iio ip C eie mae 5 5 0 2 W 0 2 o i D Por EIE io i 90 3 55 Model name FX2N 32ER ES UL FX2N 32ET ESS UL C FX2N 32ER FX2N 32ET FX2N 32ES FX2N 48ER ES UL FX2N 48ET ESS UL FX2N 48ER FX2N 48ET D FX2N 48ER DS FX2N 48ET DSS FX2N 48ER D FX2N 48ET D FX2N 48ER UA1 UL Model name FX2N 8ER ES UL FX2N 8ER FX2N 8EX ES UL F
71. c ee wel npu Orina CHAR amg ONEA EN ue Only input output powered extension unit block S ground terminal Megger S 1 5kV AC for 1min Between output terminal relay and ground terminal Between output terminal transistor and 500V AC for 1min ground terminal Between output terminal triac and ground 1 5kV AC for 1min terminal Terminals of expansion board special adapter and special function block Only input output powered extension unit block suoneouioeds Since the expansion board and the main unit CPU are not insulated it is not allowed to perform the dielectric withstand voltage test and insulation resistance test between them Between terminal of expansion board Except FX3G 4EX BD and FX3G 2EYT BD Not allowed Not allowed and ground terminal Qi Between FX3G 4EX BD input terminal 24V DC and ground terminal Between FX3G 2EYT BD output terminal transistor and ground terminal seone Jeyeudueg pue uoISJ9A 5MQ or more 500V AC for 1min on 500V DC 2 Megger Between terminal of special adapter and ground terminal cac funetionblock nid to the manual for each special function ues C uoneJn6ijuo N SON UN SON jndinondu uonejesu OO BULA A ddng Jamod ue uonesedaid h Buum ndu CO p 45 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 2 Power Supply Specifications 4
72. number is stored in D8041 ON state numbers Active state numbers are then sequentially stored in registers up D 8045 to D8047 Max 8 points ON state number 6 D 8046 ON state number 7 D 8047 ON state number 8 pisos When M8049 is ON the smallest D 8049 o number out of active annunciator M8049 On state minimum relay ranging from S900 to S999 is number stored in D8049 D8050 to D16050 1 Executed at END instruction Error Detection Refer to Subsection 14 6 3 for details If the unit or block corresponding to a programmed I O number is not actually loaded M8060 is set to ON and the first device number of the erroneous block is written to D8060 D18060 Example If X020 is unconnected M8060 D BCD converted i1 o 2 value Device number 10 to 177 1 Input X 0 Output Y D 8061 Error code for PLC hardware error M8061 Error code for PC PP communication D 8062 error or serial communication error O M8062 chO 2 Error code for serial communication M8063 D 8063 error 1 ch1 D 8064 Error code for parameter error M8064 D 8065 Error code for syntax error M8065 D 8066 Error code for ladder error M8066 D 8067 3 Error code for operation error M8067 Correspond Number and l Content of register ing special name device Error Detection Refer to Subsection 14 6 3 for details Operation error step number latched Error step number of M8065 to M8067 2 Cleared when PLC power supply from OFF to O
73. p 5c idis RENE XtUmey NI Turn the PLC power OFF install the memory cassette 33 mi 9 o nara Jr v79VU7T4NVP then attempt the operation again E e Memory cassette transfer T The Keyword 74J EEPROM Remove the memory cassette restart the unit power 5 is set in the th Jj OFF ON then use the programming tool to cancel the Internal Memory tyr V4 keyword in the internal EEPROM Mu 28 D c gt OS YR o c Mead 77 043972 Transfer successful E Memory cassette transfer completed e reading writin ae ee 2 7 l 9 2d TIYIIIN NY Check if the memory cassette is properly installed j 1 The setting value can also be changed when the PLC is in RUN mode 1 6 See 5 E N yun A ddng Jamod UOISUS X3 co suondo pue sun UOISUS X3 JOUIO J 77 nes D lt ES o c D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO 349 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 19 Operation Error Messages and Corrective Actions 19 19 1 When a Fatal error occurred message appears 350 Operation is possible with the Level C or Level B keyword function restrictions However the system is probably in one of the statuses described below Check these statuses in the order shown below and take the appropriate corrective action Perform an error check at the display module and if an error is active take the appropriate corrective action Refer
74. product Supplied FX3U 232ADP MB Procedures for handling the RS 232C communication with JY997D26401 Installation Manual special adapter product Supplied i FX3U 232ADP Procedures for handling the RS 232C communication with JY997D13701 product Installation Manual special adapter unen FX3G 422 BD Procedures for handling the RS 422 communication with JY997D32101 product Installation Manual expansion board 22 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 1 Introduction User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 1 Introduction of Manuals Supplied Manual Model name Contents number code FX3G 485 BD 23 uononpoJu with JY997D32201 Procedures for handling the RS 485 communication i Installation Manual expansion board product cim FX3G 485 BD RJ JY997D51501 Procedures for handling the RS 485 communication i 2 Installation Manual expansion board product n 2g Supplied TT FX3U 485ADP MB Procedures for handling the RS 485 communication with JY997D26301 6 Installation Manual special adapter mi product os Supplied ere with FX3U 485ADP JY997D13801 Procedures for handling the RS 485 communication i Installation Manual special adapter product Supplied EX 485PC IF Procedures for handling the RS 232C RS 485 33 with JY992D81801 Mp Sa Hardware Manual conversion interface Exc product co WM Ethernet CC Link CC Link LT S When using each product refer also to the User s Manual
75. rotation Inter lock a hazardous condition could result if switched ON simultaneously an external interlock should be provided Normal co for interlocking the PLC s internal programs as shown to PLC output rotation the right contact Reverse 22 PLC output Limit of reverse rotation m contact rotation D 4 in phase PLC output contacts should be used in an in phase 1 manner ainpoyy Aedsiq QO uoisua yoojg euw CO 175 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 1 External Wiring for Relay Output Type 12 1 4 Example of external wiring AC power supply 100 to 240V Main unit relay output JEN Breaker Power ON Output extension block relay output Input output powered extension unit relay output n x Power supply for load connected to PLC output For details on emergency stop operation refer to DESIGN PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions field 1 The output circuit of this PLC does not have a built in fuse Provide a fuse suitable to each load to prevent blowout of the wires on the circuit board caused by output element fracture due to load short circuiting 2 represents vacant terminals WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION e Do not wire the vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product 176 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures Us
76. sj pow penumnuoosiq Kieyeq JO suonneo2aJd UJ uoneuodsueJ jo Buypuey TI sejejs Jequieu 13 ui seuejeq FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 21 Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 21 8 Operation Precautions 21 7 2 Reading RD 32L PLC Programs are read from the PLC s internal RAM memory to the memory cassette Required condition The PLC must be stopped and the PROTECT switch must be OFF Install the memory cassette on the main unit Refer to Section 21 3 for the installation procedure Verify that the PLC power is OFF then install the memory cassette on the PLC MITSUBISHI Set the PROTECT switch to OFF oral 6 Turn the PLC power ON RD LED 70 Lene E 1 Jz OFF N Raise the memory cassette s eject lever RD key TO O Press the RD key 1 time The RD LED lights and a preparation status is established Tocancel press the WR key Press the RD key again Reading is executed and the RD LED blinks e t takes several seconds to read data from the built in EEPROM The RD LED flickers while data is read Remove the memory cassette from the main unit Reading is completed when the RD LED goes off After turning the PLC power OFF remove the memory cassette from the PLC then turn the PROTECT switch ON Refer to Section 21 4 for the removal procedure 21 8 Operation Precautions 384 Tapping screws provided
77. spun uoisuejx3 uda 490 UOISU9 X3 dnoandu C m j E U o D CD c xe i lt UOISUS X3 suondo pue shun xg euo ainpoyy Aedsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO FX3G Series Prog rammable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 2 Special Adapters 18 2 7 FX3U 232ADP MB External Dimensions 2 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches MASS Weight Approx 80g 0 18lbs e Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws Accessories Manual supplied with product Connector RS 232C D SUB 9 pin male 106 4 18 2 92 0 3 147 6 0 7 Pin configuration 1 CD DCD s o 2 RD RXD alo 9 9 3 SD TXD 3l o o 18 4 ER DTR 2 o o 7 5 SG GND o 9 J6 6 DR DSR 7 Notused 8 Not used 9 Not used 18 2 8 FX3U 485ADP MB External Dimensions 2 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches e MASS Weight Approx 80g 0 18lbs Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws gt Accessories Label for indication of link station number Manual supplied with product 106 4 18 Terminal block European type e Terminal resistance 3300 110Q built in 7 0 28 Terminal resistance setting switch 330 OPEN 1100 298 FX3G Series Prog rammable Controllers 18 O
78. suonneo2aJd UJ uoneuodsueJ jo Buypuey TI Ssejejs JOquiow 13 ui seuejeq FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 3 Analog expansion boards M8260 to M8279 and D8260 to D8279 Appendix A 3 2 Special data registers D8260 to D8279 404 Number Compatible Versions Operation and function FX3G 2AD BD Ver 1 10 or later 1st analog expansion board D 8260 D 8261 D 8262 D 8263 D 8264 D 8265 D 8266 D 8267 D 8268 D 8269 Input data Ch1 Input data Ch2 Not used Not used Averaging time for Ch1 1 to 4095 Averaging time for Ch2 1 to 4095 Not used Not used Error status Model code K3 2nd analog expansion board D 8270 D 8271 D 8272 D 8273 D 8274 D 8275 D 8276 D 8277 D 8278 D 8279 Input data Ch1 Input data Ch2 Not used Not used Averaging time for Ch1 1 to 4095 Averaging time for Ch2 1 to 4095 Not used Not used Error status Model code K3 FX3G 1DA BD Ver 1 10 or later Output data Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Error status Model code K4 Output data Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Error status Model code K4 Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 4 Analog special adapters M8280 to M8299 and D8280 to D8299 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers Use
79. supply A common number applies to the LI of COML ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 273 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 Input Output Extension Blocks 16 10 FX2N 8EYR FX2N 16EYR Relay Output 16 10 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement FX2N 8EYR With cover FX2n 8EYR Output indicator lamps LED lamps CD POWER ourd 1 2 3 OOOO 4567 OOOO FX2N 16EYR Without cover EEr ers Rear line extension connector When an output Y number is assigned 8 points on the upper side will be used for the lower output numbers and 8 points on the lower side will be used for the higher output numbers With cover Output indicator lamps LED lamps o 2 S oo cmao oo 000000 FXawI6EYR Output indicator lamps LED lamps NOOR Q0 82 C O0000000 274 Without cover X X tA THNO9 vA ZA T 0A KN gale oo0oo00000 53 elel ala O0000000 o lt lo lt N lt Io lt lt o lt o lt N lee 63 Y Ky Rear line extension connector Lower numbers Higher numbers Q 48 ES ELS am ES EE o N am ES a FE Re ai O RO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 10 FX2N 8EYR FX2N 16EYR Relay Output 16 10 3 External dime
80. time display v Ly Lo v v LLLLIILIOLUNMMNCON NEN NENNEN NN Monitor Test ErrorCheck X i Menu display language setting TN Contrast adjustment EN Display Bm 7 o Keyword cancel e ee Memory cassette transfer Ea e TS Display screen protect function a ee ee 1 Customer keyword Permanent PLC lock included However permanent PLC lock does not have a keyword input Tp SS SPS IR Se Bs Time X 328 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 11 Keyword 19 11 3 Keyword storage oc The system has no process for recovering registered keyword which are forgotten BS Therefore be sure to store the keywords in a secure location E 19 11 4 Screens requiring keyword for access 12 O At the menu screen use the buttons to move the cursor to the Keyword item then press OK to 8 display one of the 4 screens shown below the screen that displays depends on the keyword status If no keywords are registered press ESC to return to the menu screen 2 To cancel the operation and return to the top screen time display press ESC Menu screen Not registered s z Contrast co o ClockMenu The Keyword o Vg I RB Keyword te oe i v is not set Cassette I Registered 3 S2 Keyword If keyword is correct mund When switching to menu ae prohibited by keyword occurs Please input 2 2 Keyword All operatio
81. ues C uoneJn6ijuo jndingandu Jl SON HUN SON 5 62 ye 2 D z o 131 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 4 Examples of External Wiring AC Power Supply Type 9 4 Examples of External Wiring AC Power Supply Type 9 4 1 Example of input output wiring with 24V DC service power supply 24V DC service power supply of the main unit can be used as a power supply for loads AC power supply of 100 to 240V are Breaker Power ON P MC X In the case of sink input wiring MC i iEmergency NER i stop Main unit 1 ES X grounding P MC MC i I Power supply for loads Li bavt21 24V 1 connected to sequencer Ma oe output terminals AN V 1 Lo ET As for the details of i emergency stop see ES X1 DESIGN PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions field I l i irin DESA OF In the case of source input wiring Input i impedance 1 1 Connect the AC power supply to the L and N terminals in any case of 100V AC system and 200V AC system As for the details see WIRING PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions field 2 The 24V and OV terminals are located on the output terminal side For details on the terminal layout refer to Section 4 7 3 Connect the 24V terminal in the case of sink input or the OV terminal in the case of source input to the S
82. with Tn JY997D11401 Procedures for handling the 4 ch analog input and 1 09R616 User s Manual ch analog output special function block product 5 Manuals for positioning control Sas llCommon 228 oQ29 o2 Separate Tu en CUN wee Details of positioning functions of FX3S FX3G a 2 Series User s Manual JY997D16801 09R620 2a volume NONU v FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Series Positioning Control Edition Manuals for FX 30P Supplied FX 30P Describes FX 30P specification extracted from the 6 with instalation Manazi JY997D34201 FX 30P Operation manual OY product For details refer to FX 30P Operation manual 3 A z i l a 23 Separate FX 30P JY997D34401 Describes Handy Programming Panel FX 30P 09R924 a volume Operation Manual details E Other manuals When using each product refer also to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed j lllinput extension Supplied P with PAJATAB JY997D51301 Procedures for handling the 4 points input expansion g User s Manual board product E Output extension Supplied FX3G 2EYT BD Procedures for handling the 2 points transistor output with JY997D51401 product User s Manual expansion board lllVariable analog potentiometers Procedures for handling the 8 ch variable analog Supplied FX3G 8AV BD potentiometers expansion board with i JY997D33701 When using refer to FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Installation Manual i product Series Progra
83. yoojg euw CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes 14 6 3 Representation of errors Errors are represented in this manual GX Works2 and GX Developer as shown in the following table 214 Comparison between this manual and GX Works2 This manual I O configuration error PLC hardware error PLC PP communication error Serial communication error 1 ch1 Serial communication error 2 ch2 Parameter error Syntax error Circuit error Operation error Special block error Special parameter error GX Works2 I O Configuration Error PLC Hardware Error PLC PP Communication Error Link Error Serial Communication Error 2 ch2 Parameter Error Syntax Error Ladder Error Operation Error Special Block Error Special Parameter Error Comparison between this manual and GX Developer This manual I O configuration error PLC hardware error PLC PP communication error Serial communication error 1 ch1 Serial communication error 2 ch2 Parameter error Syntax error Circuit error Operation error Special block error Special parameter error GX Developer I O config err PLC H W error PLC PP comm err Link error Link Error 2 Param error Syntax error Ladder error Operation err SFB Error FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance
84. 104 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 3 Examination for Installing Method in Enclosure 2 Example of direct installation 1 to 2mm 0 04 to 0 08 FX3G Series main unit Extension cable FXON 65EC FXON 30EC FX2N CNV BC indicates an MA screw 3 Example of combination of installation on DIN rail and direct installation As shown in the following example when the main unit is installed on the DIN rail the extension devices connected with the extension cable can be installed directly in the enclosure 1 to 2mm 0 04 to 0 08 HR a FX2N 16EYT FX3G Series main unit DIN rail 1 to 2mm 0 04 to 0 08 Extension cable FXoN 65EC FX2N CNV BC FXoN 30EC indicates an M4 screw 1 FX2N CNV BC can be installed directly in the enclosure but cannot be installed on the DIN rail 105 UONnOnpoJjU NO SOWeN ed pue seJnjee OO uononpoJu jonpoug suoneoyiods I oO seone Jeyeudueg pue uoISJ9A wasis uoneJn amp ijuo N jndinondu Z O 2 c 2 Z O m uonejeisu BULA A ddng Jamod ue uonesedaid h Buum ndu CO p FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 4 Procedures for Installing on and Detaching from DIN Rail 8 4 Procedures for Installing on and Detaching from DIN
85. 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 2 Special Adapters 18 2 4 FX3U 4AD PT W ADP External Dimensions Terminal Layout e MASS Weight Approx 0 1kg 0 22lbs DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches Installation Accessories Manual supplied with product Terminal block European type ot ol ol ol oiL olf ol ol ol oTi old ol ol oly ori 18 2 5 FX3u 4AD PNK ADP External Dimensions Terminal Layout e MASS Weight Approx 0 1kg 0 22lbs DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches Installation Accessories Manual supplied with product Terminal block European type 98 3 86 mounting hole pitch 2 92 0 62 18 2 6 FX3u 4AD TC ADP External Dimensions Terminal Layout e MASS Weight Approx 0 1kg 0 22lbs DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws 2 064 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches Installation Accessories Manual supplied with product Terminal block European type 90 3 55 98 3 86 mounting hole pitch 15 1 0 6 5 17 6 0 7 poles 297 SJojunoo peedg uDi 1 Buum nding N 10 buum OO Ses snoueA I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1S9 peJeMod jdinoandu Q1
86. 2 Power Supply Specifications The specifications for the main unit power supply are explained below For the power current consumed by the special function blocks refer to this manual or the special function units blocks manual 4 2 1 AC Power Supply Type Specifications tem FX3G 14MO EO FX3G 24MLI ETI FX3G 40MO EO FX3G 60MO EO Supply voltage 100 to 240V AC Allowable supply 85 to 264V AC voltage range Rated frequency 50 60Hz Allowable instantaneous power Operation can be continued upon occurrence of instantaneous power failure for 10 ms or less failure time Power fuse 250V 1A 250V 3 15A Rush current 30A max 5ms or less 100V AC 50A max 5ms or less 200V AC 24V DC service power 2 400mA supply 1 This item shows values when all 24V DC service power supplies are used in the maximum configuration connectable to the main unit and includes the input current 5 or 7mA per point 2 When input output extension blocks are connected the 24V DC service power changes the current consumed by the point number of the block connected For details on the 24V DC service power supply refer to Subsection 6 5 4 2 2 DC Power Supply Type Specifications Item FX3G 14MLI DLI FX3G 24MLI DLI FX3G 40M0 DO FX3G 60M0 DO Supply voltage 24V DC Allowable supply 20 4 to 28 8V DC voltage range Allowable instantaneous power Operation can be continued upon occurrence of instantaneous power failure for 5 ms or less failure time
87. 2 pem TF FX3U 16CCL M Tor x e i FX3U 64CCL ass Eaa FX3U 1PSU 5V TAA N T Refer to the figure shown ER e co I I P I i O FB EG ros GE eee ae 67 2 64 BEEN 1 Y Refer to the figure shown iO Y PASUMI left 8 5 2 Example of mounting hole pitches 1 9 1 9 6 26 26 46 pelo 122 4 81 1 03 108 182 172 6 78 Unitmm inches E T A f le sn eae I i n pg T E I 0 f i I pup NEP I f o B Big A OF f E 3 o 1 oO f 1 a Q N 1 oo bg i 1 0 0 Pee i P I oll ooto on o 2 5 V 2 0 08 0 08 0 08 FX3U 232ADP MB FX3G 40MT ES FX2N 16EX FX2N 64CL M FX2N 48ER The gap between products is 2 mm 0 08 112 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 5 Procedures for Installing Directly with M4 Screws 8 5 3 Installation of main unit 3 o Mount the special adapters and connector conversion adapter FX3G CNV ADP on the main unit before z installing the unit in the enclosure j For the connection procedure refer to Subsection 8 6 3 Subsection 8 6 4 Make mounting holes in the mounting surface P7 i according to the external dimensions diagram z5 30 Fit the main unit A in the right figure based on the holes and secure it with M4 screws B in the OO right figure The positions and number of screws depend on the product BS Refer to the extern
88. 24V DC Input impedance 4 3kQ ON input Input ON current 3 5mA or more at 24V DC sensitivity current Input OFF current 1 5mA or less Input response time Approx 10ms No voltage contact input NPN open collector transistor Input signal form Input circuit insulation Photo coupler insulation 1 T Indication of input operation LED on panel lights when input Soy 7 9 7a LI e o Sink input wiring S Main unit oo Input circuit diagram suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 257 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 Input Output Extension Blocks 16 5 FX2N 8EX FX2N 16EX and FX2N 16EX C 16 5 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement 258 FX2N 8EX With cover Without cover FX2N 8EX POWER In ut Rear line 555 itor extension 550 connector 0000 lamps LED lamps R 3 e ales i x Vine FX2N 16EX When an input X number is assigned 8 points on the upper side will be used for the lower input numbers and 8 points on the lower side will be used for the higher input numbers With cover Without cover Input indicator lamps LED lamps X eX LX ve YX eX OX K 59 ee Rear line extension connector B FXa 16EX Input indicator lamps LED lamps oi x lt o x lt i X eS X w x lt ei x lt S
89. 4 Classification of major components in this manual 4 WD 1 Main unit Chapter 1 to Chapter 14 S This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for obtaining the manuals and the abbreviations Introduction of manuals Chapter 1 oO This chapter contains explanations of the product features and the names and Features and part names i Chapter 2 uve functions of the parts BDO Introduction of product This chapter contains explanations of the structures for model names extension Chapter 3 eD a o products go e Specifications This chapter contains explanations of the specifications for power supply and Chapter 4 input output external dimensions and terminal block layout Version bf anms This chapter contains explanation for upgrading of FX3G PLCs and information for Chapter 5 6 the application of programming tools m Procedure for determining whether or not a system configuration is possible S System configuration Chapter 6 zh p Extension device current consumption and configuration examples e Input output No and unit No Input output assignment procedure for input output powered extension units Chapter 7 5 assignment blocks etc and unit No assignment procedure for special function blocks installation This chapter contains explanations for the panel layout and the procedures for Chapter 8 installing with DIN rail or screws and how to connect extension devices T Powersupply wing This chapter contains explanatio
90. 6103 I O bus error M8069 ON S Verify that extension cables are correctly connected e 6104 Powered extension unit 24 V failure M8069 ON o Check user program Ss Me tenceg i EU eter The scan time exceeds the value stored in D8000 20 When turning the power ON to the main unit a 24V power o failure occurs in a powered extension unit The error occurs if EN PADS POA ted LIT OF OR ML ORO the 24V power is not supplied for 10 seconds or more after the m main power is turned ON 2 QO 9 215 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes PLC Error operation code at error occurrence PLC hardware error M8061 D8061 Contents of error Action Stops Check the number of the connected special function blocks 6107 System configuration error For certain special function blocks the connectable number is operation a limited PLC PP communication error D8062 6201 Parity overrun or framing error 6202 Communication character error Check the cable connection between the programming panel 6203 Continues E E ncaa cum check cer PP programming device and the PLC This error may occur operation when a cable is disconnected and reconnected during PLC 6204 Data format error monitoring Serial communication error 1 M8063 D8063 0000 j Noemr
91. 62 ye 2 D z o ue uoneJedaJdg Buum indu CO p FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not supply power to the 24 and 24V terminals 24V DC service power supply on the main unit or extension units Doing so may cause damage to the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100 O or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit and extension units with a wire 2 mm or thicker Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems refer to section 9 3 Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product Connect the AC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to properly wire the FX3G Series main unit and FX2N FX3U Series extension equipment in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric sho
92. 7 Do not connect the 24V terminal of the main unit to the 24 terminal 24V DC service power supply of an input output extension unit Connect the OV terminal to the COM terminal 133 UONnOnpoJjU NO SOWeN ed pue seJnjee OO uononpoJu jonpoud suoneoyiods I Qi seone JeJeudueg pue uoISJ9A wasis CO uoneJn6ijuo SON UN SON jndinondu 5 62 ye v D gt o ue uoneJedaJg Buum indu CO p FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures 9 4 Examples of External Wiring AC Power Supply Type 9 4 3 Example of source input common wiring An example of source input common wiring is shown below Sink and source input type AC power supply of 9 100 to 240V svlov 24v Special adapter a TN Breaker Class D Main unit grounding Power supply ON E PL yc ll s nies 7H pis Emergency input rs t type i 24V DC service Input extension s s power block supply SV IOV 24V output Special function 94 block oo AL Power supply for loads to gum be connected to PLC EE output terminals E Ta we SN input ENEE ipt operation see DESIGN type 4 PRECAUTIONS at PPly Safety Precautions field output Input extension block Special function 94 block a a Output extension block oV 0V 24V 1 Connect the
93. 8 digit keyword Please input Please input Keyword Keyword 6723B967 AF2C45BXX 01234567 Lowest order digit Lowest order digit final digit final digit Button Operation Description Cancels the operation and returns to the menu screen if pressed when the keyword s left most digit highest order digit is blinking Cancels the input and moves leftward to the next digit higher order digit if pressed when a digit other than the left most digit is blinking ESC Reduces the value FE 21 0 Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed reduction Increases the value 01 2 E F Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed increase Highest order Registers the specified value and moves to the next digit input position digit to 2nd digit If OK is pressed at the lowest order digit and if the entered keyword is correct the Keyword is canceled OK Lowest order Correct Keyword An All operation is possible message appears and the Keyword is vp canceled digit final digit Incorrect Keyword A Incorrect Keyword message appears 3 Ifthe OK button is pressed at the lowest order position the entered Keyword is registered and the message shown to the right appears If keyword is correct If the Incorrect Keyword message appears press ESC and return All operation to step 1 is possible 4 Press OK or ESC to return to the menu screen If keyword is incorrect Incorrect Keyword 3
94. 8 points Output 16 points OO Confirm the priority of all extension blocks to be connected to the main unit 23 The priority is determined by the extension block type without regard to the connection position S from the main unit as shown below Priority 4 Input extension Special function Output extension Output extension Input extension P Main unit block block block block block 9 8 points FX3U 64CCL 8 points 16 points 8 points S Priority 3 Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Judge whether extension to the main unit is possible DTE Judge the possibility of extension to the main unit for all extension blocks in turn starting from a o T block having the highest priority confirmed in step 1 In this example due to the restriction one special extension block and 16 points in input output extension block the only FX3U 64CCL priority 1 and 16 points of the output extension block pri ority 2 can be connected to the main unit Check whether extension from the 24V DC service power supply is possible Check using the quick reference matrix whether 16 input points and 8 output points whose exten sion is judged as impossible in step 2 can be added T Output Sa DE 5 SE iS ww o0 150 ee zoo 300 200 soo 9 0 8 16 24 32 7 Number of added points After 16 input points and 8 output points are connected the remaining current of the 24V DC service power supply is 50mA or less Accordingly it i
95. AC power supply to the L and N terminals in any case of 100V AC system and 200V AC system Make sure that the power is turned ON at the same time in the main unit and extension units or earlier in extension units than the main unit For the details refer to WIRING PRECAUTIONS in Safety Precautions As for the details see WIRING PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions field 2 Connect the OV terminal of the main unit or extension unit to the S S terminal of the input extension block 134 3 Some special function units blocks special adapters do not have a power supply terminal When using an external power supply turn it ON at the same time with the main unit or earlier than the main unit When turning OFF the power confirm the safety of the system and then turn OFF the power of the PLC including special extension equipment at the same time 4 Do not connect the 24V terminals 24V DC service power supply of the main unit and the input output extension unit with each other Connect the OV terminal 5 Some special extension units blocks do not have power terminals When using an external power supply turn it ON at the same time with the extension unit or earlier than the extension unit When turning OFF the power confirm the safety of the system and then turn OFF the power of the PLC including special extension equipment at the same time 6 The 24V and OV terminals are located on the output terminal side Fo
96. Attach the memory cassette Install the memory cassette to the main unit FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 21 Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 21 3 Installation The memory cassette E in the right figure can be fixed with provided M3 tapping screws D in the right figure to the main unit This work is not required when fixation is not necessary Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 6 N m AJowsy 9jesse2 Caution Two types of M3 tapping screws are provided Use M3 x 8 shorter screws Do not use M3 x 16 longer screws because they may damage the main unit N apeg IND 21 3 2 Installation when the expansion board connector conversion adapter is used together 0008a 0008W sr uononJjsu WwW seoi eq jeroeds The FX3G 40MT ES is used as the main unit and the expansion board is used together in this example Attach the expansion board connector conversion adapter to the main unit For the attachment method refer to Chapter 8 Caution Make sure to attach the expansion board connector conversion adapter before the memory cassette Tightening with tapping screws M3 x 8 is not necessary C n 30 Remove the upper connector cover A in the 2B right figure 3 SET Sg Remove the part B shown in the right figure Der l Te using nipper etc Sr G 222 pa 32L PLC SS OFF ON anc Caution O PROTECT SW
97. BD units FX3G 422 BD GT1020LBL 5V DC type FX3G 422 BD GT1020LBL 5V DC type Avoid continuous use of two GT1020LBL 5V DC type units Itis not allowable to connect a device such as GOT which consumes an internal 5V DC to each of the RS 422 port in the 40 point 60 point type main unit and two FX3G 422 BD units 3 channels in total at the same time Restrictions in the use of an input output powered extension unit When using an input output extension unit select a power supply type that is the same as the main unit 71 UOnOnpoJjU NO SOWeN ed pue sounjeo C9 uononpoJu jonpoug suoneoyiods I oO seone JeJeudueg pue uoISJ9A z O Ss O O S SON HUN SON uonejeisu OO BULA A ddnsg Jamod ue uonesedaid h Buum ndu CO p FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 3 Number of Input Output Points and Maximum Number of Input Output Points 6 3 Number of Input Output Points and Maximum Number of Input Output Points 6 3 1 Calculation of number of input output points To obtain the total number of input output points count the input output points of input output powered extension units blocks and the input output occupied points of special function blocks The number of remote I O points on CC Link network must be excluded Total the number of input output points on the main unit and the number
98. BOS S8 oh j yu A ddns Jewog UOISUS X3 co suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue yoojg euw CO 173 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 1 External Wiring for Relay Output Type 12 1 External Wiring for Relay Output Type This section explains relay outputs and external wiring For the relay output specifications refer to the following For the specifications on the main unit refer to Subsection 4 4 1 For the specifications on the input output powered extension unit refer to Chapter 15 For the specifications on the input output extension block refer to Chapter 16 12 1 1 Product life of relay contacts For product life of relay contacts refer to Subsection 14 4 3 12 1 2 Handling of relay output 174 Output terminal One common terminal is used for 4 or 8 relay output points The common terminal blocks can drive loads of different circuit voltage systems for example 100V AC and 24V DC External power supply Use an external power supply of 30V DC or less or 240V AC or less 250V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE UL or cUL standards for loads Circuit insulation The PLC internal circuit and external load circuits are electrically insulated between the output relay coil and contact The common terminal blocks are separated from one another Display o
99. C described in this manual TIECOMHOIS TRAY This chapter contains explanations for transport regulations and guidelines Appendix D transportation Handling of batteries and devices with Built in batteries in EU member states This chapter contains explanations for the disposal precautions of batteries and Appendix E exporting batteries to EU member states 20 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 1 Introduction User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 1 Introduction of Manuals 1 1 2 Manual organization and position of this manual This manual describes detail on the hardware including the system configuration selection installation and wiring The instructions communication control analog control and positioning control are explained in separate manuals Refer to the manuals as needed FIO SNS Manual for each use separate volume l Built in functions Refer to the manual for each purpose of use Main unit eSequence instructions eHigh speed counter User s Manual Hardware Edition ePositioning instructions JY997D31301 Model FX3G HW E ePID Details of hardware including input FX3G output specifications wiring separate installation and maintenance of PLC manual main unit 1 Programming Manual Basic amp Applied Instructions o JY997D16601 Model FX P3 E FX3S FX3G Details of sequence program 1 FX3GC F X3U Input output powered extension units blocks
100. Capacitive load Capacitive loads can generate rush current 20 to 40 times the stationary current Make sure that the rush 12 current does not exceed the current corresponding to the maximum specified resistance load Capacitive E loads such as capacitors may be present in electronic circuit loads including inverters S About the maximum load specifications of the resistance load refer to the specification for each model For specifications on the main unit refer to Subsection 4 4 1 For specifications on the input output powered extension units refer to Chapter 15 For specifications on the input output extension blocks refer to Chapter 16 1 3 For specifications on the terminal block refer to Chapter 20 sz cg O c D nN p o o ES Q paiemog yndynonjnduy OQ sun uoisuejx3 s syoo g UOISU9 X3 dnoandu C oh j yu A ddns Jewog UOISUS X3 co suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 209 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 5 Troubleshooting with LEDs 14 5 Troubleshooting with LEDs When trouble occurs check the LEDs on the PLC to identify the problem with the PLC 14 5 1 POW LED on flashing off State of LED State of PLC Remedies On Power of the specified voltage is being correctly The power subo TS moral s
101. DC power supply AC power supply type 32 16 16 250 SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee OO zo F O FX2N 48ER ES UL FX2N 48ET ESS UL m H B1 FX2N 48ER 48 24 24 FX2N 48ET 4 FX2N 48ER UA1 UL D DC power supply type 8 S S D FX2N 48ER DS FX2N 48ET FX2N 48ET DSS 24 24 aaa FFX2N 48ER D D CENE FPX2NMBETD D 2 Input output extension blocks B Number of input Current consumed mA No Type i output points 5V DC Internal 24V DC Types for addition of input output FX2N 8ER ES UL 16 62 5 FX2N XNN HER Types Las NU addition of input FX2N 8EX ES UL FX2N FX2N 8EX 50 FX2N 8EX aeu oO OQ U Doc zig 50 a zo o 02 oo 25 Q Uejs S uoneJn6ijuo N FX2N 16EX FX2N 16EX Ss 100 n FX2N 16EX See e 3S FX2N 16EXL E Ze en uonejesu OO ERE for addition of output FX2N 8EYR S FX2N BEYR S ES UL FX2N 8EYT SERT ESSUL aaa FFX2N BEYR d EM FFX2N BEYT lice LUE FFX2N BEYT H H FX2N 16EYR a Se ESUL UD 3238 QS ns So FX2N 16EYT C o a FX2N 16EYS 1 Four inputs and four outputs are occupied as unused numbers 1 0 5 E E 89 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 8 Number of Input Output Occupied Points and Current Consumption 6 8 3 C Special function devices Number of inp
102. Default 50000 Y000 Acceleration time NOIRS Default 100 Y000 Deceleration time Linus Default 100 D 8350 YOO1 Current value register D 8351 Default 0 D 8352 Y001 Bias speed Default 0 D 8353 Y001 Maximum speed l D 8354 Default 100000 Y001 Creep speed eo Default 1000 D 8356 Y001 Zero return speed i D 8357 Default 50000 Y001 Acceleration time uud Default 100 i Y001 Deceleration time dod Default 100 i D 8360 Y002 Current value register D 8361 Default 0 D 8362 Y002 Bias speed Default 0 D 8363 Y002 Maximum speed l D 8364 Default 100000 Y002 Creep speed USES Default 1000 D 8366 Y002 Zero return speed i D 8367 Default 50000 Y002 Acceleration time uus Default 100 i Y002 Deceleration time eee Default 100 2 RS2 FNC 87 ch0 RS2 FNC 87 chO D 8370 Communication format setting 018371 i D 8372 iot s 4 transmit data ue D 8373 dni ae points pee D 8374 D 8375 i D 8376 Not used D 8377 D 8378 400 Number and Content of register name RS2 FNC 87 ch0 D 8379 Time out time setting RS2 FNC 87 ch0 D 8380 Header 1 and 2 lt Default STX gt RS2 FNC 87 ch0 D 8381 Header 3 and 4 RS2 FNC 87 ch0 D 8382 Terminator 1 and 2 lt Default ETX gt RS2 FNC 87 ch0 D 8383 Terminator 3 and 4 RS2 FNC 87 ch0 D 8384 Receive sum received data RS2 FNC 87 ch0 D 8385 Receive sum calculated result D 8386 RS2 FNC 87 ch0
103. ESS UL FX2N 48ER UA1 UL FX2N 48ER DS oO FX2N 48ET DSS FX2N 48ER D FX2N 48ET D Soo Io 9 FX2N Series input output Generic name for the following models Oz E extension blocks FX2N 8ER ES UL FX2N 8ER a 2 e EXON Series OP Genet Generic name for the following models blocks P FX2N 16EX ES UL FX2N 16EX FX2N 16EX C FX2N 16EXL C FX2N 8EX ES UL FX2N 8EX UAM UL FX2N 8EX 6 Generic name for the following models FX2N Series output extension FX2N 16EYR ES UL FX2N 16EYR FX2N 16EYT ESS UL FX2N 16EYT FX2N 16EYS S blocks FX2N 16EYT C FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX2N 8EYR S ES UL FX2N 8EYT ESS UL FX2N 8EYR cS FX2N 8EYT FX2N 8EYT H s Special function blocks Generic name for FX3U Series special function blocks FX2N Series special function blocks S FX3U Series special function Generic name for the following models blocks FX3U 16CCL M FX3U 64CCL FX3U 4AD FX3U 4LC FX3U 4DA T EXON Series special function Generic name for the following models a blocks P FX2N 16CCL M FX2N 32CCL FX2N 64CL M FX2N 2AD FX2N 4AD FX2N 8AD FX2N 4AD PT he FX2N 4AD TC FX2N 2LC FX2N 2DA FX2N 4DA FX2N 5A 6 v Generic name for the following models Bg a FX3G EEPROM 32L gs Diselsvmedula Generic name for the following models nd FX3G 5DM 9 Battery Abbreviation of model FX3U 32BL battery E m Generic name for the following models a FX Series terminal blocks FX 16E TB FX 32E TB FX 16EX A1 TB FX 16EYR TB FX 16EYS TB FX 16EYT TB m FX 16EYT H TB S Esencon cabos Gen
104. Edition FX3c Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 2013 Foreword This manual contains text diagrams and explanations which will guide the reader in the correct installation safe use and operation of the FX3c Series Programmable Controllers and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit And store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2008 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Outline Precautions This manual provides information for the use of the FX3G Series Programmable Controllers The manual has been written to be used by trained and competent personnel The definition of such a person or persons is as follows 1 Any engineer who is responsible for the planning design and construction of automatic equipment using the product associated with this manual should be of a competent nature trained and qualified to the local and national standards required to fulfill that role These engineers should b
105. Edition 15 4 FX2N 32ET ESS UL EX2N 48ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET DSS 15 4 FX2N 32ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET DSS 15 4 4 Product specifications 232 1 The generic specifications are the same as those for the main unit Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications For external wiring refer to the following chapters Refer to Chapter 9 for power supply wiring Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring Power supply specifications For the power supply specifications refer to Section 15 2 2 Input specifications for sink input and source input Item FX2N 32ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET DSS Input points 16 points 24 points Connection type Removable terminal block M3 screw Input form sink source Input signal voltage AC power supply type 24V DC 10 DC power supply type 24V DC 20 30 Input signal current 5mA 24V DC Input impedance 4 3kQ Input response Input ON current 3 5mA or more 24V DC time Input OFF current 1 5mA or less Input response time Approx 10ms No voltage contact input Input signal form Sink NPN open collector transistor Source PNP open collector transistor Input circuit insulation Photo coupler insulation Indication of input operation LED on panel lights when input AC power supply type Sink input wiring Source input wiring Input circuit diagram DC power supply type Sink input wiring 1 Do
106. FX2N 64CL M 9 B Number of input output points of input E Number of special function blocks output powered extension units C Number of input output points of input 4 output extension blocks 8 When CC Link master is used count the remote I O points 2 When CC Link is used the total number of input output points of the remote I O stations connected on the network and the number of input output points calculated in the previous step are 256 or oO less ovg 1 FX3U 16CCL M FX2N 16CCL M CC Link master TE Calculate the number of remote I O points connected on the network in the following step mo z O Ss O O S SON HUN SON uonejeisu OO DUUM A ddnsg Jewog ue uoneJedaJg h Buum ndu CO p FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 3 Number of Input Output Points and Maximum Number of Input Output Points 6 3 2 Maximum number of input output points when CC Link master is used 1 Calculation of maximum number of input output points When CC Link master block is used the following maximum number of input output points can be connected Number of input Number of input output CC EE input output points output points occupied points x8 x 32 lt 128 256 points A B C D E units F stations points points points ieciamannaner ce Total number of points obtained by formula f point Total n
107. Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed Supplied Procedures for handling the FX3U ENET ADP um FX3U ENET ADP JY997D47401 Ethernet communication special adapter i 4 Installation Manual When using refer to FX3U ENET ADP User s product 9 Manual D Separate PAU ENE EADE JY997D45801 Details of FX3U ENET ADP Ethernet communication 09R725 S volume User s Manual special adapter o Supplied Procedures for handling the CC Link master special Ei with US JY997D43401 function block product When using refer to FX3U 16CCL M User s Manual 5 09R724 g D S EUNT 3S 6 2 en FX2N 16CCL M FE Hardware Manual product 09R710 6 Supplied Procedures for handling the CC Link Intelligent On with aon JY997D29801 device station special function block SG product When using refer to FX3U 64CCL User s Manual eg e 7 Separate e JY997D30401 Details of the CC Link Intelligent device station 09R718 S volume User s Manual special function block Supplied EX N 32CCL Procedures for handling the CC Link remote device with JY992D71701 E 09R711 7 User s Manual station special function block product a Supplied Remote I O station remote As for the remote I O station remote device station and intelligent os with device station and intelligent device station for CC Link refer to the relevant manuals and related c product device station for CC Link documents Bg E oO ct Supplied FX2N 64CL M Lien nT the CC Link LT master
108. LO Ko a 4 uH E N X021 V X022 V X023 V X024 V X025 V X026 V X027 N co st LO co co co co co co co co N JN AN ZIN AN AN Main unit Ex FX3G 40MT ES eae LI 2 In the case of source wiring When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor source type in the used main unit B wo O NO NV VW NS VD 0 1A SOV gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt diode is gt y DECRESATY X021VX022VX023VX024VX025VX026VX027 N co t LO O t st t t t t t st X021VX022VX023VX024VX025VX026WX027 o N co LO e co co c co e eo co V V V V V V V V Main unit Ex FX3G 40MT ESS NEN EN 192 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 3 Input Matrix MTR Instructions FNC 52 2 Main unit input output powered extension unit block Example of program M8000 Example of wiring 1 In the case of sink wiring When the main unit and a transistor output sink type input output powered extension unit block are used c N N fo w LO co NM 0 1A SOV 2 2 s s 353 diode is 7 necessary X021 V X022 V X023 V X024 V X025 V X026 V X027 c N ISP LO co st zt i zt st t st qe j s j I us AN X021 V X022 V X023 V X024 V X025 V X026 V X027 2 No S S A S N86 O m m 2 I LIN N LIN AN AN N L
109. LT CC Link master Special adapter unit block block master CC Link LT Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station 2 Number of remote I O points Up to 128 points CC Link system Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station v a A Number of connected special extension devices The figure below shows the number of connectable expansion boards special adapters extension power supply units and special function blocks The connector conversion adapter FX3G CNV ADP is required as the expansion board when special adapters are connected For details refer to 6 4 Number of Connected Extension Devices Including Extension Cable Special function block Up to 2 units Upto 2 units Up to 2 units Up to 2 units Only 1 unit Upto 8 units e FX3G Main units 40 60 point type adapter Special adapter Expansion anog communication board Input output Extension Main unit powered power supply 40 60 point type extension unit unit e FX3G Main units 14 24 point type adapter Special adapter Expansion Salon communication board Special function block Input output Extension Main unit powered power supply 14 24 point type extension unit unit Only 1 unit Only 1 unit Only 1 unit Up to 2 units Only 1 unit Up to 8 units 1 Available when
110. MA A10 1o 14 19 13 2 System information setting program example The following is a program example in which the system information has been assigned to D50 to D54 and M50 to M64 D8300 H System information system No 1 is set at D50 to D54 Initial pulse iB mov Kso MOV D8301 System information system No 2 is set at M50 to M64 335 SJojunoo peedg uBi Buum nding IN 10 buum OO Ses snoueA I s oD Dn es Sy XE 5 E 090 2 erg oo S Q IU Agw O c 2 Dc 2 oO GGG 2 S E a op uda sy ojg UOISU9 X3 jnd noandu C N yu A ddng Jamod UOISUS X3 co suondo pue sun UOISUS X3 JOUIO J 77 nes D lt ES o c D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 14 Specified Device Monitor Function 19 14 Specified Device Monitor Function The specified device monitor function can change the top screen to the monitor test screen for a device specified by the user For the specified device monitor function specify the device type to be displayed in DLILI of the system information system signal 1 and specify the device number to be displayed in DO O 1 of the system information system signal 1 It is necessary to turn ON MA A to enable the test operation on the specified device monitor screen 19 14 1 System information sp
111. N uny 1S9 peJeMod jdinoandu Q1 spun uoisuejx3 uda 490 UOISU9 X3 ndinoandu C N yu A ddns Jewog UOISUS X3 co suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of High speed Counters User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 5 Handling of High speed Counters C235 is set to the up count or down count mode through interruption by the count input X000 When the current value increases from 6 to 5 the output contact is set and when the value decreases from 5 to 6 it is reset The current value increases and decreases regardless of the operation of the output contact However when the counter s value increments from 2 147 483 647 it changes to 2 147 483 648 In the same manner when it decrements from 2 147 483 648 it changes to 2 147 483 647 This type of counter is called a ring counter e When RST instruction is executed after the reset input X011 turns on the current counter s value resets to 0 and the output contact is restored he current value output contact operation and reset status of counters are backed up kept even if the power is turned off 11 5 2 1 phase 2 count input These counters are 32 bit up count down count binary counters The operations of the output contact according to the current value are the same as those of the above mentioned 1 phase 1 count input high speed co
112. O O zol lt S Q 3 In the case of sink input wiring short circuit the S S terminal and the 24V terminal of the main unit 4 The 24V and OV terminals are located on the output terminal side For details on the terminal layout refer to Section 4 7 147 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 Input Wiring Procedures 10 2 24V DC input Sink and source input type 10 2 4 Examples of external wiring source input AC Power Supply Type Sink and source input type ae 2 p gr od i H Two wire proximity sensor Main unit ovh Pnt Input 5V 0V 24V impedance Input extension block Sink and source input type terminal 1 Handle the power supply circuit correctly in accordance with Chapter 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures 2 For an input device having a parallel resistance or a two wire proximity switch a bleeder resistance may be required 3 In the case of source input wiring short circuit the terminals of the extension units as well as the S S terminal and the OV terminal of the main unit 4 The 24V and OV terminals are located on the output terminal side For details on the terminal layout refer to Section 4 7 148 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 2 24V DC input Sink and source input type 10 2 5 Examples of external wiring sink input
113. Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 4 FX2N 8EX ES UL FX2N 16EX ES UL 24V DC Sink Source Input 16 4 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement FX2N 8EX ES UL With cover Without cover FX2N 8EX ES power Rear line isis extension non Input indicator connector lamps LED lamps e ry FX2N 16EX ES UL When an input X number is assigned 8 points on the upper side will be used for the lower input numbers and 8 points on the lower side will be used for the higher input numbers With cover Without cover Input indicator p EL 8 lamps AL HOE LED lamps E ca e 3 E Rear line x extension Lower E connector numbers FXa 16EX 5 Ge nog Input indicator Hx 4 lamps SE 3J LED lamps EISE Higher numbers 255 SJojunoo wh peedg uDi Buum nding N 10 buum OO Ses snoueA I zm Oo amp Dn es Sy X EN 090 2 erg O O S d Q mM US Aou O c 2opc 2 oO Ooc 2 S a op 17 yu A ddng Jamod UOISUS XF co suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 4 FX2N 8EX ES UL FX2N 16EX ES UL 24V DC Sink Source Input 16 4 3 External dimensions FX2N 8EX ES UL 2 04 5 mounting Unit mm inches FX2N 8EX ES CD POWER 80 3 15 mounting h
114. Preview Default c End Cancel 386 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 22 Battery User s Manual Hardware Edition 22 4 Battery Handling 22 4 Battery Handling Ts o3 o Ta When the battery voltage is low a ALM LED lights red while the power is ON and M8005 and M8006 are switches ON Although the battery will continue to function for approximately 1 month after the ALM LED switches ON a replacement battery should be ordered and installed as soon as possible 22 4 1 Battery life and replacement guidelines FX3U 32BL battery life Approx 5 years ambient temperature 25 C 77 F Guarantee period 1 year after delivery or 18 months after production Battery life vs temperature 53 The life of the battery changes with respect to ambient temperature 7 When planning for battery replacement please estimate the battery 6 tod life according to the graph to the right and order the replacement w 5 S8 batteries in advance g B C c 1 S BE r 0 zl 0 10 20 30 40 50 Ambient temperature C 30 22 4 2 Reading the date of manufacture a8 How to read the battery lot number reference 2 Nameplate Connector D Model name gt FX3U 32BL SEG LOT 101 2 exstet vd at 9 ouem LOT S lt Product during December 2009 or earlier gt lt Product from January 2010 gt e E preeecs To peces 3 O I ag iz 11 0
115. Rail The main unit can be installed on a DIN46277 rail 35 mm 1 38 wide 8 4 1 Preparation for installation 1 Connecting extension devices Some extension devices must be mounted on the main unit before the unit is installed in the enclosure Mount the special adapter or connector conversion adapter FX3G CNV ADP on the main unit before installing the main unit to the enclosure e Mount the input output powered extension units blocks and the special function blocks in the enclosure after installing the main unit in the enclosure The expansion boards memory cassette and the display module can be fitted to the main unit after it is installed The battery can be replaced while the main unit is installed in the enclosure However when the expansion board display module memory cassette or connector conversion adapter is attached remove the respective device For the replacement method refer to Chapter 22 2 Affixing The Dust Proof Sheet The dust proof sheet should be affixed to the ventilation port before beginning the installation and wiring work For the affixing procedure refer to the instructions on the dust proof sheet Be sure to remove the dust proof sheet when the installation and wiring work is completed FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 4 Procedures for Installing on and Detaching from DIN Rail 8 4 2 Installation of main unit
116. Refer to Subsection 19 6 1 for test mode subject devices 1 Data registers D D 16 bit DD 32 bit extended registers R R 16 bit DR 32 bit extended file registers ER ER 16 bit DER 32 bit 1 Perform a monitor mode operation to display the device whose current value is to be changed D1200 Refer to Subsection 19 6 2 for monitor function operation D1201 D1202 D1203 2 Hold the OK button for 1 second or longer to switch to the test mode The current value begins blinking refer to fig at right D1200 L D1201 D1202 D1203 3 Use the buttons to change the value as desired To cancel the operation and return to the monitor screen press D1200 ESC L DTZ207 Button Operation Description D1202 ESC Cancels the operation and returns to the monitor screen D1203 Reduces the value Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed reduction Increases the value Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed increase OK Registers the current value and returns to the monitor screen 4 Press OK to register the current value and return to the monitor screen File register D The display module s test function cannot be used to change the current value of the file register D which is stored in the program memory 319 SJojunoo wh peedsg uBij Buum nding N 10 Buum OO s sN snoueA I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1S9 peJeMod
117. S terminal on the input extension block 132 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures 9 4 Examples of External Wiring AC Power Supply Type 9 4 2 Example of sink input common wiring An example of sink input common wiring is given below When connecting input output powered extension units blocks carefully check the signal names on the terminal block because the sink and source input type units blocks and the sink input type units blocks vary in signal names on the terminal block Sink and source input type AC power supply of 4 100 to 240V Special adapter 5VJO0V 24V E p E MEM Breaker XXL o pee eae n i Class D Power supply ON grounding EH PL g Me MC k Sink and Emergency source DNE 4 stop input type 24V DC E service power MC nS MC supply output Power supply for loads to be connected to PLC output terminals bo Sink and service As for the details of source power emergency stop input supply operation see DESIGN type C 5 output PRECAUTIONS at Input extension block da Output extension 5V 0V 24V block 1 Connect the AC power supply to the L and N terminals in any case of 100V AC system and 200V AC system Make sure that the power is turned ON at the same time in the main unit and extension units or earlier in extension units than the main unit As for
118. Slave station No 1 MIE Top IM 8185 Data communication error M 8167 Slave station No 2 SMOV FNC 13 instruction Data communication error 1 is HEX data handling function Lo dde Slave station No 3 MBS IM187 Data communication error D8218 4 Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN SVO HONO 2 Applicable to RS FNC 80 ASCI FNC 82 HEX FNC 83 M 8188 Data communication error and CCD FNC 84 instructions Slave station No 5 Data communication error Pulse Catch oho Slave station No 6 M 8170 Input X000 pulse catch B IM 8190 Data communication error M 8171 Input X001 pulse catch Slave station No 7 E M 8191 Data communication in execution M 8172 Input X002 pulse catch M 8192 M 8173 Input X003 pulse catch V 8193 M 81 743 Input X004 pulse catch M 81 94 M 8175 Input X005 pulse catch M 8195 ot use M 8176 M 8196 Not used M 8177 M 8197 3 Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN M 8198 i M 8199 z Communication Port Channel Setting Parallel link channel switch OFF ch1 ON ch2 N N network channel switch 4 4 The channel is specified by either creating or not creating M8179 in setting program ch1 not creating M8179 in setting program ch2 creating M8179 in setting program 392 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M851 1 Nu
119. V 7 Make Keyword ama a i Oo Ooc Keyword 1719 344 a OBO OK Jh OKExecute SS ESCOtvvtll ESC Cancel S Voth All operation AJIT is possible 1 T s cum 4 7 5 74 wF Incorrect Seu Keyword 7 M T XtUmty N79 Memory Cassette i S d Mais XtJf ty KPC Cassette lt PLC transfer XEY ALY K PC Cassette PLC Wn Cassette lt PLC X t ey k PC ea alles a y y3 9 39 Please wait co OGO a S pe Cassette PLC MEM PC pig xi A y yjyfi19 Please wait o o O FY RAV Transfer Cassette lt PLC completed masta re Ge Ride l 77 nes D lt ES o c D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO 351 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 Terminal Block DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NWARN ING e Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents 1 Most importantly have the following an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits 2 Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PL
120. VP o gd P Po P dg bt bt g gg E gt C lock se El ng 111 17 01 10 20082 23 59 59 Wed 10 1 20098 23 59 zZ59 Wed The default Year display is a 2 digit value indicating the Western calendar year Current time 1o o gg P P tt t te I gt Cliock setting FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 10 Clock Menu Current Time Setting 19 10 2 Displaying the current time 1 At the menu screen use the buttons to move the cursor to the ClockMenu item then press OK to display the selection screen shown to the right mC ur ent PU mez To cancel the operation and return to the top screen time display press ESC Clock setting 2 Use the buttons to move the cursor to the Current time item To cancel the operation and return to the menu screen press ESC 3 Press the OK button to display the current time To cancel the operation and return to the selection screen press 2 digit display ESC Button Operation Description 01 10 08 ESC Returns to the selection screen 23 59 59 Wed Disabled Disabled OK Returns to the selection screen 4 digit display 4 Press OK or ESC to return to the selection screen 5 Press ESC to return to the menu screen 01 10 2008 23 59 59 Wed 19 10 3 Changing the current time s Year from 2 digit format to 4 digi
121. Wen to The former screen appears after a key operation was given 19 15 3 Program example screen saver time setting In this program example the screen saver time is set to 5 minutes Use this program as a reference when other time settings are specified In this program example system information is assigned from D50 to D54 and from M50 to M64 D8300 1 System information system No 1 is set at D50 to D54 Initial pulse Ba D8301 System information system No 2 is set at M50 to M64 B c3 MOV D52 Sets the screen save time 5 minutes 342 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 16 Display Screen Protect Function 19 16 Display Screen Protect Function The display screen protect function prevents accidental operation by restricting the display module functions The display screen protect function is enabled when no keyword is registered The display screen protect function s protection level is specified in the system information system signal 1 DO 0 3 Refer to Section 19 3 for display module function Refer to Subsection 19 11 5 for the keyword cancel procedure Refer to Section 19 13 for system information setting 19 16 1 System information display screen protect function 1 System signal 1 S Siam Setting dme Content Function Restriction Summary Information Level All functions except the top
122. YO37 Y000 to YO27 Y030 to Y047 E z Q 91 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 7 Assignment of Input Output Numbers and Unit Numbers User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 1 Assignment of Input Output Numbers X Y 7 1 2 Example of assigning An example of assignment of input output numbers X Y is shown below 1 Example of configuration Sonner Input output Special function Special adapter conversion Main unit extension block block FX3U 4AD ADP iN FX3G 24MT ES FXoN BER FX2N 16CCL M Input output Input powered extension extension unit block FX2N 32ET FX2N 8EX 2 Assignment of input output numbers Input output numbers are assigned to the above example configuration as shown below X016 X017 X024 to X027 Unused numbers Unused numbers C xoootoxot5 Connector Special adapter conversion Main unit Decal function extension block block FX3U A4AD ADP adapter FX3G 24MT ES FX3G CNV ADP FX2N 8ER FX2N 16CCL M Yo00 to Y011 Y012 to YO17 Y024 to Y027 Unused numbers Unused numbers X030 to X047 gt X050 to X057 Input output Input powered extension extension unit block FX2N 32ET FX2N 8EX Y030 to Y047 7 1 3 Application of I O number label The input output powered extension units blocks come with an I O number label Apply the I O number label to spaces on the enclosure see the following figure so that the input output numbers ca
123. a case Note that when an error occurs in a relay triac or transistor output device the output could be held either on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line As a guideline lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to peripheral device connectors Failure to do so may result in wire damage breakage or PLC failure WIRING PRECAUTIONS NWARN ING e Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock 186 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 1 Notes about Examples of Wiring 11 OQI eS WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION a sg Do not supply power to the 24 and 24V terminals 24V DC service power supply on the main unit or extension units Doing so may ca
124. a uu T Tm 123 Ola 1s MINING DROCC QUIS P cT 123 9 1 2 Removal and installation of quick release terminal DIOCK ccccccceccceseeceeceeceeseeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeas 123 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents 9 2 Cable Connecting Procedures cccccccceseecceeseeccceeeccseseeecseuseessugeeessugeeesseseessageeessageeessanseees 124 9 2 1 Input output terminal block power supply and input output wiring seeuesssse 124 9 2 2 MOU OULDUL COME CONS errat ate cot pt oder a tite has Cao pomi essa ee dao eade Ku nibo cosets 127 9 2 3 Terminal block for Europe expansion board and special adapters 128 9 2 4 Grounding terminal of the FX3G 485 BD RJ eese eene nnne nnne nnns 129 9 2 5 Grounding terminal of the FX3U ENET ADP sssessssseeeeenenenenen ennemis nn nnns 130 seu Groundin PNE I TU 131 9 4 Examples of External Wiring AC Power Supply Type cccccccecsseceseeceseeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeesaness 132 9 4 1 Example of input output wiring with 24V DC service power supply eeeeeeeeeese 132 9 4 2 Example of sink input COMMON wiring ccccceecccceeeeeceeeeeeeeecceeeeceeseueseeseueeseeeeeesaeeesseeeeeeess 133 9 4 3 Example of source input COMMON WILING ccccceeecceceeeceeaecesaeeececeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeesaueeesaeeeeaaas 13
125. all extension blocks in turn starting from the extension block having the highest priority confirmed in step 1 Consider that 16 input output points are provided in each of the FX2N 8ER ES UL and FX2N 8ER Eight output points have higher prior ity over 8 input points For judgment about the possibility of extension to the main unit refer to the Section 6 5 7T UONnOnpoJjU NO SOWeN ed pue seJnjee OO uononpoJu jonpoug suoneoyiods I oO seone JeJeudueg pue uoISJ9A z O Ss O O S SON HUN SON uonejeisu OO DUUM A ddnsg Jewog ue uoneJedaJg h Buum ndu CO p FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 5 Expansion of Main Unit 78 Check whether extension from the 24V DC service power supply is possible Check using the quick reference matrix shown below whether the number of points whose exten sion is judged as impossible in step 2 can be added using the 24V DC service power supply A special function block is handled in the same way as 16 output points emm Example Number of gt added points o E 200 300 200 oo o 0 8 16 24 32 gt Number of added points Example When 8 input points and 8 output points are connected the current of the 24V DC service power supply becomes 150mA or less Confirm the current capacity of the 24V DC service power supply from the value sho
126. an extension power supply unit For details refer to the following Refer to 6 5 1 When adding input output extension blocks using the 24V DC service power supply of the main unit Refer to 6 6 Expansion of FX2N Series I O Powered Extension Unit Refer to 6 7 Expansion of Extension Power Supply Unit FX3U 1PSU 5V FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 5 Expansion of Main Unit In the case of DC power type main unit The allowable extension to the DC power supply type main unit varies depending on used extension blocks as described below 1 When connecting only the input output extension block Input output extension blocks of up to 32 points can be connected 2 When connecting the input output extension block and special function block Input output extension blocks of up to 16 points can be connected Only 1 special function block can be connected 3 When connecting only the special function block Up to 2 special function blocks can be connected When extension of the above points 1 to 3 is carried out and further extension is required determine whether extension is possible using one of the following methods For details refer to the following Refer to 6 6 Expansion of FX2N Series I O Powered Extension Unit 6 5 1 When adding input output extension blocks using the 24V DC service power supply of the main unit When extension is pr
127. as shown below v Effective Ineffective Item In stopped status Batch writing of file registers D and extension file registers ER EEG Jr Partial modification of program Writing of program to PLC Modification of whole program batch writing O s Writing of parameters to PLC Fl iy Writing of comments to PLC 1 Since the writing function is used during running the programming tool must support the write during RUN function such as GX Works2 or GX Developer For the writing function during running refer to Subsection 5 2 5 14 3 4 Built in variable analog potentiometer function 206 The main unit has two built in variable analog potentiometers shown in the figure below The current value increases from 0 to 255 when a variable analog potentiometer is turned clockwise Enlarged view MITSUBISHI MEIISEE FX3G 40M The current value of each variable analog potentiometer is stored in special data registers shown below Volume Data register to store current value VR1 variable analog potentiometer1 D8030 Integer from 0 to 255 VR2 variable analog potentiometer2 D8031 Integer from 0 to 255 Use example 1 of variable analog potentiometer The current value of VR1 is used as the set value of a timer 70 D8030 The current value of VR1 is used as the set value of the timer TO The setting range in this example using TO 100ms timer is from O to 25 5 sec Use
128. be set Priority High Low FX3G PLC FX3G gt FX1N gt FX2N gt FX2 1 FX2N is selected when the FX 10P E is used SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee 2 Contents of restrictions Programming is enabled only for the range of functionality available in the PLC selected as the alternative model such as instructions device ranges and program sizes When the FX 10P E is used the range of OO functionality is limited to that available in the FX2N PLC 38 Use a programming tool that can select either FX3G to change parameters i e memory capacity file ER register capacity etc S The built in USB port cannot be used for programming communication 5 2 3 Program transfer speed and programming tools Y 1 Built in USB communication S The FX3G PLC has a built in USB communication port and performs program writing program reading and monitoring at high speed 12 Mbps with a personal computer that supports USB 1 Supported programming tools GX Works2 Ver 1 08J or later GX Developer Ver 8 72A or later 2 In programming tools not supporting USB Communication is performed via RS 422 or RS 232C jesoydued pue UOISIOA 2 RS 422 RS 232C communication The FX3G PLC can write and read programs and perform monitoring at 115 2 kbps through RS 422 RS 232C ueisa OD communication 9 1 115 2 kbps supported programming tools 2 GX Works2 Ver 1 08J or later GX Developer Ver 8 724 or later FX 30P Ver 1 00 or la
129. block Forinput output powered extension units 8 point type input output extension blocks except for the FX2N 8EYR S ES UL and special extension units blocks this operation is unnecessary Fit the upper edge of the DIN rail mounting groove B in the right figure onto the DIN rail Push the product against the DIN rail Keep a gap of 1 to 2 mm 0 04 to 0 08 between the products Connect the extension cable For the procedures on connecting the extension cable refer to Subsection 8 6 5 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 Installation In Enclosure 8 4 Procedures for Installing on and Detaching from DIN Rail 8 4 4 Removal of main unit Open the terminal block cover and remove the lower terminal block cover A in the right figure Gradually loosen the left and right terminal block mounting screws B in the right figure and remove the terminal blocks For anchoring of the terminal block refer to Subsection 9 1 2 Disconnect the extension cables and the con necting cables including expansion board and special adapters Insert the tip of a flathead screwdriver into the hole of the DIN rail mounting hook C in the right figure This step also applies for the DIN rail mounting hooks of the special adapters Move the flathead screwdriver as shown in the right figure to draw out the DIN rail mounting hooks of all devices Remove the produ
130. case remove the memory cassette and use the programming tool to cancel the internal EEPROM s keyword Item Operation Description Cassette PLC Copies internal program memory EEPROM data to a connected memory cassette Cassette PLC Copies data from a connected memory cassette to the internal program memory EEPROM Caution When a memory cassette is connected with a display module perform the data transfer procedure in the display module The memory cassette cannot be used for the data transfer procedure 19 12 1 Transfer from internal EEPROM to memory cassette Cassette PLC 332 1 Atthe menu screen use the buttons to move the cursor to the Cassette item then press OK to display the memory cassette transfer screen eee 81 4 qoi J To cancel the operation and return to the top screen time display RP Cassette PLC press ESC Cassette PLC Memory Cassette i 7 2 Use the buttons to move the cursor to the Cassette PLC item then press OK to display the screen shown to the right To cancel the operation and return to the memory cassette transfer screen press ESC Cassette PLC OK 5 Excute ESC 5 Cansel 3 Press OK to begin the transfer Or press ESC to cancel the operation Cassette PLC Button Operation Description Cancels the operation and returns to the memory cassette ESE transfer screen Please wait Disabled Disabled OK Ex
131. chO Send wait flag Acceleration deceleration operation M 8372 RS2 FNC 87 chO Send request D8372 iMi6339 i RS2 FNC 87 chO M8340 Y000 Pulse output monitor M 8373 s MEL D8373 ON BUSY OFF READY m Y000 Clear signal output function PORTO IM m M 8341 enable nase RS2 FNC 87 chO j EET Time out check flag YOOO Zero return direction M 8342 specification High Speed Counter Function M 8343 Y000 Forward limit M 8380 to M 8387 M 8344 Y000 Reverse limit M 8388 Contact for high speed counter i function change M 8345 1 Y000 DOG signal logic reverse Y000 Z int signal logi M 8346 Mee i D T Function changeover device for C248 and C253 m 8383 3 YOOO Positioning instruction 6346 DE Functi h i M 8349 Y000 Pulse output stop command M 8395 me Le d YOO1 Pulse output monitor MI8396 YOO1 Clear signal output function 1 M 8351 enable Ring Counter Y001 Zero return direction M 8398 Ring counter operation D8398 OSE specification in units of 1ms 32 bits D8399 M 8353 Y001 Forward limit M 8399 M 8354 Y001 Reverse limit 2 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP or when M 8355 1 Y001 DOG signal logic reverse RS2 instruction ch0 is OFF IYOOTlZ Soe PERT 3 1ms ring counter D8399 D8398 will operate after M8398 ero point signal logic t ON reverse Dg RS2 FNC 87 e M 8358 YOO1 Positioning instruction M 8400 B activation IMj8401 4 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Send wait flag
132. com x0 x2 X4 X6 XO X2 X4 X6 XO 2 X4 X6 e OTOL pepi px xe xz xt x3 x5 xz Xt X8 X6 XT X O o gt TO O FX2N 48ER D co vo v2 v4 vel vo v2 v4 ve vo v2 Ya ve ous cow 4 v3 pow vs v7 Joona v1 va ow vs vz v Y8 YS Y7 suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 237 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 6 FX2N 32ET FX2N 48ET FX2N 48ET D 15 6 FX2N 32ET FX2N 48ET FX2N 48ET D 15 6 1 Product specifications 238 The generic specifications are the same as those for the main unit Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications For external wiring refer to the following chapters Refer to Chapter 9 for power supply wiring Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring Power supply specifications For the power supply specifications refer to Section 15 2 2 Input specifications sink input Item FX2N 48ET FX2N 48ET D Connection type Removable terminal block M3 screw Input form sink Input signal voltage AC power supply type 24V DC 10 DC power supply type 24V DC 20 30 Input signal current 5mA 24V DC Input impedance 4 3 kO Input response Input ON current 3 5mA or more 24V DC time Input OFF current 1 5mA or less Input response time Approx 10ms ine
133. converter is applicable only to 9 600 or 19 200 bps FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 3 Introduction of Products User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 2 Connector Types and Cables for Program Communication 3 2 4 The accessing path to the FX3c from CC Link The FX3G connected to the FX3U 64CCL can be accessed via CC Link from the FX master station FX3U 16CCL M and Q CPU Q mode master local station when GX Works2 is used Accessing permits read write verify device batch monitoring and device test The communication path of CC Link is illustrated as follows For details refer to the manual of GX Works2 or GX Developer 1 The path when accessing from the FX3u 16CCL M FX3G UONnOnpoJjU NO UT a D a2 Zz oO oO 3o D v nD 2 PC GX Works2 jonpoud uononpoJu suoneoyiods I FX3G 2 The path when accessing from the master QCPU Q mode station oO PC master T D GX Works2 station m etc CC Li m ink E Qo 3 5 28 S FX3G T 0D Oc cO 3S 3 The path when accessing from a local QCPU Q mode station z amp 2 Q 8 master station ay m a CC Link m PC 9 GX Works2 etc o LER oS Q Pee FX3u 64CCL E QCPU local main unit j E mene station 1 Direct connection or connection using the GOT transparent mode E 43 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Uni
134. could be held either on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION e Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line As a guideline lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions 17 1 Outline When the internal power supplied from the FX3G Series PLC AC power supply type is insufficient for powering output extension blocks or special function blocks the FX3U 1PSU 5V extension power supply unit is available Only one FX3U 1PSU 5V unit may be connected to a FX3G PLC system Connect extension equipment to the FX3u 1PSU 5V according to the configuration specification limits described in Subsection 17 2 2 For the system configuration with FX3u 1PSU 5V refer to Chapter 6 For the mounting refer to Chapter 8 For the wiring refer to Chapter 9 284 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 17 Extension Power Supply Unit User s Manual Hardware Edition 17 2 Specifications 17 2 Specifications os 8 17 2 1 Generic Specifications The generic specifications are the same as those for the main unit 1 2 For the generic specifications refer to Section 4 1 O 17 2 2 Performance Specifications amp Items Specifications 1 3 Supply vo
135. d m co Bi O O zel lt S Q 157 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 6 Pulse width Pulse period measurement function Supported in Ver 1 10 or later 10 6 Pulse width Pulse period measurement function Supported in Ver 1 10 or later Four input points in the PLC main unit can be used for the pulse width period measurement function which enables measurement of the pulse width or pulse frequency in units of 10 us For details on programming refer to the programming manual 10 6 1 Allocation of special memories to input numbers Pulse width Pulse period Ring counter value for Ring counter value for Pulse width Input number Pulse period measurement rising edge falling edge Pulse period 2 measurement flag mode in units of 1 6us in units of 1 61s in units of 1015s X000 M8076 M80800 D8075 D8074 D8074 D8077 D8076 D8076 D8079 D8078 X001 M8077 sr ae D8080 a D8082 D8085 D8084 X003 M8078 a D8087 D8086 D8089 D8088 D8091 D8090 X004 M8079 M8083 D8093 D8092 D8095 D8094 D8097 D8096 1 Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN 2 The pulse width which can be measured is a minimum of 10 us and a maximum of 100 s The pulse period which can be measured is a minimum of 20 us and a maximum of 100 s 10 6 2 Cautions for pulse width period measurement function 1 Non overlap of input numbers The input terminals X000
136. display format for current values which appear at the Monitor Test screen RUN monitor 348 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 19 Operation Error Messages and Corrective Actions 19 19 Operation Error Messages and Corrective Actions SF F The following is a list of error messages which the system displays after an operation is performed 2 Relevant Menu Screen English Japanese Corrective Action This operation J 297 XYt 1 2 e All menus is protected 5 od ae Cancel the keyword then attempt the operation again by the keyword Id 9574NA E th Agy74 No keyword has been registered The keyword HLTA TRY Keyword cannot be registered from the display module A is not set programming tool such as GX Works2 etc is required to Keyword register keyword i comet X 7 V 7497 The entered Keyword does not match the registered 1 3 keyword Verify the registered keyword then enter the Keyword lt s correct keyword o gt O gt S aniteries PLC is running RUNT177 A Stop the PLC then attempt the operation again ie 4 i D o a c e Pasos XEYALY Ma Turn the memory cassette s write protected status to i e emory cassette transfer IET wilt soroteeted NIST A OFF then attempt the operation again 1 4 e Keyword 71 4l15 Fatal error I 7 l setting change For details refer to Subsection 19 19 1 ze al occurred Ayta S28 Memory cassette transfer 525
137. ds hy PAM I EOD REN ee ec eo I eee ne ere 287 TS RECTAL XOU eue en ce ee EM E LE ee ee ee 288 sits ay E B UA ea E eee ee ne a eee ee Ee Oe ee ae 288 iS ES TON o PREMIER mE 289 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents Uu oM S E pr c se 289 UMS PUT LIpilMT PH 290 XE MP en piper Manis 290 18 19 FX2N BA c 291 161210 FA UAC a E E LM I DM M E M ee 291 T ib 62 2 E CUNT PREMIERE RR E HEC ETERNI RR ERN 292 iom uM o vs BAD ae EE 292 1e Dd ES a oo Fas RV Be istas zone o reet eee eer eee iu tota eee eee ee T EIE 293 Ws F202 TOC FV Ree cre te ee ea ee oe er UL CIN en rene IS E 293 VO 5 PAINS 2 CCL 6 te arin ee ts Ae ba Se ey AV ohh fa hee A eh HM A 294 16 17 10 F X9U DA C GI sesso ane teh r dutieee sette as M E ics dataset 294 18 1AT wc 04 Lao Dc Pee oor ie rene ee eee ee EU LIUM NI NM dA 295 10 2 Speca l Adapers acai eco ese sa podeis ke aad ses bisa arco eee eed DEI M LUE EE 296 ko Bae Me 4610 7 7 2 6 rr 296 19 2 2 PKU AD RA DC cR 296 19 2 3 8 OPA LE 296 19 2 4 RASU MAD SPTQW SADE eatem eue ie teen ipe eor sell ab otic ntes Yous acutae d ead oru o De terbeudetev sut aur iet 297 18 2 5 FX3U AAD PNK ADP ccccccccccceeeccceceeceeceaseeceeeeueeceseaeeceeesseece
138. eo E O O zel lt S Q 153 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 4 Input Interruption I00L7 to 1500 10 4 Input Interruption 1000 to 1500 The PLC main unit is provided with an input interruption function and has six interruption input points Make sure that the ON duration or OFF duration of interruption input signals is 10us or more X000 X001 X003 and X004 or 50us or more X002 and X005 For details on programming refer to the programming manual 10 4 1 Allocation of pointers to input numbers input signal ON OFF duration Interrupt pointer Input number Interruption on Interruption on Interrupt disable control ON or OFF duration of input signal leading edge trailing edge X000 1001 000 M8050 10us or more X001 1101 1100 M8051 X002 1201 1200 M8052 50us or more X003 1301 I300 M8053 10us or more X004 1401 1400 M8054 X005 1501 1500 M8055 50us or more 10 4 2 Cautions for input interruption 1 Non overlap of input numbers The input terminals X000 to X005 can be used for high speed counter input interruption pulse catch SPD ZRN and DSZR instructions and general purpose inputs Take care not to overlap the input numbers 2 Cautions in wiring It is recommended to use shielded twisted pair cables for connection cables FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 4 Input
139. extension unit FX2N 32ET ESS UL FX2N A8ET ESS UL Transistor output source KR ME 194 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 4 Seven Segment with Latch SEGL Instructions FNC74 BCD Instructions FNC18 13 4 Seven Segment with Latch SEGL Instructions FNC74 BCD Instructions FNC18 13 4 1 When SEGL instructions are used This subsection gives examples of wiring for displaying the current value of D100 on the 4 digit 7 segment display 1 Main unit Example of program M8000 SEGL D100 Y010 Example of wiring 1 In the case of sink wiring When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor sink type in the used main unit 7 segment display to be used for sink wiring in the case of transistor output Main unit Ex FX3G 40MT ES Transistor output sink je 10 Use a 7 segment display with a latch and a built in BCD decoder 2 In the case of source wiring When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor source type in the used main unit 7 segment display to be used for source wiring in the case of transistor output Main unit Ex FX3G 40MT ESS PLC 7 segment display Transistor output source La 10 Use a 7 segment display with a latch and a built in BCD decoder 195 SJojunoo wh peedg uDi e O O S Jo BuutM
140. for fitting in a suitable Equipment requirements and tests enclosure which meets the requirements of EN61131 2 2007 Models MELSEC FX2N series manufactured from July 1st 1997 FX2N x ER ES UL FX2N X ET ESS UL Where x x indicates 32 48 FX2N 16EYR ES UL from April 1st 1998 FX2N A8ER DS from August 1st 1998 FX2N 48ER UA1 UL from August 1st 2005 FX2N 8ER ES UL FX2N 8EYR ES UL from September 1st 2010 FX2N 8EYR S ES UL For the products above PLCs manufactured before March 31st 2002 are compliant with IEC 1010 1 from April 1st 2002 to April 30th 2006 are compliant with EN61131 2 1994 A11 1996 A12 2000 after May 1st 2006 are compliant with EN61131 2 2007 Standard Remark IEC1010 1 1990 Safety requirements for electrical A1 1992 equipment for measurement control The equipment has been assessed as a component for fitting in a suitable enclosure which meets the requirements of IEC 1010 and laboratory use 4 1990 A1 1992 General requirements EN61131 2 1994 Programmable controllers The equipment has been assessed as a component for fitting in a A11 1996 Equipment requirements and tests suitable enclosure which meets the requirements of EN61131 A12 2000 2 1994 A11 1996 A12 2000 EN61131 2 2007 Programmable controllers The equipment has been assessed as a component for fitting in a Equipment requirements and tests suitable enclosure which meets the requirements of EN61131 2 2007 17 FX3G Series Programmable Cont
141. for fixing the memory cassette Two types of longer and shorter M3 tapping screws are packed together with the memory cassette Read carefully the installation method described in Section 21 3 and use the proper type Number of available units Only one memory cassette may be connected to a FX3G main units EEPROM memory writing count 10 000 writing operations are permitted at the EEPROM memory Precaution for file register D usage Writing to the flash memory occurs at each PLC operation cycle if BMOV instructions are used ina continuous execution format with regard to a file register To prevent this be sure to use pulse execution format BMOVP instructions Precaution for extended file register ER usage Do not use continuous constant execution RWER instructions with regard to extended file registers Use the individual instructions only when required Loader function when the display module is used together When the display module is used together the loader function is enabled by performing the transfer procedure in the display module Data is not transferred even if the transfer procedure is performed in the memory cassette For the data transfer procedure in the display module refer to Chapter 20 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 22 Battery User s Manual Hardware Edition 22 1 Battery Purpose 9jlesse2 NO AJowe 22 Battery STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS NWARNING Use
142. hole pitch 9 0 36 150 5 91 87 3 43 236 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 5 FX2N 32ER FX2N 48ER FX2N 48ER D FX2N 48ER FX2N 48ER D oz l i 4 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches T E e G QQQIAABDAAGAAI ES ES E GS ES 3 G3 IS 5 Ed Ed edd Es ES ES 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 63 63 5 a0000000000 Oooooooooooooooo mom 12 MITSUBISHI w d d V 294507 oln 07234567 Lu C POWER O LO 35 8 o o S8 WESSEPGMBER AG 99SSGGG 85685808 S vo gl L Y4 T Y6 n 0 2 T 71 5 T Y0 1 2 7a COMB 2 O UUUUUUUUUUU 5 Sy eS ES 9 eS E eS E Ke S e 3 e eS 9 3 CO c amp T N dus SOS s 69 G3 ES ES G3 9 9 69 63 ima m 172 6 78 mounting hole pitch 9 0 36 1 3 182 7 17 97 3 43 z 15 5 3 Terminal layout g FX2N 32ER I cod xo x2 X4 Xe X0 X2 X4 X6 gt ze O E o PL ENT 24 x1 x3 x5 x7 x1 x3 X5 x7 e PP a vol v2 valve vo v2 v4 Ye cow EE 2 oc FX2N 48ER 3 3 com xo X2 X4 X6 x0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 XE z E LN 244 X1 x3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 FX2N 48ER oms Soe BBO Yo Y2 YA Y6 YO Y2 Y4 Ye YO Y2 Y4 Y6 coms P FX2N A8ER D 1 T
143. inches 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch 90 3 55 WEE 4 0 16 9 0 36 87 3 43 55 2 17 e MASS Weight 0 3kg 0 66lbs Installation DIN rail of 35mm 1 38 in width or screws Accessories Label for indication of special unit block number Dust Proof sheet Manual supplied with product e Terminal block M3 screws for power supply terminal CC Link connection terminal M3 5 screws for CC Link connection terminal block mounting screws black The extension cable is already connected to the extension block FX3G Series Prog rammable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 1 Special Function Units Blocks 18 1 17 FX2N 64CL M o BD OQ D External Dimensions 2 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches A Q S E o o S FX2n 64CL M Mo 2N LO o OD fan oz 13 s E o Z ws 23 Ltt gJ t 4 0 16 cS 43 1 7 A e MASS Weight 0 15kg 0 33lbs I Installation DIN rail of 35mm 1 38 in width or screws Oo S o Accessories Label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product SF 7 The connector for CC Link LT interface is on the front face of the product X The extension cable is already connected to the extension block peJeMod adnoandu OQ spun uoisuejx3 uda 490 UOISU9 X3 ndinoandu C N E
144. input 3 For switching high speed counter function Device No Description X Reference M8388 ETT tor ohangining Highspeed coumen Changes the function of high speed counter function M8392 Function Function switching devices devices Switches the function of C248 and C253 the function of C248 and C253 Subsection 11 9 2 M8395 Function olco J devices ELI the function of C254 Subsection 11 9 2 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of High speed Counters User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 10 Cautions on Use 11 9 2 Function switching switching of allocation and functions of input terminals When the counters C248 C253 and C254 are combined with the following special auxiliary relays the allocation of the input terminals and functions are changed Program the special auxiliary relays just before the counters Counter No Function switching method Details of change M8388 T C248 OP KOOO e Reset input is not given M8388 T C253 OP KOOO Reset input is not given M8388 18395 The input count 2 phase 2 count changes as follows Phase A Changes from X000 to X006 C254 OP KOOQO Phase B Changes from X001 to X007 C254 Reset input is not given Start input is not given 11 10 Cautions on Use For programming details refer to the Programming Manual e Ifthe operation of a high speed counter is triggered by a device such as a switch the counter may malfunction due to ext
145. list the display jumps to the end of the device No list Input X Output Y Auxiliary relay M Scrolls the display screen downward Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed State S scrolling If pressed again at the end of the device No list the display jumps to the beginning of the device No list All devices except x OK Switches to the test mode when hold for 1 second or longer 316 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 6 Monitor Test Mode 19 6 3 Monitor screen and status display Refer to Section 19 18 for the procedure used to display the current values as hexadecimal values 1 Data register D 16 bit extended register R 16 bit extended file register ER 16 bit Display Content D1001 D1002 D1003 Device No 1 2 Current value 4 Display Content Device No 1 Upper 16 bit device No odd number Lower 16 bit device No even number 2 Current value File register D The file register D current value cannot be directly monitored at the display module 3 Timer T Display Content 1 Device No Contact image 4 2 loc m OFF Blank 5 Reset image 3 oN m OFF Blank 4 Current value 5 Setting value 1 When not using it in a program a setting value is displayed as 317 SJojunoo wh peedg uBi Buum nding NS 10 bu
146. mA mA c MEN DO EN Input output EN extension x 000 UR block cU JEN 5 5 pou Cea cn rr RN the extension pe qu 9 unit Special i A EM unit block ER rr E rr ZUDEM NNI ee Calculate the totals Capacity of built in power supply Number of Power supply er Type Power supply for Enter the products 86 Number of I O occupied points points FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 7 Expansion of Extension Power Supply Unit FX3U 1PSU 5V 1 Input output occupied points by special function blocks are excluded 2 For the input extension block including the FX2N 8ER ES UL and FX2N 8ER it is not necessary to calculate the current consumption of the internal 24V DC Include the input extension block in calculation for the nearest main unit or input output powered extension unit located on the upstream side to the extension power supply unit When the main unit is on the upstream side refer to Subsection 6 5 1 and Subsection 6 5 2 When the input output powered extension unit is on the upstream side refer to Subsection 6 6 1 and Subsection 6 6 2 3 A maximum of 8 special function units blocks are connectable including the main unit and the input output powered extension unit UONnOnpoJjU NO SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee OO Determine whether the devices can be added to the exten
147. machinery operation in such a case Note that when an error occurs in a relay triac or transistor output device the output could be held either on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION e Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line As a guideline lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to peripheral device connectors Failure to do so may result in wire damage breakage or PLC failure INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS NWARN N G e Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product 98 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Use the product within the generic environment specifications described in Section 4 1 of this manual Never use the product in areas with excessive dust oily smoke conductive dusts corrosive gas salt air CI2 H2S SO2 or NO2 flammable gas vibration or impacts or expose it to high temperature condensation or rain and wind If the product is us
148. measurement data measurement data Ch4 temperature Ch4 temperature Ch4 temperature D 8293 measurement data measurement data measurement data D 8294 Averaging time for Ch1 Averaging time for Ch1 Averaging time for Ch1 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 D 8295 Averaging time for Ch2 Averaging time for Ch2 Averaging time for Ch2 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 D 8296 Averaging time for Ch3 Averaging time for Ch3 Averaging time for Ch3 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 D 8297 Averaging time for Ch4 Averaging time for Ch4 Averaging time for Ch4 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 Model code PT K20 i D 8299 PTW K21 Model code K10 Model code K11 408 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers Appendix B Instruction List User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix B 1 Basic Instructions 9jlesse2 NO JOUJOJN h Appendix B Instruction List Appendix B 1 Basic Instructions N apeg NO Mnemonic Function Mnemonic Function Contact Instruction Out Instruction LD Initial logical operation contact type NO normally open OUT Final logical operation type coil drive A LDI Initial logical operation contact type NC normally closed SET SET Bit device latch ON LDP Initial logical operation of Rising edge pulse RST RESET Bit device OFF zz LDF Initial logical operation of Falling trailing edge pulse PLS Rising edge pulse as AND Serial connection of NO normally open contacts PLF Falling trailing edge pulse Ss ANI Serial connection
149. of NC normally closed contacts Master Control Instruction Lo ANDP Serial connection of Rising edge pulse MC Denotes the start of a master control block ANDF Serial connection of Falling trailing edge pulse MCR Denotes the end of a master control block OR Parallel connection of NO normally open contacts Other Instruction ORI Parallel connection of NC normally closed contacts NOP No operation or null step S ORP Parallel connection of Rising edge pulse End Instruction Ur ORF Parallel connection of Falling trailing edge pulse END Program END I O refresh and Return to Step 0 Connection Instruction ANB Serial connection of multiple parallel circuits 530 on ORB Parallel connection of multiple contact circuits o 8 oz MPS Stores the current result of the internal PLC operations D MRD Reads the current result of the internal PLC operations 2 MPP Pops recalls and removes the currently stored result INV Invert the current result of the internal PLC operations D MEP Conversion of operation result to leading edge pulse Sua 2 zo MEF Conversion of operation result to trailing edge pulse 5 S S 8 EE x o o RS 3E 29g Appendix B 2 Step Ladder Instructions vos UN a S ge Mnemonic Function STL Starts step ladder RET Completes step ladder 409 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix B Instruction List Appendix B 3 Applied Instructions in Ascending Order of FNC Number
150. of the operation performed for the input relays X are not retained because the relays refresh input even while the PLC is in the stopped state They are updated according to the input terminal conditions 2 Since the current values may be changed according to MOV instruction in the program and the operation results the most recently obtained values are retained 8 Only display modules can change the current value by the extension file register test function 4 The current values of the file registers stored in the program memory cannot be monitored or tested on the display module 5 Change of timer and counter settings The settings of the timers T and counters C can be changed only when the timers are driven by the program 205 SJojunoo wh peeds y6 q Buum indno NS a 10 buum OO S E o 77 c o D a uny 1S9 eoueua ure N Bunoouse qnou pejewog jdnoandu Q1 sun uoisuejx3 s sy ojg UOISU9 X3 jd noandu C N yun A ddns Jewog UOISUS X3 co suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 3 Operation and Test Power ON and PLC Running 14 3 3 Program modification function The sequence program can be transferred while the PLC is running or in the stopped state
151. on the lower side will be used for the higher output numbers S S ciae With cover Without cover 9 Output indicator 3 3 K lamps E E LED lamps Rear line extension Lower connector numbers 19 Output indicator z E lamps B 3 LED lamps E 17 c Um SOX oO S p NS Higher E numbers co suondo pue sun 1X3 JOO eipojy A ejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 271 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 9 EX2N 8EYT ESS UL FX2N 16EYT ESS UL Transistor Output 16 9 3 External dimensions FX2N 8EYT ESS UL 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches FXoN 8EYT ESS POWER oTo 12 3 OOOO 4587 C000 90 3 55 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch FX2N 16EYT ESS UL 2 04 5 mounting holes _Unit mm inches 90 3 55 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch FXoi 16EYT 272 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 10 FX2N 8EYR FX2N 16EYR Relay Output 16 10 FX2N 8EYR FX2N 16EYR Relay Output oz 16 10 1 Product specifications The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications 1 2 Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications O For external wiring refer to the following chapters E Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring 1 Power supply specifications Item F
152. on the upstream side or from an input output powered extension unit on the upstream side of the extension power supply unit The extension power supply unit is available only when the main unit is a AC power supply type In the example above the input output powered extension unit supplies the power to extension blocks For details refer to 6 5 Expansion of Main Unit For details refer to 6 6 Expansion of FX2N Series I O Powered Extension Unit For details refer to 6 7 Expansion of Extension Power Supply Unit FX3U 1PSU 5V Other restrictions e Restrictions in the use of the FX3G 422 BD When connecting a device such as GOT which consumes an internal 5V DC to each of the RS 422 port built in the main unit and the FX3G 422 BD at the same time avoid continuous use of either device If both devices are used continuously their life may be shortened due to heat generation Configuration example 1 RS 422 port built in main unit GT1020LBL 5V DC type FX3G 422 BD GT1020LBL 5V DC type Avoid continuous use of two GT1020LBL 5V DC type units When connecting a device such as GOT which consumes an internal 5V DC to each of two FX3G 422 BD units connected to the 40 point 60 point type main unit avoid continuous use of either device If both devices are used continuously their life may be shortened due to heat generation Configuration example 2 When connecting the 40 point type main unit and two FX3G 422
153. or thicker Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems refer to section 9 3 Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product Connect the AC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to properly wire the FX3G Series main unit and FX2N FX3U Series extension equipment in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block European type in accordance with the following precautio
154. power 5 LO e D e WESEPPoHQER 799999399 EIS coM1 Yi Y3 TCO Y5 YZ TOON Y1 Y3 CONT Ye IL YT o UUUUUUUUUUU ADAAABAAOABAAOBAE 9 T N 3 3 9 29 ES 9 9 C9 EDI ES 9 23 1p 140 5 52 mounting hole pitch 150 5 91 230 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units 15 3 EX2N 32bR ES UL FX2N 48ER ES UL FX2N 48ER DS FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition w High Speed CNI Output Wiring Counters wD ab a D C a D O a 5 c a D C D N a D e Fl E d Cc E ean ES CoH ee OLH E B zz e boll oco ergi Po a CORY es TT ESO In o oo oO ie lY SE S8 o 59H X o Gc 5 5 Fer 2 2 t og 8 Q al OH d S 1 wW 2 z 3 ks z YU N St 3 LL C4 Wiring for q Various Uses 9 0 36 172 6 78 mounting hole pitch 15 3 3 Terminal layout wq Test Run Maintenance x Troubleshooting FX2N 32ER ES UL Input Output Powered Extension Units FX2N 48ER ES UL CO Input Output Extension zm Blocks Er 0 m us LLI OO ef S fa Iw Extension Power Supply E Unit U Q x LLI OO Y Z N gt lt fa FX2N 48ER DS CO Other Extension Display Module Units and E Options E C Terminal Block N 231 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware
155. prevent malfunctions caused by chattering of the input contact and noise from S the input line There is a delay of approx 10ms in response to input switching from ON to OFF and from OFF to ON 9 Change of filter time lt X000 to X007 have digital filters and the filter time can be changed in increments of 1ms in the range from 0 ae o Q S Cog O O zel lt S Q to 15ms through special data register D8020 When 0 is specified for the time the input filter values are set as shown in the following table Input number Input filter value when 0 is specified X000 X001 X003 X004 10us X002 X005 X006 X007 50us 143 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 2 24V DC input Sink and source input type 3 Input sensitivity The PLC input current and input sensitivity are shown in the following table When there is a series diode or resistance at the input contact or there is a parallel resistance or leakage current at the input contact wire the terminals in accordance with the following table For the instructions for connecting input devices refer to Subsection 10 2 2 Item X000 to X007 X010 to max input number of the main unit Input voltage AC power supply type 24V DC 10 DC power supply type 20 4V to 28 8V DC Input sensitivity current EON 1 5mA or less 1 5mA or less 10 2 2 Instructions for connecting input devices 1 In the case of no voltage con
156. prohibited in the AC power supply type main unit due to restrictions in connection described in Section 6 5 Enter the current supply specification of the extension power supply unit The output current of the extension power supply unit is proportional to the ambient temperature as shown by the derating curve below Enter the output current value based on this derating curve Also verify that the number of occupied input output points from input output extension block s connected to the extension power supply unit is less than 32 Derating curve Output current A m 5V DC e Co I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I rer T 40 55 Ambient temperature C Capacity of built in power supply of built in power supply Number of Power supply classification Enter the specifications for the products to be added Classification connected Type 5V DC power Power supply BENE units internal 24V DC supply mA ET A With built in Extansion FX3U 1PSU 5V power supply power supply unit Connectable I O occupied points points Enter the data on the input output extension blocks and special function units blocks to be con nected to the input output powered extension unit and calculate the current For the data on the number of input output occupied points and current consumption of each type refer to Section 6 8 classification Classification connected 5V WW power internal 24V DC units WW
157. rail width 35 mm 1 38 or direct installation 3 Output specifications Transistor output type FX2N 8EYT ESS UL FX2N 16EYT ESS UL 8 points 16 points Vertical terminal block M3 screws Transistor source output 5 to 30V DC Photo coupler insulation Activation of the photo coupler will light the LED indicator lamp on panel 0 5A point The total load current per common should be as follows 4 output points common 0 8A or less e 8 output points common 1 6A or less 12W 24V DC The total of inductive loads per common terminal should be the following value 4 output points common terminal 19 2W or less 24V DC e 8 output points common terminal 38 4W or less 24V DC 0 1mA 30V DC 0 2ms or less for 200mA at 24V DC 0 2ms or less for 200mA at 24V DC A common number applies to the LJ of V FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 9 FX2N 8EYT ESS UL FX2N 16EYT ESS UL Transistor Output 16 9 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement QI FX2N 8EYT ESS UL a With cover Without cover 1 2 O E FX2N 8EYT ESS z CO POWER Output Rear line I Q 5655 indicator extension 990 lamps connector LED lamps 1 3 rls lt aaf T ea c a cS wn D 6 I EE S29 292 FX2N 16EYT ESS UL 15 When an output Y number is assigned 8 points on the upper side will be used for the lower output numbers Mam and 8 points
158. ro oue i D 8403 3 Subnet mask High order Receive sum received data vaT D RS2 FNC 87 ch2 D 8404 3 Default router IP Address Low order E E 3 Receive sum calculated result D 8405 3 Default router IP Address High order S D 8436 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Send sum D 8406 CYPRUS EM 2 8 Missed D18407 Connection condition of the Ethernet i E 1 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP D port 3 J 7 39 T MODBUS communication ch1 D 8408 AEE A VRON z F lor 2 ES PYP Conan an a E D 8409 3 Communication timeout time 58 p h D 8401 D 8410 Connection forcible nullification a m 2 H n D 8403 Error details M8403 D 8412 to D 8414 Host MAC address p D 8405 2 Communication format display D 8416 2 Model code D 8406 i D 8417 Error code of the Ethernet adapter D Li i deii cud Dn D 8408 Current retry value B D 8419 3 Operation mode 12 i l D 8409 Slave response timeout i 3 Supported in Ver 2 00 or later D 8410 2 Turn around delay D 8411 2 Message to message delay D 8412 Number of retries jer D 8414 Slave node address peas to OA ete i 401 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 Number and nare Content of register ing special device FX3U ENET ADP ch2 D 8420 IP Address Low order D 8421 IP Addre
159. s Manual Hardware Edition 19 5 Menu Structure 19 5 Menu Structure T Title screen MELSEC F FX3G Series Operation keys OK Press the OK button lt ESC _ Press the ESC button Ver 1 10 Buum nding N A 4 The button are used to move the cursor and switch between display l screens Approx 1 5 secs Top screen Time display ah Menu screen 1 3 Eon P Monitor Test _OK mD 16bit iE 01 10 08 ESC ESC DD 32bit cg 23 59 59 Wed T P C E R 16bit 14 Switched by system information setting DR 32bit 3 S2 l1 ER 16bit 328 Specified device monitor screen DER 32bit 88 X X010 34567 Y 15 M 38 T S 25S Specified sae C Display example uda P ErrorCheck ErrorCheck No errors 490 UOISU9 X3 ndinoandu C C Um B LANGUAGE LANGUAGE Se 5 o 25 Japanese oS FP English oo Contrast suondo pue sun UOISUS X3 JOUIO P ClockMenu UJ 62 nos D lt o D Current time Clock Setting 2 yoojg jeuuue CO 313 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM 19 5 Menu Structure 22 Keyword gt Cassette 314 Display example The Keyword is not set Display example OK Memory Cassette lt ESC _ BRB Cassette PLC Cassette PLC FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM Use
160. screen time as eee display press ESC m Englishz 2 Use the buttons to move the cursor to English To cancel the operation and return to the menu screen press ESC Button Operation Description ESC Cancels the operation and returns to the menu screen Moves the cursor upward Moves the cursor downward OK Registers the selected display language and returns to the menu screen 3 Press OK to register the selected display language and return to the menu screen 19 8 3 D8302 changes by program and related devices Selections made at this menu are saved at D8302 A Language setting of 1 is specified at factory default D8302 changes by user program can also be specified D8302 1 Current Value Display Language When the display language is set to Japanese KO Japanese M8002 Other English 1 Latch device 324 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 9 Contrast 19 9 Contrast The liquid crystal display contrast setting is specified at the Contrast menu Selections made at this menu are saved at D8302 A contrast setting of 0 is specified at factory default 1 At the menu screen use the buttons to move the cursor to the Contrast item then press OK to display the contrast Contrast adjustment screen To cancel the operation and return to the top screen time display press ESC 2 Use the
161. screws for installation of board Side cover Manual supplied with product RS 422 MINI DIN 8 pin female 301 SJojunoo wh peedg uDi Buum nding N 10 buum OO Ses snoueA I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1S9 peJeMod adnoandu OQ spun uoisuejx3 uda 490 UOISU9 X3 ndinoandu C E U o D CD c xe i lt UOISU9 X3 suondo pue shun xg euo ainpoyy Aedsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO FX3G Series Prog rammable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 3 Expansion Board 18 3 5 FX3G 485 BD External Dimensions Unit mm inches 51 2 2 02 Terminal Layout S S S R R GIDIDIDD BIA BJA Terminal resistance setting switch o o D N 1100 OPEN 3300 18 3 6 FX3G 485 BD RJ MASS Weight Approx 20g 0 05lbs Two M3x8 tapping screws for installation of board Side cover Label for indication of link station number 2 types Manual supplied with product Accessories Terminal block European type Terminal resistance 330 0 1 1020 built in 302 External Dimensions Unit mm inches gt MITSUBISHI L 2PAIR 1100 S Stein foret Oo e RS 485 Se ell LB MN eo 1 12 0 4 0 48 35 1 38 Terminal Layout Pi
162. seJnjee OO uononpoJu jonpoud suoneoyiods I oO seone Jeyeudueg pue uoISJ9A wasis CO uoneJn6ijuo N SON UN SON jndinondu uonejeisu OO BULA A ddng Jamod ue uonesedaid h Buum ndu CO p FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 2 Features and Part Names User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 2 Names and Functions of Parts When the top covers are open 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Peripheral device connecting connector USB Peripheral device connecting connector RS 422 RUN STOP switch Variable analog potentiometers Optional equipment connector1 Optional equipment connector2 40 points 60 points type only Battery connector Battery holder Optional equipment connecting screw holes2 2 places 40 points 60 points type only Optional equipment connecting screw holes1 2 places 10 9 Connect a programming tool PC to program a sequence For details on applicable peripheral devices refer to Chapter 5 Connect a programming tool to program a sequence For details on applicable peripheral devices refer to Chapter 5 To stop writing batch of the sequence program or operation set the switch to STOP slide it downward To start operation run the machine set it to RUN slide it upward Two variable analog potentiometers are built in Upper side VR1 Lower
163. send processing Computer link ch2 D8427 Miss On demand error flag D8428 Computer link ch2 dies M 8429 On demand Word Byte changeover RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Time out check flag n Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP or when RS2 instruction ch2 is OFF MODBUS communication ch1 M 84032 diera communication error D8403 meo o MBA Notused n M e470 MODBUS communication ch2 M 84232 Mitre communication error D8423 peaa o Mear Notused Lla a m e430 MODBUS communication ch1 ch2 M 8411 2 Supported in Ver 1 30 or later MODBUS configuration request flag Correspond Number and i Operation and function ing special name device FX3U ENET ADP ch1 ios M 8407 to M 8410 FX3U ENET ADP ch2 ieas M 8427 to M 8430 3 Supported in Ver 2 00 or later 4 Used when the SNTP function setting is set to Use in the time setting parameters Error Detection M18430 to VIB437 M 8438 Serial communication error 2 ch2 D8438 M18439 to MBAR M 8449 Special block error flag D8449 M18450 1o MIBAES Positioning DSZR FNC150 ZRN FNC156 M 8464 instructions YOOO D8464 Clear signal device specification function enabled DSZR FNC150 ZRN FNC156 instructions YOO 1 MEOS Clear signal device specification pentes function enabled DSZR FNC150 ZRN FNC156 M 8466 instructions YOO2 D8466 Clear signal device specification function enabled
164. set in a general purpose data register however the display screen protect function can be canceled by turning the power off then on again 346 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 17 Operation Button ON OFF Information 19 17 Operation Button ON OFF Information Operation button ON OFF information can be monitored at the system information system signal 2 MA A 4 to MA A 7 while the PLC is running Various applications of this function are described below Refer to Section 19 13 for system information setting 19 17 1 Various applications 1 Operation button function checks The programming tool can be used to monitor the system information s system signal 2 operation button ON OFF information to verify that operation buttons are functioning properly 2 Specified device monitor function device changes Devices handled in the specified device monitor function can be changed over by using both the specified device monitor display status and operation button ON OFF information in the system information system signal 2 Refer to Section 19 14 for the specified device monitor function setting procedure 19 17 2 System information operation button ON OFF information 1 System signal 1 System signal 1 has no system information related to this function 2 System signal 2 System Information Status Description ESC button is presse
165. side VR2 Connect the expansion board and memory cassette to the connector Connect the expansion board display module and memory cassette to the connector Connect the optional battery to the connector This holder accommodates the optional battery These holes are designed to secure the expansion board and memory cassette with Screws These holes are designed to secure the expansion board and memory cassette with Screws When the terminal block covers are open 1 2 3 4 5 32 1 Power supply terminal Terminal block mounting screws Input X terminals Output Y terminals Terminal cover MITSUBISHI MELSEC Connect the power supply to the main unit If the main unit must be replaced loosen the screws slightly loosen the left and right screws and the upper part of the terminal block can be removed For anchoring of the terminal block refer to Subsection 9 1 2 Wire switches and sensors to the terminals Wire loads contactors solenoid valves etc to be driven to the terminals A protective terminal cover refer to the following drawing is fitted to the lower stage of each terminal block The cover prevents fingers from touching terminals thereby improving safety pue FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 2 Features and Part Names User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 2 Names and Functions of Parts A 2 2 2 Sides 5 a o Q c 2 o 2
166. sra 2 X2 NOTING 315 pX35 X7 X4 KAS j 1 EN XO x2 x X6 xtoprz tapcre xoo x22 px2a 2e xao pxa2 xoa pa xao x42 FX3G 60MR ES FX3G 60MT ES T ez ov vo v1 v2L v4 vel roa ae z Tv29lv22 TY241v29L a onl conifoone Y3 Joona Y5 Y Ew t jv cows 1 7 oomely2 vzs oom v2s FX3G 60MT ESS i a DC power supply type 2 FX3G 60MR DS FX3G 60MT DS p Teo l ae Ez oe pae roz ae 8 COMO COM1 COM2 Y3 coma Y5 Y7 CON4IY111Y13 COMSIY15 Y FX3G 60MT DSS 1 0 3 55 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 1 Version Information 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability 5 1 Version Information 5 1 1 Manufacturer s serial number check method The year and month of production of the product can be checked on the name plate and on the front of the product 1 Checking the nameplate The year and month of production of the product can be checked from the manufacturer s serial number S N indicated on the label adhered to the right side of the product Example nameplate manufacturer s serial number 1010001 MITSUBISHI P Covradtten MODEL FX3c 40MT ES Right side 100 240VAC 50 60Hz 37W OUT 5 30VDC S N 11010001 sh MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION Actual product nameplate differs from the example shown above
167. te c UE 235 15 52 External GIMEM SIONS fes cen cent Doe eraot a sa ondas amd oodd vex vE evt Rape quam O tallo qu aE Rd uptey du este 236 15 53 Terminal LAYOUT scr mode cidem brote dbi oa eal de e E a a a ga E pde o RE Ea 237 15 6 FX2N 32ET FX2N 48ET EX2NE 49ET D 2 rrr borea Orem d bbc ha Y Ec Ee bon eet cda 238 15 6 1 Product specifications 2 slsssssssesssssessssseseseeene nennen nnn nnne nnn snna nsn sa sr sana sers rn 238 19 0 2 External ditrieFislOFiS coats cstetiuao used a Sige sachs alacant gin mana toga causa ambe eR se OU e tan Uo d qn EROR IE 239 1503 Terminal er T M 240 157 FAN cece Carn mone mua dde cu vatur e tota Pam en OE 241 15 4 Product specications eiin a es eee ie andl tai tsi Ich a dad EL ete 241 197 2 External CIMENSIONS aceite ee os ae to entice Bo E DE I DI MALE P LUE 242 USES MOMMA Al AY OUT te 242 15 9 FXA2NASER A Me iet sate duet UD a Get uve Gat aang ith slants s ai DU Dar e Teale See Ge Qc DR Oe Gv aie 243 15 01 PNOGUCUSDCCIICALIONS eU 243 19 9 2 EXEef tial CIMOENSIONS oc eoetccue ctio Oe e eoe a a eet edie d of a eae eva eet 244 15 95 93 Temnallayoul codec nobts too b otia cele Ld eodd on to iod ouf et as to eee stunde ee eer 244 16 Input Output Extension Blocks 245 jo DUUE eeepc ne reece ane it a ee ee Y 246 15 14 Product COMMOGUMALION Sct net ie lhe e es ee tinto du Oe ane nia ccs es 246 10 12 Frode ta c Gee eee Se
168. terminal 72W or less 24V Inductive load N So Open circuit D p 0 1mA 30V DC Os leakage current S Res orrFOoN 0 2ms or less 24V DC 0 3ms or less 24V DC ponse time OFF2ON 1 5ms or less 24V DC 4ms or less 24V DC Output element s oo 9S9 ON voltage S d Circuit isolation Photo coupler isolation T zi n operation Activation of the photo coupler will light the LED indicator lamp on panel indicators poner NM 2 7W 112mA 24V DC 1 consumption D 5 w o 5 77 pes e lt Oo 2 e D 1 This response time does not include the response delay at the PLC yoo g jJeuiuJe 369 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 8 FX 16EYT TB FX 16EYT H TB 20 8 2 370 Internal circuit Photo y coupler L 9 4 to 39kO0 CSF r Photo 1 coupler Bub T Photo 4 A coupler y 4 HT 3 3kO gt LL mmm LCN Pa coupler ay O00 to 0017 Lower numbers A AO to AA7 Higher numbers O00 12 3 004 5 6 7 440 1 2 3 444 5 6 7 PLC output No o00 1 2 3 004 5 6 7 440 1 2 3 444 567 Photo coupler power supply Hh For the FX 16EYT H TB the output transistor elements are as shown in the figure below 20 Terminal Block FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 8 FX 16EYT TB FX 16EYT H TB 20 8 4 External wiring precautions SF Bo OQ D 1 Protection circ
169. terminal block El z Accessing the other station from CC Link is used 2 USB A connector FJUSB cable Refer to Subsection 3 2 4 Refer to Subsection 3 2 2 1 0 When FX 232AW or FX 232AWC is used the communication baud rate is 19 200 bps or less E n S For details refer to Subsection 3 2 3 41 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 3 Introduction of Products User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 2 Connector Types and Cables for Program Communication 3 2 1 Programming tool The following programming tools support FX3G Series PLCs Model name Description Version 1 07H or later of SWODNC GXW2 J supports the FX3G Version 1 08J or later of SWODNC GXW2 E supports the FX3G Version 8 72A or later of SWOD5C GPPW J and SWLID5C GPPW E supports FX3G GX Works2 GX Developer Although the tool earlier than version 8 72A can be used for programming by selecting FX1N C restrictions will be made on programming FX 30P FX 30P From first version supports FX3G PLCs Ver 1 10 or later For more information refer to 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability 3 2 2 Communication cables Model name Description USB cable 3m USB A plug lt USB Mini B plug 1 Concave 9 10 For connection between personal computer and FX3G programming port USB RS 232C cable E ESSE 3m D SUB 9Pin lt gt D SUB 25Pin PARAG AB 9 10 For connection between personal computer and
170. the case of sink wiring When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor sink type in the used main unit IN ZN ZN AN AX ZIN ZA AN A AN ZN AN A AY AA AN 8 Main unit Ex FX3G 40MT ES Digital switch of BCD 0 1A 50V diode is necessary 2 In the case of source wiring When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor source type in the used main unit Digital switch of BCD 0 1A 50V gt W VV v VY VV WV V VV WV VY VV V diode is ea necessary ARA RT an na a a a 8 Main unit Ex FX3G 40MT ESS 188 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 2 Digital Switch DSW Instructions FNC72 BIN Instructions FNC19 2 Main unit input output powered extension unit block oz Example of program 32 do D M8000 Example of wiring 1 In the case of sink wiring When the main unit and a transistor output sink type input output powered extension unit block are used O O S Digital 10 10 switch of BCD 0 1A 50V Pix A A A K A A A KA A A K A A A o8 diode is BM CUN F ay DER SERT ET OMNE QUU IT EP SIUE cS necessary Eee e AR d 2 zm IARE p LR Md d I I 2 8 COM 24 X M E S29 Input output powered extensi
171. the main unit is the AC power supply type FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 2 Rules of System Configuration Connection restriction and calculation of current consumption The number of points and number of units connected are restricted by the number of extension blocks connected to the main unit The built in power supply of the input output powered extension unit and extension power supply unit supplies the power to a unit block board extended to the corresponding unit The built in power supply refers to the 24V DC service power supply 5V DC power supply and internal 24V DC power supply The consumed power varies depending on the type of extended unit block board Input output powered extension unit Extension block Extension Extension block some blocks can power supply some blocks can be connected unit be connected Extension block Main unit some blocks can be connected Special Expansion adapter board Power supply Power supply Power supply from Power supply from from main unit from main unit input output powered extension power extension unit j supply unit j Refer to Section 6 4 Refer to Section 6 5 Refer to Section 6 6 Refer to Section 6 7 1 When connecting an input extension block on the downstream side of an extension power supply unit supply the power to the input extension block from the nearest main unit
172. to 16000 steps or less usinga Mis parameter sS The extension mode is selected when the program capacity is set to 16001 steps or more using a parameter For parameter settings refer to the Programming Manual 1 0 4 Supported in Ver 1 10 or later a 51 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 6 External Dimensions Weight Accessories Installation 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units 4 6 External Dimensions Weight Accessories Installation The external dimensions of the main unit are explained 4 6 1 Main units 2 04 5 mounting holes Y14 Y16 Y15 YT 82 3 23 mounting hole pitch O J W1 mounting hole pitch Series Model name FX3G 14MLI FX3G 24MLI FX3G 40MLI FX3G 60MLI FX3G 14MR ES FX3G 14MT ES FX3G 14MT ESS FX3G 14MR DS FX3G 14MT DS FX3G 14MT DSS FX3G 24MR ES FX3G 24MT ES FX3G 24MT ESS FX3G 24MR DS FX3G 24MT DS FX3G 24MT DSS FX3G 40MR ES FX3G 40MT ES FX3G 40MT ESS FX3G 40MR DS FX3G 40MT DS FX3G 40MT DSS FX3G 60MR ES FX3G 60MT ES FX3G 60MT ESS FX3G 60MR DS FX3G 60MT DS FX3G 60MT DSS 1 Accessories Dust proof protection sheet Manual supplied with product 2 Installation 35mm 1 38 wide DIN rail or Direct installation 52 m W mm inches W1 mm inches MASS weight kg Ibs 90 3 55 90 3 55 130 5 12 175 6 89 Unit mm inche
173. to 20 and connect the wires directly Remove the coating from the solid wire and connect the wire Two electric wires directly e Bar terminal with insulating sleeve recommended product Al 0 5 8WH Phoenix Contact e Caulking tool CRIMPFOX 6 Phoenix Contact CRIMPFOX 6T F 2 Phoenix Contact 0 22 to 0 25 Nem 0 3 to 0 5 mm Bar terminal with AWG22 to 20 insulating sleeve Refer to the following outline drawing of bar terminal 1 Old model name CRIMPFOX ZA 3 2 Old model name CRIMPFOX UD 6 Treatment of electric wire ends Treat the ends of stranded wires and solid wires without coating or using bar terminals with insulating sleeve Tighten the terminals to a torque of 0 22 to 0 25 Nem Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above mentioned range Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions Treatment of stranded wires and solid wires without coating e Stranded wire solid wire Twist the ends of stranded wires tightly so that loose wires will not stick out alii k Do not solder plate the electric wire ends 9mm e Treatment using bar terminal with insulating sleeve 0 36 It may be difficult to insert the electric wire into the insulating sleeve e Bar terminal with insulating sleeve depending on the thickness of the electric wire sheath Select the Insulating sleeve Contact area electric wire referring to the outline drawing Crimp area Referenc
174. warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases a Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design b Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user c When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a users device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided d Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced e Relay failure or output contact failure caused by usage beyond the specified Life of contact cycles f Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage g Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment
175. 0 FX 10DM SETO FX 10DU Not available and program sizes available in the FX1N and FX1NC PLCs For applicable models refer to the GOT manual Not available For connection using the 2 port interface function refer to Section 5 5 Not available The following restriction applies when connected Contents of restrictions Not available Programming is enabled only in the function ranges such as instructions device ranges and program sizes available in the FX1N and FX1NC PLCs For supported models and device ranges refer to the FX 10DM USER S MANUAL JY992D86401 The following restriction applies when connected Contents of restrictions Not available It is limited to the device range and function range supported by the highest class model FX1N or FX2N applicable in the product version For supported models and device ranges refer to the FX 10DU E FX 20DU E User s Manual JY992D54801 1 The F940GOT and ET 940 whose version is former than Ver 1 10 do not support the transparent 2 port function of the GX Developer FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 1 Configuration of a Whole System 6 Examination of System Configuration 6 1 Configuration of a Whole System The configuration of a whole system is shown below as an example Configuration of whole system Determination of number of Expansion board Special adapters Memory cass
176. 0 3 15 mounting hole pitch co suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 269 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 9 FX2N 8EYT ESS UL EX2N 16EYT ESS UL Transistor Output 16 9 FX2N 8EYT ESS UL FX2N 16EYT ESS UL Transistor Output 16 9 1 Product specifications 270 The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications For external wiring refer to the following chapters Item Product type Rated voltage Item MASS Weight Other Item Output Points Connection type Output unit type External power supply Output circuit insulation Indication of output operation Resistance load Max load Inductive load Open circuit leakage current Min load OFFON Response time Output circuit configuration ON OFF Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring 1 Power supply specifications FX2N 8EYT ESS UL FX2N 16EYT ESS UL FX2N extension block 24V DC supplied from main unit and input output powered extension unit 2 Weight and Other specifications External dimensions are described later FX2N 8EYT ESS UL FX2N 16EYT ESS UL 0 2kg 0 44lbs 0 3kg 0 66lbs The extension cable is already connected to the extension block Accessories Label for indication of input output number The DIN46277
177. 01 M8171 X002 M8172 50us or more X003 M8173 10us or more X004 M8174 X005 M8175 50us or more 10 5 2 Cautions for pulse catch 1 Non overlap of input numbers The input terminals X000 to X005 can be used for high speed counter input interruption pulse catch speed detection SPD instructions and general purpose input Take care not to overlap the input numbers 2 Cautions in wiring It is recommended to use shielded twisted pair cables for connection cables 156 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 5 Pulse Catch M8170 to M8175 10 5 3 Examples of external wiring It is recommended to use shielded twisted pair cables for connection cables Ground the shield of each shielded cable only on the PLC side UONnOnpoJjU 1 Examples of pulse catch M8170 wiring using X000 When another input terminal is used wire it according to the following diagrams NO 1 When 24V DC service power supply is used Fuse gp peeso aning G E S WEN Hed pue s ne 4 OO uononpoJu jonpoud suoneoyiods I The grounding resistance should be 100 or less oO 2 When 24V DC external power supply is used vyg Sink wiring Source wiring MT Q e Class D gro 6 On e S zh e3 EI A j The grounding resistance should be 100 or less SON IlUuf SON jndinondu uonejesu OO e py I D
178. 1 2 M g r i O For the dimensions of 2 each product refer to the 5 external dimensions 4 y i N Input output as oR D powered 5 OS S Extension cable extension units A 1 S FXON 65EC 5 i 2 G50mm 29 59 TT uL ui duc ee a 3 EXoN 30EC For the dimensions of each product 300mm 11 81 refer to the external dimensions 1 Including FX3U 1PSU 5V Vo 50mm 27 Qi s 9149q Jeyeudueg pue uoISJ9A 2 When an input output extension block or a special function block is connected at the top of the 2nd stage Special Connector Input output powered extension adapter Lo ll he on See blocks ye ees adapter wasis CO FX3G Series main unit UOISUS X4 uoneJn6ijuo j For the dimensions of each product refer to the external dimensions e o Pe co 2t D aa ea mei tee hg E DE eas O m iH m ZS o Input output 5 cA c o 9 5 powered i o5189 Q i its 22 Extension cable SO extension units i A o i A FXoN C65EC 0EAAA 0 0 0 1L 0 0 00 0o 7 v 03 650mm 25 59 For the dimensions of each product FXoN 30EC refer to the external dimensions 300mm 11 81 2 Except for the FX3U 4LC or FX2N 8AD gt 50mm 1 97 uonejeisu BULA A ddng Jamod ue uonesedaid h Buum ndu CO p 103 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 3 Examina
179. 1 oE T T Lo T 83 Month Example Dec Month Example Jan S 9 1 to 9 Jan to Sept 1 to 9 Jan to Sept Sc X Oct Y Nov Z Dec X Oct Y Nov Z Dec Year Example 2009 Year Example 2010 Last digit of year Last two digit of year 22 4 3 Special battery low voltage device amp notification program example Prepare a system which allows constant external monitoring of the battery status using an indicator lamp etc M8005 M8005 I 09D Y001 is output when a battery low voltage condition occurs Batt ery low voltage e M8006 Battery low voltage is latched e D8005 Battery voltage can be monitored 387 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 22 Battery User s Manual Hardware Edition 22 5 Battery Replacement 22 5 Battery Replacement Before replacing the battery Step 4 of the replacement procedure below must be performed within 20 seconds after step 3 or the memory content could be lost The FX3G 40MT ES is used as the main unit in this example Turn the power OFF Remove the top cover A in the right figure When the expansion board connector conversion adaptor or memory cassette remove it Remove the old battery Extract the old battery from the battery holder B and disconnect the battery connector C Install the new battery For the installation procedure refer to Subsection 22 3 1 Attach the top cover When the expansion board connector conv
180. 1st position i NS SL Bas y S NS a BD 2nd position Model name Expansion board Connector conversion adapter v FX3G CNV ADP Memory cassette i LM Display module LU O 1 Can be connected in either position only one device can be at one time 2 The memory cassette cannot be connected when the display module is connected to the BD 1st position 3 The display module cannot be connected when the memory cassette is connected to the BD 1st position 69 UONnOnpoJjU NO SOWeN ed pue seJnjee OO uononpoJu jonpoug suoneoyiods I Qi UO U D CD Cx en oO to zs o v pue uoISJ9A ueis s uoneJn amp ijuo N SON HUN SON jndinondu uonejesu OO Bulli A ddnsg Jamod ue uonesedaid h Buum ndu CO p FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 2 Rules of System Configuration 6 2 Rules of System Configuration 70 The system configuration must meet the following four requirements Number of input output points The total number of input and output points should be 256 or less in the whole system For details refer to 6 3 Number of Input Output Points and Maximum Number of Input Output Points Number of input output points on whole system Up to 256 points Input output Special di Expansion board Main unit extension function CC Link
181. 2 FNC 87 ch2 and Computer Link ch2 MODBUS communication ch2 D 8420 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 i D 8420 Communication format Communication format setting 22 i peor D 8424 Computer link ch2 DU Station number setting i D 8422 M8422 2 lt 5 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 D 2 Error detail M8423 1 8423 rror details D 8422 Remaining points of transmit data MEE D 8424 Error step numbe RS2 FNC 87 ch2 i D Monitoring receive data points D 8425 2 Communication format display D Pa D 8425 Communication parameter display i D 8427 Step number being executed zg ch2 e 2 Current retry value ee D 8426 iiis EE L CO Computer link ch2 D 8429 Slave response timeout S B D 8427 Specification of on demand head D 84307 Turn around delay IL device register D 84312 Message to message delay B Computer link ch2 M8426 to D 8428 Specification of on demand data M8429 D 8432 Number of retries 71 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 computer link E S D 8429 ch2 D 8434 Slave node address m Time out time setting D 8435 to D 8438 s R52 FORT NA ee Vidi Header 1 and 2 Default STX gt C 2 Supported in Ver 1 30 or later 3o RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Oo D 8431 a0 Header 3 and 4 FX3U ENET ADP ch1 ape RS2 FNC 87 ch2 3 IP Address Low order ete Terminator 1 and 2 lt Default ETX gt eee l a RS2 FNC 87 ch2 D 8401 5 IP Address High order Terminator 3 and 4 D 8402 Subnet mask Low order D D 8434
182. 2 elogran memenes wen Cane Built in EEPROM and optional memory cassette whose write protect switch is set to OFF a written in RUN mode GX Works2 Ver 1 08J or later GX Developer Ver 8 72A or later 256 steps or less after edition addition deletion including NOP immediately after circuit blocks except final circuit Number of program steps which can be written for GX Developer circuit change Ver 8 70Y or 127 steps or less after edition addition deletion including NOP in RUN mode former immediately after circuit blocks except final circuit FX PCS WIN E Circuit blocks in which labels P and are added deleted or changed in edited circuits Circuit blocks in which 1 ms timers T246 to T249 and T256 to T319 are added in edited circuits Circuit blocks in which the following instructions are included in edited circuits Instruction to output high speed counters C235 to C255 OUT instruction e TBL FNC152 instruction Circuit blocks which cannot be written in RUN mode 0p lt 27 D E uoneJn6ijuo 1 Circuit blocks cannot be edited to insert a label as shown below when written during RUN Step FNC 04 0 El C 2 Added deleted or changed SON Iluf SON jndinondu uonejesu OO FNC 06 Bloc Pointer for LED 9 interrupt Label is inserted by editing the circuit block a UD 1001 C gt 35 D o8 o9 C 2 Added deleted or changed mE Q FNC 03 1 0 IRET
183. 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement Input numbers X are assigned to the upper four points and output numbers Y are assigned to the lower four points With cover Without cover FX2N 8ER CD POWER Input indicator lamps LED lamps Output indicator lamps LED lamps Rear line extension connector Wem sali t uA 252 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 3 FX2N 8ER 24V DC Sink Input Relay Output 16 3 3 External dimensions oc o D 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches 2 12 O FXon 8ER o O moO C POWER lo p HE OD o zi 2 Q Oo E s eper o 5 5 Q E ee wn D 6 I Ex Oo amp Dn es Sy TE EN 090 2 erg O O S d Q Iu A gw O c gt Oo 2 oO Ooc 2 s a op 17 yu A ddng Jamod UOISU9 X3 co suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 253 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 4 FX2N 8EX ES UL FX2N 16EX ES UL 24V DC Sink Source Input 16 4 FX2N 8EX ES UL FX2N 16EX ES UL 24V DC Sink Source Input 16 4 4 Product specifications 254 1 The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications For external wiring ref
184. 2 digits of year data 0 to 99 i Year data for real time clock diui 0 Sunday to 6 Saturday Day of the week for real time clock data 2 Indicated value includes waiting time of constant scan operation when M8039 is activated Input Filter D 8020 Input filter adjustment D 8021 D 8022 D 8023 D 8024 D 8025 D 8026 D 8027 Index Register Z0 and VO Input filter value of X000 to X007 Default 10ms Not used D 8028 Value of ZO Z register D 8029 Value of VO V register 3 The values of Z1 to Z7 and V1 to V7 are stored in D8182 to D8195 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 Number and Correspond Content of register ing special name device Analog Volume and Constant Scan Value of analog volume Pies VR1 Integer from O to 255 i Value of analog volume DT VR2 Integer from 0 to 255 i 018032 o D8038 D 8039 Default 0 ms in 1 ms steps Writes from system ROM at power Constant scan ON M8039 duration l Can be overwritten by program Stepladder and Annunciator D 8040 1 ON state number 1 D 8041 1 ON state number 2 D 8042 ON state number 3 The smallest number out of active 5 state ranging from SO to S899 and D 8043 S1000 to 4095 is stored in D8040 ON state number 4 and the second smallest state M8047 D 8044
185. 2006 66 EC Article 20 Information for end users and Annex II for battery EU The symbol to the left indicates that batteries need to be disposed of separately from other wastes 30 e a Appendix E 2 Exportation precautions The new EU Battery Directive 2006 66 EC requires the following when marketing or exporting batteries and D or devices with built in batteries to EU member states sgy To print the symbol on batteries devices or their packaging 288 E To explain the symbol in the manuals of the products 3 5 g 1 Labelling To market or export batteries and or devices with built in batteries which have no symbol to EU member states on September 26 2008 or later print the symbol shown in the figure above on the batteries devices or their packaging 2 Explaining the symbol in the manuals To export devices incorporating Mitsubishi programmable controller to EU member states on September 26 2008 or later provide the latest manuals that include the explanation of the symbol If no Mitsubishi manuals or any old manuals without the explanation of the symbol are provided separately attach an explanatory note regarding the symbol to each manual of the devices POINT The requirements apply to batteries and or devices with built in batteries manufactured before the enforcement date of the new EU Battery Directive 2006 66 EC Appendix E 3 Regulated FX3G Series products 1 Included modules and
186. 3 Output extelmial wICIEYOs dear oie te Eo Rue ka teca ies ech eor rabie i ie en ose P uice dee ciii niae eee 362 2O FA TOE ull eM 363 200 1 CCI CAM OMS dinna a E A a m LA ott eee 363 20 6 2 IMEMA GIN CW asa E a a a a beat a a 364 20 6 3 Example of input external wiring esses nnne nennen nnne nnn nnns 364 UID Giszadpiiio T 365 PU ESe ole isacct M 365 20 2 dntermal clt Cul es enses pee ELM ILU E M MM IM M IM ee cree 366 20 7 3 Example of output external wiring cccccccssesececceeeeeeeccesseecceaeeececseaueeesseseeessaaeeeessuaesseeeess 366 20 74 External Wiring precatio S sui 5 recessed coute ne SE zucca ath duis ede ene od ate Loco Dea auno DUAL uu AR wits 367 20 7 95 Product life of relay COPI Leo S sucsctantamen aai dipR B EK oii agir Betitu supr aate a a cotone aad r 368 20 8 EX TOEY TB FX 16E Y F H TB siccis cr OU Eb ONE AP se oan ouo pida lu ean seany ben c pr ME EUR 369 20 9 MEO CINGATOIMNG 12 Sess n rM 369 200 2 Memali CCU eer rc a R E 370 20 9 35 Example of output external WINN ence nid enn ete pa ea eee ee 370 20 8 4 External wiring precautions sessssssssssssessesseseeeeneene nennen nennen nennen nnne nnne 371 20 9 EXSTOEYSSTB s octets cae ta cit te aat d te Saec diete ataca ege a iacet M COR nea 372 20 971 SPeCIIGAllONS m E RN 372 20 9 2 ATO VAI C ID ce aged tue deris
187. 3 Selection example 2 using the 24V DC service power supply of the main unit 80 6 6 Expansion of FX2N Series I O Powered Extension Unit ccccccceeccccseeeeceeeeeseeeeseeesseeeesaeeees 81 6 6 1 Quick reference matrix when only input output devices are added 81 6 6 2 When special extension devices are also added calculation of current consumption 84 6 7 Expansion of Extension Power Supply Unit FX3U 1PSU 5V ce eecceecseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesaaeeeeeas 86 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents 6 8 Number of Input Output Occupied Points and Current Consumption ssssse 88 OSTAMAAN NVIO eR RE RET 88 6 8 2 B Input output powered extension units blocks seeeeeseesseeeeeeeeeenrenn 89 6 8 3 C Special Tuncuon KYeVIGOS 5 ozs ool eae saei ect e xli anes d dicen aes Iu tli i e E a cien 90 6 8 4 D Extension Power Supply Uhnit eelsseeesesesessseseeeennennennm nnnm nnne nnns 90 7 Assignment of Input Output Numbers and Unit Numbers 91 71 1 Assignment of Input Output Numbers X Y sseesssssssssssseseneeenen nennen nnne nnn nnne nnn 91 eM Ores lar Ree ETE mC HO 91 71 2 Example Or asSSiQWING Pete tT 92 7 1 3 Application of I O number label cccccccccccceececeeeeceseeececeeeeeeeeeceseeeeeess
188. 30 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 11 Keyword 19 11 6 Enabling a keyword 1 Atthe menu screen use the buttons to move the cursor to the keyword item then press OK to display the enable keyword Make Keyword screen valid 2 Press the OK button to enable the keyword Or to retain the keyword s canceled status press ESC OK gt Execute Button Operation Description ESC gt Cancel ESC Cancels the operation and returns to the menu screen Disabled Disabled OK Enables the Keyword and returns to the menu screen 331 SJojuno peeds uBij Buum nding N 10 Buum OO Ses snoueA I JE oD nV es Sy XE 5 E 090 2 2357 oo 2 0 5 Q mM US Aog O c gt Oo 2 oO GGG 2 s S a e uda 490 UOISU9 X3 ndinoandu C N yun A ddng Jamod UOISUS X3 co suondo pue sun UOISUS X3 JOUIO J 77 nes D lt ES o c D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 12 Memory Cassette Transfers 19 12 Memory Cassette Transfers Data transfers between the internal EEPROM memory and a connected memory cassette can be performed from the Cassette menu when the PLC is in a STOP state This menu is disabled however if a keyword is registered in the internal EEPROM In this
189. 4 9 4 4 An external wiring example for the extension power supply unit sink input common 135 9 4 5 An external wiring example for the extension power supply unit source input common 136 9 5 Examples of External Wiring DC Power Supply Type eeeeeeeeeeenn 137 9 5 1 Example of sink input COMMON wiring cccceeecceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseueceseeeeessaeeeesaneeessneeeteess 137 9 5 2 Example of source input COMMON WILING ccccceeecceceeeeecaeeecaeeececaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeseneeesaaes 138 10 Input Wiring Procedures 139 10 1 Before Starting Input Wiring lsseeeesssssesseeeeeneeene enne nnn nnne nnn nnn nnn nnns 141 T0 TcT SINK ane SoulceIEpblE foie fete cc shared bet a ceu teres pubes cen Seabees 141 10 2 24V DC input Sink and source input tyPe ee cccceeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeesaeeeesseeeeeeneeeeneas 143 10 21 Handing OF 24 V gt DC IDpULb iudi eee esac eee eet cance ea Secs ad esethad eue das cut 143 10 2 2 Instructions for connecting input CEVICES cccceeecccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeeeeseseeeessaaeeeeesaeeeeeees 144 10 2 3 Examples of external wiring sink input AC Power Supply Type 146 10 2 4 Examples of external wiring source input AC Power Supply Type 148 10 2 5 Examples of external wiring sink input DC Power S
190. 47 D8040 to D8047 are enabled when M8047 is ON ON when M8049 is ON and either i of S900 to S999 is ON D8040 to D8047 D8049 M8048 D8049 is enabled when M8049 is ON 2 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP 3 Executed at END instruction 390 Correspond Number and Operation and function ing special name device Interrupt Disable M8050 Input interrupt 1000 disable M8051 Input interrupt 1100 disable M8052 If an input interrupt or timer interrupt occurs while a special auxiliary relay for that interrupt M8050 M8058 is ON the interrupt will not operate Input interrupt For example turning M8050 ON 1200 disable disables the 1000 interrupt hence the interrupt routine is M8053 not processed even in an Input interrupt allowable program area 1300 disable M8054 Input interrupt 1400 disable If an input interrupt or timer interrupt occurs while a special auxiliary relay for that interrupt M8050 M8058 is OFF M8055 a The interrupt will be Input interrupt accepted 500 disable 4 b The interrupt routine will be M8056 processed promptly if it is permitted by the El FNC 04 instruction However if the DI FNC 05 instruction disables interrupts the interrupt program will not gt be processed until El FNC 04 permits the interrupts Timer interrupt I6OO disable M8057 Timer interrupt 1700 disable M8058 Timer interrup
191. 5 mm 1 38 or direct installation 3 Input specifications common to both sink and source inputs Item FX2N 8ER ES UL Input points 4 points Connection type Vertical terminal block M3 screws Input form sink source Input signal voltage 24V DC 10 Input signal current 5mA 24V DC Input impedance 4 3kQ ON input Input ON current 3 5mA or more at 24V DC sensitivity current Inout OFF current 1 5mA or less Input response time Approx 10ms Sink input No voltage contact input NPN open collector transistor Input signal form Source input No voltage contact input PNP open collector transistor Input circuit insulation Photo coupler insulation Indication of input operation LED on panel lights when input Sink input wiring Source input wiring Main unit Main unit nae Input circuit diagram FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 2 FX2N 8ER ES UL 24V DC Sink Source Input Relay Output 4 Output specifications Relay output type Item FX2N 8ER ES UL Output Points 4 points Connection type Vertical terminal block M3 screws Output type Relay 30V DC or less Expl potek epus 240V AC or less 250V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE UL or cUL standards Output circuit insulation Mechanical insulation Indication of output operation Supplying power to the relay coil will light the LED indicator lamp on panel 2A point Resistance
192. 6467 5 Cleared when PLC power supply from OFF to ON Error Detection eas to Mes Special parameter error M 8489 M18400 1o INMTST 6 Supported in Ver 2 00 or later FX3U ENET ADP ch1 ch2 NIBAS to ue M 84927 IP address storage area write request IP address storage area write 7 M 84947 IP address storage area write error M 8495 7 IP address storage area clear request i IP address storage area clear 7 M 8496 completion M 8497 7 IP address storage area clear error IM 8498 7 IP address change function enable flag f Supported in Ver 2 10 or later 395 9jlesse2 NO Alowa 22 5 a 0008Q 0008IN sr uononJjsu UJ seoi eq jeroeds sj pow penumnuoosiq Aseyeg Jo suonne2aJd UJ uoneuodsueJ jo Buypuey TI sejejs Jequieu 13 ui seuejeq FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 Appendix A 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 Correspond Number and i Content of register ing special name device PLC Status Default value is 200ms in 1ms steps D 8000 Writes from system ROM at power Watchdog timer ON i g Value overwritten by program is valid after END or WDT instruction execution D 8001 2 6 ON PLC type and Wg D8101 system version Version 1 00 FX3G Series 2 2K steps 4 4K steps D 8002
193. 7 com v1 Y3jcow YS Y7 Jos Y1 Y3 Y5 YT 244 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 16 Input Output Extension Blocks E 12 DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NWARN ING s e Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents 1 Most importantly have the following an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements 1 3 such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits SS 2 Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off o8 Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be ec disabled 2 62 External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that the output current of the 24V DC service power supply varies depending on the model and the absence presence of extension blocks If an overload occurs the voltage automatically drops inputs in the PLC are disabled and all outputs are turned off I External circuits and mechanisms should be d
194. 8 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 4 Installation Work 11 20 4 Installation Work os Refer to Section 8 1 for installation location a8 20 4 1 Installation 12 e Turn OFF all power supplies connected to the PLC 5 input output devices and terminal blocks Q 2 Align the top side of the DIN rail mounting groove 13 refer to Fig 1 at right with the DIN rail sz Press the product onto the DIN rail refer to Fig 2 at a right 2 14 20 4 2 Removal S58 a 2 Turn the power supply OFF d 15 Disconnect the wiring and input output cables mos o c B50 Place a flathead screwdriver against the DIN rail 2 mounting hook in the posture shown refer to Fig 1 at Q i nm SS 3 Move the flathead screwdriver in direction shown at Yq TE right refer to Fig 2 to detach the DIN rail mounting SB hook from the DIN rail 2 Remove the product from the DIN rail 17 20 4 3 Input output cable connection E The terminal block s CN1 and CN2 connectors comply with the MIL 83503 standard 1 8 Refer to Subsection 9 2 2 for input output cable information suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO 1 D 5 w o z 77 D lt o ex D Input output cable Terminal block yoo g jJeuiuJe 359 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 4 Installation Work 20 4 4 Connection to terminal block 1 Terminal S
195. 8 8K steps M8002 Memory capacity If 16K steps or more D8102 K8 is written to D8002 and 16 or 32 is written to D8102 Stores the memory type built in D 8003 EEPROM or memory cassette and Memory type the PROTECT switch ON OFF status of the memory cassette E rumbo M Meee 8060 to 8068 when M8004 is ON D 8005 sio in units of 0 1V M8005 Battery voltage Battery voltage present value Example 3 0V paw Default 2 7V in units of 0 1V y Writes from system ROM at power M8006 voltage detection ON level 18007 D 8009 Lowest input device number of 24V DC failed input output powered extension unit M8009 device in which 24V DC has failed a D8003 becomes the undermentioned content oe Type of memory Protect switch 10H Built in memory in PLC 396 Number and Correspond Content of register ing special name device Clock D 8010 Accumulated instruction execution Present scan time from 0 step time in units of 0 1ms D 8011 Mini i Minim m scan inimum value of scan time i SODE in units of 0 1ms time D 8012 i Manum Sean Maximum value of scan time ky in units of 0 1ms time D 8013 0 to 59 seconds i Second data for real time clock D 8014 0 to 59 minutes i Minute data for real time clock D 8015 0 to 23 hours i Hour data for real time clock D 8016 1 to 31 days i Day data for real time clock D 8017 1 to 12 months i Month data for real time clock D 8018
196. 8008 ate jo BuypueH TI Ssejejs JOquiow 13 ui seveyeq ON when 24V DC power fails in M 8020 M 8009 any input output powered Ea5n Zero subtraction is 0 24V DC down extension unit or special function M 8021 ON when the result of subtraction is ON when carry occurs as a result hoa of addition or when an overflow y occurs as a result of shift operation Meo M 80241 BMOV direction specification f FNC 15 M 8025 to M 8027 Not used Interrupt permission during FROM M 8028 TO FNC 78 and 79 instruction execution Done ON when operation such as DSW Instruction FNC 72 is completed execution complete eT Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP 389 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 Number and name PLC Mode M 8030 Battery LED OFF M 8031 Non latch memory all clear M 8032 Latch memory all clear M 8033 Memory hold STOP M 8034 All outputs disable M 8035 Forced RUN mode M 8036 Forced RUN signal M 8037 Forced STOP signal M 8038 Parameter setting M 8039 Constant scan mode Correspond ing special device Operation and function When M8030 set to ON LED on PLC is not lit even if low battery voltage is detected If this special auxiliary relay is activated the ON OFF image memo
197. 8EX FX2N 16EX and FX2N 1G6EX Q iiec nene eet rhe deren eon dne ke ae Rudd 257 16 5 1 Product SPECITICATIONS ice tri one tan Rr eth d rata e eene De hast den Ux e erada des Gore gos poa UR aea Puis 257 16 5 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement ccceccecesseeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaas 258 16 5 3 External dimensions ccccccececsseeccceeceeeeceueeceueeceueeceueccuueecaeseueessuceseusesaeesaeeesueeesaaeesageessaees 259 16 6 EX2N TOEXL C 5V DG Input 16 Polnts ino ite eee Ire irte 261 1165621 Product specifICallOlis acorde t ee tain a bee oe E beacuse omen de olestie enel beet obit 261 16 6 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement cccccecccccsseeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeaeeeseeeeeeeesans 262 16 6 3 ExtertialdiernsloliS i usos ulcus a a chek ieee cine esu otis Ras a E Deu Die at 262 16 04 Example OF Idae ett P 262 16 7 FX2N 8EX UA1 UL 100V AC Input ied egs qoi xao se oh Rene geo eua suec Lv gae beue ee 264 1620 JProdUctSpeclli C allODSesotasscebaet eremita ot sacuntut eerta a tb e a esce Secus ned occ sears 264 16 7 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement ccccceccecesseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeesaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaas 265 16 7 3 EXENA GIMENSIONS 2 a tubi octo cad seu csse sts hag indie ies tesi a 265 16 8 FX2N 8bEYR ES UL FX2N 8EYR S ES UL FX2N 16EYR ES UL Relay Output 266 16 9 1 PROGUCUSDEGCIICALIONS 2 250 0 a scd aa
198. 9 and D8489 is added 134 Ver 2 10 April 2013 Supports the IP address change function of FX3U ENET ADP Ver 2 20 13X e Supports connection of following expansion boards o October 2013 FX3G 4EX BD FX3G 2EYT BD 57 uononpoJu NO SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee OO uononpoJu jonpoud suoneoyiods I CD lt 27 D E uoneJn6ijuo N SON HUN SON jndinondu uonejesu OO Bui A ddng Jamod ue uonesedaid h Buum ndu CO p FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 2 Programming Tool Applicability 5 2 Programming Tool Applicability 5 2 1 Applicable versions of programming tool 1 GX Works2 e GX Works2 English version SWLIDNC GXW2 E is applicable to FX3G PLCs from the following versions Model name FX3G PLC version Media model name is shown below Before Ver 1 40 Ver 1 08J or later Before Ver 2 00 on One Ver 1 62Q or later 2 SWEIDNC GXW2 E Ver 2 00 Ver 1 87R or later e GX Works2 Japanese version SWLIDNC GXWO2 J is applicable to FX3G PLCs from the following versions Applicable GX Works2 Remarks version Model name FX3G PLC version Media model name is shown below Applicable GX Works2 version Before Ver 1 40 Ver 1 07H or later Before Ver 2 00 GX Works2 Ver 1 56J or later SWLIDNC GXW2 J E Ver 2 00 Ver 1 86Q or later The settin
199. A 3 Analog expansion boards M8260 to M8279 and D8260 to D8279 Appendix A 3 Analog expansion boards M8260 to M8279 and D8260 to D8279 When analog expansion boards are connected operations and functions are assigned to the devices shown in the tables below in accordance with the position of connected analog special adapters Devices which cannot be written are shaded in Operation and function column For details refer to the Analog Control Edition Appendix A 3 1 Special auxiliary relays M8260 to M8279 Operation and function Number FX3G 2AD BD FX3G 1DA BD Companele Ver 1 10 or later Ver 1 10 or later Versions 1st expansion board M 8260 Input mode switching Ch1 Output mode switching M 8261 Input mode switching Ch2 Not used M 8262 Not used Not used M 8263 Not used Not used M 8264 Not used Output hold mode M 8265 Not used Not used M 8266 Not used Not used M 8267 Not used Not used M 8268 Not used Not used M 8269 Not used Not used 2nd expansion board M 8270 Input mode switching Ch1 Output mode switching M 8271 Input mode switching Ch2 Not used M 8272 Not used Not used M 8273 Not used Not used M 8274 Not used Output hold mode M 8275 Not used Not used M 8276 Not used Not used M 8277 Not used Not used M 8278 Not used Not used M 8279 Not used Not used 403 9jlesse2 NO JOUJOJN 22 m 8 0008d 0008IN sr uononJjsu UJ seoi eq jeroeds sj pow penumnuoosiq Kieyeq 10
200. BCDEBE34523724 cg D re i n B123456789012345 p Writing prohibited A to F O to 9 16 digit value 7 ABCDEF73DAEB93A Y Y i Tw NE 2890445234817567 Reading writing prohibited A to F 0 to 9 16 digit value CDEF567FABDEEA46 1 4 9 e52 i i oss i So A 19 16 6 Relationship between specified device monitor function and display screen protect 235 n O function 2 8 Q When the display screen protect function is used the generated function restriction has higher priority than 1 5 the specified device monitor function moni The table below shows the relationship between the specified device monitor function and the display screen 323 i 30S protect function sO O D i Display screen protect function status S S Specified device DIPESUETPER FIER zi monitor function 1 Initial screen fixing function Tost tunc ti onprohibiton setting 1 6 e Initial screen Initial screen Initial screen Clock display e S Clock display Fixed to clock display Transition to another screen Qos Invalid e E Se Transition to another screen Transition to another screen Enabled oc Enabled Disabled Only monitoring of specified z device is enabled Initial screen Initial screen Valid Specified device monitor Initial screen Specified device monitor 1 T Only monitoring is Transition to another screen Specified device monitor Transition to another screen cum enabled Enabled Transition to another screen Enabled 22 MA A OFF Testing of specifie
201. C CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that the output current of the 24V DC service power supply varies depending on the model and the absence presence of extension blocks If an overload occurs the voltage automatically drops inputs in the PLC are disabled and all outputs are turned off External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that when an error occurs in a relay triac or transistor output device the output could be held either on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION e Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line As a guideline lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to peripheral device connectors Failure to do so may result in wire damage breakage or PLC failure INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS NWARN N G e Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock 352 FX3G
202. C VL COM1 PTB TC ICOM PTB TC ICOM OUT3 OUT4 PTA PTBITC HVLt PTA PTB TC VL COM2 291 SJojunoo wh peedg uDi e Buum nding N 10 buum OO Ses SNOEN I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1S9 peJeMod jdinoandu Q1 spun uoisuejx3 uda 490 UOISU9 X3 ndinoandu C E U o D CD c xe i lt UOISU9 X3 OcQ REX ono 5 a L m mS D o o 3 D c D lt O ex D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO FX3G Series Prog rammable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 1 Special Function Units Blocks 18 1 11 FX2N 2LC External Dimensions Terminal Layout 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches POWER 90 3 55 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch FXan 2LC en ot 4 0 16 55 2 17 e MASS Weight 0 3kg 0 66lbs e Installation DIN rail of 35mm 1 38 in width or screws Accessories Label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product Terminal block M3 screws The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 18 1 12 FX2N 8AD 292 External Dimensions Terminal Layout 2 04 5 mounting holes ES ATF MITSUBISHI FXe2n 8AD 67 2 64 gt
203. C Ver 2 20 or later 2 Supported in FX3G PLC Ver 1 10 or later For RS 485 communication RJ45 connector For 8 ch Analog volume 2 ch voltage current input 1 ch voltage current output 38 Description FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 3 Introduction of Products User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 1 List of Products and Interpretation of Model Names 3 1 7 Connector conversion adapter e Model name Description FX3G CNV ADP Special adapter connection conversion adapter 3 1 8 Special adapters Model name Description FX3U 232ADP MB RS 232C communication FX3U 485ADP MB RS 485 communication FX3U ENET ADP Ethernet communication FX3U 4AD ADP 4 ch voltage current input FX3U 4DA ADP 4 ch voltage current output FX3U 3A ADP 2 2 ch voltage current input 1 ch voltage current output FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 ch platinum resistance thermometer sensor input 50 to 250 C FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 ch platinum resistance thermometer sensor input 100 to 600 C FX3U 4AD PNK ADP 4 ch Pt1000 Ni1000 resistance thermometer sensor input FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 ch thermocouple K J type temperature sensor input 1 Supported in FX3G PLC Ver 2 00 or later 2 Supported in FX3G PLC Ver 1 20 or later 3 1 9 Extension power supply unit FX3U 1PSU 5V Extension power supply 5V DC 1A 100 to 240V AC 3 1 10 Extension cables and connector conversion adapter Battery Memory cassettes Classification Description 0 65m Extension FXON 65EC id
204. C type Example 26 FX3G PLC 5 1 3 Version upgrade history FX3G Series performed the following upgrade Manufacturer s Version Contents of version upgrade serial number 86 Ver 1 00 June 2008 From first version e Supports following 15 instructions FLT FNC49 VRRD FNC85 VRSC FNC86 ECMP FNC110 EMOV FNC112 EADD FNC120 ESUB FNC121 EMUL FNC122 EDIV FNC123 ESQR FNC127 INT FNC129 IVCK FNC270 IVDR FNC271 IVRD FNC272 IVWR FNC273 Ver 1 10 Ti 2008 e Supports connection of following expansion boards FX3G 2AD BD FX3G 1DA BD FX3G 8AV BD e Supports connection of display module FX3G 5DM e Supports of the inverter communication function e Supports of the pulse width measurement function gg e Supports connection of following special adapter Ver 1 20 June 2009 FX3U 3A ADP e Supports the hardware error function of FX3U 4DA ADP T e Supports of the MODBUS communication function Ver 1 30 RE e Supports the following instruction December 2009 ADPRW FNC276 Ver 1 40 111 e Supports the following instruction s January 2011 IVMC FNC275 e Supports the following functions of the FX3U 16CCL M Network parameter Accessing the other station from CC Link Ver 2 00 124 Remote device station initialization procedure registration Do April 2012 CC Link diagnostics e Supports connection of following special adapter FX3U ENET ADP Special parameter error M848
205. CAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product 1 When connected to an FX2N 16EYT C sink output output extension block OCO to LIL17 Lower Nos A AO to A A7 Higher Nos PLC s output No d 001 003 005 007 AA1 AA3 AAS AA Vacant O00 002 004 006 AAO AA2 AA4 AAG terminal COM Hirel ieaie cadi COM 362 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 6 FX 16EX A1 TB 20 6 FX 16EX A1 TB 25 The FX 16EX A1 TB is used by connecting it to the FX2N series input extension block 24V DC 2 Input Connector Connectable models FX2N 16EX C sink input 1 2 e The applications shown below are not supported B Unsupported Applications E High speed counter input interruption pulse catch pulse width pulse period measurement speed detection High speed processing SPD instruction Time division inputs Input matrix MTR instruction digital switch DSW instruction 1 3 Other Absolute current value read ABS instruction S 22 cS m gn m 62 20 6 1 Specifications E I Item AC Input Type S53 Sas p 5c GOP 25 INA CN1 100V E Input output circuitry Connector AC a side 1 5 Terminal block T mus External wiring A Qo 228 Input signal voltage 100 to 120V AC 10 15 50 60Hz S8 e 4 7mA 100V AC 50Hz c ptos dno sunt 6 2mA 110V AC 60Hz z Approx 21kQ 50Hz Inputdmpegan
206. Ch2 Output mode switching Ch2 Input mode switching Ch2 M 8292 Input mode switching Ch3 Output mode switching Ch3 Output mode switching M 8293 Input mode switching Ch4 Output mode switching Ch4 Not used M 8295 ENTUM Output hold mode cancel EMEN Ch2 M 8296 uda d Output hold mode cancel M 8297 aA Output hold mode cancel Sets whether or not input Ch4 channel 1 is used M 8298 Not used Not used a eens Wee channel 2 is used M 8299 Not used Not used Sets whether or not output channel is used 405 9jlesse2 NO Alowa 22 F 3 0008d 0008IN sr uononJjsu UJ seoi eq jeroeds sj pow penumnuoosiq Kieyeq 10 suonneo2aJd UJ uoneuodsueJ jo Buypuey TI Ssejejs JOquiow 13 ui seuejeq FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 4 Analog special adapters M8280 to M8299 and D8280 to D8299 406 Number Compatible Versions Operation and function FX3U 4AD PT W ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP Ver 1 00 or later Ver 1 00 or later LES analog special adapter M 8280 M 8281 M 8282 M 8283 M 8284 M 8285 M 8286 M 8287 M 8288 M 8289 Temperature unit selection Not used Type K J switching PA EEUE E AEE e F To C38 Temperature unit selection Temperature unit selection Temperature unit selection M 8290 M 8291 M 8292 M 8293 M 8294 M 8295 M 8296 M 8297 M 8298 M 8299 Type K J switching Input sensor s
207. DC Power Supply Type Sink and source input type Class D E ERR grounding d E nm al M s i nl m Three WAT wire Sensor NY Input 5VIOVI 24V impedance Input extension block Two wire proximity sensor Sink and source input type 5VIOV 24V Input terminal 1 Handle the power supply circuit correctly in accordance with Chapter 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures 2 Foran input device having a parallel resistance or a two wire proximity switch a bleeder resistance may be required 3 In the case of sink input wiring short circuit the terminals of the input output powered extension units as well as the S S terminal and the terminal of the main unit 4 Do not connect with OV and 24V terminals 149 seone Jeyeudueg pue uoISJ9A e U o D op Ke lt UOI ONPO U NO SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee OO uononpoJu jonpoug suoneoyioods I Qi uoneJn6ijuo wasis CO SON HUN SON jndinondu uonejeisu OO pue uoneJedeJgd FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 2 24V DC input Sink and source input type Use of input output extension units blocks of sink input type Main unit Fuse 1 727 Class D T a fd grounding 1 oe Sink and source ial input type Three IN MESS E wire sensor Tw
208. DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to properly wire the FX3G Series main unit and FX2N FX3U Series extension equipment in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product 1 N Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 245 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 1 Outline 16 1 Outline Connect input output extension blocks to the PLC to add more input output points 8 or 16 points can be added by an input output extension block Since the power is supplied from the main unit it is not necessary to prepare another power supply unit for eac
209. DIOE Ld eee I m zl joe x Grounding and g power cables Sg O 5 LZ sink and Input extension S S Q source j block S S input i type l l l l l l l oVj0VM 24V 1 Connect the AC power supply to the L and N terminals in any case of 100V AC system and 200V AC system Make sure that the power is turned ON at the same time in the main unit and extension power supply units or earlier in extension power supply units than the main unit As for the details see WIRING PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions field 2 Connect the 24V terminal of the main unit to the S S terminal of the input When turning OFF the power confirm the extension block safety of the system and then turn OFF 3 In the case of the sink input type the S S terminal is used as the 24 terminal the power of the PLC including special 1 4 Some special function units blocks special adapters do not have a power extension equipment at the same time supply terminal When using an external power supply turn it ON at the same time with the main unit or earlier than the main unit When turning OFF the power confirm the safety of the system and then turn OFF the power of the PLC including special extension equipment at the same time 5 Some special function blocks do not have the power supply terminals When using an external power supply turn it ON at the same time with the extension power supply unit or earlier than the extension power su
210. Dimensions and Component Names 20 2 External Dimensions and Component Names FX 16E TB FX 32E TB 150 5 91 150 5 91 J 1 2 5 LJ MITSUBISHI FX 16E 18 m F PIN X 55 2 17 1 SS E 45 1 7 X 7 9 FX 16EYR TB FX 16EX A1 TB FX 16EYS TB FX 16EYT TB FX 16EYT H TB 150 5 91 150 5 91 1 3 T sem E d TUE D AC 100V INPUT 66 bm PL 7 4 vI dyni Bo EI c Lg TN LT ITA RII va WAS LO EJ 4 i A 9 4 6 9 9 6 9 Units mm inches Accessories Input output No labels terminal block arrangement cards No Remarks 1 CN1 connector 5 2 CN2 connector Present at FX 32bE TB Present at FX 16EYR TB FX 16EYS TB FX 16EYT TB 3 Operation indicator LED FX T6EYT H TB 4 POWER LED Present at FX 16EX A1 TB 5 CN2 terminal block M3 5 screws Present at FX 32E TB 6 CN1 terminal block M3 5 screws 7 Nameplate 8 DIN rail mounting groove DIN rail width 35mm 1 38 9 DIN rail mounting hook 356 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 3 Terminal Layout 20 3 Terminal Layout QE 1 FX 16E TB When connected to the FX2N 16EYT C _7 MITSUBISH
211. E Q Communication Communication special adapter arse a is 3G DD Connector Communication 6 FX3G 2EYT BD conversion j adapter BD1 expansion OOo FX3G 8AV BD board BD1 S eo c3 SI Communication special adapter o Only either one between the communication expansion board and the special communication adapter which requires the connector conversion adapter can be used Z5 2 In the case of main unit 14 24 point type oe Ch1 is assigned to the communication expansion board FX3G 4EX BD FX3G 2EYT BD FX3G 8AV BD Se connected to the BD connector or the special communication adapter connected to the connector conversion z amp adapter Main unit 14 24 point type BD connector ch1 uonejesu OO ch1 E 358 as 2 OR Connector Communication m9 conversion oO expansion c ROS pO board BD zi Communication special adapter 2 Only either one between the communication expansion board e FX3G 4EX BD FX3G 2bEYT BD FX3G 8AV BD and the special communication adapter which requires the connector conversion adapter can be used a 95 7 Assignment of Input Output Numbers and Unit Numbers FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 7 4 Station No Label of FX3G 485 BD User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 4 Station No Label of FX3G 485 BD The station No label is packed together with the FX3G 485 BD Place it in a position where it can be seen easily for simple reference as shown
212. E Ea S 24V DC sink source Terminal block AC power supply only for 24V DC sink input FX2N 32ET Transistor sink Terminal block AC power supply common to 100V AC sink and source input DC power supply common to 24V DC sink and source input DC power supply only for 24V DC sink input Total number of input Input output and output points extension FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 3 Introduction of Products User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 1 List of Products and Interpretation of Model Names 3 1 3 Input output extension blocks The input output extension block has built in input or output terminals to add input or output terminals Connect the input output extension block to the main unit or input output powered extension unit F XIN O C L L Incorporating input or output terminals UOI ONPO U NO U TI D SM zi l Classification 1 None Not compliant with standard a Series name UL Compliant with standard e Input output type Connection on terminal block or with connector ma ER 24V DC sink input relay output terminal block ER ES 24V DC sink source input relay output terminal block X 24V DC sink input terminal block X C 24V DC sink input connector a X ES 24V DC sink source input terminal block a XL C 5V DC input connector X UA1 100V AC input terminal block YR Relay output terminal block YR ES Relay output terminal block YR S ES
213. ER23999 24000 points unit or stored in the EEPROM in the memory cassette when the memory cassette is used oO seone Jeyeudueg pue uoISJ9A Extension file For EEPROM keep 16 bits register 6 ae For branching of JUMP and PO to P2047 2048 points For CJ instructions and CALL Sg CALL instructions a i cedes Input interruption 1000 to 1500 s E Timer interruption I6OO to 1800 3 points Nesting For master control NO to N7 For MC instructions 16bits 32 768 to 32 767 Decimal number K 32bits 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 j 25 E 16bits 0 to FFFF S Constant Hexadecimal number H SS 32bits 0 to FFFFFFFF o o 128 126 126 128 Real number E 4 32bits 1 0 x 21 to 1 0x 27 0 10x2 to 1 0x2 Decimal point and exponential notations are possible 1 The current time of the clock is backed up by the capacitor built in the PLC Supply the power to the PLC for 30 minutes or more to completely charge this large capacity capacitor The capacitor works for 10 days atmosphere 25 C The current time can be backed up by the battery when the optional battery is incorporated For details on the battery refer to Chapter 22 uonejeisu OO 2 These devices can be changed to the keep battery backup type using a parameter when the optional battery is used For the parameter setting method refer to Chapter 22 su 382 3 The standard mode is selected when the program capacity is set
214. ERCO 0 EE J z M o0 o0 Q0 E LOO oc e 25 So E os Oe 3 E 17 E C m 20 D Os Iw oo Oo c lt e MASS Weight 0 3kg 0 66lbs e Installation DIN rail of 35mm 1 38 in width or screws Accessories Label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product suondo pue shun 3X3 Jeujo Terminal block M3 screws The extension cable is already connected to the extension block ainpoyy Aedsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 289 FX3G Series Prog rammable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 1 Special Function Units Blocks 18 1 7 FX2N 4AD PT 18 1 8 External Dimensions Terminal Layout 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches POWER 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch 4 0 16 9 0 36 55 2 17 87 3 43 e MASS Weight 0 3kg 0 66lbs e Installation DIN rail of 35mm 1 38 in width or screws Accessories Label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product Terminal block M3 screws The extension cable is already connected to the extension block FX2N AAD TC 290 External Dimensions Terminal Layout 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches POWER 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch e MASS Weight 0 3kg 0 66lbs e Installation DIN rail of 35mm 1 38 in width or screws A
215. ESC to display the menu screen 28 S zu 19 12 2 Transfer from memory cassette to internal EEPROM Cassette gt PLC 1 Atthe menu screen use the buttons to move the cursor to the 1 6 Cassette item then press OK to display the memory cassette Memory Cassette EE transfer screen Cassette PLC aes To cancel the operation and return to the top screen time display Mites he eo 99 Ss press ESC uil re N 2 Use the buttons to move the cursor to the Cassette PLC item then press OK to display the screen shown to the right Cassette gt PLC EMI To cancel the operation and return to the memory cassette transfer 7 screen press ESC 22 OK gt Excute S ESC gt Cansel 18 3 Press OK to begin the transfer Or press ESC to cancel the operation Cassette gt PLC mE on Oc Button Operation Description S T ESC Cancels the operation and returns to the memory cassette Please wait transfer screen o Disabled Disabled OK Executes the transfer a xe je H SS Caution oe Do not turn the PLC power off or perform writing from the programming tool while a program is being T transferred by a memory cassette transfer menu operation doing so may destroy the program and disorder the PLC 20 ey 4 Press OK or ESC to return to the memory cassette transfer screen 3 D 9 o 333 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardwa
216. ESS I 35 138 15 4 14 1 0 67 RM Terminal Layout LEDs correspond to each input terminal LI CJ CJ LI 1 sg x BX0 BX1 BX2 BX3 O m m m am Ld 5 poles 18 3 2 FX3G 2EYT BD External Dimensions Unit mm inches e MASS Weight Approx 20g 0 05lbs Accessories Two M3x8 tapping screws for installation of board Side cover Manual supplied with product MITSUBISHI I ai N N eN qm LO Terminal block European type 35 1 38 Terminal Layout LEDs correspond to each output terminal oorr BYO BY alala Ld 5 poles 300 FX3G Series Prog rammable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 3 Expansion Board 18 3 3 FX3G 232 BD External Dimensions 51 2 2 02 Pin configuration 12345 O OOOO O00 0 6789 18 3 4 FX3G 422 BD Oo o 40o00ci 05 n5 Unit mm inches 5 2 0 21 CD RD SD ER SG DR 12 0 48 DCD RXD TXD DTR GND DSR Not used Not used Not used e MASS Weight Approx 20g 0 05lbs Accessories e Connector Two M3x8 tapping screws for installation of board Side cover Manual supplied with product RS 232C D SUB 9 pin male External Dimensions Unit mm inches e MASS Weight Approx 20g 0 05lbs Accessories e Connector Two M3x8 tapping
217. Edition 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units 15 2 Power supply specifications 15 2 Power supply specifications FX2N 32bER ES UL Item FX2N 32bET ESS UL Classification Supply voltage Allowable supply voltage range Rated frequency Power fuse 100V AC 200V AC Power consumption Rush current FX2N 32ER FX2N 32ES FX2N 32ET FX2N 48ER ES UL FX2N 48ET ESS UL FX2N 48ER FX2N 48ET FX2N powered extension unit 100 to 240V AC 85 to 264V AC 50 60 Hz 250V 3 15A 3A 250V 5A Up to 40A 5ms or less Up to 60A 5ms or less Without extension 24V DC 250mA or less block 24V DC service ower suppl f nb With extension block them Connection type Item FX2N 48ER UA1 UL Classification FX2N powered extension unit 35W 24V DC 460mA or less When input output extension blocks are connected 24V DC service power is consumed by For details refer to Chapter 6 Removable terminal block M3 screw Item Classification FX2N 48ER DS FX2N 48ER D FX2N 48ET DSS FX2N 48ET D FX2N powered extension unit Supply voltage 100 to 240V AC Supply voltage 24V DC Allowable supply voltage 85 to 264V AC Allowable supply voltage 20 30 range range Power fuse 250V 5A Power fuse 250V 5A 100V AC Up to 40A 5ms or less Power consumption 30W Rush current i 200V AC Up to 60A 5ms or less ZIV PEC ENIES SPONGI None supply Power consumption 35W Connection type Removable terminal block
218. Edition 3 2 Connector Types and Cables for Program Communication 3 2 Connector Types and Cables for Program Communication UONnOnpoJjU EN m RS 232C RS 422 cable e Connection cabling ge Connection cabling for Peripheral device connector eyiancien device 2 FX 232AWC H RS 232C d RS 422 umn a D a2 Zz oO oO 3o D v nD 2 jonpoud uononpoJu j Special adapter FX3u 232ADP MB 6 FX3c CNV ADP RS 232C suojeoyioeds I oO Expansion board OU Eg my d RS 232C 29 oO Ug FX 232AWC H ze F 5 FX3G 422 BD i RS 232C x RS 422 F 6 MITSUBISHI S Dn Eg a A gs FX 20P CABO E No Shape of connector or combination with cable No Shape of connector or combination with cable 2 O EJ Fx 422cABO 4f F2 232CAB 1 FX3G 232 BD D SUB 9Pin RS 232C a D SUB 9Pin zc Oo m EI X 232CAB 1 FX3G 422 BD MINI DIN 8Pin RS 422 z P FX 422CAB0 F2 232CAB 2 6 FX3G CNV ADP FX 232AW FX 232AWC FX 232AWC H Half pitch 14Pin a Peripheral device connector USB m IjFX 232CAB 2 USB Mini B connector USB2 0 S IE FxX 422CABO El F2 232CAB Peripheral device connector RS 422 FX 232AW FX 232AWC FX 232AWC H MINI DIN 8Pin 9 D SUB 25Pin FF2 232CAB 1 9 Expansion board connector e 3 238 FX 30P MINI DIN om 8Pin RS 422 EE Fx 20P CABO FX3U 64CCL CC Link connection
219. FX2N Series I O Powered Extension Unit Check the current capacity of the 24V DC service power supply based on the value shown in the quick reference matrix UONnOnpoJjU 1 In the case of AC power supply DC input type The remaining power supply capacity current can be used as a power supply to loads sensors or the like When special adapters and special function units blocks are connected by external wiring it is necessary to consider whether they can be covered by the remaining power supply capacity NO SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee 2 In the case of DC power supply DC input type 24V DC service power supply is not provided 3 In the case of AC power supply AC input type 24V DC service power supply is not provided Go 3 When the power supply capacity is insufficient connect another input output powered extension unit When two input output powered extension units or more are connected calculate the power supply 4 capacities of the input output extension blocks and special function blocks connected to them and Y check the capacity oO seone JeJeudueg pue uoISJ9A 5 O Ss O O S SON HUN SON uonejeisu OO DUUM A ddnsg Jewog ue uoneJedaJg h Buum ndu CO p 83 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 6 Expansion of FX2N Series I O Powered Extension Unit 6 6 2 When special extension devices are also a
220. Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals c ccccccsecceceececeseeeceeeeeeeeesaeeeeseeeeesaeeeas 27 2 Features and Part Names 29 ox ME Ile FOALS EE nats rude aaa E deb ieee alos elses eed hae 29 2 2 Names and F unctoris eb Parts aec os r ede rae gains eee ages eg eee 31 22 1 FOnblsdrel usmunotcu mera tumousdoteesues ia cs eic LA dr Sob ipic uc ens a er Lucho ssi ere eee 31 VL SNCS PEE 33 3 Introduction of Products 34 3 1 List of Products and Interpretation of Model Names c cccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeceecesseeeeseeeesseeeesaeeeees 34 Cm MINUTE 35 3 1 2 Input output powered extension units lsseeesssesssssssseseeneeeneenenennnnen nennen nene nnne nnns 36 3 1 9 Inp vo tput extensio DIOCKS cio ce ER ern ee oe a aporte eun icxa c anco a rta ea rea eee 37 3 1 4 Special function blocks ce ecccccceecceceeececeeeeeceeeeeceaeeeseaeeeseueeseaaeeseeaeeseaaeeeseaeeessaeeesssaeeesanseessaes 38 o 15 5 DISDISBV FO GUC sesen o bevoi i aasceradtu ded ea vasan a Vae scaled diva buds a Eos ada me bee QA NUR 38 9 1 5 EXPANSION DOGFOS aana ct dar sodas canon sot Pesce enc erat docu cr ttu rur apis ur te sul un sari tu c ced icones s ade ded 38 3 1 7 Connector conversion adapte eure ee er exeat exer edere Neue ex ee eee 39 2 1 9 Speca adapers uds ciatis as Ae cece deena Litus aries eof suse LL EIL hese anaes 39 93 1 9 Extension DOWEr SUDDIV UP oan Aid aio esc bec ade at on bec esce deest b deut s
221. I FX 16E TB 1 2 O E l O AAT eS cs EE 2 LES 2 EO SG 0 zi sz O gt c oQ 0 ee di P Qo MITSUBISHI FX 16E TB BERET I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1S9 2 FX 32bE TB When connected to the FX2N 16EYT C Lower numbers Higher numbers peJeMod jdinoandu Q1 spun uoisuejx3 uda 490 UOISU9 X3 ndinoandu C a CES UU 9j E Higher numbers yu A ddng Jewog CN1 UOISU9 X3 When connected to the FX2N 16EX C Lower numbers Higher numbers oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO D 5 w o 5 J 77 e lt Oo 2 c D yoojg jJeuiuJe 357 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 3 Terminal Layout 3 FX 16EX A1 TB MITSUBISHI FX 16EX Al TB AC 100V INPUT POWER Lower numbers d 7 FX 16EYR TB La LL s casga BEETLE Lower numbers Higher numbers 24 0 2 coMt 4 6 coma o 2 jcoms 4 6 coma 35
222. IN AX 2 S S _ X020 X021 X022 X023 X024 X025 X026 X027 COM 24 X Input output powered extension unit block Transistor output sink Y050 Y051 Y052 E E ae mg 1 To use the input terminal X of the input output powered extension unit wire the terminal as shown by the dotted line 2 The terminals in the shaded areas are provided on input output powered extension units ex FX2N 32ET Output extension blocks do not have the terminals Main unit 2 In the case of source wiring When the main unit and a transistor output source type input output powered extension unit block are used diode is o necessary X021vX022VX023v X024v X025v X026v X027 N Co LO o t st t xt st st t st X021VX022VX023VX024WX025VX026WX027 o N co t LO O co co co C co C co Co 7 V VV V V V W V Input output powered extension unit block Main unit Transistor output source oM 1 To use the input terminal X of the input output powered extension unit wire the terminal as shown by the dotted line 2 The terminals in the shaded areas are provided on input output powered extension units ex FX2N 32ET ESS UL Output extension blocks do not have the terminals 193 SJojunoo wh peeds uBij O O S 10 BuutM Ses snoueA I E OD nV es Sy XL EN Nw 2 O O 2 0 Q mM US OS O c ES D ct 2 oO Ooc 2 S E a
223. ISIOA PC side I F Serial setting RS 232C C RS 232C include F2 LISB amp w 7 F lt 3U USB BD include Fes USB AM F 3U U SB BD Cancel x Cancel C USB GOT transparent mode C USB GOT transparent mode C USB Built in port id USB Built in port hi No specification Ot COM port COM 1 PLC direct coupled setti Transmission speed 115 2K bps v Connection test ueisa OD Time out Sec 110 uoneJn6ijuo C24 CCIE Cont CC Link Ethernet NET 10 H NET II System image Select USB Built in port j Co existence network route TEL FXCPU C24 CCIE Cont NETI IN CC Link Ethernet NET 10 H OK Z5 Accessing host station a m Close S fee CO SIS e mto 2 4 Click the OK button to finish the setting uonejeisu OO BULA A ddng Jamod ue uonesedaid h Buum ndu CO p 63 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 4 Cautions on using transparent function by way of USB in GOT1000 Series 5 4 Cautions on using transparent function by way of USB in GOT1000 Series When monitoring circuits device registration etc or reading writing programs in an FX3G PLC from GX Developer Ver 8 22Y or later using the transparent function by way of USB in the GOT1000 Series make sure to execute the following setting
224. ITSUBISHI io 5 E a MELSECFXa 48ET D boecacsecsocsclblecls t See ee es E PE 172 6 78 mounting hole pitch 182 7 17 15 4 3 Terminal layout FX2N 32ET ESS UL x es pov xo x2 xa Xe xo x2 xa Xe PLN gavpxi xs X9 x7 x x3 XS x7 vo v2 v4 ve Tvo v2 T4 ve Vol va vagi vs za YA YVa YS YT FX2N 48ET ESS UL 1 Tespov xo xz x4 Xe Xo X2 x4 Xe XO X2 X4 X6 C NT pov xt x3 x6 x7 x1 x3 x6 x xi x3 X X7 FX2N 48ET ESS UL vol v2 v4 vel Tvo v2 val ve vo v va ve v eva va vspevi ve V7 V2 v1T YSVSL V5 7 Y1 VB VS Y FX2N 48ET DSS S S Ov XO x2 x4 X6 xO x2 x4 x6 XO X2 XA X6 O1O av xt x3 FX2N 48ET DSS vo v2 v4 ve vo v2 v4 ve vo z v4 ve va vo vi v3 PVA v5 V7 Valve Y8 EV3L S 7 Y YS YS 7 234 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 5 FX2N 32ER FX2N 48ER FX2N 48ER D 15 5 FX2N 32ER FX2N 48ER FX2N 48ER D oF 15 5 1 Product specifications The generic specifications are the same as those for the main unit 1 2 Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications O For external wiring refer to the following chapters E Refer to Chapter 9 for power supply wiring Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring a Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring
225. If the following setting is not provided a communication error occurs GX Developer Ver 8 21X or former GX Developer Ver8 22Y or later When using transparent function by way of USB in GOT1000 Series Not supported not available Setting shown below is required When using transparent function by way of RS 232 in GOT1000 Series Set COM port and Transmission speed When directly connecting GX Developer to on PC side I F Serial setting dialog box PLC Select RS 232C in setting shown below and set COM port and Transmission speed 1 GX Developer Ver 8 72A or later supports the FX3G Series Setting in GX Developer Ver 8 22Y or later 1 Select Online Transfer setup to open the Transfer setup dialog box 2 Double click Serial in PC side I F to open the PC side I F Serial setting dialog box 3 Select USB GOT Transparent mode Transfer Setup PC side I F m Serial CCIE Cont NET II CC Link Ethernet PLC USB NET 10 H board board board board board PLC side I F PC side I F Serial setting include FX USB AW 7 FX3U USB BD USB GOT transparent mode Other C USB Built in port station EI No specification O COM port COM 1 PLC direct coupled setting Time out Sec 110 7 Transmission speed 115 2Kbps X onnection tes PLC type C24 CCIE Cont NET II CC Link Ethernet NET 10 H SU se m EBENEN System image transparent mode TEL FXEPU
226. Input signal form Voltage contact Input circuit insulation Photo coupler insulation Indication of input operation LED on panel lights when input 100 to 120V AC Photocoupler Input impedance Input circuit diagram 264 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 Input Output Extension Blocks 16 7 FX2N 8EX UA 1 UL 100V AC Input 16 7 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement With cover Without cover amon ED c Ho Q EE IZA les j FX2N 8EX UA1 Rear line extension connector Ses Input b55 indicator WES lamps LED lamps Umm mu 16 7 3 External dimensions FX2N 8EX UA1 CD POWER 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch EEE 9 0 36 43 1 7 87 3 43 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches 265 SJojunoo wh peedg uDi e Buum nding N 10 buum OO Ses snoueA I mcer Oo amp Dn es Sy TE EN 090 2 erg O O S d Q mM US Aou O c 2oc 2 oO Ooc 2 S a op 17 yu A ddng Jamod UOISUS XF co suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 8 FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX2N 8EYR S ES UL FX2N 16EYR ES UL Relay Output 16 8 FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX2N 8EYR S ES UL FX2N 16EYR ES UL Relay Output 16 8 1 Product specifications
227. Interruption I00L to 50L 10 4 3 Examples of external wiring UONnOnpoJjU It is recommended to use shielded twisted pair cables for connection cables Ground the shield of each shielded cable only on the PLC side 1 Examples of input interruption 1000 or 1001 wiring using X000 When another input terminal is used wire it according to the following diagrams NO 1 When 24V DC service power supply is used SOWeN ed pue seJnjee OO Fuse M E A jonpoud uononpoJu suoneoyiods I The grounding resistance should be 100 or less oO 2 When 24V DC external power supply is used seone Jeyeudueg pue uoISJ9A Class D gro Class D gro I nj ueisa OD uoneJn amp ijuo jndinondu The grounding resistance should be 100 or less SON HUN SON uonejeisu OO e py I D d ms co Bi O O zel lt S Q 155 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 5 Pulse Catch M8170 to M8175 10 5 Pulse Catch M8170 to M8175 The PLC main unit is provided with a pulse catch function and has 6 pulse catch input points For details on programming refer to the programming manual 10 5 1 Allocation of special memories to input numbers ON duration of input signals Input number Contact on sequence program ON duration of input signal X000 M8170 10us or more X0
228. LC output element 4 In phase PLC output contacts should be used in an in phase manner 184 Surge absorber Model name 250MCRA104100M B0325 Inter Limit of nonna lock rotation Normal rotation Reverse Limit of reverse rotation rotation FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 3 External Wiring for Triac SSR Output Type 12 3 3 Example of external wiring oc 8 iain uni 7 relay output Eger Breaker e Power ON For the relay output wiring of the main unit refer to a Subsection 12 1 4 s 10 Buum OO Ses snoueA Output extension block triac output Fuse 14 poe 353 TE 50 gt 88 E C 15 Power supply for load wes connected to PLC output E Lo I Sas For details on emergency stop Input output powered operation refer to DESIGN adenaion wat zi PRECAUTIONS at Safety triac output Precautions field m 1 6 gm P O SE d N SON seo 1 The output circuit of this PLC does not have a built in fuse o 2 Provide a fuse suitable to each load to prevent blowout of the wires on the circuit board caused by output S gt lt element fracture due to load short circuiting 2 represents vacant terminals co suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION e Do not wire the vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the pro
229. M 307 jS ESOS CIN IP NETTES 307 US AIT PROC d B TT 307 1921 2 DiSplay SWILGN SOCCIIGCATONS otiosi Ca neus pides tae ota pain lut deudas sais dower ali destas s ou sedem ees eu Does 307 USES Pan NIMES kosee t RR 308 19 1 4 External DIMENSIONS us ocsooto cen oo tun bo a satin bec dme u umbo dun easia dedissem tesi Sala duse neu eco 308 19 2 Installation and KR CMOVAl EE 309 19 2 1 Installation when the expansion board connector conversion adapter is not used together 309 19 2 2 Installation when the expansion board connector conversion adapter is used together 310 19 3 SUMMARY Ol FUNCIONS 3 m eet timida teta armies et dude vente CELUM Dios OUS QUA ot equ 311 19 4 Procedure for Accessing the Menu Screen from the Title Screen ssssuussse 312 POA TESE CN arts e 312 19 42 TOD SCREEN mie display sasustsaiodtetiseudaesdc a reti ots Dodd adt ows e LUE 312 TO 4 9 Menu SCEOOll uid decem n MUI DUM MEINE I I M IM LM PE 312 To Mena SUNG EB Pot puaesiebiu hcaeuec ab cede tasana a DAI o Eu n uci une ane 313 19 6 MOMO Fest eer ccc 315 19 651 Relevant de VICOS osito darte epe bU quo Po obe cuo b ch cecetuntace onc dtuc uaa es das cue m ona date a 315 19 6 2 Monitor mode ODGFPAllOFsus o uio aie tec to a Don tea tac be Coa usto E Deu dia on ue iude 316 19 6 3 Monitor screen and status display lessen ene nnn nnn nnn 317 19 5 4 TesP node
230. M3 screw 24V DC service power supply Connection type None Removable terminal block M3 screw 15 2 1 Weight accessories etc FX2N 48ER ES UL FX2N 48ET ESS UL FX2N 48ER DS FX2N 48ER D FX2N 48ET DSS FX2N 48ET D 0 65kg 1 43 Ibs 0 85kg 1 87 Ibs e Terminal protective cover 2 pcs Fitted to FX2N 32ER ES UL FX2N 32bET ESS UL FX2N 48ER ES UL FX2N 48bET ESS UL FX2N 48ER UA1 UL FX2N 48ER DS and FX2N 48ET DSS FX2N 48ER FX2N 32ER ES UL TANER FX2N 48ET Item FX2N 32ES FX2N 32ET FX2N 48ER UA1 UL FX2N 32ET ESS UL MASS Weight 1 00kg 2 2 Ibs Secas one e Extension cable 55mm 2 16 Optional extension cables FXON 30EC and FXON 65EC are available input output number label The terminal block uses M3 terminal screws Others Installation of the DIN46277 35mm 1 37 wide rail or screws 226 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 2 Power supply specifications 15 2 2 Part names oc HM 1 Front B 4 Input display LEDs 1 Top cover 5 Terminal block covers 1 2 NE B eS TTT EEE MITSUBISHI 85888883 e 6 Extension device connecting a wi connector cover MELSEC F Xov 48ER 7 POWER LED 1 3 oa NN a 2 DIN rail mounting hooks 8 Output display LEDs 2 3 Model name I 1 Top cover When adding this to the main unit connect the supplied extensio
231. M8289 M8290 to M8299 1st expansion board 2nd expansion board 1st special adapter 2nd special adapter 4 E 1 Supported in Ver 1 10 or later 2 1st expansion board becomes an expansion board connected to BD connector of main units 14 24 point type or BD1 connector of main units 40 60 point type 3 2nd expansion board becomes an expansion board connected to BD2 connector of main units 40 60 point type 4 Connected analog special adapters are counted from the main unit side Flag M 8300 to M 8303 Not used Turns ON when the multiplication or Ned mess IRS eB MESSRTWEXS Xue E Mesas 5 Backed up against power interruption and automatically cleared when M8312 itself is cleared or when the clock data is set again 393 3E o3 o os 0008Q 0008IN Js uononJjsu UJ seoi eq jeroeds sj pow penumnuoosiq Ksyeq 10 suonneo2aJd UJ uoneuodsueJ jo Buypuey TI Ssejejs JOquiow ng ul s n yeq Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Correspond Correspond Number and i Number and Operation and function ing special Operation and function ing special name devico vame device Positioning RS2 FNC 87 ch0 M18330 to M8397 Notused Meo M 8338 PLSV FNC157 instruction i M 8371 2 RS2 FNC 87
232. MITSUBISHI F 1 ELECTRIC PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS MEUSE Hardware Edition Main Unit AC Power Type FX3G LIMR ES FX3G LIMT ES FX3G LIMT ESS DC Power Type FX3G LIMR DS FX3G LIMT DS FX3G LIMT DSS Input Output Powered Extension Unit FX2N LIELI L Input Output Extension Block FX2N 8ELI LJ FX2N 16ELI L Display Module FX3G 5DM Memory Cassette FX3G EEPROM 32L GEES 525v Precautions ED Read these precautions before use Before installation operation maintenance or inspection of this product thoroughly read through and understand this manual and all of the associated manuals Also take care to handle the module properly and safely This manual classifies the safety precautions into two categories and A CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe WARNING 7 Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in medium or slight NCAU T O N personal injury or physical damage Depending on the circumstances procedures indicated by A CAUTION may also cause severe injury It is important to follow all precautions for personal safety Store this manual in a safe place so that it can be taken out and read whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user 1 DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NWARNING Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system o
233. Manual Hardware Edition 20 9 FX 16EYS TB 20 9 FX 16EYS TB The FX 16EYS TB is used by connecting it to the FX2N series output extension block transistor Output Connector Connectable models FX2N 16EYT C sink output The applications shown below are not supported Unsupported Applications Pulse Y output PLSY instruction acceleration deceleration setup PLSR instruction pulse width modulation PWM instruction DOG search zero return DSZR instruction batch data positioning mode TBL instruction absolute current value read ABS instruction zero return ZRN instruction variable speed pulse output PLSV instruction drive to increment DRVI instruction drive to absolute DRVA instruction Pulse outputs Time division inputs Input matrix MTR instruction digital switch DSW instruction Time division output Seven segment with latch SEGL instruction 20 9 1 Specifications Item Triac output input output l it Vx AV U circuitry 0 045 connector Ur CO sido Photo thyristor External wiring Load voltage 85 to 242V AC The total load current of resistance loads per common terminal should be the following Resistance M load 0 3A point value iun 4 output points common terminal 0 8A or less oa Inductive 15VA 100V AC load 36VA 200V AC Min load 0 4VA 100V AC 1 6 VA 200V AC Open circuit 1mA 100V AC 372 leakage current 2mA 200V AC F Response time 2ms or le
234. N 3 Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN M8068 M8065 to M8067 D 8069 3 Parallel Link Parallel link error time out check time 500ms DOTT is Drs Pulse width Pulse period measurement function D 8070 D 8074 Lower x000 Ring counter value for rising D 80754 edge 1 6us unit D 8076 Lower x000 Ring counter value for falling M8076 D 80774 edge 1 6us unit M8080 D 8078 Lower xooo Pulse width Pulse period D 8079 4 10us unit D 80804 X001 Ring counter value for rising D 8084 4 edge 1 6us unit D 8082 Lower 1x001 Ring counter value for falling M8077 D 8083 4 edge 1 6us unit M8081 D 8084 Lower x001 Pulse width Pulse period D 8085 4 10us unit D 8086 X003 Ring counter value for rising D 80874 edge 1 6us unit D 8088 Lower Dx003 Ring counter value for falling M8078 D 8089 4 edge 1 6us unit M8082 D 8090 Lower 1x003 Pulse width Pulse period D 80914 10us unit D 80924 X004 Ring counter value for rising D 8093 4 edge 1 6us unit D 80947 Lower xo04 Ring counter value for falling M8079 D 80954 edge 1 6us unit M8083 D 8096 Lower 1x04 Pulse width Pulse period D 8097 4 10us unit 4 Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN Supported in Ver 1 10 or later Memory Information 2 6 ON D 8101 PLC type and Wes f system version as E sess 1 00 2K steps 4K steps D 8102 8K steps g 16 16K steps 32 32K st
235. ODOFallODi sd aeo eese dh de oe Ig e emet teense ad Ace seemed ub stesso estela ee 319 19 6 5 Test mode operation Notes cccccccccsecccseeccseeccueeccsueccsueccuuecceueecseesssueessuseeeeeseueeseueessanaeessaees 322 10 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents OT iro ERIS EMO LU I E T RHET 322 19 8 LANGUAGE Menu Display Language Setting cccccccseeceeeseeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesseeeeeeas 323 19 0 1 Changing to Japanese miens oec ice Pelei e une be s b emere det i Gila BAAS 323 19 8 2 Changing to English Menus cccccssecccecsssececceeseececceseeeceuesceeecsueceeseeauseessaueeeessusesesssansesess 324 19 8 3 D8302 changes by program and related devices ccc ccecccceeecceeeeeae cece eesaeeeseeeeseaeesaeessaeeeenes 324 19 9 CONTAS a er D EE 325 19 10 Clock Menu Current Time Setting cccccccccssseeccsseeceeeseceseeeeeceeseeseeaeeessegeeessagsessesseeeees 326 USB EG ore eT ure elyoe lo i e 326 19 102 Displaying trie CULFentb TI ss ioca Dos a Eoo a ova cin UR Cul be ruat br e a Pc tcu dein ati eco ER RE pd 327 19 10 3 Changing the current time s Year from 2 digit format to 4 digit format 327 DONE uem 328 19 11 1 Keyword types anadaievelsu inii eo sa teuer ceat red 6e e Seen benedi a ecd PU dude d Ead Susa E EcRU cx diated 328 19 11 2 Level specific restrictions scr
236. OMU 4 RS FNC 80 instruction D setting is incorrect M 8121 Send wait flag z e je 1 Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN RS FNC 80 instruction z M 8122 Send request Dee E Pulse width Pulse period measurement function q Sp Pulse width Pulse period M 8123 4 DA D8123 IM B079 measurement setting flag B RS FN instruction Mer X000 Pulse width Pulse period D8074 to M 8124 i Mihi a M measurement flag D8079 zi X001 Pulse width Pulse period D8080 to M pan S M 8077 measurement flag D8085 M 8126 Computer link ch1 Global ON X003 Pulse width Pulse period D8086 to Computer link ch1 2 measurement flag D8091 On demand send processing C IMJ8079 2 X004 Pulse width Pulse period D8092 to M 8128 Computer link ch1 D8127 measurement flag D8097 On demand error flag D8128 39 a0 i X000 Pulse period measurement D8074 to Computer link ch1 D8129 x M 8080 mode D8079 On demand Word Byte z M 812 h D M 8081 2 X001 Pulse period measurement D8080 to i a INED sts moge iius Time out check flag x X003 Pulse period measurement D8086 to M 8082 2 en P D8091 4 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP or RS D instruction is OFF Sgc M 80832 X004 Pulse period measurement D8092 to 3 O mode D8097 Positioning PLSY PLSR instruction 2 gt o 2 Supported in Ver 1 10 or later M 8145 Y000 Pulse output stop command S A Flag M 8146 Y001 Pulse output stop command s 8090 t MIS100 or o E Mpar SU
237. OOOOOOO c Rear line extension connector FXan 16EXL C xal s 15 xa xsl e 16 x5 xe 7 17 xe Terminal arrangement X7 8 18 X7 9 19 Input indicator lamps LED lamps BZ Oo como OOOOOOOO 16 6 3 External dimensions 2 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch 16 6 4 Example of wiring 1 Wiring on input side Sink input ae I L 4 1 External 5VDC TTL unit s Pv v UL j L EIN S S OV 4V XO 5 XO X1 X3 ais D LT Zi y MNITIISM main unit or input output powered extension unit 262 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 6 FX2N 16EXL C 5V DC Input 16 Points How to connect connector 2z lt 5 n D Connection face of connector The polarity is shown in the following table 3 19 17 15 2135511 13 201181 16 14 12 20 948 48 914154 211 sz o 5 oS 10987654321 gs o I ME 252 Side B is for the higher input numbers 292 siue 4 EXER COREE and side A is for the lower input numbers 3 2 Side A s xz xe xs x xS x2 Xt XO Exe siae B X050 to X057 28 Side A X040 to X047 4 5 ES ofc 2 Oe Sao c 17 yu A ddng Jamod UOISUS XF co suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO
238. Other equipment gt 50mm 1 97 8 2 Layout in Enclosure Input output powered extension unit FX3U 16CCL M FX2N CNV BC FX2N 16EX The PLC components can be laid out in one stage or in two stages upper and lower The connecting procedures in each case are explained below 8 2 1 1 stage layout Special Connector Input output powered extension units blocks pecia conversion Special function blocks H i i x b oxi input output ok ox i ei om in oX ft ok EXORCGCEE o o ii deii i i 59 i go main unit opt og Powered i Bg og o o extension units 5 AS J i H H 2 i 2 For the dimensions of each product refer to the external dimensions E gt 50mm 1 97 102 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 2 Layout in Enclosure 8 2 2 2 stage layout UONnOnpoJjU In the case of a 2 stage layout connect the first stage and the second stage with the extension cable When an extension block is connected at the top of the second stage FX2N CNV BC connector conversion adapter is necessary NO 1 When an input output powered extension unit is connected at the top of the 2nd stage Special conversion units blocks Connector Input output powered extension adapter Special function blocks S WEN Hed pue s ne 4 Ti VE ZENE co 5 So O 5 I O 5 3 main unit Oo Qa A AS O l O 5
239. Output extension block oV 0V 24V When turning OFF the power confirm the safety of the 1 Connect the AC power supply to the L and N terminals in system and then turn OFF the power of the PLC any case of 100V AC system and 200V AC system including special extension equipment at the same time Make sure that the power is turned ON at the same time in 4 Some special function blocks do not have the power the main unit and extension power supply units or earlier in supply terminals extension power supply units than the main unit When using an external power supply turn it ON at the As for the details see WIRING PRECAUTIONS at Safety same time with the extension power supply unit or earlier Precautions field than the extension power supply unit 2 Connect the OV terminal of the main unit to the S S terminal When turning OFF the power confirm the safety of the of the input extension block system and then turn OFF the power of the PLC including special extension equipment at the same time 5 The 24V and OV terminals are located on the output terminal side For details on the terminal layout refer to Section 4 7 3 Some special function units blocks special adapters do not have a power supply terminal When using an external power supply turn it ON at the same time with the main unit or earlier than the main unit 136 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for Wiring and Pow
240. Output extension block SVIOV 24V 1 Connect DC power to and terminals The same power source for the 3 24V DC supplies power to the S S main unit extension units special function unit blocks and special adapters terminal at the input extension block a is preferable When using the different power source from the main unit turn 4 In the case of the sink input type the S S ON the peripheral devices power simultaneously or earlier than the main terminal is used as the 24 terminal 0 unit s When turning OFF the power confirm the safety of the system and 5 Some special function units blocks special then turn OFF the power of the PLC including special extension equipment adapters do not have a power supply terminal E at the same time 6 Do not connect with 24 and terminal 2 Do not connect with OV and 24V terminals E 137 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 5 Examples of External Wiring DC Power Supply Type 9 5 2 Example of source input common wiring An example of source input common wiring is shown below Sink and source input type TET 24V DC Special adapter S id rada ay Circuit protector Class D Power supply ON grounding PL 62 MC e a i e Sink and MC source iEmergency input RE 4 stop type EM Input extension IMC MC block T
241. P FX3U 3A ADP FX3U 4AD PT ADP FX3U 4AD PTW ADP FX3U 4AD PNK ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP Models MELSEC FX2N series manufactured FX2N X ER ES UL FX2N Xx x ET ESS UL Where x x indicates 32 48 FX2N 48ER DS FX2N 48ET DSS FX2N 48ER UA1 UL FX2N 8ER ES UL FX2N 8EX ES UL FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX2N 8EYR S ES UL FX2N 8EYT ESS UL FX2N 8EX UA1 UL FX2N 16EX ES UL FX2N 16EYR ES UL FX2N 16EYT ESS UL FX2N 16EYS Compliance with EC directive CE Marking This note does not guarantee that an entire mechanical module produced in accordance with the contents of this note will comply with the following standards Compliance to EMC directive and LVD directive of the entire mechanical module should be checked by the user manufacturer For more details please contact to the local Mitsubishi Electric sales site Requirement for Compliance with EMC directive The following products have shown compliance through direct testing of the identified standards below and design analysis through the creation of a technical construction file to the European Directive for Electromagnetic Compatibility 2004 108 EC when used as directed by the appropriate documentation Attention his products is designed for use in industrial applications Note e Manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation 2 7 3 Marunouchi Chiyoda ku Tokyo 100 8310 Japan e Manufactured at Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Himeji Works 840 Chiyoda machi Himeji Hyogo 670 8677 Japan Auth
242. PLC s internal programs as shown to ert ak 9S9 the right Reverse 998 PLC output Reverse Ton contact limit 2 4 In phase 19 PLC output contacts should be used in an in phase o manner l j Ej D Bad O D Good i yoojg euw 367 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 7 FX 16EYR TB 20 7 5 Product life of relay contacts The product life of relay contacts varies considerably depending on the load type used Take care that loads generating reverse electromotive force or rush current may cause poor contact or deposition of contacts which may lead to considerable reduction of the contact product life 1 Inductive load Inductive loads generate large reverse electromotive force between contacts at shutdown which may cause arcing At a fixed current consumption as the power factor phase between current and voltage gets smaller the arc energy gets larger The standard life of contacts used for Inductive loads such as contactors and solenoid valves is 500 000 operations at 35VA The following table shows the approximate life of a relay based on the results of an operation life test Test condition 1 sec ON 1 sec OFF Load Capacity Contact Life 0 35A 100V AC 35VA 3 000 000 times 0 17A 200V AC 0 8A 100V AC l 80VA 1 000 000 times 0 4A 200V AC 1 2A 100V AC 120VA 200 000 times 0 6A 200V AC The product life of relay contacts
243. PLC side A 20 pin connector FX 16E 150CAB 1 5m 4 11 FX 16E 300CAB 3m 9 10 Cables for connecting FX Series terminal block Flat cables with tube e A 20 pin connector at both ends FX 16E 500CAB 5m 10 4 and input output connector For the connection with FX Series terminal block LJ FX 16E 150CAB R 1 5m 4 117 refer to the following chapter x Rond mulicormcanice LJ FX 16E 300CAB R 3m 910 pene Fermi E 20 pin connector at both ends FX 16E 500CAB R 5m 10 4 FX A32E 150CAB 1 5m 4 11 FX A32E 300CAB 3m 9 10 Flat cables with tube PLC side Two 20 pin connectors in 16 Cables for connecting A Series Model AGTBXY36 point units connector terminal block conversion unit and Terminal block side A dedicated FX A32E 500CAB 5m 10 4 input output connector type connector One common terminal covers 32 input output terminals 3 Connectors for making input output cables by users our options The users should prepare the electric wires and pressure bonding tool Applicable electric wire UL 1061 are recommended and tool Ou modell name Details of part EIECIUC WII SIE Pressure bonding tool made by DDK Ltd made by DDK Ltd 10 piece AWG28 0 1mm 357J 4674D Main body FX2C I O CON for flat cable Solderless connector FRC2 A020 30S 1 27 pitch 20 core 357J 4664N Attachment 5 piece Housing HU 200S2 001 2 FX2C I O CON S for bulk wire Solderless conta
244. Phase A Hin HI JEL I 1 NM T Phase B k l i Up counting Down counting e The down count up count operations of C251 to C255 can be monitored through the ON OFF operations of M8251 to M8255 ON Down counting OFF Up counting 165 SJejuno2 peeds ubiH Buum indno NS 10 buum OO Ses snoueA I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1S9 pejowog jdinoandu Q1 spun uoisuejx3 uda sy ojg UOISU9 X3 jnd noandu C N yu A ddns Jewog UOISUS X3 co suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of High speed Counters User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 6 Timing of Updating of Current Value and Comparison of Current Value 11 6 Timing of Updating of Current Value and Comparison of Current Value 11 6 1 Timing of updating of current value When pulses are input to an input terminal for a high speed counter the high speed counter executes up counting or down counting The current values of devices are updated when counting is input 11 6 2 Comparison of current value To compare and output the current value of a high speed counter the following two methods are available 1 Use of comparison instruction CMP band comparison instruction ZCP or contact comparison instruction Use the comparison instruction CMP band comparison instruction ZCP or contact co
245. Processing is possible even with a peripheral device version that is not compatible with the FX3G PLC Number Peripheral Device Of Registration Method FX3G Not FX3G zunfetpefisrm Lara Keyword Description Digits Compatible Compatible Reading writing 16 digit hexadecimal value 16 diait By selecting the keyword prohibited A to F 0 to 9 in registration level at the GX v Writing prohibited Ex Works2 etc setting screen All online operations FABO5C25DAECF293 prohibited AABCDEFF34509345 8 digit hexadecimal value beginning with A or 0 to 9 ExXJOABCDEF2 AABCD345 By entering the level at the 8 digit hexadecimal value beginning with 8 digit first character when entering B the keyword Ex B1234567 BABCDEF7 8 digit hexadecimal value beginning with p bud Ex C8904567 CDEF567F Keyword A 0 to 9 first char 1 Customer keyword Permanent PLC lock included However permanent PLC lock does not have a keyword input 19 11 2 Level specific restrictions screen list v Function enabled A Timer and counter setting values cannot be changed A Only monitor function is usable test function is not available Function disabled Keyword 8 digits Keyword 16 digits Label entered as the first i Selected at peripheral device setting screen character at Keyword input All online e Reading i Writing vu C operations rohibited writing prohibited p prohibited Function name X Top screen
246. RE it l E Memon niernation M 8148 Y001 Pulse output monitor i z q S M 8101 BUSY READY TE M 8102 TE Inverter Communication Function a o Me meS P8 M 8104 p aT Sa M E IMj8151 8 Inverter communication in one M 8105 ON during writing in RUN mode execution ch1 M 8106 3 M 8152 5 8 Inverter communication error ch1 D8152 M 8107 Not used M 8153 5 6 Inverter communication error latch D8153 M 8108 ch1 Output Refresh Error M 8154 Not used M 8109 Output refresh error D8109 M 8155 Inverter communication in M 8110 6 5 6 FX3G 4EX BD M 8157 Inverter communication error ch2 D8157 Inverter communication error latch M 8112 BXO input M 8158 ich D8158 Mens Xt input a M 8114 BX2 input i 5 Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN M 8115 BX3 input 6 Supported in Ver 1 10 or later 391 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers Appendix A Special Device List User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 N Correspond Correspond umber and i Number and i Operation and function ing special Operation and function ing special name name device device Advanced Function N N Network M8160 LE M 8161 1 8 bit process mode M 8181 Not used M 8162 High speed parallel link mode E M 8182 M 8163 i M 8183 Data communication error M 8164 Master station Data communication error M 8165 Not used M 8184
247. RS 232C RS 422 converter 3m D SUB 25Pin lt D SUB 25Pin APO OUR 9 10 For connection between personal computer and RS 232C RS 422 converter 3m Half pitch 14 pin lt gt D SUB 25Pin EE 9 10 For connection between personal computer and RS 232C RS 422 converter D SUB 9Pin lt gt D SUB 9Pin FX 232CAB 1 910 For connection between personal computer and RS 232C RS 422 converter FX3G 232 BD FX3U 232ADP MB 3m Half pitch 14 pin lt gt D SUB 9Pin FX 232CAB 2 3J 9 10 FOr connection between personal computer and RS 232C RS 422 converter FX3G 232 BD FX3U 232ADP MB RS 422 cable 1 5m D SUB 25Pin amp MINI DIN 8Pin FX 422CAB0 B 411 For connection between RS 232C RS 422 converter and FX3G programming port RS 422 FX3G 422 BD 1 5m MINI DIN 8Pin lt MINI DIN 8Pin Peer ee Bi 4 11 For connection between FX 30P and FX3G programming port RS 422 FX3G 422 BD 1 The following USB cables are applicable Model name Description MR J3USBCBL3M USB cable 3m 9 10 GT09 C30USB 5P USB cable to transfer personal computer data USB A plug 3m 9 10 3 2 3 Converters and interface 42 Model name Description RS 232C RS 422 Converters RS 232C RS 422 converter high speed type di FX 232AWC H Communication speed Applicable to 9 600 to 115 200 bps FX 232AW RS 232C RS 422 converters FX 232AWC Communication speed Applicable to 9 600 19 200 bps 1 When the programming software is not applicable to FX3G the
248. Relay output separate reference terminals Commons 4 terminal block 9 Total number of input Input output YT Transistor sink output terminal block D and output points extension Vien Transistor sink output terminal block 2 YT C Transistor sink output connector o YT ESS Transistor source output terminal block E YS Triac SSR output terminal block oO Number of Number of input output points points i EJ e Model name Total number mans MUNI INN Number of Input type Output type kdo dad EE Input Output extension type Input extension type S Output extension type Se pawaevesesu 8 8 Re emm Xaver ESSIUE Rp resin Terminalbock Q 1 Each value inside indicates the number of occupied points m 10 3 c a 37 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 Introduction of Products 3 1 List of Products and Interpretation of Model Names 3 1 4 Special function blocks For details of each product refer to the product manual 1 Analog control 5 Analog Model name Description Analog input FX3U 4AD 4ch ELE Voltage current input FX2N 2AD 2ch S Voltage current input FX2N 4AD 4ch LE Voltage current input FX2N 8AD 8h Voltage current temperature thermocouple input FX2N 4AD PT 4ch f Platinum resistance thermometer sensor input FX2N 4AD TC Ach Ll Temperature thermocouple input Analog output FX3U 4DA Doc 4 Volta
249. S S FX3G 24MT OSS Main units FX3G 40MT OS 18 FX3G 40MT OSS oco The total load current of resistance loads per common terminal S 3 5 FX3G 60MT LIS should be the following value S w FX3G 60MT OSS 1 point common 0 5A or less a l 4 points common 0 8A or less e EO 0 5A point 8 points common 1 6A or less S FX2N 48ET ESS UL Input output powered FX2N 48ET DSS For FX2N 16EYT C 1 9 extension units FX2N 32ET 16 points common 1 6A or less o wn O FX2N 48ET For FX2N 8EYT H 2 FX2N 48ET D 4 points common 2A or less FX2N 16EYT ESS UL 3 FX2N 8EYT ESS UL FX2N 16EYT 20 Output extension block FX2N 8EYT m FX2N 8EYT H 1A point El je FX2N 16EYT C 0 3A point w O QO o 179 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 Output Wiring Procedures 12 2 External Wiring of Transistor Output Sink Source Type 7 Open circuit leakage current 0 1mA or less 12 2 3 External wiring precautions 1 Protection circuit for load short circuits A short circuit at a load connected to an output terminal could cause burnout at the output element or the PCB To prevent this a protection fuse should be inserted at the output Use a load power supply capacity that is at least 2 times larger than the total rated fuse capacity 2 Contact protection circuit for inductive loads When an inductive load is connected connect a diode for commutation in parallel with the load as necessary The dio
250. S2 a o 2 h AND Compare S1 2 CS2 S OR Compare S1 S2 3c o2 gt OR Compare S1 gt S2 228 00 TOR compare SO GS ES o C OR Compare S1 2 S2 OR Compare S1 S2 OR Compare S1 gt S2 411 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers Appendix B Instruction List User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix B 3 Applied Instructions in Ascending Order of FNC Number FNC No External Device Communication Function 270 Inverter Status Check 271 Inverter Drive 272 Inverter Parameter Read 273 Inverter Parameter Write 275 Inverter Multi Command 276 MODBUS Read Write Extension File Register Control 290 Load From ER 294 Rewrite to ER 1 Supported in Ver 1 10 or later 2 Supported in Ver 1 40 or later 3 Supported in Ver 1 30 or later 412 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers Appendix C Discontinued models User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix C Discontinued models The table below lists the discontinued MELSEC F Series PLC models and programming tools described in this manual Discontinued model Production stop date Repair acceptance period FX3U 232ADP September 30 2013 Until September 30 2020 FX3U 485ADP FX PCS WIN E March 31 2013 FX 20P E December 31 2012 December 31 2019 FX 10DU E FX2N 16CCL M Until September 30 2019 FX 16EYT H TB Until August 31 2016 FX 10P Until June 30 2015 FX 232AW Until September 30 2011 F
251. Send sum D 8387 DE Not used D 8389 Operation mode display ch0 Ring Counter D 8398 Up operation ring counter of 0 to 2 147 483 647 D 8399 in units of 1ms 32 bit 2 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 ia Communication format setting oa D18402 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 D Remaining points of transmit data D18403 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 D Monitoring receive data points pisaa D 8405 Communication parameter display ch1 D 8406 D 8407 Not used D 8408 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 SE Time out time setting RS2 FNC 87 ch1 idis Header 1 and 2 Default STX RS2 FNC 87 ch1 ee Header 3 and 4 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Bisel Terminator 1 and 2 lt Default ETX gt RS2 FNC 87 ch1 pedis Terminator 3 and 4 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Pi Receive sum received data RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Pier Receive sum calculated result D 8416 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Send sum pers gas D 8419 Operation mode display ch 1 ms Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP Corres ponding special device M8398 M8402 M8403 2 ms ring counter D8399 D8398 will operate after M8398 turns ON Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Oz o D Number and EOS Number and d Correspond do 3 Content of register ing special Content of register ing special cub name i name D device device RS
252. Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition SJojunoo wh peedg uDi INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Use the product within the generic environment specifications described in section 4 1 of this manual Never use the product in areas with excessive dust oily smoke conductive dusts corrosive gas salt air CI2 H2S SO2 or NO2 1 flammable gas vibration or impacts or expose it to high temperature condensation or rain and wind If the product is used in such conditions electric shock fire malfunctions deterioration or damage may occur Do not touch the conductive parts of the product directly Doing so may cause device failures or malfunctions Install the product securely using a DIN rail or mounting screws Terminal block DIN rail only Main unit FX2N Series I O extension unit block FX2N FX3U Series special DIN rail or direct mounting function block and special adapter Install the product on a flat surface If the mounting surface is rough undue force will be applied to the PC board thereby causing nonconformities When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure that cutting and wiring debris do not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Be sure to remove the dust proof sheet from the PLC s ventilation port when installation work is completed Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfun
253. Side B gt OM V7 Yo V5 YS 3 V2 YT YO cum Side A e COM Y7 Ye YS Y4 Y3 Y2 Y YO Exe Side B X050 to X057 s Side A X040 to X047 E E co suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 279 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 Input Output Extension Blocks 16 12 EX2N 8EYT H Transistor Output 16 12 FX2N 8EYT H Transistor Output 16 12 1 Product specifications 280 The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications For external wiring refer to the following chapters Item Product type Rated voltage Item MASS Weight Other Item Output Points Connection type Output unit type External power supply Output circuit insulation Indication of output operation Resistance load Max load Inductive load Open circuit leakage current Min load OFF ON Response time Output circuit configuration ON OFF 1 Power supply specifications Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring FX2N 8EYT H FX2N extension block 24V DC supplied from main unit and input output powered extension unit 2 Weight and Other specifications External dimensions are described later FX2N 8EYT H 0 2kg 0 44lbs The extension cable is already connected to the extension block Accessories Label for indication of input output n
254. T 0 Optional cable or user fabricated cable Terminal block T 354 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 1 Outline 20 1 1 Product configuration or The connection destinations shown below are products which can be connected by connector lt connector GD cables An individual wire type can also be used for wiring to the terminal blocks of PLC side input output products Number of Number of A Drive Power Output Connection Destination Input Points Supply Points Model Name Buum nding N FX 16E TB Ciena C ts directly t ees NEVIS EX2N 16EX C sink input 32 input points PLC input output 1 FX2N 16EYT C sink output FX 32E TB 32 output points terminals 1 3 or 16 input amp 16 output points FX 16EX A1 TB Lo339 Tox 100V AC input type FX2N 16EX C sink input 4 sz O gt FX 16EYR TB Lx Relay output type FX2N 16EYT C sink output 24V DC 80mA a 5 m FX 16EYS TB ENEMIES Triac output type FX2N 16EYT C sink output PIR P s Transistor output sink 24V DC o P EO E 1 A power supply for the input circuit is required when connected to the FX2N 16EX C 83 The current consumption is shown in the table below Power Supply Voltage Current Consumption 1 5 FX2N 16EX C 24V DC 112mA E See 2 The applications shown below are not supported ass Oo c Unsupported Applications ie
255. T EG e FX2N 48ET 2N BjExtension power supply unit FX3U 1PSU 5V 9 Power supply unit The configuration is remote I O for CC Link FXon 20PSU N Remote I O i FX Series terminal block 34 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 Introduction of Products 3 1 List of Products and Interpretation of Model Names 3 1 1 Main units The main unit incorporates a CPU memory input and output terminals and power supply To establish a system at least one main unit is necessary FXsc OO M 7 LH Series name Total number of input and output points Model name Total number Number se Number of Input type Output type of points input points output points Incorporating power supply CPU memory and input output pum supply Input output type Connection on terminal block eR ES AC power supply 24V DC sink source input Relay output eT ES AC power supply 24V DC sink source input Transistor sink output e ESS AC power supply 24V DC sink source input Transistor source output eR DS DC power supply 24V DC sink source input Relay output eT DS DC power supply 24V DC sink source input Transistor sink output e DSS DC power supply 24V DC sink source input Transistor source output Main unit paia Number of Number of input output points points Connection form AC power supply common to 24V DC sink and sour
256. T OWIU liodie pides E Ui onte dein dortia qued iata because derent Li c iip cS SIDE Ud 382 21 6 T PROTEGT SWIEGEESOLDUDO ui ice a ice SCIEN dau eR pM LM RUN MEINTE 382 216 2 PROTEGTSWIICDEODOFGOL 111 css tet roo nasa Peer ao Eoo dec Spotted eeoa eeri eaei ea anlai 382 21 6 3 Precautions when setting and using the switch eessesssseeneene 382 21 7 Memory Cassette lt gt PLC EEPROM Memory Transfers by Loader Function 383 21A WAO WR 326s PEC ERE 383 231 452 Reading RD 32L sS P B asa a a a cn car 384 21 8 Operation FrecautlonS srta oeste E E A A te Suesx uS cdd UIS 384 22 Battery 385 221 Balten PulDOSeuiuietu dee E EEE NEE REE EEEE EAEE Lo er te NC ed 385 22 2 SBOCIIC HOD IS sar aa e a a Ee E ELE ML ea a 385 22 9 elung Ior Baltery oranan aa a aTi 386 VES Aachino LMC Dale e 386 22 3 2 Setting the battery mode using GX Works2 ssssssssssssseeeeeennenne nennen 386 12 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents 22 4 Batey dPiariglits aa pes adot edendo M hue aaa I bbod totae Missed a din Eee aeos 387 22 4 1 Battery life and replacement guidelines sees 387 22 4 2 Reading the date of manufacture sssssssssssssssssesseeeeene nennen nennen nnne nnns 387 22 4 3 Special battery low voltage device amp notification program example 387 22 0 Ba
257. The file register D current value cannot be directly monitored at the display module Specified 3 Timer T TN 0 1000 Specified 4 Counter C CO to C199 C 0 CN 0 CV 1000 Specified C200 to C255 CN CV 1000 Specified 340 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 14 Specified Device Monitor Function 5 Input X Output Y Auxiliary Relay M State S X010 34567 Specified M1000 34567 Specified 19 14 8 Test operation on specified device monitor screen To perform the test operation on the specified device monitor screen it is necessary to turn ON MA A in the system information system signal 2 The device test operation is same as the operation in the monitor test mode Refer to Subsection 19 6 1 for the operation method 341 SJojunoo peeds y6 q Buum nding N 10 Buum OO Ses snoueA I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1S9 peJeMod jdinoandu Q1 spun uoisuejx3 uda syoolg UOISU9 X3 dnoandu C N yun A ddng Jamod UOISUS X3 suondo pue sjun gt uoisuex3 240 OQO 77 nes D lt ES o c D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 15 Screen saver function 19 15 Screen saver function The screen saver function disp
258. X 232AWC Until June 30 2011 413 9jlesse2 NO JOUJOJN N apeg IND uoneuodsueJ Ssejejs Jequieu ng ui seuegeq Co c ce e g Co c ce e Co O D Q m e D S o p o 5 o e c O c o ES o sj pow penumnuoosiq Kieyeq 10 suonneoaJg UJ jo BuypueH TI FX3G Series Programmable Controllers Appendix C Discontinued models User s Manual Hardware Edition MEMO 414 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers Appendix D Precautions for Battery Transportation User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix D 1 Regulated FX3G Series products Appendix D Precautions for Battery Transportation When transporting lithium batteries follow the transportation regulations The batteries for the FX3G Series CPU unit are classified as shown in following table Appendix D 1 Regulated FX3G Series products 1 Included modules and batteries None FX3G Series CPU units do not include batteries when shipped from the factory 2 Batteries to be built in modules spare parts and optional parts Product supply Lithium Content Product name Battery type gram unit Mass gram unit FXsU 32BL lithium metal battery 30 1 The value indicates the mass with packaging Appendix D 2 Transport guidelines Comply with IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations IMDG code and the local transport regulations when transporting products listed above Also consult with the shipping carrier
259. X Works2 GX Developer and FX PCS WIN E Abbreviation of programming software packages SWLIDNC GXW2 J and SWLIDNC GXW2 E Abbreviation of programming software packages SWLID5C GPPW J and SWLID5C GPPW E Abbreviation of programming software packages FX PCS WIN and FX PCS WIN E Generic name for the following models FX 30P FX 20P FX 20P E Generic name for the following models FX 232AW FX 232AWC FX 232AWC H Abbreviation of FX 485PC IF Generic name for GT16 GT15 GT14 GT11 and GT10 Generic name for GOT A900 Series and GOT F900 Series Generic name for GOT A900 Series Generic name for GOT F900 Series Abbreviation of FX3G Series User s Manual Hardware Edition Abbreviation of FX3S FX3G FX3GC F X3U FX3UC Series Programming Manual Basic amp Applied Instruction Edition Abbreviation of FX Series User s Manual Data Communication Edition Abbreviation of FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Series User s Manual MODBUS Serial Communication Edition Abbreviation of FX3S FX3G FX3GC F X3U FX3UC Series User s Manual Analog Control Edition Abbreviation of FX3S FX3G F X3GC F X3U FX3UC Series User s Manual Positioning Control Edition FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 Features and Part Names 2 1 Major Features Features and Part Names Major Features 1 Basic functions Up to 256 input output points The total number of inputs and outputs 128 points maximum directly connected to the PLC
260. X2N 8EX FX2N 8EX UA1 UL FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX2N 8EYT ESS UL FX2N 8EYR FX2N 8EYT FX2N 8EYT H FX2N 8EYR S ES UL FX2N 16EX ES UL FX2N 16EX FX2N 16EX C FX2N 16EXL C F FX2N 16EYR ES UL FX2N 16EYR FX2N 16EYT ESS UL FX2N 16EYT FX2N 16EYT C FX2N 16EYS Unit mm inches Mounting hole pitch W 140 5 52 172 6 78 210 8 27 Unit mm inches Mounting hole pitch W 39 1 54 Refer to the figure shown left 111 uononpoJu NO SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee OO uononpoJu jonpoug suoneoyiods I oO seone Jeyeudueg pue uoISJ9A wasis CQ uoneJn6ijuo j z5 a2 Gt co ZS O ZS O n uonejeisu BULA A ddng Jamod ue uonesedaid h Buum ndu CO p FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 Installation In Enclosure 8 5 Procedures for Installing Directly with M4 Screws 5 Special function unit block G H I or J Unit mm inches 4 4 4 Mounting hole pitch W 0 106 W 0 16 75 2 96 0 16 FX2N 2AD SERE gt lt gt lt FX2N 2DA 39 1 54 y T Qo E FX2N 64CL M m c FX2N 32CCL lO tO O iv LO i x LO FX3U 4AD G oe H FX3U 4DA ioo Pole FX2N 4AD o M i Te G FX2N 4DA ae Fo l 4 een FX2N 4AD PT j T FX2N 4AD TC 51 2 01 i FX2N 5A ANB NN eh Oo laa ES FX2N 2LC ma
261. X2N 8EYR FX2N 16EYR 1 3 Product type FX2N extension block lt lt Rated voltage 24V DC supplied from main unit and input output powered extension unit d 0 ee 2 Weight and Other specifications External dimensions are described later Item FX2N 8EYR FX2N 16EYR MASS Weight 0 2kg 0 44lbs 0 3kg 0 66lbs The extension cable is already connected to the extension block I Other Accessories Label for indication of input output number 3 3 z The DIN46277 rail width 35 mm 1 38 or direct installation gee o2 3 Output specifications Relay output type Ei Output Points 16 points 9 Connection type Vertical terminal block M3 screws A 8 Output type Relay D d S External power supply 250V AC 30V DC or less E Output circuit insulation Mechanical insulation 2 Indication of output operation Supplying power to the relay coil will light the LED indicator lamp on panel 2A point The total resistance load current per common should be as follows 4 output points common 8A or less Resistance load Max load e 8 output points common 8A or less 80VA Inductive load For the product life refer to Subsection 14 4 3 For cautions on external wiring refer to Subsection 12 1 3 1 7 Open circuit leakage current com Min load 5V DC 2mA reference values 292 OFFON Approx 10ms x a Response time eS ON OFF Approx 10ms 5 lt oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO Output circuit configuration
262. ZR FNC150 TBL FNC152 ZRN FNC156 PLSV FNC157 DRVI FNC158 DRVA FNC159 1 1 Number of pulse width cycle measurement inputs x 40kHz Calculation of overall frequency Obtain the overall frequency using the following expression Overall frequency gt Sum of used frequency of 1 phase counters Sum of used frequency of 2 phase counters Example of calculation Example1 When HSCS HSCR or HSZ instruction is not used and instructions related to positioning DRVI instruction YOOO and DRVA instruction YOO1 are used Overall frequency 200kHz 2 axes x 40kHz 120kHz Contents of use SOKHz is input SOKHZ is input 10kHz is input okHz is input 115kHz lt 120kHz Overall frequency Counter No C235 1 phase 1 count input C236 1 phase 1 count input e SST N Nr C237 1 phase 1 count input C253 2 phase 2 count input Total Example2 When HSCS HSCR or HSZ instruction is not used and instructions related to positioning DRVI instruction Y000 are used Number of pulse width cycle measurement inputs X003 Overall frequency 200 kHz 1 axes 1 input x 40 kHz 120 kHz Contents of use SOKHZ is input SOKHz is input 100kHz lt 120kHz Overall frequency Counter No C235 1 phase 1 counting C236 1 phase 1 counting Total 167 SJejuno2 peeds ubiH Buum nding N 10 Buum OO Ses snoueA I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua
263. a 185 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses 186 13 1 Notes about Examples of Wiring essssessssssssseeeeeenneenennnnneen menm nnnm nnn 187 13 2 Digital Switch DSW Instructions FNC72 BIN Instructions FNC19 188 13 2 1 When DSW instructions are USC cccccccccssseececcesseeccececeeecsuuseeecsesesecseeueeesssaaeeessanseeeeeess 188 13 2 2 When BIN instructions are Use i uds ioo laches dut oat peat ono euo OU A ee SO DRO Dex DL aE RE aE Fa RUTAS UP RU dE 191 13 3 Input Matrix MTR Instructions FNC 52 eeeseeeseseesseeenneeennnnnennnnnn nn 192 13 4 Seven Segment with Latch SEGL Instructions FNC74 BCD Instructions FNC18 195 13 4 1 When SEGL instructions are used cecccccceeeceecceeseccecceeseececeueeeesceuseeesseuaseeessseeessuaueeeesenas 195 13 4 2 When BCD instructions are used coerente ese Debet ee bte eet ieee eee eet iet 197 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting 199 14 1 Preparation for Test Operation oio E ot aee sry TEE ese Fco re pee aee poeta reso tbid ee droeves ker aria ai 200 14 1 1 Preliminary inspection power OFF ccccccccsececeeeceeceeeceseeeceseeeeeseaeeeessuaeesseaeessaeeeeeseeeeseeeas 200 14 1 2 Connection to built in programming connector RS 422 sseseeeseseeneeeernnn 200 14 1 3 Connection to built in programming connector USB cccccceceseee
264. a t n Potest toas bos a Pasos ti usto t ebcer ta EIE 4T 43 1 24 VDO Inp t SINK SOURCE vedo casae deco Perte pe taeda EOM e c oU ii ese send ii aan e ee oes 4T 5 IESU qoem Ss PSC CATIONS HE 48 qa eldy oHlpE scere tdt cee eer re rere ee nO e cli atem utu dep a er Po er 48 AA 2 TRANSISTOR OURO 220 se sas c E 49 4 5 Performance oDeclifiCallOFiS anessan a tetas teh acunara Sacdats eccasebatucbatelatanmaeeemes 50 4 6 External Dimensions Weight Accessories Installation cccccccceccseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeenees 52 DT VITE UIE neces act cone tae doo E auo E es coude eo deer eau tes dene a bud ot dbxndee dut SA Bere cus dut ues d 02 2 Ae Terminal MAY OUI pet m 53 4 7 1 Interpretation of terminal block lAYOUL ccccccsseeecccceeseecceeeeceecceeececseeueeeessaueeesseaaeeesseanensesenias 53 n TAE o et T TT E 54 A MTS P eccL TN Pcr 54 BAG EROS AO MEN os e 55 BT co Fe SOO OM Meret aires Petes septs E 55 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability 56 SNB enano Uie mmm 56 5 1 1 Manufacturer s serial number check Method ccccccceecceceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeecesaeeeeseeeeesaeeeesseeeetanees 56 9 1 2 VWEFSION CHECK MENO sarre they Em 57 Shko V SFSION UD OTA Se NSOV ERES 57 5 2 Programming TOOrAPPICA DIN sesos a Aia 58 5 2 1 Applicable versions of progra
265. abled and all outputs are turned off External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that when an error occurs in a relay triac or transistor output device the output could be held either on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line As a guideline lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to peripheral device connectors Failure to do so may result in wire damage breakage or PLC failure WIRING PRECAUTIONS NWARN ING Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock 121 seone Jeyeudueg pue uoISJ9A uononpoJu NO SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee OO uononpoJu jonpoug suoneoyiods I oO ues C uoneJn6ijuo N SON PUN SON jndinondu 5
266. ad I OFF ON 0 2ms or less 200mA at 24V DC Response time ON OFF 0 2ms or less 200mA at 24V DC peJewog jndinogindu sun uoisuejx3 Output circuit configuration s A common number applies to the of V syoo g UOISU9 X3 dnoandu C 15 4 2 External dimensions N FX2N 32ET ESS UL com 3 2 4 5 mounting holes 4 S D Unit mm inches oo S Fe s lt SOK ES KES eS Ke KES LES KES KS Ke LES KES ES BULL x Ss QV 0 4 6 X 2 4 6 l MITSUBISHI 8582686 z a z 1 8 IN S 1234587 ces POWER LO LO v c LO eo eo OEG 2 o Gag 012 4 6 7 c o5 g MESECFX 32ET 7 89 985884 eo ume mem aibi 99 0 09 9 99 co T O e 2 TI 5 a VO Yi Y3 V1 Y5 TT V2 Y1 Ys V3 Y5 brd O UUUUUUUUUUU elealre3re3lele3eleleieleleieile E eu e G9 fes ee 23 3 ah es es ah 9 G3 G3 1 140 5 52 mounting hole pitch 150 5 91 9 0 36 1 ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 233 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 4 FX2N 32ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET DSS FX2N A8ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET DSS 4 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches 2 00000000000 Q M
267. adnoandu OQ spun uoisuejx3 uda 490 UOISU9 X3 jdnoandu C N yun A ddng Jamod UOISUS X3 suondo pue sjun gt uoisuex3 240 OQO 77 nes D lt ES o c D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 6 Monitor Test Mode 2 Timer T counter C 1 Perform a monitor mode operation to display the device where the Monitor screen test function is to be used However when not using it in a program a setting value is displayed as Test function cannot be used Refer to Subsection 19 6 2 for monitor function operation 2 Press the OK button to display the cursor then select the test subject selection screen To cancel the operation and return to the monitor screen press ESC 3 Use the buttons to select the test subject To cancel the operation and return to the monitor screen press ESC Test Subject Test Description 1 Contact forced ON OFF 2 Current value change 3 Setting value change 4 Hold the OK button for 1 second or longer to register the test subject selection and switch to the test mode To cancel the operation and return to the test subject selection screen press ESC Test Subject Status when OK is hold for 1 second or longer 1 No change 2 3 5 Operation varies as shown below depending on the selected test subject a For contac
268. al dimensions diagram o For the external dimensions refer to Section 4 6 4 i i 8 5 4 Installation of input output powered extension unit block and special function block 3 Make mounting holes in the mounting surface Rear panel Rear panel D according to the external dimensions diagram TA Push in the DIN rail mounting hook A in the right 2i figure of the input output extension block If the DIN rail mounting hook is not pushed in the screw hole is 6 covered and the block cannot be mounted oT For input output powered extension units 8 point type input 5 output extension blocks except for the FX2zN 8EYR S ES UL S and special function blocks this operation is unnecessary T Fit the input output extension block B in the z5 right figure based on the holes and secure it cS with M4 screws C in the right figure EE The positions and number of screws depend on the product Refer to the external dimensions diagram For the external dimensions of the input output powered extension unit refer to Chapter 15 For the external dimensions of the input output extension block refer to Chapter 16 For the external dimensions of the special function blocks refer to Chapter 18 uonejeisu OX BuulM A ddng Jewog ue uoneJedaJg h Buum ndu CO p 113 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 6 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices
269. alog cables should not be laid in the same trunking or cable conduit as high voltage cabling Where possible users should run analog cables separately Good cable shielding should be used When terminating the shield at Earth ensure that no earth loops are accidentally created When reading analog values EMC accuracy can be improved by averaging the readings This can be achieved either through functions on the analog special adapters boards blocks or through a user s program in the FX3G Series PLC main unit FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 1 Introduction User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 1 Introduction of Manuals uononpoJu 1 Introduction NO This manual explains the procedures for selecting the system components main unit specifications and procedures for installing the main unit specifications for the input output powered extension units blocks and procedures for adding input output devices and procedures for operating the display module etc FX3G PLCs can make various kinds of control in combination with the main unit functions and many extension devices expansion board special adapters and special function blocks The detailed explanation of the sequence instructions communication control analog control and positioning control are given in separate manuals For information on manual organization refer to Subsection 1 1 2 SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee OO zm 1 4 Introduction of Manuals S 1 4
270. ames Liquid crystal screen Q ESC button O button O button O OK button Cut off the part when lt using an expansion board at the same time MITSUBISHI FX3G 5DM b emu ew meee wee ee eee eee ee ee eee d Functions of operation buttons The display module has 4 operation buttons as shown in the following table Name of button Function of operation button ESC Use this button to cancel the operation and to return to the previous screen Use this button to move the cursor or to set a numeric value Use this button to move the cursor or to set a numeric value OK Use this button to select an item or to determine the set numeric value 19 1 4 External Dimensions Unit mm inches MITSUBISHI FX3G 5DM 49 4 1 95 308 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 2 Installation and Removal 11 19 2 Installation and Removal SF Be sure that the power is OFF when installing the display module F 19 2 1 Installation 12 when the expansion board connector conversion adapter is not used together The FX3G 40MT ES is used as the main unit in this example d Remove the top cover a Remove the top cover A in the figure on the right as shown in the right figure 10 Buum OO Ses snoueA Caution Display module cannot attach in the top cover S sid
271. amming tool PROTECT switch When the memory cassette is used Make sure to set the PROTECT switch of the memory cassette to OFF shown right For details on handling of the memory cassette refer to Chapter 21 Verify the sequence program Verify that the program has been correctly written to the PLC Execute PLC diagnosis Check for errors in the PLC main body with the PLC diagnostic function of the programming tool For details on the PLC diagnosis with the display module or GX Works2 refer to Section 14 6 For details on the PLC diagnosis with the GX Developer refer to GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual For details on the PLC diagnosis with the FX 30P refer to FX 30P Operation Manual 202 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 2 Running and Stopping Procedures Power ON 14 2 Running and Stopping Procedures Power ON os 14 2 1 Methods of running and stopping FX3G PLCs can be started or stopped by any of the following three methods 1 2 Two of the methods can be combined O The RUN STOP switch is located under the peripheral device connector cover E 1 Operation with built in RUN STOP switch E Operate the RUN STOP switch on the front panel of the main unit to start and RUN STOP switch stop the PLC refer to the right figure ja L 1 3 Turn the switch to RUN and the PLC will s
272. and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes 14 6 4 Error Code List and Action QI y o Oo When a program error occurs in the PLC the error code is stored in special data registers D8060 to D8067 BS D8438 and D8449 Take action based on the following information E PLC Erori operation Contents of error Action 1 2 code at error occurrence 2 xe I O configuration error M8060 D8060 The head number of unconnected I O devic Example When X020 is unconnected 1 0 2 BCD conversion value 1 3 lt Ex Connes EE NEN Device number 10 to 177 Unconnected l O relay numbers are programmed T ample Beara The PLC continues its operation Modify the program check cda 1020 P 1 Input X 0 Output Y wiring connection or add the appropriate unit block e e D o e 1st to 3rd digits Device number Ath digit I O type 1 input X 0 output Y Example When 1020 is stored in D8060 Inputs X020 and later are unconnected Aza Oo oD Serial communication error 2 M8438 D8438 S a x D oO 3801 Parity overrun or framing error a 3802 Communication character error 3803 Communication data sum check error 1 5 3804 Communication data format error e Ethernet communication inverter communication mous computer link and programming x29 3805 Ensure the parameters are correctly set according to their P 3806 Communication tim
273. andling the 4 ch analog input special Supplied with FX3U 4AD JY997D20701 function block i Installation Manual When using refer to FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC product Series User s Manual Analog Control Edition supplied FX2N 2AD Procedures for handling the 2 ch analog input special with JY992D74701 User s Guide function block product Supplied FX2N 4AD Procedures for handling the 4 ch analog input special with i JY992D65201 i User s Guide function block product Supplied FX2N 8AD Procedures for handling the 8 ch analog input special with JY992D86001 function block to be used also for thermocouple 09R608 produci User s Manual input Separate volume Supplied Procedures for handling the 4 ch analog input special wi AAR JY997D13901 24aPter product User s Manual When using refer to FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC series User s Manual Analog Control Edition Supplied Procedures for handling the 4 ch Pt100 temperature with FX3U 4AD PT ADP JY997D14701 sensor input special adapter i product User s Manual When using refer to FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC series User s Manual Analog Control Edition Supplied Procedures for handling the 4 ch Pt100 temperature with FX3U 4AD PTW ADP JY997D29101 sensor input special adapter i product User s Manual When using refer to FX3S FX3G F X3GC FX3U FX3UC Series User s Manual Analog Control Edition Supplied with TAE Procedures for handling the 4 ch Pt100 temperature i User
274. anual Hardware Edition 3 1 List of Products and Interpretation of Model Names 3 1 2 Input output powered extension units 36 The input output powered extension unit incorporates a power supply circuit and input and output terminals It is designed to add input and output terminals It can supply power to extension devices connected on the downstream side FGN OOELI LI LII Series name i ae Classification 1 None Not compliant with standard UL Compliant with standard Power supply Input output type Connection on terminal block R AC Power supply 24V DC sink input Relay output S AC Power supply 24V DC sink input Triac SSR output T AC Power supply 24V DC sink input Transistor sink output R ES AC Power supply 24V DC sink source input Relay output T ESS AC Power supply 24V DC sink source input Transistor source output R UA1 AC Power supply 100V AC input Relay output R DS DC Power supply 24V DC sink source input Relay output T DSS DC Power supply 24V DC sink source input Transistor source output R D DC Power supply 24V DC sink input Relay output T D DC Power supply 24V DC sink input Transistor sink output Number of Number of input output points points Connection Model name Total number Number MN onis LEM Number of Input type Output type FAM of points input points output points AC power supply common to 24V DC sink and source sas FX2N 48ET ESS UL B EN
275. apter 22 210 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting 14 5 Troubleshooting with LEDs 14 5 3 ERR LED on flashing off State of LED State of PLC 1 On A watchdog timer error may have occurred or the hardware of the PLC may be damaged 2 3 One of the following errors has occurred in the PLC Flashing e Parameter error e Syntax error Ladder error Off No errors that stop the PLC have occurred Remedies Stop the PLC and re apply power If ERR LED goes off a watchdog timer error may have occurred Take any of the following measures Review the program The maximum value D8012 of the scan time should not exceed the setting D8000 of the watchdog timer Check that the input used for input interruption or pulse catch is not being abnormally turned on and off in one scan Check that the frequency of the pulse duty of 5096 input to the high speed counter does not exceed the specified range Add the WDT instructions Add some WDT instructions to the program and reset the watchdog timer several times in one scan Change the setting of the watchdog timer Change the watchdog timer setting D8000 in the program so that the setting is larger than the maximum value of the scan time D8012 Remove the PLC and supply power to it from another power supply on a desk If the ERR LED goes off noise may have affected t
276. ard e RF immunity e Fast transients e ESD e Conducted Power magnetic fields Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard e Radiated electromagnetic field e Fast transient burst Electrostatic discharge e Damped oscillatory wave Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard EMI e Radiated Emission e Conducted Emission EMS e Radiated electromagnetic field e Fast transient burst Electrostatic discharge e High energy surge e Voltage drops and interruptions e Conducted RF Power frequency magnetic field FX3G Series Programmable Controllers Standards User s Manual Hardware Edition Requirement for Compliance with LVD directive The following products have shown compliance through direct testing of the identified standards below and design analysis through the creation of a technical construction file to the European Directive for Low Voltage 2006 95 EC when used as directed by the appropriate documentation Type Programmable Controller Open Type Equipment Models MELSEC FX3cG series manufactured from November 1st 2008 FX3G x xMT ES Where x x indicates 14 24 40 60 from December 1st 2008 FX3G Xx X MR ES Where xx indicates 14 24 40 60 from March 1st 2009 FX3G X MT ESS Where x x indicates 14 24 40 60 from December 1st 2009 FX36 Xx x MR DS Where x x indicates 14 24 40 60 Standard Remark EN61131 2 2007 Programmable controllers The equipment has been assessed as a component
277. ass D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit and extension units with a wire 2 mm or thicker Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems refer to section 9 3 Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product Connect the AC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual BuutM 1ndino If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out 1 3 When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits sz Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions ei Make sure to properly wire the FX3G Series main unit and FX2N FX3U Series extension equipment in accordance with the following oo E O precautions D B 62 Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or le
278. aster cannot be used together with FX3U 16CCL M FX3U 64CCL Only one FX3U 64CCL unit can be connected to a single PLC main unit When any of these products is connected to a FX2N Series input output powered extension unit the current consumption is restricted The total current consumption of FX2N 2AD and FX2N 2DA must be the following value or less FX2N 32bLI 190mA or less FX2N A48ELI 300mA or less FX3U 16CCL FX2N 16CCL M FX2N 2AD FX2N 2DA 6 4 5 Extension cable One extension cable can be used in a system The FX2N CNV BC is required when the extension block is connected e FXoN 65EC 650mm 25 59 e FXoN 30EC 300mm 11 81 75 UONnOnpoJjU NO SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee OO uononpoJu jonpoug suoneoyiods I oO OQ U DDD o O29 no gt a gt o wa skS uoneJn6ijuo N SON HUN SON jndinondu uonejesu OO Bulli A ddnsg Jamod ue uonesedaid h Buum ndu CO p FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 5 Expansion of Main Unit 6 5 Expansion of Main Unit 76 The extendibility of the main unit varies depending on the power supply type AC power supply type or DC power supply type Select proper extension devices in accordance with the power supply type of the main unit used In the case of AC power type main unit 1 The allowable extension to the AC po
279. at when an error occurs in a relay triac or transistor output device the output could be held either on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION e Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line As a guideline lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to peripheral device connectors Failure to do so may result in wire damage breakage or PLC failure WIRING PRECAUTIONS NWARN ING e Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock 172 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition oz F epo N D D ok WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not supply power to the 24 and 24V terminals 24V DC service power supply on the main unit or extension units Doing so may cause damage to the product Perform cl
280. ation is continued Check whether the target setting contents are correct Abnormal PID input variation alarm set value or output Alarm output is not given PID operation is continued 6749 de variation alarm set value Set value lt 0 Check whether the target setting contents are correct Azz O D Auto tuning is finished PID operation is started 53 x The deviation at start of auto tuning is 150 or less P ss 6750 Step response method The deviation at end of auto tuning is 1 3 or more of the 9 o Improper auto tuning result deviation at start of auto tuning IS Check the measured value and target value and then execute auto tuning again 1 5 Auto tuning is forcibly finished PID operation is not num started A Qo The operation direction estimated from the measured valueat 2 6 6751 Continues Step response method the start of auto tuning was different from the actual operation S5 operation Auto tuning operation direction mismatch direction of the output during auto tuning 5S Correct the relationship among the target value output value 6 for auto tuning and the measured value and then execute auto tuning again 1 6 Auto tuning is finished PID operation is not started 2 uE Because the set value was fluctuated during auto tuning auto So 6752 lt Step response method gt tuning was not executed correctly 5 2 Improper auto tuning result Set the sampling time to a value larger than the ou
281. batteries None FX3G Series CPU units do not include batteries when shipped from the factory 2 Batteries to be built in modules spare parts and optional parts Product name Battery type FX3U 32BL Lithium Manganese Dioxide Battery 417 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Warranty Warranty 418 1 Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis
282. becomes considerably shorter than the above conditions when the rush overcurrent is shut down For precautions on using inductive loads refer to Subsection 20 7 4 2 Some types of inductive loads generate rush current 5 to 15 times the stationary current at activation Make sure that the rush current does not exceed the current corresponding to the maximum specified resistance load 2 Lamp load Lamp loads generally generate rush current 10 to 15 times the stationary current Make sure that the rush current does not exceed the current corresponding to the maximum specified resistance load 3 Capacitive load Capacitive loads can generate rush current 20 to 40 times the stationary current Make sure that the rush current does not exceed the current corresponding to the maximum specified resistance load Capacitive loads such as capacitors may be present in electronic circuit loads including inverters For the maximum specified resistance load refer to Subsection 20 7 1 368 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 8 FX 16EYT TB FX 16EYT H TB 20 8 FX 16EYT TB FX 16EYT H TB os The FX 16EYT H TB is used by connecting it to the FX2N series output extension block transistor 2 Output Connector Connectable models FX2N 16EYT C sink output 1 2 e The applications shown below are not supported B Unsupported Applications E Pulse Y output PLSY instruction accelerati
283. below e Inthe case of the main units 40 60 point type Connector conversion adapter lo SR 9o 7 o A Ro Wy Da Uy S i NE We Ps Available connection position BD1 1st position BD1 2nd position BD2 1st position BD2 2nd position Model name Expansion board Except for the FX3G 4EX BD v v FX3G 2bEYT BD FX3G 8AV BD FX3G 4EX BD FX3G 2EYT BD P g FX3G 8AV BD Connector conversion adapter 2 g FX3G CNV ADP gre gee Memory cassette Display module T ia 9 4 b 68 A 5 v When the memory cassette and display module are used together the transfer function of the memory cassette is not available Use the display module to transfer data stored in the memory cassette Can be connected in any position however only one device can be connected at one time The memory cassette cannot be connected when the display module is connected to the BD2 1st position Only the BD2 1st position and the BD2 2nd position can be used for connection Only one display module can be connected to the main unit The display module cannot be connected when the memory cassette is connected to the BD2 1st position FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 1 Configuration of a Whole System e In the case of the main units 14 24 point type Connector conversion adapter NS aS ES Q
284. ble Controllers 17 Extension Power Supply Unit User s Manual Hardware Edition 17 1 Outline 17 Extension Power Supply Unit DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NWARN ING e Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents 1 Most importantly have the following an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits 2 Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that the output current of the 24V DC service power supply varies depending on the model and the absence presence of extension blocks If an overload occurs the voltage automatically drops inputs in the PLC are disabled and all outputs are turned off External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that when an error occurs in a relay triac or transistor output device the output
285. button to finish the setting uonejesu OO BULA A ddng Jamod ue uonesedaid h Buum ndu CO p 65 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 6 Other Peripheral Equipment Applicability 5 6 Other Peripheral Equipment Applicability 5 6 1 Other Peripheral Equipment Applicability Model name GOT1000 Series F940WGOT Applicability Remarks Standard monitor OS communication driver and option OS which support the FX3G PLC are required For details refer to the GOT manual This series is subject to the following restrictions when connected using unsupported standard monitor OS communication driver or option OS Applicable Contents of restrictions Programming is enabled only in the function ranges such as instructions device ranges and program sizes available in the FX1N and FX1NC PLCs The list editor function for MELSEC FX is not available When using the list editor function for MELSEC FX upgrade the standard monitor OS communication driver and option OS to the version compatible with the FX3G PLC Check the applicability of other items in the GOT manual Not available The following restriction applies when connected F940GOT F940 Handy GOT Not available Contents of restrictions Programming is enabled only in the function ranges such as instructions device ranges F930GOT K F920GOT K ET 94
286. by turning on or off 1 phase 1 count Jp 15154141 M8235 to M8245 input DOWN ON Down counting OFF Up counting Up count or down count 1 phase 2 count The counting direction can be checked with M8246 to M8250 input ON Down counting OFF Up counting Automatic up count or down count according to change in input status of phase A B i idi L The counting direction can be checked with M8251 to M8255 p Phase B d l ON Down counting Up counting Down counting OFF Up counting 11 2 2 High speed counter device notations The input terminal assignments for FX3G PLC high speed counters can be switched when used in combination with a special auxiliary relay This section classifies these high speed counter devices under the following notations Note that an OP input cannot be programmed Standard Device Numbers Switched Device Numbers C248 C248 OP C253 C253 OP C254 C254 OP 11 2 3 Cautions in connecting mating device Encoders with the output forms in the following table can be connected to the input terminals The encoders may not function correctly depending on electrical compatibility Check the specifications in advance Voltage output type encoders and absolute encoders cannot be connected to the high speed counter input terminals Terminals for connecting Output form that can be directly connected Input terminals of main unit Open oollector transistor output form applicable to 24V DC 160
287. c dte eae l ac teo thee oil ied DA Pu 266 16 8 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement c cceccceeseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeesaaeeeeseeeeeeeeeaas 267 16 9 3 External dimensions 5 cae eva roo oie a ee ianua sedet eiut tesi eel a 269 16 9 FX2N 8EYT ESS UL FX2N 16EYT ESS UL Transistor Output eseeeussse 270 16 9 1 Frod ct specifications eieo seine ds a e deren nn ddnde etta esee arn 270 16 9 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement cccceecceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeesaaeeeeeeseeeeeeeaas 271 16 9 3 EXT RMalSGIIMGN SIONS eresien Pessac en soeuase E TCR RDUM dresse gne ut d coss quest ceca cu arose t dcr do que 272 16 10 FX2N 8EYR FX2N 16EYR Relay Output nennen nenas 213 16 10 1 IPROGUECTSDeCINGAllONS srra oe a ee a ee Ae Sete tus cd UU 273 16 10 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement cccccccseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesaeeeesseaeeeeeeas 274 16 T0 5 External aimierisioliS uc ede een eC hes eeu conet cure ca Eth et Ea emu co eeepc leot det tete beau E Enea 2 5 16 11 FX2N 8EYT FX2N 16EYT FX2N 16EYT C Transistor Output eeeeeeeeesseeese 2 6 16 11 10 Product SDecIfICatlOriS utes boxudi a a aa ae 276 16 11 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement cccccccseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeesaaeeeeeseaeeeeeeas 277 RGF Uo EUS Fal CUTS I See aoe ae I 278 16 12 FX2N 8EYT H Transistor Output s
288. c shock j Use the battery for memory backup correctly in conformance to this manual ea Use the battery only for the specified purpose S Connect the battery correctly D and a GOT 1 5 Doing so may cause destruction or malfunction of the PLC program mus See 2 30 STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE SS PRECAUTIONS NCAUTION 1 DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE PRECAUTIONS NCAUTION Do not charge disassemble heat put in fire short circuit connect reversely weld swallow or burn the battery or apply excessive forces vibration impact drop etc to the battery Do not store or use the battery at high temperatures or expose to direct sunlight Do not expose to water bring near fire or touch liquid leakage or other contents directly Incorrect handling of the battery may cause heat excessive generation bursting ignition liquid leakage or deformation and lead 3 Sg to injury fire or failures and malfunctions of facilities and other equipment D D Before modifying or disrupting the program in operation or running the PLC carefully read through this manual and the associated S manuals and ensure the safety of the operation o D An operation error may damage the machinery or cause accidents a Do not change the program in the PLC from two or more peripheral equipment devices at the same time i e from a programming tool Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detach
289. cause malfunctions Installing the cassette in a raised or tilted posture can also cause malfunctions 3 WIRING PRECAUTIONS NWARNING Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock GEE ciety Precautions IEEE Read these precautions before use NCAUTION m Do not supply power to the 24 and 24V terminals 24V DC service power supply on the main unit or extension units Doing so may cause damage to the product e Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 1009 or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit and extension units with a wire 2 mm or thicker Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems refer to section 9 3 Connect the AC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Do not wire vacant terminals externa
290. ccessories Label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product Terminal block M3 screws The extension cable is already connected to the extension block FX3G Series Prog rammable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 1 Special Function Units Blocks 18 1 9 FX2N 5A External Dimensions Terminal Layout 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches 90 3 55 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch FX2N 5A e MASS Weight 0 3kg 0 66lbs e Installation DIN rail of 35mm 1 38 in width or screws Accessories Label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product Terminal block M3 screws The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 18 1 10 FX3u A4LC External Dimensions 2 4 5 mounting holes MASS Weight 0 4kg 0 88lbs Unit mm inches Installation 35mm 1 38 wide DIN rail Or screws E eAccessories Label for indication of special BE o unit block number Ne Dust proof sheet SES Manual supplied with product Terminal block M3 screws The extension cable is already connected to 82 3 23 the extension block mounting hole pitch 9 0 36 90 3 55 p 86 3 39 Terminal Layout a PTB TC COM PTB TC ICOM OUT1 OUT2 24 24 PTA PTB TC VL PTA PTB T
291. ce Approx 18kQ 60Hz 1 6 um 3 8mA 80V AC or more SRS nput sensitivi j d OFF 1 7mA 30V AC or more BBO 5 Oo Response time 25 to 30ms 8 Input signal format Voltage contact Circuit isolation Photocoupler isolation 1 7 Input operation display No input LEDs equipped with 24V power supply LED indicator oa Power consumption 1 2W 48mA 24V DC 3 n 1 This response time does not include the response delay at the PLC EE TO 2 3 9W 160mA 24V DC is required when connected to the FX2N 16EX C oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO D 5 w o 5 J 77 e lt Oo 2 e D yoojg jJeuiuJe 363 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 6 FX 16EX A1 TB 20 6 2 Internal circuit W W Photo r 1 Photo coupler i 1 coupler Hu 0 m 1 m 1 Photo Photo coupler coupler OOo toWU3 O04 toL1L17 AA0t0AA3 AA4to AAT7 LIL1O to L IL17 Lower numbers A A0 to AA7 Higher numbers 20 6 3 Example of input external wiring PLC input No LILO to L1L13 O04 toL 1L 17 AAO0toAA3 AA4to AA7 Photo couple i power supply Amro eam ae Tops poy CET Eas O TEE TESTES TES Y 100 to 120V AC 24V DC 364 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 7 FX 16EYR TB 20 7 FX 16EYR TB OF The FX 16EYR TB is used by connecting it to the FX2N series output extension block transistor 2 Output Connector
292. ce input FX3G 14MR ES FX3G 14MT ES FX3G 14MT ESS FX3G 24MR ES FX3G 24MT ES FX3G 24MT ESS FX3G 40MR ES FX3G 40MT ES FX3G 40MT ESS FX3G 60MR ES FX3G 60MT ES FX3G 60MT ESS 10 24V DC A Terminal block 60 64 1 36 40 a 24V DC sink source Terminal block 60 64 j 36 40 4 OX 24V DC sink source Transistor sink Terminal block 60 64 36 40 3 24V DC sink source Terminal block ONO e Me ae aea aae e DC power supply common to 24V DC sink and source input FX3G 14MR DS FX3G 14MT DS FX3G 14MT DSS FX3G 24MR DS FX3G 24MT DS FX3G 24MT DSS FX3G 40MR DS FX3G 40MT DS FX3G 40MT DSS FX3G 60MR DS FX3G 60MT DS FX3G 60MT DSS 06 8 68 24V DC sink source Transistor source Terminal block pote Transistor sink Terminal block E BE GER ME 24V CORN Relay Terminal block 6064 3040 o 24V DC sink source Transistor sink Terminal block 6064 3640 24 24V DC sink source Transistor source Terminal block Terminal block 1 Each value inside i indicates E number of occupied points 35 A uononpoJu NO UT Oo 22 Zz oO c 3o o0 nD 2 jonpoud uononpoJu suoneoyiods I oO seone Jeyeudueg pue uoISJ9A uess C uoneJn6ijuo N SON Iluf SON jndinondu uonejesu OO Bui A ddng Jamod ue uonesedaid h Buum ndu CO p FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 3 Introduction of Products User s M
293. cessories Label for indication of input output number The DIN46277 rail width 35 mm 1 38 or direct installation 3 Output specifications Transistor output type Item FX2N 8EYT FX2N 16EYT FX2N 16EYT C Output Points 16 points Connection type Vertical terminal block M3 screws Connector terminal block Output unit type Transistor sink output External power supply 5 to 30V DC Output circuit insulation Photo coupler insulation Indication of output operation Activation of the photo coupler will light the LED indicator lamp on panel 0 5A point The total load current per common should be Resistance load as follows 4 output points common 0 8A or less 0 3A point The total load current per common should be as follows Boutoub ponis common 1 0Aor less 716 output points common 1 6A or less Max load 12W 24V DC The total of inductive loads per common 7 2 W 24V DC terminal should be the following value The total of inductive loads per common Inductive load 4 output point common terminal 19 2W or terminal should be the following value less 24V DC 16 output points common terminal 38 4W e 8 output points common terminal 38 4W or or less 24V DC less 24V DC Open circuit leakage current 0 1mA 30V DC Min load OFF ON 0 2ms or less for 200mA at 24V DC ON OFF 0 2ms or less for 200mA at 24V DC Response time DC power Output circuit configuration supply unit DC power supply unit supply unit
294. changed o Refer to Subsection 19 6 2 for monitor function operation B 2 Hold the OK button for 1 second or longer to switch to the test 13 mode The device then begins blinking refer to figure at right SS To cancel the operation and return to the test subject selection Sa screen press ESC aa I 3 Use the buttons to move the blinking position to the device where a forced ON OFF is desired 258 zl To cancel the operation and return to the monitor screen press o p 62 eV E ESC tT Button Operation Description a ESC Cancels the operation and returns to the monitor screen 1 5 Moves in the lower device No direction for forced ON OFF subject selection m Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed scrolling E S D Moves in the higher device No direction for forced ON OFF subject S aS selection a Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed scrolling s 4 Press the OK button to highlight the contact s ON OFF status Return to the monitor screen press ESC Button Operation Description syoo g UOISU9 X3 dnoandu C ESC Returns to the monitor screen Moves in the lower device No direction for forced ON OFF subject selection Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed scrolling m Moves in the higher device No direction for forced ON OFF subject c ur selection 32 Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed s
295. circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits 2 Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that the output current of the 24V DC service power supply varies depending on the model and the absence presence of extension blocks If an overload occurs the voltage automatically drops inputs in the PLC are disabled and all outputs are turned off External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that when an error occurs in a relay triac or transistor output device the output could be held either on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION e Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line As a guideline lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise ma
296. city PLC Name PLC System 1 PLC System 2 Positioning Ethernet Port cH1 m STT The setting contents are cleared when unchecked c Eje f esos When communicate with GX Works2 GOT etc by PLC using optional board for FX etc Sd S Jie D8120 special register of PLC must be 0 cleared and must be unchecked Leave this unchecked pu Print Window Print Window Preview Default Check End Cancel 5 2 5 Cautions on write during RUN In FX3G PLCs write during RUN program changes in the RUN mode is enabled using the following programming tools For the operating procedure of and cautions on write during RUN refer to the manual of the used programming tool Programming tools supporting write during RUN e English version Programming tool Remarks Verc Bde Writing in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX3G PLCs GX Works2 earlier than Ver 1 40 SWLIDNC GXW2 E Ver 1 62Q or later VU the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX3G PLCs Ver 5 00A or later Writing in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX1N PLCs GX Developer Ver 1 00 SWOD5C GPPW E Ver 8 72A or later Writing in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX3G PLCs Ver 2 00A or later Aae the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX2N PLCs earlier than Ver 1 10 Ver 8 78G or later ipn the instruction and device ranges duri
297. ck equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block European type in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed Make sure to properly wire to the FX Series terminal blocks in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in th
298. crew Size The product terminal screws are as shown in the table below Model Name Terminal Screw Size FX 16E TB FX 32bE TB FX 16EX A1 TB FX 16EYR TB FX 16EYS TB FX 16EYT TB FX 16EYT H TB 2 Wire end treatment and tightening torque Use solderless terminals of the following size Tighten the terminals to a torque of 0 5 to 0 8 Nem Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above mentioned range Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions e When 1 wire is connected to 1 terminal Use a crimp terminal of the size shown below and install it as shown in the lower right figure Terminal Crimp b 3 7 0 15 screw terminal 6 8mm 0 27 T Gu or less 0 3 7 0 15 6 8mm 0 27 Terminal or less When 2 wires are connected to 1 terminal Use a crimp terminal of the size shown below and install it as shown in the lower right figure b 3 7 0 15 6 8mm 0 27 Terminal Crimp or Gig screw terminal 6 0mm 0 24 or more b 3 7 0 15 6 8mm 0 27 m Terminal or less Bo 6 0 Omm 0 24 or more 360 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 5 FX 16E TB FX 32b TB 20 5 FX 16E TB FX 32bE TB The FX 16E TB and FX 32E TB items must be connected using an FX2N series input output connector type extension block Input Connector Output Connector Connectable models FX2N 16EX C sink input FX2N 16EYT C sink o
299. crolling x D o OK Highlights the contact ON OFF status S x 5 Press ESC to return to the monitor screen oo suondo pue sun UOISUS X3 JOUIO J 77 pes D lt o 2 c D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO 321 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 7 Error Check 19 6 5 Test mode operation notes 1 When using multiple same number timers T and counters C Operation occurs as follows if multiple timers T and counters C are used in programs which contain CJ instructions and step ladders e When a setting change is performed after switching from the device monitor to the test function mode the setting change is applied to the timer T or counter C which is nearest to Step O When changing the setting values for same number timers T and counters C use the programming tool to change the program 2 When the set values of timers T and counters C are specified indirectly When the set values of timers T and counters C are specified indirectly in programs the values of indirectly specified devices change if the set values of timers T and counters C are changed in the display module 3 When changing the values of extension file registers ER and DER When the value of an extension file register ER or DER is changed such a change is counted as write to the EEPROM memory Be careful not to exceed the allowable number writes
300. ct HU 411S AWG22 0 3mm 357J 5538 5 piece Housing HU 200S2 001 2 FX2C I O CON SA for bulk wire Sclderiesscontact HUATISA AWG20 0 5mm 357J 13963 4 Certified connectors commercially available connectors Connectors made by DDK Ltd shown in Item 3 Model name and composition of input output connector 127 seone Jeyeudueg pue uoISJ9A uononpoJu NO SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee OO uononpoJu jonpoug suoneoyioods I Qi w js s C uoneJn6ijuo SON HU SON jndinondu 5 o ye a D o ue uoneJedaJdg Buum indu CO p FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 2 Cable Connecting Procedures 9 2 3 Terminal block for Europe expansion board and special adapters 128 The expansion board and special adapters of a terminal block type have terminal blocks for Europe 1 Applicable products Classification Model names Expansion Board FX3G 4EX BD FX3G 2EYT BD FX3G 485 BD FX3G 2AD BD FX3G 1DA BD FX3U 485ADP MB FX3U 4AD ADP FX3U 4DA ADP FX3U 3A ADP FX3U 4AD PT ADP SPecaluadaplets FX3U 4AD PTW ADP FX3U 4AD PNK ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP 2 Compliant electric wires and tightening torque Electric wire size Tightening stranded wire solid wire End treatment 0 3 to 0 5 mm Remove the coating of the stranded wire twist the core wires Chiari e ie wile AWG22
301. ct from the DIN rail D in the right figure Push in the DIN rail mounting hooks E in the right figure Forinput output powered extension units 8 point type input output extension blocks except for the FX2N 8EYR S ES UL and special function blocks this operation is unnecessary 10 1112 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 MITSUBISHI MELSEG Pa u NNI T 109 UONOnNpoJu N S WEN Hed pue seJnjee OO uononpoJu jonpoud suoneoyiods I Qi seone Jeyeudueg pue uoISJ9A wasis CO uoneJn6ijuo jndinoandu Z O 2 c 2 Z O m uonejeisu BULA A ddng Jamod ue uonesedaid h Buum ndu CO p FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 Installation In Enclosure 8 5 Procedures for Installing Directly with M4 Screws 8 5 Procedures for Installing Directly with M4 Screws The product can be installed directly in the enclosure with screws Point Position the holes so that there is a gap of 1 to 2 mm 0 04 to 0 08 between the products 8 5 1 Hole pitches for direct mounting 110 The product mounting hole pitches are shown below For the pitch that varies depending on the product refer to the table 1 Main unit A 4 0 16 W 4 0 16 e ot A TOES IN O pe en NEN
302. ctions Connect the extension cables peripheral device cables input output cables and battery connecting cable securely to their designated Buum nding N 10 Buum OO s sN snoueA I connectors zu Loose connections may cause malfunctions o D Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices P 2s Failure to do so may cause device failures or malfunctions 9 o Peripheral devices display modules expansion boards and special adapters a Extension units blocks and FX Series terminal blocks Battery and memory cassette 1 5 ES ofc TE gas WIRING PRECAUTIONS NWARNING c a Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work 1 6 Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or om5 wiring work o SE Failure to do so may cause electric shock 2 9 23 WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Connect the AC power supply to the dedicated terminals specified in this manual Soy If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out i S Connect the DC power supply to the dedicated terminals specified in this manual oo If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal t
303. d MA A 4 ESC button is not pressed button is pressed button is not pressed button is pressed MA A 6 button is not pressed OK button is pressed MA A 7 F OK button is not pressed MA A 5 347 SJojunoo wh peedg uDi e Buum nding N 10 Buum OO s sN snoueA I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1S9 peJeMod adnoandu OQ spun uoisuejx3 uda syoolg UOISU9 X3 dnoandu C N yun A ddng Jamod UOISUS X3 suondo pue sjun gt uoisuex3 240 OQO 77 nes D lt ES o c D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 18 Specifying a Hexadecimal Current Value Display Format 19 18 Specifying a Hexadecimal Current Value Display Format The procedure for specifying a hexadecimal display format for current values which display at the Monitor Test menu explained below The display format is specified by the system information s system signal 2 MO O 8 ON OFF status The display formats which correspond to the ON and OFF statuses are shown in Section 19 13 below The display format should either be fixed as decimal or hexadecimal Switching between the two should be possible by an external operation Refer to Section 19 13 for system information setting 19 18 1 System information specifying a hexadecimal current value display format 1 Syste
304. d Resistance load be as follows 2A point 4 output points common 8A or less Max load e 8 output points common 8A or less 80VA Inductive load For the product life refer to Subsection 14 4 3 For cautions on external wiring refer to Subsection 12 1 3 Open circuit leakage current Min load 5V DC 2mA reference values OFF ON Approx 10ms ON OFF Approx 10ms Response time DC power RBS unit DC power supply unit Output circuit configuration AC power supply unit supply unit A common number applies to the L of COML FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 8 FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX2N 8EYR S ES UL FX2N 16EYR ES UL Relay Output 16 8 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement QI Nn D FX2N 8EYR ES UL a With cover Without cover 12 O o S FX2N 8EYR ES Rear line POWER i a Dro Output extension 5560 indicator connector lamps LED lamps Prem 1 3 Sz ers eg n 7 E O C 5 D o I Jz 359 Say oo a gt 25 9 o X FX2N 8EYR S ES UL 1 9 IZ D With cover Without cover 22S Oac 7o Output 9 Sos 26 H e C S 3 indicator 2 E 1o 8 9 lamps LED lamps 0 Rear line extension connector FX2N 8EYR S 17 yu A ddng Jamod UOISUS XF co suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg e
305. d special adapter and special function block for each analog function are connected Refer to Analog Control Edition Kinds of analog functions Voltage current input Voltage current output Temperature sensor input thermocouple and platinum resistance thermometer sensor Temperature control FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 Features and Part Names 2 2 Names and Functions of Parts 2 2 Names and Functions of Parts 2 2 1 Front Panel Factory default configuration standard 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 10 a m 12 Peripheral device connecting connector cover Terminal names Top cover S 40points 60points type only Top cover Terminal block covers Input display LEDs red Extension device connecting connector cover Operation status display LEDs Output display LEDs red Model name abbreviation DIN rail mounting hooks The year and month of production The peripheral device connector variable analog potentiometers and RUN STOP switch are located under this cover The signal names for power supply input and output terminals are shown Mount the expansion board and memory cassette under this cover Mount the expansion board display module memory cassette and battery under this cov
306. d device is Disabled Only monitoring of specified x D disabled device is enabled Ee O Initial screen Initial screen Initial screen lt Valid Specified device monitor Specified device monitor Specified device monitor Both monitoring and Transition to another screen testing are enabled Enabled Disabled Enabled MA A ON Both monitoring and testing of Both monitoring and testing of Only monitoring of specified Q5 specified device are enabled specified device are enabled device is enabled ej 9 o 5 Q Transition to another screen Transition to another screen 345 co UOISUS X3 JOUIO J 77 nes D lt ES o c D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 16 Display Screen Protect Function 19 16 7 Pointers for using the display screen protect function The display screen protect function settings should be specified in a sequence program The protect function is enabled by using the display module s monitor test function to change the system information s system signal 1 DLJ O 3 current value to 1 or 2 Once the setting is made it cannot be canceled from the display module To cancel the setting use the programming tool to change the system information s system signal 1 DO 0O 3 current value to a value other than 1 and 2 If the system information s system signal 1 DO O 3 is
307. d needa ten PUES dN 102 0 2 2 A Sage NAY OU T M 103 8 3 Examination for Installing Method in Enclosure cccsccccccseeeceeeeceeeeeseueeceeeeeseueesaueeeseneessaaes 104 5 9 1 JBstellingetllOCSasstdeaccntamdtesades E cuu posu on epuzdesaczz ufus naw nu pd a PA udcR EN Dese a fsste men dede Lose 104 8 3 2 Cautions on examining installing method sesssssessseseenneneen menm 104 8 3 9 Examples OF installations m E 104 8 4 Procedures for Installing on and Detaching from DIN Rall cccccseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeas 106 8 4 1 Preparation for anstallallORgzss du doces che boues oi obo opor ueber setae Peeco ob be ette bbisaur ed ha doscecteeniut 106 94 2 Installauobrof mali Ulis 32 restare wala esca occu duda e SM oscura RUE etai ELM gre LL 107 8 4 3 Installation of input output powered extension unit block and special function block 108 9 44 Removal or mal Ula uud 10 esce op ano EO e ie itode ati teras ag Io adent e dn i est Ia dite i i Led ep cU eet 109 8 5 Procedures for Installing Directly with M4 SCreWs ccccseeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeeeseeeeeeas 110 8 5 1 Hole pitches for direct mounting ccccceccceeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseaeeeeeseeeeeeseaeeeeeeseaeeeessaeeeeesesaeeeeees 110 9 5 2 Example of Mounting hole pitChies x 2 iem sete Cerro dem quo oet eec pacer echoed
308. d source input type 10 2 24V DC input Sink and source input type UONnOnpoJjU This section explains handling of 24V DC inputs in the main unit precautions on input device connection and external wiring examples For the input specifications refer to Section 4 3 NO 10 2 1 Handling of 24V DC input SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee 1 Input terminals Sink input When a no voltage contact or NPN open collector transistor OO output is connected between an input X terminal and the OV 233 terminal and the circuit is closed the input X turns on E Then the input display LED lights S i i S Source input When a no voltage contact or PNP open collector transistor output is connected between an input X terminal and the 24V Qi terminal and the circuit is closed the input X turns on vyg Then the input display LED lights ss a OW S EE Input impedance 5 RUN terminal setting X000 to X017 up to the largest input number in the main unit of the main unit can be used as RUN input F terminals by setting parameters z5 1 X000 to X007 in the FX3c 14MU main unit and X000 to X015 in the FX3c 24MU main unit S For the functions of the RUN terminals refer to Subsection 14 2 1 Bg Ze 2 Input circuit Function of input circuit 8 The primary and secondary circuits for input are insulated with a photocoupler and the second circuit is 2 provided with a C R filter a The C R filter is designed to
309. dded calculation of current consumption 84 Select an input output powered extension unit For the data on the number of input output occupied points and current consumption of each type refer to Section 6 8 Capacity of built in power supply EOwsUsuBUly NUT Number of input 24V DC E service classification Cass ICaPon connected units Lype Suipi pomi SV DC power power supply points supply mA mA 1 With built in power input output FX2N supply powered extension unit Example of entry gt FX2N 48ER ES UL Enter the specifications for the products to be added Enter the data for the input output extension blocks and special function blocks to be connected to the input output powered extension unit and calculate the current For data on the number of input output occupied points and current consumption of each type refer to Section 6 8 i Calculation of current consumption Power supply Number of input of built in power supply Me Classification connected Type output points classification 5V DC power 24V DC power units points supply mA supply mA o 0o MEN ae Number of lESEEEES pam ERES pam BEES pa IEEE Pe Fx LL ewe oo o pawx a ewo o o pwwo i 1 When connecting the FX3U 1PSU 5V extension power supply unit to a system where the nearest upstream unit to the FX3U 1PSU 5V is
310. de for commutation must comply with the following specifications Guide Reverse voltage 5 to 10 times of the load voltage Item Forward current Load current or more 3 Interlock For loads such as forward reverse contactors etc where a hazardous condition could result if switched ON simultaneously an external interlock should be provided for interlocking the PLC s internal programs as shown to the right 180 Sink output type Sink output type Inductive load Source output type Inductive Normal Limit of normal rotation rotation xd Reverse Limit of reverse rotation Normal Limit of normal rotation rotation Reverse PLC output rotation element Limit of reverse rotation FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 2 External Wiring of Transistor Output Sink Source Type 12 2 4 Example of external wiring oc o D 1 Transistor output Sink a AC power supply 100 to 240V Main unit transistor output sink 5 SE Breaker Power ON sink N Sey 1 c a Emergency 5 Le 2 o MC Output extension block me transistor output sink ES 2 E 7 25 5 25 po B supply vr A E EI ofc A a D O gag cO cs z TI o Input output powered 882 extension unit 2 0 o transistor output Load com Fuse o 2 Q Power s
311. do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to properly wire the FX3G Series main unit and FX2N FX3U Series extension equipment in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block 224 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 1 Outline 15 4 Outline SE An input output powered extension unit is used to expand inputs outputs 15 1 1 Product configuration 15 1 2 Product list Power can be supplied to subsequent extension blocks from an input output powered extension unit with a built in 24V DC power supply An input output powered extension unit is required when the capacity of the main unit s built in power supply 1 is insufficient for the current consumption demands of the extension blocks Buum nding N There are various types of input output powered extension units They differ in supply voltage number of input output points input form output form and con
312. duct eipoyy ejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 185 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NWARN ING e Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents 1 Most importantly have the following an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits 2 Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that the output current of the 24V DC service power supply varies depending on the model and the absence presence of extension blocks If an overload occurs the voltage automatically drops inputs in the PLC are disabled and all outputs are turned off External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such
313. dures 3 Wire end treatment The solderless terminal size depends on the terminal screw size and wiring method Use solderless terminals of the following size Tighten the terminals to a torque of 0 5 to 0 8 Nem Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above mentioned range Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions UONnOnpoJjU NO In the case of M3 terminal screw e When one wire is connected to one terminal SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee Terminal Crimp b 3 2 0 13 screw terminal 6 2mm 0 24 T Om or less OO 5 U zo eoo 3 20013 ES 6 2mm 0 24 Terminal o or less Reference 4 Terminal Manufacturer Type No Certification Pressure Bonding Tool O FV1 25 B3A mi JAPAN SOLDERLESS TERMINAL MFG CO LTD JST UL Listed YA 1 JST D FV2 MS3 o o oO e When two wires are connected to one terminal Da b 3 2 0 13 S5 6 2mm 0 24 Terminal Crimp 29 or less ST screw terminal Bo 6 3mm 0 25 or more b 3 2 0 13 6 6 2mm 0 24 Terminal 5 Q ORIees 6 3mm 0 25 Ed or more 3 lt Reference gt T Terminal Manufacturer Type No Certification Pressure Bonding Tool 25 cO JAPAN SOLDERLESS TERMINAL MFG CO LTD JST FV1 25 B3A UL Listed YA 1 JST p s 25 ZS P 5 o ye a D o ue uoneJedaJdg Buum indu CO p 125 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edi
314. dware Edition Table of Contents 14 5 Troubleshooting with LEDS ciui to orna p Lo iun rear a Rana eth In Een R Eu OR Rente gen Lose duni do pt dra da eeR eios 210 1451 POW LED on ashing olt s emeie dus estais E siue s dbarec roc A uper nha beca ied obse eceee 210 149 2 ALME ONOM e aneocadue Gp secaeea bec pna de uou ipa neruos se ete fenct a tuamn ic aolusot indio ae bea oet ine ene counted 210 14 5 9 ERR EED Tonflashindg oltf icut Hae sausda ere oder euet auti ne ema D vens ie da eil sa teca ie beoe rSh a ne eta 211 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes ccccseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeas 212 14 6 1 Operation and check by GX Works2 esssssssssseseeeeeeeeen nemen mener nnn nnne nnne nnns nnns 212 14 6 2 Operation and check on display module FX3G 5DM ccccccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeees 213 14 6 3 Representation of CrrOrs ccccccscccccceseeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeaeeeesaeeeeseeeceeseeceseaeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseueeesaeeeeesaeeeeeas 214 1464 Enor Code LiSt and ACION sae oe hee eee ek DEED UN I Ea e rete a te du eite bd qa 215 debo DEOBIDIGSTIOOHTTO oboe hide lioe i a OO iam cse E 222 14 7 1 Output does not operate main unit and input output extension blocks 222 14 7 2 24V DC input does not operate main unit and input output extension blocks 222 14 7 3 Cautions in registering keyword sse nennen nn
315. e Manufacturer Caulking tool 8mm 3 2 6mm Phoenix Contact Al 0 5 8WH CRIMPEGX G 0 11 14mm 0 56 or CRIMPFOX 6T F 4 3 Old model name CRIMPFOX ZA 3 4 Old model name CRIMPFOX UD 6 Tool Fortightening the terminal use a commercially available small screwdriver having a straight form that is not widened toward the end as shown right Note If the diameter of screwdriver grip is too small tightening torque will not be able to be achieved To achieve the appropriate tightening torque shown in the table above use the following screwdriver or appropriate replacement grip diameter approximately 25 mm 0 98 With straight tip Reference 0 4mm 2 5mm Manufacturer Model names ea zr Phoenix Contact SZS 0 4 x 2 5 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 2 Cable Connecting Procedures 9 2 4 Grounding terminal of the FX3G 485 BD RJ The grounding terminal of the FX3G 485 BD RJ is a terminal blocks for Europe UONnOnpoJjU 1 Applicable cables Electric wire size AWG 20 to 16 NO 2 Treatment of electric wire ends SOWeN ed pue seJnjee When using a stranded cable or solid cable as it is Twist the end of the stranded cable so that loose wires will not stick out Do not solder plate the end of the cable OO 239 Se 2 Approx 6 mm 0 24 4 3 Tightening torque 3 Set the tighte
316. e PLC 2 Execute the PLC diagnosis Click Diagnostics PLC Diagnostics on the tool menu and the diagnosis of PLC will start Project Edit DBAS o Find Replace Compile View Navigation x Praject T 33 3 by 2 ah Parameter E PLC Parameter Ff fy Network Parameter Cy Global Device Comment El e Program ab MAIM Ue Local Device Comment A Device Memory Check the results of diagnosis MF MELSOFT Series GX Works Untitled Project PRG Write MAIN 1 Step Online Es E E ER ig 2 it Parameter LPRG rrite M p Debug Diagnostics Tool Window Help il PLC Diagnostics A Ethernet Diagnostics CC IE Control Diagnostics CC IE Field Diagnostics MELSECHET Diagnostics CC Link Diagnostics Sensor Device Monitor System Monitor Online Module Change Display the following window to check the errors Example one error occurs PLC Diagnostics Connection Channel List Serial Port PLC Module Connection RS 232C System Image Error Information Status Mo Error Step Current Error Year Month Day Check the error details Error Help r Status Icon Legend 6507 Syntax Error The error in PLC is displayed Change the window size and position after error jump 2013 07 26 Time 15 10 09 Major Error A Moderate Error 7
317. e fully aware of all aspects of safety with regards to automated equipment 2 Any commissioning or service engineer must be of a competent nature trained and qualified to the local and national standards required to fulfill that job These engineers should also be trained in the use and maintenance of the completed product This includes being completely familiar with all associated documentation for the said product All maintenance should be carried out in accordance with established safety practices 3 All operators of the completed equipment should be trained to use that product in a safe and coordinated manner in compliance to established safety practices The operators should also be familiar with documentation which is connected with the actual operation of the completed equipment Note The term completed equipment refers to a third party constructed device which contains or uses the product associated with this manual This product has been manufactured as a general purpose part for general industries and has not been designed or manufactured to be incorporated in a device or system used in purposes related to human life Before using the product for special purposes such as nuclear power electric power aerospace medicine or passenger movement vehicles consult with Mitsubishi Electric This product has been manufactured under strict quality control However when installing the product where major accidents or losses could occur if
318. e manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block 122 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 1 Preparation for Wiring 9 1 Preparation for Wiring 9 1 1 Wiring procedures Before starting wiring work make sure that the main power is off Prepare the parts for wiring Prepare the solderless terminals and cables necessary for wiring For details refer to Section 9 2 Wire the power supply terminals In the case of AC power supply type Connect the power supply to the terminals L and N In the case of DC power supply type Connect the power supply to the terminals and GO Provide the power supply circuit with the protection circuit shown in this subsection For details refer to Section 9 4 and Section 9 5 Wire the ground terminal at a grounding resistance of 100 or less Class D Connect a class D ground wire to the terminal For details refer to Section 9 3 and Section 9 4 Wire the input X terminals For a type 24V DC input type common to sink source input select sink or source input by the fol lowing connection In the case of AC power supply type Forsi
319. e of a 40 60 point types main unit I 387 15 Install remove the display module x93 230 Attach the display module to the main unit as shown in the 3g right figure arrow 2 37 16 Remove the display module while pressing and holding the 22a display module fixing hook B in the figure on the right as TE shown in the right figure arrow 2 2E m yu A ddng Jamod UOISUS XF suondo pue sjun gt uoisuex3 240 OQO UJ 62 os D lt o 2 D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO 309 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 2 Installation and Removal 19 2 2 Installation when the expansion board connector conversion adapter is used together 310 The FX3G 40MT ES is used as the main unit and the expansion board is used together in this example Attach the expansion board connector conversion adapter to the main unit For the attachment method refer to Chapter 8 Caution Make sure to attach the expansion board connector conversion adapter before the display module The display module cannot be attached to the expansion board connector conversion adapter attached on the top cover S side of the 40 60 point type main unit Remove the upper connector cover A in the right figure Remove the part B shown in the right figure USES using a nipper etc Caution Removal of the part B is not necessary when
320. e out detected applications 8 3807 Modem initialization error e NN network parallel link MODBUS communication etc 2 7 Continues Check programs according to the applications id 3808 aperon N N network parameter error Paemate maintenance 3809 N N Network setting error Ensure modem power is ON and check the settings of the 1 6 3812 Parallel link character error AT commands OS e Wiring occ 3813 Parallel link sum error Check the communication cables for correct wiring UO 3814 Parallel link format error x Ss 3821 MODBUS communication error 3840 Special adapter connection error Check connection of the special adapter 1 T PLC hardware error M8061 D8061 S 4 ata D 2S When the memory cassette is used check whether it is S2 mounted correctly lt 6101 Memory access error If the problem persists or if the memory cassette is not used something may be malfunctioning inside the PLC Consult 1 8 your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Isolate the PLC and supply power to it using a different power i E supply Sa If the ERR LED turns OFF noise may be affecting the PLC ES Take the following measures e mn Par oO 6102 OBerataneircult emoi Check the ground wiring and reexamine the wiring 5 route and installation location Stops Fita noise filter onto the power supply line 1 9 operation If the ERR LED does not turn OFF even after the above actions are taken consult your local Mitsubishi Electric a representative m
321. ecified device monitor function 1 System signal 1 System Information Description DOO Device type to be displayed DOO 1 Device No to be displayed 1 Maximum or minimum value of the corresponding device if the device number is set outside the allowable range The table below shows the device type to be displayed in accordance with the numeric value written in DOO If any numeric value outside the range from 1 to 10 is written in DOLD the specified device monitor function is disabled Value stored in DOO Device type 1 Input X 2 Output X 3 Auxiliary relay M 4 State S 5 Timer T 6 Counter C 7 Data register D 8 Data register DD 9 Extended register R 10 Extended register DR others Not used 2 System signal 2 System Information Description Request Edit of displayed device data MAA ON Enables the test function OFF Disables the test function and enables only monitoring MA A 1 Edition completion response MA A 4 ESC key status MA A 5 key status MA A 6 key status MA A 7 OK key status Specified device monitor display status MA A 9 ON The specified device monitor screen is displayed OFF Any screen other than the specified device monitor screen is displayed 1 Turns ON after completion of a test operation for a specified device monitor or when the OK or ESC key operated To turn OFF the request edit of a specified device monitor is turned off or it is turned off in the user s prog
322. ecting Procedures For cable connection a terminal block or a connector is used The cable connecting procedures are explained below 9 2 1 input output terminal block power supply and input output wiring For the main unit FX2N Series input output powered extension units blocks and FX2N FX3u Series special function blocks an M3 or M3 5 screw terminal block is used 1 Applicable products Product type Model name Main unit All models of FX3G Series main units Input output powered extension unit All models of FX2N Series input output powered extension units All models of FX2N Series input output extension blocks TIDTGOHIpHESXTensIS Tro gew except for the FX2N 16EX C FX2N 16EXL C and FX2N 16EYT C Extension power supply unit FX3U 1PSU 5V Special function block Refer to the manual for each product FX Series terminal block All models Power supply unit FX2N 20PSU 2 Terminal block screw size and tightening torque The size of the terminal screws for each product is shown below For the solderless terminals refer to the following page Main unit FX2N Series input output powered extension units M3 FX2N Series input output extension blocks 0 5 to 0 8 Nem FX3U 1PSU 5V FX Series terminal block FX2N 20PSU Special function block Refer to the manual for each product FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 2 Cable Connecting Proce
323. ecutes the transfer Caution Do not turn the PLC power off or perform writing from the programming tool while a program is being transferred by a memory cassette transfer menu operation as these actions could destroy the program causing incorrect operation of the PLC 4 Press OK or ESC to return to the memory cassette transfer screen FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 12 Memory Cassette Transfers Result and measures to take or The transfer is not executed if a PLC is running message p appears a 3 In this case set the PLC to the STOP state then perform step 3 PLC is running described above O The transfer is not executed if a Transfer failed message g appears Cassette PLC In this case turn the power off check the memory cassette connection then attempt the operation again from the first step Transfer 13 failed lt lt The transfer is not executed if a Memory Cassette is write oa protected message displays g In this case turn the power OFF set the memory cassette Memory Cassette PROTECT switch to OFF then attempt the operation again from the first step Is 14 write protected a A Transfer completed message appears when the transfer is Sg completed Cassette PLC E When this message appears press OK or ESC to display the 3 Cassette screen Transfer 15 completed moz 5 Press
324. ed select the input output powered extension unit Since input output powered extension units have built in input output terminals reexamine the input output devices connected to the main unit to ensure the required number of points NO Range to be covered by main unit Range exceeding power supply capacity Input output S pecial Output extension Special iod function block block 16 points function block SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee nee en Before selection 16 SCIES OO zn Input output Input output Ni ag After Special Special 2S selection Main unit el ancien block extension unit T block g 32 points o Replaced with input output powered extension unit 4 Determine whether extension devices can be connected to the input output powered extension unit by the following method Oo When only input output extension devices are added use the quick reference matrix 2 Refer to 6 6 1 Quick reference matrix when only input output devices are added ej e When also special extension devices are added calculate the current consumption to ensure that the total current to be consumed by the added extension devices can be supplied by the built in power supply Refer to 6 6 2 When special extension devices are also added calculation of current consumption oO UU D CD Cx en oO to zs o v 6 6 1 Quick reference matrix when only input output devices are added pue uoISJ9A In the follo
325. ed for Inductive loads such as contactors and solenoid valves is 500 000 operations at 35VA The following table shows the approximate life of a relay based on the results of an operation life test Test condition 1 sec ON 1 sec OFF Load capacity Contact life 0 35A 100V AC 0 17A 200V AC 0 8A 100V AC 0 4A 200V AC 1 2A 100V AC 0 6A 200V AC 35VA 3 000 000 times 80VA 1 000 000 times 120VA 200 000 times The product life of relay contacts becomes considerably shorter than the above conditions when the rush overcurrent is shut down Please refer to the following measures regarding the inductive load For precautions on the main unit Input output extension units Input output extension block refer to Subsection 12 1 3 2 For precautions on inductive loads for the terminal block refer to Subsection 20 7 4 2 Some types of inductive loads generate rush current 5 to 15 times the stationary current at activation Make sure that the rush current does not exceed the current corresponding to the maximum specified resistance load 208 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 4 Maintenance and Periodic Inspection 2 Lamp load oz Lamp loads generally generate rush current 10 to 15 times the stationary current Make sure that the rush 2 current does not exceed the current corresponding to the maximum specified resistance load iD 3
326. ed in such conditions electric shock fire malfunctions deterioration or damage may occur Do not touch the conductive parts of the product directly Doing so may cause device failures or malfunctions Install the product securely using a DIN rail or mounting screws Terminal block DIN rail only Main unit FX2N Series I O extension unit block FX2N F X3U Series DIN rail or direct mounting special function block and special adapter Install the product on a flat surface If the mounting surface is rough undue force will be applied to the PC board thereby causing nonconformities Make sure to affix the expansion board with tapping screws Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Loose connections may cause malfunctions When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure that cutting and wiring debris do not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Be sure to remove the dust proof sheet from the PLC s ventilation port when installation work is completed Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Connect the extension cables peripheral device cables input output cables and battery connecting cable securely to their designated connectors Loose connections may cause malfunctions Connect the display module memory cassette and expansion board securely to their designated connectors Loose connections may cause malfunctions
327. ed with the ALM LED on or the battery exhausted the battery backed data may be unstable during transportation The PLC is a precision instrument During transportation avoid impacts larger than those specified in the general specifications section 4 1 Failure to do so may cause failures in the PLC After transportation verify the operations of the PLC When transporting lithium batteries follow required transportation regulations 2 ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue For details of the regulated products refer to Appendix D yoojg euw CO 199 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 1 Preparation for Test Operation 14 1 Preparation for Test Operation 14 1 1 Preliminary inspection power OFF Incorrect connection of the power supply terminal contact of the DC input wire and power supply wire or short circuiting of output wires may result in serious damage Before applying power check that the power supply and ground terminals are connected correctly and input output devices are wired properly The dielectric withstand voltage and insulation resistance test of the PLC should be measured in accordance with the following procedures 1 Remove all input output wires and power supply wires from the PLC 2 Connect a crossing wire to each of the PLC terminals power supply terminal input terminals and output terminals exce
328. eee mC nee creme eet am eee oon a eee er SNP 246 16 2 FX2N 8ER ES UL 24V DC Sink Source Input Relay Output seeeeeeeeeeeses 248 16 2 1 2 Product SDOCITICSIIOFIS o Ours aoc Fe onm ie ET a eoe a uae Ode iunc sid do an ou aet aad d 248 16 2 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement cccccccceceseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesseaeeeeeseeeeeesaas 249 16 2 3 EXternabalmelrisloris eeu Wass loea Mem it i voa sube und sequia Sy ew ees eee aa 250 16 3 FX2N 8ER 24V DC Sink Input Relay Output eeesseeessessseseeeeeennnnnnne nnn 251 16 3 1 Product sSpeclfICallOls ooo rr Dn SE n trennen Ca tu i ta a Docet ras aeter aedi eiie aas De Cx d E Put UT 251 16 3 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement esssesssssssseeenennn eene 252 16 3 9 External dimensions seriis aa eaae Svr ienaa uei cud resa coax nea ka ea ada depu dU us 253 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents 16 4 FX2N 8EX ES UL FX2N 16EX ES UL 24V DC Sink Source Input 254 16 471 Product speci eallOris 5 enuiseb eros oi eite certet beca ease e d eod Cu esu du cee seas Fuga de 254 16 4 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement cccceecccccseeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeesaeeeeeesaaeeeeesaeeeeeeeaas 255 16 4 3 External dltmienslofis eda arsit beer ated eroe d A db dei chen ales Ta ba sbus tt edu 256 16 5 FX2N
329. eeeeeeeennennm nemen 174 12 154 Product life or relay CODICIS sorora ohne Dite tn one rb Seed iicet po De iei deae be EE der ns 174 12 12 Pancdlimng orrelay Olpe centi oce ad Lana decies Soa e era a Maes Riad posa Pu CE xe bue e bi Ecos RH DELI RAE 174 12 1 3 External wiring precautions assis twee Peaux aa casn ure orent ou datio cux a Sud pa vea den0c Dawes ba Vs iUe at Us Plata 175 12 1 4 Example of external Wining cicer a eve Eee err USE aer exin ce ec Hi aca ade a p re Ue SN bo Debe eu Ml ug 176 12 2 External Wiring of Transistor Output Sink Source Type eseeeeseseeneeeennnn 177 12 2 1 Transistor Output SINK and Source ccc ccc eccccccecceceeeeeceeceecaeeeeseeeeeesaueeeseueeesseeeessaeeeesaneeeeeees 177 122 2 Tandling oriranmsistoer Ou DUI cater eu eras eed sedated ia animator eode Eben Gres bodsi hace seeiceesde wane 178 12 23 External Wiring PIECAULIONS 35 3 see ae nhd oia ned ees Le pah vue adag eia risu o tab sun ted sa eiuld a ab DE Xv uda Gens 180 12 2 Example of extermal WIN buceo es ane crac u na Dares e boda ane lated e bet niles bue n Ee tue pul ee soU Debo bed 181 12 3 External Wiring for Triac SSR Output Type seessssesesseeeennenenm enne 183 12 354 Handing Ot tila OULD Ul ao iunii Doug Ua etae oe ba saec ia iu aea Ped Aem 183 12 9 2 E xterial WIRING PRECAUTIONS x stade de mob i oes a rasa prf case ano load uds 184 12 9 9 Example or external WINING 5i et e e a e UU se uo as eee a
330. eeeesaeeseeeaeeeeeeas 349 19 19 1 When a Fatal error occurred message appears ccceeccceececeeeeeeeeeseeeesaeeeseeeeseeeeseeesseeesees 350 19 20 Menu Display Characters Japanese and English Display Character Correspondence ADI Cis T MsnsMadiclatas 351 20 Terminal Block 352 ZO QUINN mec mmn S 354 20 121 JProducbcocontigHreiliOEYa su cuoc stead taut acutos ud nate ob ec de dex obti dea edocet cepe ups te des unes duct 355 20 2 External Dimensions and Component Names ccccccceeceseeeeceeeeeseeeeseeeeeseeeesaeeeseeeesaeeeees 356 11 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents 20 3 ermina LAV OUL xt TII PEE 357 20 4 nstallallQn VVOIK eueniesuneuucet ume hie o hdi ved ds the diea cby ate idee ate nitd ae dta de tla e tse o nde 359 ZO Stalai e EET 359 20 A 2 o ettiovellusse ssa detis tuoofestutuccum aces E IM ecu tetas 359 20 4 3 Input output cable CORnriecllOni iae doa ted Maat io esee eoe Memes esu uet eA Baek 359 20 4 4 Connection to terminal block cccccccccccceeecceeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeseeecesseceeseeeeeseeeeesaeeeeesgeeeeeas 360 20 5 EXSTOE TB EX SZESTDB testa viet ndi tbt cabal t adii e on dca o t acd qua 361 20 91 nema oreu c M 361 20 5 2 Example of input external WIring cccccccccseeccceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseecesseeesseeeeeeaeeeesseecesseeeesseeeeeeeas 362 20 5
331. eeeesseeeesseeeeessneeeeeseeeeeees 92 7 2 Unit Numbers of Special Function Blocks 2 0 2 0 cecccceccccececeeeeeeceeeeseeeeeseeeesseseeseaeeseusesseeeesaeeeeas 93 7 2 CONCeCDEO assighlif lg xen eee se ee eee ae ae ee na meat La M COD UIDI 93 1 22 Example ol assigning iei Ceres a ie teet vows sea Nd aaia equ erc i taU E E 93 1 2 9 Application oF unitn mber labels ost reacts aeu e ee o ea oic decet Wola e oc pena 94 7 3 Assignment of Communication Channels cccccsescceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeesseseesseeeeeseaaeeeeeas 95 7 3 1 Assignment of communication channels sssssssssssssssesesee eene nnne nnne nnn nnne 95 7 4 Station No Label of FX3G 485 BD ccccccccccseececaseecaeeeesaueeseaeeeceueeeeeeecseeesageessaeeesueessseeeens 96 7 5 Station No Label of EF X36 4065 BD RJ so eI ee Eo tet pda ele bees Dess 96 7 6 Trimmer Layout Label of FX3G 8AV BD eee leeictesekeen toin saa enr sa aano ge s Ey a aa dana aba an 97 8 Installation In Enclosure 98 es MAS CAI ATORY NOCAUO MM E 101 8 1 1 Installation location in enclosure sseesssessssssseseeneennneennene nnne nnnm nnne nnns 101 91 2 Spaces n eneclosufe sa ise ea E DR UR Ue M RAD ee ee ME 102 9 2 Layout te MClOSUNG ostendis caimbes ae ricerca omaes taceo tinea te leutars best tact tence ose tau tto is 102 8 2 1 1 stage layout eriein usta vaL REX vri Ua cenc lust aaaea SL e ER aaa TE lease neo OR ucc i
332. eeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeseeaeeeees 201 14 1 4 Writing of program and program check power ON and PLC stopped 202 14 2 Running and Stopping Procedures Power ON ccccccccccsececeeeeseeeeeseeeeseeeeeseeeesaeeeeseeeeesanees 203 14 2 1 Methods of running and stopping sssssssesesseeeee enne 203 14 2 2 Use of several running stopping methods cccceecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeesseeeeeeesaeseeeeeeseeeeeesaaas 204 14 3 Operation and Test Power ON and PLC Running eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeern 205 14 3 1 Self diagnostic function see eoe cent eae era ous mre oes utc etes Deme Date be iine ene sen teenage 205 14 3 2 TOSUMUN CONS sexo I c HW 205 14 3 3 Program modification function lssseesssssssssssssseseeen nennen nennen nnne nnne nnn nnns 206 14 3 4 Built in variable analog potentiometer fUNCTION ccccceeecceeceeeeeeeeaseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeessseeeeeeaeas 206 14 4 Maintenance and Periodic Inspection ccc ccecccc cece eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesaeeeseueeseeeseueeseesaeeeseeeaees 207 14 4 1 Procedures for checking model name ssssssssssssssssseseeeenene nennen nnne nnns 207 14 4 2 Periodic inspection battery life etc enne 207 14 4 3 Maintenance product life of relay contacts 208 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Har
333. een list seeeesssessssseeesseeeenenennnennennnn nnn 328 19 11 9 Keyword Storage c codo ea aeos EOD Ea Nau Usa ea seu OM aqua I Rie ON rU lr uu Eu du UL UAE 329 19 11 4 Screens requiring keyword for access ssssssssssssssssseeneeneene nennen nnne nnn nnn nnns 329 191455 Gahcelltg a KeyWOLG s ue oistasevea derat pe ac pei opa a e debates ida os esten S 330 19 11 6 Enabling ake yW ascia tereacennacttusa veis edax Dus unda vod csa a udendbanwteieLad Cw cde dad pU ta a AE 331 19 12 Memory Cassette Transfers cccccccsssccccsesceccesseecceuscceeusececseuseesseeeessaeeesseseeessaseeesseneesenes 332 19 12 1 Transfer from internal EEPROM to memory cassette Cassette lt PLC 332 19 12 2 Transfer from memory cassette to internal EEPROM Cassette gt PLC 333 19 13 System Information Restrictions From PLC ccccccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeesaaeeeeeesaeees 335 1913 I SYSE NOMA ton IS 5 d npereb E a a Las a a 335 19 13 2 System information setting program example ccccceccseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaseeeeeeseeseessaeeeeeeas 335 19 14 Specified Device Monitor Function lsseeeessseseeeeseee nennen nnn nnns 336 19 14 1 System information specified device monitor function seeeesesssees 336 19 14 2 Differences between specified device monitor screen and monitor test scree
334. election Ver 1 00 or later Input sensor selection FX3U 4AD PNK ADP Temperature unit selection Temperature unit selection User s Manual FX3G Series Programmable Controllers Hardware Edition Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 4 Analog special adapters M8280 to M8299 and D8280 to D8299 Number Compatible Versions LES analog special adapter D 8280 D 8281 D 8282 D 8283 D 8284 D 8285 D 8286 D 8287 D 8288 D 8289 Appendix A 4 2 Special data registers D8280 to D8299 Operation and function FX3U 4DA ADP Ver 1 00 or later zc ne Error status status Error status status Error status bt UA code K1 d code K2 Model code K50 FX3U 4AD ADP FX3U 3A ADP Ver 1 00 or later Ver 1 20 or later PANT EEUE ET eT Ted ERE o F To C3 8 D 8290 D 8291 D 8292 D 8293 D 8294 D 8295 D 8296 D 8297 D 8298 D 8299 Ge time for Ch1 eek time for Ch1 me time for Ch2 men time for Ch2 nine time for Ch3 Averaging time for Ch4 Model code K1 Model code K2 Model code K50 407 9jlesse2 NO JOUJOJN h 22 Y a 0008Q 0008IN sr uononJjsu UJ seoi eq jeroeds sj pow penumnuoosiq Ksyeq 10 suonneo2aJd UJ uoneuodsueJ jo Buypuey TI Ssejejs JOquiow 13 ui seuejeq FX3G Series Programmable Controllers Appendix A Special Device List User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A 4 Analog special adapters M8280 t
335. en the terminal is connected with an external power supply the current is not included in the calculation of current consumption 6 8 1 A Main units Input output Output current mA No Type Number ot input Input output output points 24V DC service power supply points points FX3G 14MT ES 14 16 8 6 8 FX3G 24MT ES 24 32 1 14 16 10 16 FX3G 40MT ES DC power supply type FX3G 24MT DS 24 32 1 14 16 10 16 FX3G 40MT DS 1 Each number inside indicates the number of occupied points AC power supply type FX3G 14MT ESS FX3G 24MT ESS 4 24 16 FX3G 40MT ESS FX3G 14MR DS FX3G 14MT DS 14 16 8 6 8 FX3G 14MT DSS FX3G 24MT DSS FX3G 40MT DSS Use numbers inside when calculating the total number of input output points 400 p 4 24 16 FX3G 14MR ES FX3G 24MR ES FX3G 40MR ES FX3G 60MR ES FX3G 60MT ES 60 64 36 40 24 FX3G 60MT ESS FX3G 24MR DS FX3G 40MR DS FX3G 60MR DS FX3G 60MT DS 60 64 36 40 24 FX3G 60MT DSS 88 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 8 Number of Input Output Occupied Points and Current Consumption 6 8 2 B Input output powered extension units blocks uononpoJu 1 Input output powered extension units B input output Output current mA N Number of input output points points No Type 24V DC service power supply input output IS 5V
336. eparate Aea uereg Sequence instructions provided in structured projects p Programming Manual JY997D34701 q p proj 09R926 volume of GX Works2 Basic amp Applied Instruction Separate FA CPU Structured Application functions provided in structured projects p Programming Manual JY997D34801 PP P proj 09R927 volume of GX Works2 Application Functions EFX Series terminal block Supplied FX INPUT AND with OUTPUT TERMINAL JY992D50401 Procedures for handling FX Series terminal block product BLOCKS USER S GUIDE Manuals for communication control Common Separate FX Series User s Manual Details of N N Network parallel link computer link p an m JY997D16901 and no protocol communication RS instructions 09R715 volume Data Communication Edition FX2N 232IF FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Separate Series User s Manual JY997D26201 Details on MODBUS serial communication i volume MODBUS Serial in FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC PLCs Communication Edition BIRS 232C RS 422 RS 485 communication When using each product refer also to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed and FX Series User s Manual Data Communication Edition For the MODBUS communication refer to the FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Series User s Manual MODBUS Serial Communication Edition supplied FX3G 232 BD Procedures for handling the RS 232C communication with JY997D32001 Installation Manual expansion board
337. eps D 8103 to l D 8107 Not used D 8108 Number of special function blocks i connected 397 9jlesse2 NO Alowa 22 5 a 0008Q 0008IN sr uononJjsu UJ seoi eq jeroeds sj pow penumnuoosiq Aseyeg Jo suonne2aJd UJ uoneuodsueJ jo Buypuey TI Ssejejs Jequieu 13 ui seuejeq FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 Correspond Number and i Content of register ing special name device Output Refresh Error D 8109 Y number where output refresh M8109 error occurs DIsrio BITS RS FNC 80 and Computer Link ch1 RS FNC 80 instruction and D 8120 computer link ch1 n Communication format setting D 8121 1 Computer link ch1 8 Station number setting RS FNC 80 instruction 2 D16122 Remaining points of transmit data MAE RS FNC 80 instruction 2 D 8123 Monitoring receive data points VOTES RS FNC 80 instruction ples Header lt Default STX gt RS FNC 80 instruction ee Terminator lt Default ETX gt i Disiza Computer link ch1 D 8127 Specification of on demand head device register Computer link ch1 D 8128 Specification of on demand data atap to M8129 length register RS FNC 80 instruction computer D 8129 1 link ch1 Time out time setting eT Latch device 2 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP Positioning D18130 1
338. er The covers can be opened for wiring Keep the covers closed while the PLC is running the unit power is on When an input terminal X000 or more is turned on the corresponding LED lights Connect the extension cables of input output powered extension unit block or special function block to the extension device connecting connectors under this cover FX3U Series extension devices and FX2N Series extension devices can be connected For details on the extension devices refer to Chapter 15 Chapter 16 Chapter 17 and Section 18 1 The operation status of the PLC can be checked with the LEDs The LEDs turn off light and flash according to the following table For details on the operation status refer to Section 14 5 LED name Description POW On while power is on the PLC RUN On while the PLC is running Flashing when a program error occurs ERR Lights when the battery voltage drops ALM When the optional battery is used Red O Lights when a CPU error occurs When an output terminal YOOO or more is turned on the corresponding LED lights The model name of the main unit is indicated Check the nameplate on the right side for the model name The main unit can be installed on DIN46277 rail 35mm 1 38 wide The year and month of production of the main unit is indicated For details on the year and month of production refer to Subsection 5 1 2 31 A 5 a Ss o Q S o 2 SOWeN Hed pue
339. er Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 5 Examples of External Wiring DC Power Supply Type 9 5 Examples of External Wiring DC Power Supply Type UONnOnpoJjU 9 5 1 Example of sink input common wiring NO An example of sink input common wiring is given below When connecting input output powered extension units blocks carefully check the signal names on the terminal block because the sink and source input type units blocks and the sink input type units blocks vary in signal names on the terminal block Sink and source input type 24V DC EMEN Circuit protector SOWeN ed pue seJnjee SVIOV 24V OO SY e rr Cass Power supply ON roundin PL E e MC e ES Sink and MC 4 source B einergency g input Lee i Stop s type o j C S Input extension MC MC block T J naYyY7 MM 5VIOV 24V 5 o U lt TLT 225 Qo o2 Special function E block Power supply for loads to Oo be connected to PLC E output terminals 5 3 a As for the details of Sink and emergency stop source i operation see DESIGN 7 input l PRECAUTIONS at a type i Safety Precautions field eum J T 2 Input extension Se block 2 Special function block 5 62 ye v D gt o B C Lo m m me e e e m e e c um m Db m m Dum a RR GR RS RR GR RR RR RU
340. er s Manual Hardware Edition 12 2 External Wiring of Transistor Output Sink Source Type 12 2 External Wiring of Transistor Output Sink Source Type 25 This section explains the procedures for handling transistor output and external wiring 2 For the transistor output specifications refer to the following For the specifications on the main unit refer to Subsection 4 4 2 For the specifications on the input output powered extension unit refer to Chapter 15 For the specifications on the input output extension block refer to Chapter 16 12 2 4 Transistor Output Sink and Source BuutM 1ndino FX3G Series main units FX2N Series input output extension units blocks of transistor sink output type and of transistor source output type are available 13 1 Differences in circuit E e Sink output common a Output to make load current flow into the output Y terminal is D called sink output I uny 1S9 Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N e Source output common Output to make load current flow out of the output Y terminal is called source output peJeMod jidnoandu Ql spun uoisuejx3 uda 490 UOISU9 X3 dnoandu C N yu A ddns Jewog UOISUS X3 co suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 177 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 2 External Wiring of T
341. er supply Do not connect with terminals For external wiring make sure to read the power supply wiring described later 6 Refer to Chapter 9 mE oS Indication of Input terminal gu Both AC and DC power supply type have the same input terminals however the external input wiring si differs from each other S For external wiring make sure to read the input wiring described later Refer to Chapter 10 T Indication of output terminals connected to common terminal zc One common terminal covers 1 2 3 or 4 output points YE The output numbers Y connected to a common terminal are enclosed with heavy partition lines For transistor output source type COME is V0 a 2 zgJTI TE e Li ss 53 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 7 Terminal Layout 4 7 2 FX3G 14MU AC power supply type S S X1 X3 X5 X7 e L N XO X2 X4 X6 e FX3G 14MR ES FX3G 14MT ES ovIvo va vz vs v4 vs e av co cor coco cow oom FX3G 14MT ESS ovIvo riTvz vs v4 v8 T Davo vi pvp vapvarvs DC power supply type JS S XT X8 XS X7 e v DO X01 x2 x4 x6 e FX3G 14MR DS FX3G 14MT DS ps Yo Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Jcouofcont coz coms coms cons FX3G 14MT DSS Jvojv1 v2 Y3 Y4 YS5 Ls vor vipevapevapevap vs e
342. er to the following chapters Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring Power supply specifications Item FX2N 8EX ES UL FX2N 16EX ES UL Product type FX2N extension block Rated voltage 24V DC supplied from main unit and input output powered extension unit 2 Weight and Other specifications External dimensions are described later Item FX2N 8EX ES UL FX2N 16EX ES UL MASS Weight 0 2kg 0 44lbs 0 3kg 0 66lbs The extension cable is already connected to the extension block Other Accessories Label for indication of input output number The DIN46277 rail width 35 mm 1 38 or direct installation 3 Input specifications common to both sink and source inputs Item FX2N 8EX ES UL FX2N 16EX ES UL Connection type Vertical terminal block M3 screws Input form sink source Input signal voltage 24V DC 10 Input signal current 5mA 24V DC Input impedance 4 3kQ ON input Input ON current 3 5mA or more at 24V DC sensitivity current Inout OFF current 1 5mA or less Input response time Approx 10ms Sink input No voltage contact input NPN open collector transistor Input signal form Source input No voltage contact input PNP open collector transistor Input circuit insulation Photo coupler insulation Indication of input operation LED on panel lights when input Sink input wiring Source input wiring Main unit Main unit nae Input circuit diagram FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input
343. eric name for the following models FXON 30EC FXON 65EC Generic name for the following models 9 Input output cables FX 16E 500CAB S FX 16ELILILICAB FX 16E QOOCAB R FX A32bE LIEIEICAB ZU 150 300 or 500 is entered in OOO E a sy2 Connectors reel Generic name for the following models DB pum FX2C l O CON FX2C I O CON S FX2C l O CON SA sS o CC Link master Generic name for the following models 2 FX3U 16CCL M FX2N 16CCL M Intelligent device stations Abbreviation of FX3U 64CCL interface block 1 0 Remote device stations Abbreviation of FX2N 32CCL interface block a E Remote l O station Remote station that handles bit data only Peripheral devices Generic name for programming software handy programming panel HPP and indicator E 27 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 Introduction 1 2 Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals 28 Abbreviation generic name Programming tool Programming software GX Works2 GX Developer FX PCS WIN E Handy programming panels HPP RS 232C RS 422 converters RS 232C RS 485 converters Indicators GOT1000 Series GOT 900 Series GOT A900 Series GOT F900 Series Manuals FX3G Hardware Edition Programming manual Data Communication Edition MODBUS Serial Communication Edition Analog Control Edition Positioning Control Edition Description Generic name for programming software and handy programming panel HPP Generic name for G
344. eries Programmable Controllers Revised History User s Manual Hardware Edition Revised History 11 2008 12 2008 3 2009 3 2010 7 2011 3 2012 9 2012 Description First Edition The following products are added Main unit of relay output type FX3G 14MR ES FX3G 24MR ES FX3G 40MR ES FX3G 60MR ES Programming tool FX 30P The accessing path to the FX3G from CC Link Network are added Explanation corrections for manufacturer s serial number Section 2 2 and 5 1 EC directive CE Marking Compliance added Errors are corrected The following products are added Main unit of transistor output source type FX3G 14MT ESS FX3G 24MT ESS FX3G 40MT ESS FX3G 60MT ESS The following products are added Main unit of DC power supply type FX3G 14MR DS FX3G 24MR DS FX3G 40MR DS FX3G 60MR DS FX3G 14MT DS FX3G 24MT DS FX3G 40MT DS FX3G 60MT DS FX3G 14MT DSS FX3G 24MT DSS FX3G 40MT DSS FX3G 60MT DSS Input output powered extension unit of DC power supply type FX2N 48ER DS FX2N 48ET DSS FX2N 48ER D FX2N 48ET D Analog special adapter FX3U 3A ADP Ver 1 20 is supported Supports FX3U 3A ADP Supports the hardware error function of FX3U 4DA ADP Precautions for Battery Transportation are added Appendix D Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built in Batteries in EU Member States are added Appendix E Explanation corrections for manufacturer s serial number and lot number Explanati
345. erminal block M3 screw sex Input form AC input E 5 Input signal voltage 100 to 120V AC 10 15 50 60 Hz 3 3 E E ACE 4 7 mA 100V AC 50 Hz 70 or less when turned on simultaneously E 6 2 mA 110V AC 60 Hz 70 or less when turned on simultaneously ae Approx 21 kQ 50 Hz Approx 18 kQ 60 Hz Input impedance Iz Input response Input ON current 3 8mA or more 80V AC xe 5 3 D time Input OFF current 1 7mA or less 30V AC See 5 r Input response time Approx 25 to 30ms c E Input signal form Contact input d Input circuit insulation Photo coupler insulation 1 6 Indication of input operation LED on panel lights when input SxS Qoc BBO oc 5 100 to 240V AC Input circuit diagram 1 7 com 53 gt OX Ig OD QD NO e5 1 Input impedance S lt co suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 243 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 8 FX2N 48ER UA1 UL 3 Output specifications relay output type Item FX2N 48ER UA1 UL Output Points 24 points Connection type Removable terminal block M3 screw Output unit Relay 30V DC or less 240V AC or less 250V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE UL or cUL standards Output circuit insulation Mechanical insulation External power supply Indication of output operation Supplying power to the relay coil will light the LED i
346. ersion adaptor or memory cassette was removed in the step 2 attach it again Caution 1 After replacing the battery check whether the backup target devices keep devices and clock data are backed up correctly confirm safety and then run the PLC 2 If the backup target devices keep devices are not backed up correctly clear them and set their initial values and clock data again if necessary For the clear method of keeping devices refer to the programming manual 22 6 Battery Related Precautions 388 The FX3G series uses a different battery type than those used for the FX2N F2 40BL and FX2Nc FX2NC 32BL series e Not for use with the FX3G series Make sure to select the battery mode using a parameter when using the battery FX3G Series Programmable Controllers Appendix A Special Device List User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 9jlesse2 NO Alowa Appendix A Special Device List The device numbers and functions of the special auxiliary relays indicated as special M in tables and special data registers indicated as special D in tables are shown below Note that functions of certain devices vary depending on the series of the PLC Do not use the undefined blank special auxiliary relays and special data registers in the sequence program since they are occupied by the CPU In addition do not activate or write to the devices with brac
347. ese se numver is spec The device number is specified within the allowable range END E FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 14 Specified Device Monitor Function 19 14 5 Program example3 when monitoring non consecutive timers using operation keys OI In this program example the device type to be displayed on the specified device monitor screen is set to CE timer T The operation keys and in the display module are available to scroll device numbers T1 T5 E T10 and T20 during monitoring In this program example system information is assigned from D50 to D54 and from M50 to M64 1 2 e M Me System information system No 1 is Set at D50 o D54 Initial pulse l l System information system No 2 is D8301 Stat MBO to M64 Sets the device type to Timer Resets the index register a 10 Buum OO Ses snoueA DEL Transfers the timer device numbers E 5 oD D102 to D100 to D103 B35 2S e BEEN a Specified device 1 5 monitor screen button ON displayed mus aoe M56 M55 M59 Sse Specified device The timer number is scrolled using e monitor screen the or button while the 6 button ON displayed specified device monitor screen is M55 M56 M59 displayed 1 NS 90 UOISU9 X3 ndinoandu C Ta The device number is specified within the allowable range xa 20 The device number to be M
348. eseeneceeeseeeeessueeeeesseeeesseeeeeneas 297 18 20 EXSUSTADSTOSNDB ici ome ET a ak ee ee ee ue E ood EcL S 297 19 2 7 EX3U 292ADP CMB Joseri ciare to oto PU Ra Rate ct nau cue U nutu tenni ase duxeesuxcdieut ease Jr EREE TEE VEEE ene 298 10 2 9 PXSU AC SADE CIB uisus cndkts otto abel adit adtota ete ces tian ok ahaa he isnt sene etus 298 1829 dris El ce n tees 299 16 3 Expansion BON ie ee ae ok chacun a Den tec E E ec Sate esi cds 300 ioo EA 7 esp 300 19 922 FX9G 2EY TSBD ii e RE er ee ere eee eee 300 13a FAIG 232 Lp T 301 19 954 FX3G422 BD ium D Rito d es Dedit teatro eer elon ued 301 oM eccihlssiBMTMM T 302 10 3 0 FXSG2465 B DRG ice cect ects ea a uv dee bad eden i uu a temet ice eade Cee reser ctae 302 103 USO ZAD BD Mee acne Meet eete arr eee tere e Putus a rei dedu D LES Rep EE 303 10 9 9 EX9SGSTDASBIS bee odes bod see e ao edat eben Metu ede cca Iu Lun eMe eee 303 SRM ec EpE 304 ors POWEr SUPPI m t em 305 184A MEO SU DU c bM E mr 305 18 5 Connector Conversion JAdabler u deno dr ota ane rte SER urko utu Rein Panes ia ivendvehivalaxditeae tives 305 19 51 EFEX3G CNV ADP Acer 305 omoia ils BC iore a en On ES 306 joroxiui uie Qu eU Mr 306 MG Ord eo ZA Ole iuto eich tu ation a puntos iniu utatur Mc ALES LEN E eere 306 19 Display Module FX3G 5D
349. esigned to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case a 2 Note that when an error occurs in a relay triac or transistor output device the output could be held either on or off vg 2 For output signals that may lead to serious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe ug 2 machinery operation in such a case 8 3 Eb DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION 15 mu gt Aog d e Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line As a guideline lay the control line at least 2 D O 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line g Noise may cause malfunctions 2 7 62 WIRING PRECAUTIONS NWARN ING Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock 1 WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Connect the AC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or
350. esirikanira E a Ei 280 16412 PROGUCLSDECINCANONS EE E D st 280 16 12 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement cccccccseeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeseaeeeeeeas 281 16 12 3 EXtertabalimefiSIOllS usu ass eangcudetcsc ns endet a io sepu duit netos 281 16 13 FX2N 16EYS Triac Output 16 Points eeeeeessessssesssseenneeeennnnnnnen nennen 282 16 131 Product Specili C dtlOEIS x 25 series Reise s spen emnt oet ease o tonne eae oe 282 16 13 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement cccccccseeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeesaeeeeesseeeeeeeeas 283 16 13 39 External CIMONSIONS suasit a a a acta darts ire eee eae were 283 17 Extension Power Supply Unit 284 UT EOD i r I dI 284 W2 DS DCCINCALONS ee c Sek 285 17 2 1 GENETIC SDGeeciliGalloOris uui essc sedo Cui tit pect acido dod E ec dase eee 285 17 2 2 Performance Specifications cscs iesescennscsdenanaeneseeenesdcdeee up cure pnt R Ou ehetenteepanee ec EesdepRE S ined ce i adcud 285 17 29 ExtermalDImmehslolISca mee seeds M Pn e toi See eris o Saga a pened Ea dmn tad ate ed 285 17 3 Extension Power Supply Unit Related Precaution ccccccccccsecccceeeesaeeeceeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeesanees 286 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement 287 18 1 Special Function Dnits BIOCKS ue Eo ree e eeu Rp un re pe dees ieee eels 287 18 Big Pec ae gt 2 AD aeara rt dP MEE UT NT COE TPO 287
351. etachment lever D and pull it vertically to remove the memory cassette Attach the upper connector cover E in the right figure Fix the expansion board with the tapping screws F in the right figure provided for fixing the memory cassette Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 6 N m Caution Two types of M3 tapping screws are provided Use M3 x 8 shorter screws Do not use M3 x 16 longer screws removed in the step 2 because they may damage the main unit FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 21 Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 21 5 Saved Data Content 21 5 Saved Data Content The following data is saved on the memory cassette Memory capacity setting 22 Memory capacity default setting 8k steps E 2k 4k 8k 16k 32k steps D Comment capacity 3 Parameters File register capacity Modem initializing settings Battery mode settings RUN terminal settings RS RS2 instructions computer link function communication settings Positioning settings Program Memory 2 Programming tool Special parameters Sequence programs User created sequence programs Max 3150 points Comments and file registers can be Comments 0 to eo POE created in the memory by setting 1 block 50 points 500 steps them in the parameter memory Max 7000 points capacity File registers 0 to 14 blocks 1 block 500 points 500 steps 0008d 0008IN sr uononajsu W seoi eq jeiroeds
352. eteenErotect Function Restrictions registration Status Keyword is being used is being used Keyword is not ant ae l l Keyword is not being used Keyword is registered Keyword is being used Keyword is canceled All functions are enabled no restrictions Keyword is not being used Restriction of functions is according to the display screen l l Keyword is being used i Keyword is not registered protect function Keyword is not being used All functions are enabled no restrictions Restriction of functions is according to the keyword level 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM 19 16 Display Screen Protect Function FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 19 16 5 Keyword levels oc 1 For 8 Digit Keyword a 8 Digit Keyword Level Keyword Input Example Keyword Content es 8 digit hexadecimal value beginning with A OABCDEF2 A All operations prohibited cid to Ol numeral AABCD345 1 2 T eos i non B1234567 s B Read Incorrect write protection 8 digit hexadecimal value beginning with B BABCDEF7 T oe new C8904567 EL C Erroneous write prohibited 8 digit hexadecimal value beginning with C CDEF567F i 2 For 16 Digit Keyword Customer keyword Permanent PLC lock included 13 16 Digit Keyword Level Keyword Content Keyword Input Example S E OABCDEF262297529 2a All online operations prohibited A to F 0 to 9 16 digit value AA
353. ette 12 atencion devices to be connactades Display module Connector conversion adapter to mainrurnit Extension devices for FX2N FX3U Series Input extension Output Memory cassette Expansion board Display module MITSUBISHI block extension block Special Connector conversion FX3G 40MT ES FX2N 16EX FX2N 16EYT adapters adapter X000 to X027 X030 to X047 Y020 to YO37 Range of devices powered from main unit ee um um um EM EM EE EE EE RE RE EM EE EE EE RM RE EM EE EE EE REM RE EM EN RE EE EE EM RE EM EE EE RE EE EM X Selection of extension cable fe Determination of number of devices to be connected to extension unit _ Refer to this chapter 4 l extension power supply unit i FX2N input output powered Extension devices for FX2N FX3U Series extension unit 1 4 Extension power supply unit Input extension Sp ecial block function block FX2N 32ER ES UL FX2N 16EX C FX2N 16CCL M X050 to X06 X070 to X107 y I rjESEQESeSEQESGQE ESG9E GSG d 8 i The range of devices powered from oo ues m the FX2N input output powered 1 E extension unit or the extension power supply unit EAO eS ee 6 FX Series terminal block Refer to Chapter 19 r 777 7 7 T 7 When CC Link is used 77 7
354. eturn to the menu screen press ER 16bit DER 32bit l X l Y I I S 3 Press OK to display the monitor screen for the device which was selected for monitoring To cancel the operation and return to the device selection screen press ESC After the power is turned on the number of the device to be displayed is shown as follows a The first time the power is turned on the display begins with device No 1 b At subsequent power ONs the device which was being monitored at the previous operation is displayed they are saved in memory for each device type 4 Use the and buttons to move the cursor or the screen to the until the device to be monitored is displayed Refer to Subsection 19 6 3 for status display Selected Device Type Operation Description All devices ESC Returns to the device selection screen Dataregisters D DD Extended registers Scrolls upward Press for 1 second or longer for high speed scrolling If pressed again at the beginning of the device No list the display jumps to the end of R DR the device No list Extended file registers ER DER Scrolls downward Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed scrolling Timer T If pressed again at the end of the device No list the display jumps to the beginning of Scrolls the display screen upward Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed scrolling If pressed again at the beginning of the device No
355. example 2 of variable analog potentiometer The current value of VR2 multiplied by 10 is used as the set value of a timer M8000 MUL D8031 K10 DO D1 The value of D8031 is multiplied by 10 and stored in DO D1 T4 DU reser ree setar Nested es The current value of VR2 multiplied by 10 is used as the E T set value of the timer T1 The setting range in this example using T1 100ms timer is from O to 255 sec FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 4 Maintenance and Periodic Inspection 14 4 Maintenance and Periodic Inspection OF This PLC does not incorporate consumable parts that are factors in the reduction of service life 2 However the output relays points of contact and batteries option have a limited life expectancy 14 4 1 Procedures for checking model name 12 O The model name of the main unit can be checked on the nameplate on the right side After extension devices g are connected the nameplate cannot be seen Check the model name in the following places When the top cover is removed co ss Hf Sc E Ehi 6 Model name p Model name g abbreviation e d OSS Oo T MEA p M i 3 T o S 14 4 2 Periodic inspection battery life etc 15 ES 1 Battery 3 RE Part Life 278 Model FX3U 32BL battery Standard life 5 years at amb
356. existing unit main unit with the supplied extension cable or the optional extension cable Fit the extension connector cover A in the right figure FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NWARN ING Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents 1 2 Most importantly have the following an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that the output current of the 24V DC service power supply varies depending on the model and the absence presence of extension blocks If an overload occurs the voltage automatically drops inputs in the PLC are dis
357. f System Configuration cccccccssececcceecccceeeeeceeseeeceeeueeesseeeeesseueeessgeeessageesseeeeessaneneeegas 70 6 3 Number of Input Output Points and Maximum Number of Input Output Points 72 6 3 1 Calculation of number of input output points cece cc eeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeseaeeeseaeeesananes 72 6 3 2 Maximum number of input output points when CC Link master is used 14 6 4 Number of Connected Extension Devices Including Extension Cable sssssse 75 6 4 1 Number of connectable expansion boards and special adapters ccccccceecccseeeeceeeeeeaeeeeaees 15 6 4 2 Input output powered extension UNItS cccccccceeccececeeceeceeceeeeesee cesses cesses eeeseeeeesaeeeessueeessneeeesaaes 75 64 3 Extension Power Supply UN a n ec e ce oeque o dta cep es de 75 644 Special function DIOCKS oo toa deae oE hecstun oi fades arsed cunts o setenta Eg ta d o auc Stu aaa 75 6 2 5 EXTENSION Cable ctor etes used Pos Se alee Ns coe a sade das eee fetu edd ee de oe 15 6 5 Expansion OF Main DIE oor ufui iore vitto Ferien uai tos stultis nene a a bed esto ista dta ud 76 6 5 1 When adding input output extension blocks using the 24V DC service power supply of me man UN ase T rite eet aes adr eer Cee ee N ene er eee TT 6 5 2 Selection example 1 using the 24V DC service power supply of the main unit 79 6 5
358. f approx 0 8mm 0 04 Shape of tool tip Good Do not use objects with round tips as the round tip can easily slip off the switch knob possibly resulting in an incorrect setting Tool tip Bad Switch operation procedure As shown in the figure below the switch knob can be pushed or pulled When setting the switch do not set it in an intermediate position Switch setting Push tool directiori Switch Switch case Pull knob direction OFFeON OFFeON 21 6 3 Precautions when setting and using the switch 382 Leaving the switch knob at an intermediate position for an extended period can cause an equipment failure FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 21 Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 21 7 Memory Cassette PLC EEPROM Memory Transfers by Loader Function 21 7 Memory Cassette lt gt PLC EEPROM Memory Transfers by Loader Function The FX3G EEPROM 32L loader function WR and RD key operation is explained in this section Program transfers reading writing are possible between the memory cassette and the PLC s internal EEPROM memory The loader function is enabled while the PLC is stopped e When the display module is connected data can be transferred from the memory cassette by performing the data transfer procedure in the display module It is not possible to transfer data from the memory cassette by performing the data transfer procedure in the memory cassette For t
359. f operation When power is applied to the output relay coil the LED is lit and the output contact is turned on Response time The response time of the output relay from when the power is applied to the coil until the output contact is turned on and from when the coil is shut off until the output contact is turned off is approx 10ms Output current At a circuit voltage of 240V AC or less 250V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE UL or cUL standards a resistance load of 2A per point or an inductive load of 80VA or less 100V AC or 200V AC can be driven For the life of the contact for switching an inductive load refer to Subsection 14 4 3 When an inductive load is switched connect a diode for commutation or a surge absorber in parallel with this load DC circuit Diode for commutation AC circuit Surge absorber Open circuit leakage current Because there is no leakage current even while output contacts are OFF the neon ball etc can be driven directly FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 1 External Wiring for Relay Output Type 12 1 3 External wiring precautions oc o D 1 Protection circuit for load short circuiting a A short circuit at a load connected to an output terminal could cause burnout at the output element or the PCB To prevent this a protection fuse should be inserted at the output BuutM 1ndino
360. fective In stopped status Devices used in program gt gt Forcible ON OFF Devices not in use Change of current values of timers counters Devices used in program 2 3 3 data registers extension registers extension Devices not in use file registers and file registers When the program memory is the built in EEPROM When the program memory is in the memory cassette Change of settings of timers and counters and the PROTECT switch is on When the program memory is in the memory cassette and the PROTECT switch is off zi 3 HR C2 lt lx wo 1 Forcible ON OFF The forcible ON OFF function is effective on the input relays X output relays Y auxiliary relays M state S timers T and counters C On the display module the function cannot be operated for the input relays X The forcible ON OFF function can turn on or off the devices only for one scan While the PLC is running the function is substantially effective in clearing the current values of the timers T counters C data registers D index registers Z and V and extension registers R and in controlling the SET RST circuit and self retaining circuit The operation to forcibly turn on timers is effective only when the timers are driven by the program The results of forcible ON OFF operation performed while the PLC in the stopped state or performed for devices not used in the program are retained However the results
361. fications refer to Section 15 2 Jo Buum OO Ses SNOEN 2 Input specifications for sink input and source input Item FX2N 32ER ES UL FX2N 48ER ES UL FX2N 48ER DS Input points 16 points 24 points I Connection type Removable terminal block M3 screw 3 a 2 Input form sink source g D Input signal voltage AC power supply type 24V DC 10 DC power supply type 24V DC 20 30 X Input signal current 5mA 24V DC a Input impedance 4 3 KQ Input response lInput ON current 3 5mA or more 24V DC time Input OFF current 1 5mA or less Input response time Approx 10ms peJewog jndinogindu No voltage contact input Input signal form Sink NPN open collector transistor Source PNP open collector transistor sun uoisuejx3 s Input circuit insulation Photo coupler insulation Indication of input operation LED on panel lights when input AC power supply type syoo g UOISU9 X3 dnoandu C Sink input wiring Source input wiring N yu A ddns Jewog UOISUS X3 co Input circuit diagram suondo DC power supply type pue shun 3X3 Jeujo Sink input wiring ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 1 Do not connect with OV and 24V terminals yoojg euw CO 229 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 3 FX2N 32ER ES UL FX2N 48ER ES UL FX2N 48ER DS 3 Output specifications relay output type I
362. from Mitsubishi h Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user or third person by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice Product application
363. g of the FX3U ENET ADP is supported in Ver 1 90U or later 2 GX Developer e GX Developer English version SWLID5C GPPW E is applicable to FX3G PLCs from the following versions Remarks Model name FX3G PLC version Media model name is shown below Before Ver 1 10 GX Developer Ver 8 72A or later Ver 1 10 SWLIDS5C GPPW E Ver 8 78G or later GX Developer Japanese version SWLID5C GPPW J is applicable to FX3G PLCs from the following versions Applicable Remarks GX Developer version Model name FX3G PLC version Media model name is shown below Before Ver 1 10 GX Developer Ver 8 72A or later Ver 1 10 SWLIDS5C GPPW J Ver 8 76E or later 3 FX 30P FX 30P is applicable to FX3G PLCs from the following version FX3G PLC version Model name APPICADIE Remarks FX 30P version e FX 30P From first version supports FX3G PLCs Ver 1 10 or later The IVMC instruction is supported in FX 30P Ver 1 50 or later Applicable Remarks GX Developer version Ver 1 00 FX 30P Ver 1 00 or later 58 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 2 Programming Tool Applicability 5 2 2 Inthe case of programming tool version not applicable Inapplicable programming tools can be used by selecting an alternative PLC model UONnOnpoJjU 1 Alternative model setting NO Model to be programmed Model to
364. gain FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 3 Use of Built in USB Programming Port 5 3 Use of Built in USB Programming Port UONnOnpoJjU Make sure to set the contents described in this section when executing circuit monitor device registration monitor program reading writing etc in the FX3G PLC using the built in USB programming port and GX Works2 GX Developer Ver 8 72A or later For GX Developer is prior to Ver 8 72A communication using the built in USB programming port is not available NO 5 3 1 Installation of USB driver SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee It is necessary to install the USB driver to execute USB communication using the built in USB programming port For the USB driver installation method and procedure refer to the following manual GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common OO GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual Startup i8 5 3 2 Setting in GX Developer 3 1 Select Online Transfer setup to open the Transfer setup dialog box 4 WM 2 Double click Serial USB in PC side I F to open the PC side I F Serial setting dialog box 8 3 Select USB Built in port j Transfer Setup PC side F CC IE Cont HET II CC Link Ethernet FEE AF ssc NET 10 H board oa board board board net board 4 Double click it bs PLC side I F jesoydued pue UO
365. ge current output FX2N 2DA Do 4 2ch Voltage current output FX2N 4DA ELE 4ch Voltage current output Analog input output mixed FX2N 5A 1ch Voltage current input output Temperature control FX3U 4LC 4 loops voltage input Temperature control resistance thermometer sensor thermocouple micro FX2N 2LC 2lops Temperature control resistance thermometer sensor thermocouple 2 Data link functions Model name FX3U 16CCL M Description Master for CC Link Compatible with Ver 2 00 and Ver 1 10 Connectable stations Remote I O station Remote device station Intelligent device station FX2N 16CCL M Master for CC Link Compatible with Ver 1 10 Connectable stations Remote I O station Remote device station Intelligent device station for CC Link os 1 to 4 stations occupied FX2N 32CCL Remote device station for CC Link 1 to 4 stations occupied FX2N 64CL M Master for CC Link LT 3 1 5 Display module Model name FX3G 5DM 1 Supported in FX3G PLC Ver 1 10 or later 3 1 6 Expansion boards Description Display module that can be incorporated in FX3G Series main unit Model name FX3G 4EX BD FX3G 2EYT BD 4 points general purpose input 2 points transistor output FX3G 232 BD For RS 232C communication FX3G 422 BD For RS 422 communication FX3G 485 BD For RS 485 communication European type FX3G 485 BD RJ FX3G 8AV BD 7 FX3G 2AD BD FX3G 1DA BD 7 1 Supported in FX3G PL
366. glish as the menu display language Button operation Section 19 8 mo language ces D 62 Contrast Adjusts the contrast 5 to 10 default setting 0 Button operation Section 19 9 Display Displays the current time Button operation eod ClockMenu I Setting Sets the current time Button operation Eod 3 2 O mq SE Keyword The currently specified keyword can be canceled Button operation Section 19 11 2 5 2 Cassette Allows data transfers between the internal EEPROM and the S g Button operation Section 19 12 5 Memory cassette transfer memory cassette a Non menu functions 1 5 oe Deu See moniter Displays the monitor test screen for a specified device at the top Requires program Section 19 14 mos function x25 D c Displays the screen saver if key operation is not given for specified 3 aS O Screen saver function period of tre Requires program Section 19 15 358 2 utm Display screen protect function enables all tuncttons promong change tes TINGIONS Ang Requires program Section 19 16 zj protects the top screen time display ee PUNOI eer Allows monitoring of operation button ON OFF status Peace pro Ea Section 19 17 1 6 information or monitor m T Changes the display format of the current values and setting See Hexadecimal current value i 2 i aps values for the timer counter data register extended register and Requires program Section 19 18 HL display setting l i i
367. grammable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 5 FX2N 8EX FX2N 16EX and FX2N 16EX C FX2N 16EX C 2 64 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch How to connect connector FX2N 16EX C Connection face of connector The polarity is shown in the following table 2018 16714712 20 9481 46944 94211 Side B is for the higher input numbers Side Bpa X7 X6 XS X4 X3 X2 X1 XO and side A is for the lower input numbers Side Abas xz xe xe xa x3 X2 X1 XO Exe side B X050 to X057 Side A X040 to X047 260 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 6 FX2N 16EXL C 5V DC Input 16 Points 16 6 FX2N 16EXL C 5V DC Input 16 Points oF a 16 6 1 Product specifications The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications 1 2 Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications O S 1 Power supply specifications Item FX2N 16EXL C a Product type FX2N connector type extension block for each application Rated voltage 24V DC supplied from main unit and input output powered extension unit 1 3 SS 2 Weight and Other specifications External dimensions are described later e c a Item FX2N 16EXL C a MASS Weight 0 3kg 0 66lbs o The extension cable is already connected to the extension block Other Accessories Label for indica
368. gure as shown in the right figure Connect the connector conversion adapter to the option connector D in the right figure as shown in the right figure and fix it with provided M3 tapping screws E in the right figure Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 6 N m Fix the connector conversion adapter F in the right figure with provided M3 tapping screws E in the right figure to the main unit Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 6 N m 1 This paragraph explains how to connect the connector conversion adapter to the main unit LT E HU Y FA w C4 A WY Wa 2 NN LSS o VS FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 6 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices 2 This paragraph explains how to connect the connector conversion adapter to the main unit The FX3G 40MT ES is used as the main unit in this example amp Remove the top cover A in the right figure and peripheral device connector cover B in 2 the right figure from the front face of the main um unit 2g 5S n Caution 3 x The peripheral device connector cover has the possibility of being Sa damaged when removed Please remove by pressing on the Sm attaching tab a in the figure to the right g Connect the connector conversion adapter to 3 the option connector C in the right figure as 2 shown in the right figure
369. h input output extension block 16 1 1 Product configuration There are various types of input output extension blocks Select optimum blocks considering the input type output type and connection unit of your system Input output extension blocks Power supply Number of points Input type Output type Power supply to T 24V DC Terminal block inside of PLC Sink source 24V DC Sink Transistor Source 5V DC Transistor 100V AC system Sink 16 1 2 Product list 246 1 For input output extension Sink common Source common Connection type Tone Number Common Tse Number Common yP of points system yP of points system Common to both sink and source inputs a DO aan CM NN Dedicated to sink input only CONSER zvoc aey wo 1 Four inputs and four outputs are occupied as unused numbers Terminal block Terminal block 2 For input extension Sink common Source common ee aa eae eee Model ae Number Common Number Common type yp of points system yp of points system Common to both sink and source inputs Dedicated to sink input only 100V AC input type FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 1 Outline 3 For output extension oz Sink common Source common TO aes aaa eee E Connection Model usc Number Common Toss Number Common fm yp of points system yp of points sy
370. h to STOP 2 When the remote running stopping operation from the programming software is performed For this operation keep both the built in RUN STOP switch and the general purpose input RUN terminal in the STOP position If the stop command is given from the programming software after the PLC is started by either the built in RUN STOP switch or the general purpose input RUN terminal the PLC will be restored to the running status by giving the RUN command from the programming software This can also be accomplished by setting the built in RUN STOP switch or the general purpose input RUN terminal to STOP and then to RUN FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 3 Operation and Test Power ON and PLC Running 14 3 Operation and Test Power ON and PLC Running 14 3 1 Self diagnostic function When the PLC s power is turned on its self diagnostic function starts automatically If there are no problems with the hardware parameters or program the PLC will start and the RUN command refer to Section 14 2 is given RUN LED is lit If any problems are found the ERR LED flashes or lights 14 3 2 Test functions Functions of the programming tool to turn on off the PLC devices and change the current values settings are effective or ineffective depending on the PLC status as shown below v Effective A Conditionally effective Inef
371. haft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that the screwdriver I does not touch the partition part of the terminal block zs Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block European type in accordance with the following precautions E 5 e Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product 23 The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual od Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual a Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends 1 5 Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed Une Make sure to properly wire to the FX Series terminal blocks in accordance with the following precautions o S Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product z D e The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the termi
372. hase 1 count input high speed counters Mni of program For C251 e While X012 is on C251 counts the operation of the input terminals X000 A phase and X001 B phase through interruption s K1234 While X011 is turned on the counter is reset when RST instruction is executed I 93 When the current value exceeds the setting YOO2 turns on and when the current value becomes lower than the setting YOO2 turns off I 098 Co e Y003 turns on down count or off up count according to the A phase input B phase input counting direction Main unit 2 For C254 X011 ee EIEE e C254 starts counting immediately when the input terminal ere RST C254 X006 is turned on while X012 is on v The count input terminals are X000 A phase and X001 X012 B phase DO D1 PS e C254 is reset by X011 on the sequence and it is reset C254 a immediately when X002 is turned on The setting is D1 D0 e When the current value exceeds the setting D1 D0 YOOA M8254 operates and when the current value becomes lower than the setting Y004 turns off B phase input External start input YOOS turns on down count or off up count according to A phase input External reset the counting direction input Main unit e A 2 phase encoder generates A phase output and B phase output between which there is a 90 phase difference The high speed counter automatically counts up or down according to the output as shown below
373. having a parallel resistance or a two wire proximity switch a bleeder resistance may be required 3 In the case of source input wiring short circuit the terminals of the input output powered extension units as well as the S S terminal and the terminal of the main unit 4 Do not connect with OV and 24V terminals 151 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 3 100V AC Input 10 3 100V AC Input 10 3 1 Input specifications Main units of a 100V AC input type are not available Select the input for the input output powered extension units blocks For the specifications on input output powered extension units refer to Chapter 15 For the specifications on input output extension blocks refer to Chapter 16 10 3 2 Handling of 100V AC Input 1 Input terminal When voltage of 100 to 120V AC is applied between the input terminal and COM terminal the input terminal is turned on The input display LED lights Do not connect the COM terminal of an AC input type input output powered extension unit block with the COM terminal of a DC system 100 to 240V AC 100 to 120V AC 2 Input circuit The primary input circuit and the secondary input circuit are insulated with a photocoupler There is a delay of approx 25 to 30ms in response to input switching from ON to OFF and from OFF to ON Input impedance 3 Input sensitivity The input current a
374. he PLC Take the following measures Check the ground wiring and reexamine the wiring route and installation location Fita noise filter onto the power supply line If the ERR LED does not go off even after the measures stated in 1 and 2 are taken consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Perform PLC diagnosis and program check with the programming tool For the remedies refer to 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes If the operations of the PLC are abnormal perform PLC diagnosis and program check with the programming tool An I O error Comms error or Runtime error may have occurred 211 SJojunoo wh peedg uBi Buum nding N a 10 Buum OO S O c o c o D o uny 1S9 Bunoouse qnoy eoueua ure N peJeMod adnoandu OQ spun uoisuejx3 s syoojg UOISU9 X3 jd noandu C N yu A ddns Jewog UOISUS X3 co suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes Error codes can be checked with the programming tool and display module 14 6 1 Operation and check by GX Works2 1 Connect the personal computer and th
375. he PLC will burn out S Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to properly wire to the FX Series terminal blocks in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO D 5 e o 5 D e lt o a D yoojg jJeuiuJe 353 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 1 Outline 20 1 Outline A terminal block is used to convert connector type input output terminals into a terminal block Moreover dedicated input and output terminal blocks built in element types can be used to receive AC input signals for conversion to relay transistor triac output types xi xu v MITSUBISHI MELSEC FX36 40M f9ceeec FXov A6EY
376. he data transfer method in the display module refer to Chapter 20 21 7 1 Writing WR 32L gt PLC A memory cassette program is written to the PLC s internal EEPROM memory Required condition The PLC must be stopped Install the memory cassette on the main unit Setting the PROTECT switch to ON on memory cassette s rear face prevents accidental overwriting of memory cassette program Refer to Section 21 3 for the installation procedure Verify that the PLC power is OFF then install the memory cassette on the PLC Turn the PLC power ON Raise the memory cassette s eject lever UMITSUBISH WR LED gt o 32L PLC 6 WR key EO 32L PLC Press the WR key 1 time OFF ON O PROTECT SW I 1 I The WR LED lights and a preparation status is established Tocancel press the RD key Press the WR key again Writing is executed and the WR LED blinks e t takes several seconds to write data to the built in EEPROM The WR LED flickers while data is written Remove the memory cassette from the main unit Writing is completed when the WR LED goes off After turning the PLC power OFF remove the memory cassette from the PLC Refer to Section 21 4 for the removal procedure 383 KJOW N 9jesse2 N apeg IND 0008d 0008IN sr uononJjsu WwW seoi eq jeloeds
377. hich cause the difference between the number of occupied points and the 25 number of effective points are generated when the following products are used Main units FX3G 14MLI FX3c 24M0O FX3c 60M0 6 input output extension blocks FX2N 8ER ES UL FX2N 8ER ne SS 3 Numbers for added input output unit block es To an added input output powered extension unit block input numbers and output numbers following the a input numbers and output numbers given to the preceding device are assigned The last digit of the assigned numbers must begin with 0 When the input output powered extension unit is connected to the main unit input output numbers are assigned as follows z5 O o e n the case of FX3c 14ML e n the case of FX3cG 24MLI co X016 X017 Unused numbers 2 X000 to X007 X010 to X027 X000 to X015 X020 to X037 Input output powered METRE Input output powered extension unit extension unit FX3G 14MT ES FX2N 32ER FX3G 24MT ES FX2N 32ER Main unit uonejesu OO YOOO to Y005 Y010 to Y027 YOOO to YO11 Y020 to Y037 Y006 Y007 Unused numbers Y012 to YO17 Unused numbers 9 e Inthe case of FX3G 40ML e Inthe case of FX36 60MLI m X044 to X047 Unused numbers 328 X000 to X027 X030 to X047 X000 to X043 X050 to X067 E T Input output powered Input output powered m Main unit l Main unit extension unit extension unit FX3G 40MT ES a A FX36 60MT ES EUER 10 5 YOOO to YO17 Y020 to
378. hole pitch 250 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 3 FX2N 8ER 24V DC Sink Input Relay Output 16 3 FX2N 8ER 24V DC Sink Input Relay Output os 16 3 1 Product specifications The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications 1 2 Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications O For external wiring refer to the following chapters E Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring z Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring a 1 Power supply specifications 1 3 Item FX2N 8ER lt lt Product type FX2N extension block a Rated voltage 24V DC supplied from main unit and input output powered extension unit a 2 Weight and Other specifications External dimensions are described later Item FX2N 8ER 1 4 MASS Weight 0 2kg 0 44lbs a The extension cable is already connected to the extension block E 5 Other e Accessories Label for indication of input output number 23 S The DIN46277 rail width 35 mm 1 38 or direct installation 28 a 3 Input specifications Item FX2N 8ER 1 9 Input points 4 points A 28 Connection type Vertical terminal block M3 screws D de Input form Sink Input signal voltage 24V DC 10 z Input signal current 5mA 24V DC Input impedance 4 3kQ ON input Input ON current 3 5mA or more at 24V DC sensitivity current Inout OFF current 1 5mA or less Input response time Approx 10ms Inpu
379. ialog box n 3 speed speed When using transparent Selha shown bew ie met Select RS 232C on PC side I F 2 3 function in GOT F900 Setting shown below is not required g Serial setting dialog box and 22 i required co Series execute setting shown below Setting in GX Developer Ver 8 22Y or later 1 Select Online Transfer setup to open the Transfer Setup dialog box 4 Co TO m D 2 Double click PLC module in PLC side I F to open the PLC side I F Detailed setting of PLC S D module dialog box 3 o 3 Put a check mark to the check box via GOT F900 transparent mode as shown below Transfer Setup zuo J Serial NET 10 H NET II CC Link Ethernet PLC board board board board board ha C M1 Transmission ee 115 2Kbps Bus module LC side I F Detailed setting of PLC module Cancel Connection channel list via MAC MTA transparent mode CD lt 27 koj 3 No specification PLC direct coupled setting Ti t Sec ied Iv via GOT F900 transparent mode uoneinByuoy Put a check mark to the check box via GOT F900 transparent mode type C24 NET 10 H NET I CC Link Ethernet System image Co existence al E a TEL FXCPU network route C24 NET 10 H NET I CC Link Ethernet OK Accessing host station SON Iluf SON jndinondu A display screen is the example of Ver 8 724 4 Click the OK
380. ication expansion board iuit FX3G 4EX BD FX3G 2EYT BD 1 unit 2 units When expansion board is used FX3G 8AV BD Analog expansion board 1 unit 2 units Cannot be connected Cannot be connected 1 Only one FX3G 4EX BD FX3G 2EYT BD and FX3G 8AV BD can be connected to a single PLC main unit 2 Only one FX3U ENET ADP can be connected to a single PLC main unit Inthe case of Main units 14 24 point type Number of connectable Number of connectable special adapters of each type Use of expansion board eek of SIM EXE MA Communication expansion boards Analog special adapters When expansion board is used Cannot be connected 6 4 2 Input output powered extension units Up to 2 input output powered extension units can be connected in one system 6 4 35 Extension Power Supply Unit Only one extension power supply unit FX3U 1PSU 5V unit can be connected to a single PLC main unit Available when the main unit is the AC power supply type 6 4 4 Special function blocks Up to 8 special function units blocks can be connected in one system When connecting the following products take into consideration the combination number of units blocks and connecting order Type Limitations Only one FX3U 16CCL M unit can be connected to a single PLC main unit This master cannot be used together with FX2N 16CCL M When some units are used a remote I O station cannot be connected to the second and following master stations This m
381. ient temperature of 25 C 77 F 1 5 c O 5 E Standard life of FX3u 32BL 5 years at ambient temperature of 25 C 77 F For details on the standard life and recommended replacement frequency refer to Subsection 22 4 1 syoo g UOISUS X3 2 Other devices When inspecting the battery check the following points N e Check that the temperature in the panel is not abnormally increased by other heat generating bodies or direct sunlight C uUum 39x Check that dust or conductive dust has not entered the panel 7 Check for loosening of wiring and other abnormalities 3 3 Battery Replacement When the battery voltage drops while the PLC power is on the ALM LED on the panel is lit in red and M8005 and M8006 latch are turned on The memory can be retained for about one month after the lamps turn on However the operators may not immediately find the lamps to be on Prepare a new battery promptly and replace the battery with the new one co suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO For details on the specifications and functions of the battery refer to 22 Battery Caution 1 Select the battery mode using a parameter when using the battery If the battery mode is not selected the data is not backed up and the ALM LED on the panel does not light For the battery mode setting method refer to Subsection 22 3 2 ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 207 FX3G Series P
382. ight 0 1kg 0 22lbs 1 7 Accessories Four M3x8 tapping screws T for installation of adapter s g Side cover oS Manual supplied with product El suondo pue shun xg euo ainpoyy Aedsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 305 FX3G Series Prog rammable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 6 Interface Module 18 5 2 FX2N CNV BC External Dimensions e MASS Weight 40g 0 09lbs 2 3 2 Unit h ACUNUN O DE ANC Installation Screws only 18 6 Interface Module 18 6 1 FX 232AWC H External Dimensions Unit mm inches e MASS Weight 0 1kg 0 22Ibs Accessories Manual supplied with product Connector RS 232C D SUB 25 pin female RS 422 D SUB 25 pin female MITSUBISHI L POWER mm PE o zd 28 zo ox o m FX 232AWC H 80 3 15 306 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM 19 1 Specifications FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS NWARNING Before modifying or disrupting the program in operation or running the PLC carefully read through this manual and the associated manuals and ensure the safety of the operation An operation error may damage the machinery or cause accidents Do not disassemble or modify the PLC Doing so may cause fire equ
383. imensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed Make sure to properly wire to the FX Series terminal blocks in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block 140 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 1 Before Starting Input Wiring 10 1 Before Starting Input Wiring UONnOnpoJjU 10 1 1 Sink and source input NO The input terminals X of the main unit are common to sink source input of 24V DC internal power FX2N Series input output powered extension units blocks have input terminals common to sink source input or only for sink input
384. in the figure below UPZRR6 2 4bL Network Station No JY818D63001A MITSUBISHI MITSUBISHI Station 7 Station 8 S 8 O ermm when the memory cassette when the memory cassette is not used together is used together 7 5 Station No Label of FX3G 485 BD RJ The station No label is packed together with the FX3G 485 BD RJ Place it in a position where it can be seen easily for simple reference as shown in the figure below UPZRRB6 2 4L Network Station No JY818D63001A MITSUBISHI Station 7 Station 8 S 8 when the memory cassette when the memory cassette is not used together is used together 96 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 7 Assignment of Input Output Numbers and Unit Numbers User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 6 Trimmer Layout Label of FX3G 8AV BD 7 6 Trimmer Layout Label of FX3G 8AV BD UONnOnpoJjU The trimmer layout label is packed together with the FX3G 8AV BD Adhere it in a position where it can be seen easily for quick reference as shown in the figure below NO FX3G 8AV BD VOLUME LABEL Y818D63201A FX3G 8AV BD SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee OO uononpoJu jonpoug suoneoyioods I Qi seone Jeyeudueg pue uoISJ9A ues C O o zh Q S ev SS o gt
385. ing j Unit numbers are assigned to the special function blocks in the following configuration For assignment of input output numbers refer to Section 7 1 Qi Sos zo w 1 Example of configuration 929 62 so Connector pur Special function S Special adapter conversion Main unit extension P sisi FX3U AAD ADP adapter FX3G 24MT ES block FX2N 16CCL M FX3G CNV ADP FX2N 8EX 6 Input output Special 2 Z powered function S extension unit block 3 FX2N 32ET FX3U 64CCL 2 Assignment of Unit No Unit numbers are assigned to the special function blocks in the above configuration as shown below S e Unit No P L No 0 j Connector Input Special adapter conversion Main unit extension EE n FX3U 4AD ADP adapter eleZIUIESM block FX3G CNV ADP FX2N SEX E uonejesu OO Llll222222 4 See 382 Input output Special mal powered function 59 extension unit block pum FX2N 32ET FX3U 64CCL 2 E 93 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 7 Assignment of Input Output Numbers and Unit Numbers User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 2 Unit Numbers of Special Function Blocks 7 2 3 Application of unit number labels The special function units blocks come with unit number labels Apply the unit number labels to spaces on the enclosure see the following figure so that the unit numbers can be identified AIL T OBS Y818D33101 moo ma ITIZU cocoz
386. ing the memory cassette If the memory cassette is attached or detached while the PLC s power is on the data in the memory may be destroyed or the memory cassette may be damaged Do not disassemble or modify the PLC Doing so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions For repair contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Turn off the power to the PLC before connecting or disconnecting any extension cable Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions Peripheral devices display module expansion boards and special adapters s syoolg UOISU9 X3 dnoandu C N Extension units blocks and FX Series terminal blocks com Battery and memory cassette oF no TO oO lt co Please contact a certified electronic waste disposal company for the environmentally safe recycling and disposal of your device When disposing of batteries separate them from other waste according to local regulations For details of the Battery Directive in EU countries refer to Appendix E suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO When transporting the FX3G Series PLC incorporating the optional battery turn on the PLC before shipment confirm that the battery mode is set using a parameter and the ALM LED is OFF and check the battery life If the PLC is transport
387. ing with a DC power supply type main unit 2 The power is supplied as follows when the input extension block including the FX2n 8ER ES UL and FX2n 8ER is used on the downstream side of the extension power supply unit When the main unit is located on the upstream side of the extension power supply unit The power is supplied from the main unit For details refer to Chapter 6 When the input output powered extension unit is located on the upstream side of the extension power supply unit The power is supplied from the 24V DC service power supply of the input output powered extension unit For details refer to Chapter 6 3 Grounding and power cables should be positioned to exit the unit from above For details refer to Subsection 9 4 4 and Subsection 9 4 5 286 FX3G Series Prog rammable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 1 Special Function Units Blocks 11 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units 8 External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement O 18 1 Special Function Units Blocks z 18 1 1 FX2N 2AD 13 ss External Dimensions Terminal Layout Sa O 2 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches 9 S 14 a FX2n 2AD z 0 Ei Kole cso POWER 2 c or EU Oo B35 jtf x 2 O Q 15 AE TE e MASS Weight 0 2kg 0 44lbs x o e Installation DIN rail of 35mm 1 38 in width or screws Accesso
388. input output powered extension unit also enter the current consumption and number of occupied I O points for the input extension blocks including FX2N 8ER ES UL and FX2N 8ER that are connected to the FX3u 1PSU 5V 2 Amaximum of 8 special function blocks are connectable including the main unit and extension power supply unit Input output extension block Enter the products connected to the input output powered extension unit Calculate the totals FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 6 Expansion of FX2N Series I O Powered Extension Unit Determine whether FX2N 2AD and FX2N 2DA can be added UONnOnpoJjU Determine the number of analog special function blocks FX2N 2AD and FX2N 2DA to be con nected to the input output powered extension unit by the following method When connecting to FX2N 32EL Total current Analog special function block FX2N 2AD FX2N 2DA BOMA x 85mA x units units When connecting to FX2N A8ET l Total current Analog special function block FX2N 2AD FX2N 2DA BOMA x 85mA x i lt 300mA units units mA Determine whether the devices can be added to the input output powered extension unit NO SOWeN ed pue seJnjee 190mA I OO al jonpoug uononpoJu suoneoyiods I Qi Calculate the current to confirm whether the selected extension devices can be connected O
389. ion on special function devices refer to the relevant manuals Indispensable manuals v Manuals necessary for some purposes A Manuals with separate volumes for details Manual Contents number Manuals for PLC main unit BEFX3G PLC main unit Extractions of descriptions of input output Supplied FX3G Series specifications wiring and installation of FX3G Series with HARDWARE MANUAL JY997D46001 PLC main unit from FX3G Series User s Manual product Hardware Edition Model name code For the detailed explanation refer to this manual Senare FX3G Series User s Manual Details of hardware of FX3G Series PLC main unit p Hardware Edition JY997D31301 including input output specifications wiring 09R521 volume i this manual installation and maintenance llProgramming FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC ON TEUER MAIN MM Details of sequence programming for FX3G Series P g J JY997D16601 including explanation for basic instructions applied 09R517 volume Manual Basic amp Applied n instructions and various devices Instruction Edition Separate ME UE Programming methods specifications functions etc p Structured Programming Manual SH 080782 g g sap mE 13JW06 volume required to create structured programs Fundamentals Separate DAS GPU Structured Devices parameters etc provided in structured p Programming Manual JY997D26001 m a 09R925 volume projects of GX Works2 Device amp Common S
390. ipment failures or malfunctions For repair contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions Peripheral devices display module expansion boards and special adapters Extension units blocks and FX Series terminal blocks Battery and memory cassette STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS 19 1 Specifications 19 1 1 Applicable PLC Model name FX3G Series Applicability Ver 1 10 or later 19 1 2 Display switch specifications Item Specifications Display device Backlight STN monochrome liquid crystal display Green LED backlight Number of letters 16 letters half width character x 4 lines Displayed letters Alphabets Numbers Japanese character Language for menu display English Japanese Button 4 operation buttons OK ESC and 307 SJojunoo wh peedg uDi e Buum nding N 10 buum OO s sN snoueA I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1S9 peJeMod adnoandu OQ sun uoisuejx3 uda 490 UOISU9 X3 jndnoandu C yu A ddng Jamod UOISUS X3 co suondo pue sun UOISUS X3 JOUIO UJ 62 nex D lt o 2 D N yoojg jeuuue CO 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 1 Specifications User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 1 3 Part N
391. ired In addition the battery mode is set via a parameter 22 3 1 Attaching the battery The FX3G 40MT ES is used as the main unit in this example Turn the power OFF Remove the top cover A in the right figure When the expansion board connector conversion adaptor or memory cassette is attached remove it Attach the battery Insert the battery connector B in the right figure of the battery Push the battery into the battery holder C in the right figure Set the battery cable as shown in D in the right figure Attach the top cover When the expansion board connector conversion adaptor or memory cassette was removed in the step 2 attach it again 22 3 2 Setting the battery mode using GX Works2 The following setting using a parameter is required to use the battery Note that the battery does not back up the data if the following setting is not provided For the backup target data refer to Section 22 1 For details on GX Developer operating procedure refer to GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual On the PLC system 1 tab on the FX parameter window check the check box Use the battery Refer to the window below FX Parameter Memory Capacity PLC Name PLC System 1 puc System 2 Positioning Ethernet Port Battery Mode Put a check mark to the check box Use the battery MODEM Initialized Mone v RUN Terminal Input None Print Window Print Window
392. isplay module o z Not used Control device D for display E D 8 198 module D 8199 Default K 1 E N N Network monitoring Control device M for display 3g 8200 niue TE K oo gt D 8201 Current link scan time Dod F ae Z Language display setting Eu D 8202 Maximum link scan ud D 830256 Japanese KO D c D 8203 oo error at English Other than KO LCD contrast setting value D 8204 Number of communication error at e Default KO slave station No 1 b Supported in Ver 1 10 or later D 8205 Number of communication error at 6 Latch device slave station No 2 D 8206 Number of communication error at slave station No 3 M8183 to icati M8191 D 8207 Number of communication error at slave station No 4 D 8208 Number of communication error at slave station No 5 D 8209 Number of communication error at slave station No 6 D 8240 Number of communication error at slave station No 7 8 QQ FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 Corres Sumpor ana Content of register ponding name special device Positioning D 8329 to D 8339 Not used D 8340 Y000 Current value register D 8344 Default 0 D 8342 YOOO Bias speed Default 0 D 8343 Y000 Maximum speed i D 8344 Default 100000 Y000 Creep speed ores Default 1000 D 8346 Y000 Zero return speed i D 8347
393. it YOOO Y001 Sus or less positioning make sure to set the load current to 10 to 100mA 10mA or more 14 24 point type 5 to 24V DC Y002 or more 24V DC 200 mA or more 1 5 to 24V DC When using an instruction related to pulse train output or Main unit Y000 to YOO2 Sys or less positioning make sure to set the load current to 10 to 100mA BuutM 1ndino 10mA or more 40 60 point type 5 to 24V DC 13 Y003 or more 24V DC 200mA or more EM COM Input output powered extension unit oS Output extension block A a E e il 1 The transistor OFF time is longer under lighter loads For example under a load of 24V DC 40mA the o response time is approx 0 3ms When response performance is required under light loads provide a dummy resistor as shown below to increase the load current I Sink output type Source output type 3 2 ir Dummy Dummy E z o 2 FusedLoad resistance Fusel Load llresistance o 8 amp 15 OS gas c amp zi 6 Output current 1 6 The maximum resistance loads for the main unit or input output powered extension units and output extension blocks are shown in the following table FE The ON voltage of the output transistor is approx 1 5V BBS m i o ex When driving a semiconductor element carefully check the input voltage characteristics of the applied xis element Output NT Model Limitation 1 T C Um FX3G 14MT OS 29x D FX3G 14MT OSS o 2 gt FX3G 24MT O
394. jndinondu SON HUN SON uonejeisu OO BULA A ddng Jamod ue uonesedaid h Buum ndu CO p 97 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 Installation In Enclosure DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NWARN ING e Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents 1 Most importantly have the following an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits 2 Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that the output current of the 24V DC service power supply varies depending on the model and the absence presence of extension blocks If an overload occurs the voltage automatically drops inputs in the PLC are disabled and all outputs are turned off External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe
395. kets on the first letter such as M 8000 or D 8001 in the program 22 F 3 For detailed explanation refer to the Programming Manual Ze e m a a S D Appendix A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 Bg eo PB Number and otto pond Number and molteskend B Dame Operation and function ing special MA Operation and function ing special B device device PLC Status Clock S pone MIe010 RUN monitor RUN T NO contact input ON and OFF in 10ms cycle 10ms clock RUN monitor Error occurrence NC contact hi sia ON and OFF in 100ms cycle mm eee ON 50ms OFF 50ms a M 8002 M8000 pulse l l 6 3 Tae maoo 1 i M 8013 ON and OFF in 1 M8001 M an in 1sec cycle f NO Comag 1sec clock pulse ON 500ms OFF 500ms gt M8002 M 8014 ON and OFF in 1min cycle i M 8003 1min clock pulse ON 30sec OFF 30sec D Initial pulse M8003 E NC contact M 8015 Clock stop and preset f 3g He 1 scan time For real time clock E g o M 8004 ON when either M8060 M8061 M 8016 Ue bs Mode stopped i S 3 Error occurrence M8064 M8065 M8066 or M8067 D8004 ip dca som M 8005 ON when battery voltage is below mnes For real time clock Battery voltage low the value set in D8006 IM 8018 Installation detection Always ON i M 8006 It is set when battery voltage low is ss For real time clock Battery error latch detected M 8019 Real time clock RTC error i M 8007 a J For real time clock ot use M
396. language used at the display module menus is specified at the LANGUAGE menu The language setting procedure is described below All operation explanations and display screen examples in this manual are in English When the menu display language is set to Japanese please convert the screen messages to their Japanese translations Refer to Section 19 20 for the Japanese and English display character correspondence table 19 8 1 Changing to Japanese menus The procedure for changing from English menus to Japanese menus is described below 1 Turn the PLC power on Following a brief title screen display 1 5 seconds the top screen time display or a specified device monitor screen is displayed 2 Press the ESC button when the specified device screen is displayed Press the OK or ESC button when the time is displayed Then the menu screen shown on the right appears Four lines out of the whole menu are displayed at one time on the menu screen 3 At the menu screen use the buttons to move the cursor to the LANGUAGE item then press OK to display the display language selection screen To cancel the operation and return to the top screen time display press ESC Title screen MELSEC F FX3G Series Ver 1 10 g Approx 1 5 secs Top screen Time display 01 10 08 23 59 59 Wed or Specified device monitor screen example X010 34567 Specified Vg o d OES o
397. lay of current value Display screen protect function Refer to Section 19 18 for the setting Refer to Section 19 16 for details procedure 19 13 1 System information list Special data register D8300 and D8301 devices with first numbers specified are assigned as system information devices data register auxiliary relay The data register excluding special data register should be specified at the system information s system signal 1 and the auxiliary relay excluding special auxiliary relay should be specified at the system information s system signal 2 Both D8300 and D8301 have default settings of 1 When D8300 is 1 the screen saver function becomes effective after 10 minutes Refer to Section 19 14 to Section 19 18 for explanations of each system signal 1 System signal 1 specta Gat System Description Reference register Information ooo Device type to be displayed For specified device monitor function Section 19 14 D8300 KOO DLILI 1 Device No to be displayed Occupies DOO 2 Screen saver setting time Forced display Section 19 15 5 points poo 3 Device for display screen protect function Section 19 16 oa 2 System signal 2 register Information anal Operation button ON OFF button ON OFF Section 19 17 MA A48 Device for specifying the Monitor Test menu s current value and setting the value Section 19 18 display format hexadecimal or decimal Specified device monitor display status Section 19 14
398. lays the dedicated screen to prevent burning of the screen when a key operation is not given for the specified time in the display module For the screen saver function set the screen saver setting time in DO O 2 of the system information system signal 1 The screen saver function is set as 10 minutes as an initial value in D8300 when 1 or DODO 2 is 0 19 15 1 System information Screen saver function 1 System signal 10 System Information Description Screen saver setting time in units of min 1orless Forced screen saver function to always display the dedicated screen DOO 2 0 10 minutes initial value 1 to 240 Can be set in units of minute within this range 241 or more 240 minutes 2 System signal 2 System Information Description MA A 2 Screen saver function invalid 19 15 2 Screen saver display When a key operation is not given within the specified screen saver setting time the dedicated screen shown below appears and scrolls from the right to the left and from the top to the bottom When a key operation is given while the dedicated screen is displayed the former screen appears The key operation given for the first time after the dedicated screen appeared resets the screen saver function and is invalid as a key operation The dedicated screen scrolls Display screen example The dedicated screen appears until a key operation is given W een saver n saver 01 10 08 gt Misc 23 59 59
399. line As a guideline lay the control line at least Cas 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to peripheral device connectors Failure to do so may result in wire damage breakage or PLC failure 6 WIRING PRECAUTIONS NWARNING ga Rt 9 Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or T wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock o8 Se c gt JS zB P zi 2 v m Q UA o Q S Cog O O zel lt S Q 139 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not supply power to the 24 and 24V terminals 24V DC service power supply on the main unit or extension units Doing so may cause damage to the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100 or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit and extension units with a wire 2 mm or thicker Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems refer to section 9 3 Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product Connect the AC power sup
400. llers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 5 Performance Specifications Item Performance 16 bits up EEPROM keep C16 to C199 Counter 32 bits up down me For general 32 bits up down EEPROM keep C220 to C234 184 points Counting from 0 to 32 767 uononpoJu 20 points Counting from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 NO 15 points 1 phase 1 count input in both directions 32 bits up down EEPROM keep C235 to C245 SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee 1 phase 2 count input in High speed both directions counter 32 bits up down EEPROM keep 2 phase 2 count input in both directions 32 bits up down EEPROM keep For general 16 bits DO to D127 128 points For EEPROM keep 16 bits D128 to D1099 972 points Go C246 to C250 Counting from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 jonpoud e o O et O 3 C251 to C255 77 For general 16 bits D1100 to D7999 6900 points 2 Data register m Maximum 7000 can be set as file registers in units of F 32 bits when Ero en D1000 to D7999 site 500 points from D1000 in the program o paired p p area EEPROM using parameters A For special 16 bits D8000 to D8511 512 points VO to V7 For index 16 bits 70 to Z7 16 points Extension 2 i i register For general 16 bits RO to R23999 24000 points Stored in the EEPROM built in the main ERO to
401. lly Doing so may damage the product 100 When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits 122 Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions 140 e Make sure to properly wire the FX3G Series main unit and FX2N FX3U Series extension equipment in accordance 173 with the following precautions 176 Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or 181 damage to the product 182 The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual 185 Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual 187 Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that 224 the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block 245 e Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block European type in accordance with the following precautions 353 Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or 362 damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified number of wires
402. load The total resistance load current per common should be as follows 4 output points common 8A or less Max load 80VA Inductive load For the product life refer to Subsection 14 4 3 For cautions on external wiring refer to Subsection 12 1 3 Open circuit leakage current Min load 5V DC 2mA reference values OFF ON Approx 10ms Response time ON OFF Approx 10ms DC power Output circuit configuration supply unit 16 2 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement Input numbers X are assigned to the upper four points and output numbers Y are assigned to the lower four points With cover Without cover FX2N 8ER ES POWER Input indicator Rear line lamps LED lamps extension Output indicator connector lamps LED lamps 249 SJojunoo wh peedg uBi Buum nding NS 10 buum OO s sN snoueA I I Oo amp Dn es Sy XE EN 090 2 erg oo S d Q I1 U c E el O c 2 Dc 2 oO Oak 2 S a op 17 yu A ddng Jamod UOISUS XF co suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 2 FX2N 8ER ES UL 24V DC Sink Source Input Relay Output 16 2 3 External dimensions 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches FX2N 8ER ES CD POWER LO AE Z c mounting
403. ltage 100 240V AC ae Allowable supply voltage range 85 264V AC Rated frequency 50 60Hz E The allowable momentary power failure time depends on the power supply used D e 100V AC power supply system Allowable instantaneous power failure time The operation is continued to the momentary power failure for 10 or less ms e 200V AC power supply system The operation is continued to the momentary power failure for 100 or less ms I mem Rush current 30A max 5ms or less 100V AC 65A max 5ms or less 200V AC E 2 P O m Power consumption 20W Max P 2 5 o o Output current 24V DC 0 3A 1 ED Internal for supply 5y pc 4A EE 1 The output current depends on the ambient temperature as shown in the derating curve below 1 9 IU Xx oo Derating curve 25g Output current A sum uer c amp o X B oOoOoc BBO l 40 55 oc Ambient temperature C E 17 2 3 External Dimensions 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches UOISU9 X3 A ddng eod POWERCO co TN LO I co e ee FXsu 1PSU 5V suondo mounting hole pitch pue shun 3X3 Jeujo 9 0 36 1 55 2 17 87 3 43 ainpoyy Aedsiq QO uoisua 2 yoojg euw CO 285 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 17 Extension Power Supply Unit User s Manual Hardware Edition 17 3 Extension Power Supply Unit Related Precaution 17 3 Extension Power Supply Unit Related Precaution 1 Do not use when combin
404. ly If you forget the keyword you cannot operate the PLC online from the programming tool depending on the type of the programming tool and the registered keyword 2 Caution on using a peripheral device which does not support the second keyword and customer keyword Sequence programs in which the second keyword and customer keyword are registered cannot be all cleared using a peripheral device that does not support the second keyword and customer keyword such as GX Developer whose earlier than Ver 8 724 3 Non resettable protect function When the non resettable protect function is set the protect function cannot be reset 223 SJojunoo wh peeds y6 q Buum nding N 10 Buum OO Ses snoueA O c D nN p o o ES Q paiemog yndynonjnduy OQ sun uoisuejx3 s syoojg UOISU9 X3 jd noandu C N yu A ddns Jewog UOISUS X3 co suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NWARN ING e Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents 1 Most importantly have the following an emergency stop
405. m we jipang Be YSIS 00000000 FXa 16CCL M 94 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 7 Assignment of Input Output Numbers and Unit Numbers User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 3 Assignment of Communication Channels T 3 Assignment of Communication Channels UONnOnpoJjU 7 3 1 Assignment of communication channels NO When the communication expansion board or special communication adapter is used the main unit CPU automatically assigns communication channels at the time of power ON The number of available communication channels varies depending on the main unit type Main unit 40 60 point type Max 2ch Main unit 14 24 point type Max 1ch SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee 1 In the case of main unit 40 60 point type Ch1 is assigned to the communication expansion board connected to the BD1 connector or the first special OO 5 U communication adapter connected to the connector conversion adapter ag Ch2 is assigned to the communication expansion board FX3G 4EX BD FX3G 2EYT BD FX3G 8AV BD 6 2 connected to the BD2 connector or the second special communication adapter connected to the connector 3 conversion adapter Only between the communication expansion board FX3G 4EX BD 4 FX3G 2EYT BD FX3G 8AV BD and the special communication adapter which requires the connector conversion adapter can be used 3 Main unit 40 60 point type EI oO zo 9 929 DI
406. m signal 1 System signal 1 is unrelated to this function 2 System signal 2 System Setting Display Information Content BD EU SU acres Timer T current value setting value counter C current value setting value data MA A 8 register D 16 bit 32 bit extended register R 16 bit 32 bit and extended file register OFF ER 16 bit 32 bit 19 18 2 Program example 1 specifying a hexadecimal data display format The following program example specifies a hexadecimal display format for current values and setting values which display at the Monitor Test screen In this program example system information is assigned from D50 to D54 and from M50 to M64 D8300 1 System information system No 1 is set at D50 to D54 Initial pulse SS mov eo osse MOV System information system No 2 is set at M50 to M64 M8000 Specifies a hexadecimal display format for current values which appear at the Monitor Test screen RUN monitor 19 18 3 Program example 2 specifying a decadal data display format The following program example specifies a decimal display format for current values and setting values which appear at the Monitor Test screen In this program example system information is assigned from D50 to D54 and from M50 to M64 MOV M8002 System information system No 1 is set at D50 to D54 Initial pulse System information system No 2 is set at M50 to M64 M8000 Specifies a decimal
407. malfunctions Caution When tightening a grounding terminal use a screwdriver suitable for the terminal screw The screwdriver which does not suit the thread groove is used tightening torque will not be able to be achieved To achieve the appropriate tightening torque shown in the above use the following screwdriver or an appropriate replacement lt Reference gt Weidmuller Interface GmbH amp Co KG SDIK PHO 9008560000 Weidmuller Interface GmbH amp Co KG SD 0 6x3 5x100 9008330000 130 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 3 Grounding 9 3 Grounding UONnOnpoJjU Ground the PLC as stated below Perform class D grounding Grounding resistance 100 or less e Ground the PLC independently if possible If it cannot be grounded independently ground it jointly as shown below NO Sn a2 PLC 5 3 n Y BS e Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed 3 IR Extension devices of PLC except expansion board and special adapter SB S adapter C 4 i i L Independent grounding S Class D grounding e grounding resistance 100 or less gt Use ground wires thicker than AWG14 2 mm Position the grounding point as close to the PLC as possible to decrease the length of the ground wire Qi seone Jeyeudueg pue uoISJ9A
408. mber 410 Appendix C Discontinued models 413 Appendix D Precautions for Battery Transportation 415 Appendix D 1 Regulated FX3G Series products cccccceeccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeens 415 Appendix D 2 Transport guldellries 5 eodein a oti iesu pP eo veec lude SU sex Tome Aqu eee eds 415 Appendix E Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built in Batteries in EU Member States 417 Appendix E 1 Disposal precautions eo ei eee oth eddie du see aes erue net Que ba dale ees 417 Appendix E 2 Exportation precautions cccccccccccccececeeeceeeeeeeeseeeseesaeeseeeeaeesseeeseeesseetaeenaees 417 Appendix E 3 Regulated FX3G Series products cccccccceccceeeeseceseeeseeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeaeeeaes 417 MW AMANO Peooeeee E e cS 418 ERO VISCOUS CON ETE E TEE Ea 419 13 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers Standards User s Manual Hardware Edition Standards Certification of UL cUL standards FX3G series main units FX3G series interface adapter FX3U series special adapters and FX2N input output extension units blocks supporting UL cUL standards are as follows UL cUL file number E95239 Models MELSEC FX3G FX3uU series manufactured FX3G X x MR ES FX3G X X MT ES FX3G Xx x MT ESS FX3G X X MR DS FX3G X X MT DS FX3G x MT DSS Where x x indicates 14 24 40 60 FX3G CNV ADP FX3U 232ADP MB FX3U 485ADP MB FX3U ENET ADP FX3U 4AD ADP FX3U 4DA AD
409. mber and name Counter Up down Counter Counting Direction M 8200 M 8201 M 8202 M 8203 M 8204 M 8205 M 8206 M 8207 M 8208 M 8209 M 8210 M 8211 M 8212 M 8213 M 8214 M 8215 M 8216 M 8217 M 8218 M 8219 M 8220 M 8221 M 8222 M 8223 M 8224 M 8225 M 8226 M 8227 M 8228 M 8229 M 8230 M 8231 M 8232 M 8233 M 8234 High Speed Counter Up down Counter Counting Direction M 8235 M 8236 M 8237 M 8238 M 8239 M 8240 M 8241 M 8242 M 8243 M 8244 M 8245 C234 Operation and function When M8LILILIis ON the corresponding COOL is changed to down mode ON Down count operation OFF Up count operation When M8000 is ON the corresponding COOL is changed to down mode ON Down count operation OFF Up count operation Corres ponding special device Corres Numer ang Operation and function ponding name special device High Speed Counter Up down Counter Monitoring M 8246 C246 M 8247 C247 M 8248 C248 When COOO of 1 phase 2 M 8249 C249 input or 2 phase M 8250 C250 Z input counter is in down TH ULT mode the corresponding Mi ss 91 M8000 turns ON i M 8252 C252 OFF Down count operation E M 8253 C253 ON Up count operation E M 8254 C254 M 8255 C255 MRD s VIZES Analog Expansion Board Refer to Appendix A 3 for details M8260 to M8269 M8270 to M8279 Analog Special Adapter Refer to Appendix A 4 for details M8280 to
410. me TI TI 0 data executing PID instruction ET Check the contents of the parameters 6735 Incompatible derivative gain KD KD lt 0 or 201 lt KD 6736 Incompatible derivative time TD TD lt 0 Auto tuning is continued 6740 Sampling time TS x Scan time The operation is continued in the condition sampling time TS cyclic time scan time 218 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes PLC Oz Error operation ST Contents of error Action m code at error m occurrence 2 Operation error M8067 D8067 6742 Variation of measured value exceeds limit 1 2 APV lt 32768 or 32767 lt APV 6743 Deviation exceeds limit e EV 32768 or 32767 lt EV E 6744 Integral result exceeds limit PID operation is continued Outside range from 32768 to 32767 The operation is continued with each parameter set to the 6745 Derivative value exceeds limit due to derivative gain KD maximum or minimum value 6746 Derivative result exceeds limit 1 3 Outside range from 32768 to 32767 lt lt Oo gt 6747 PID operation result exceeds limit aS Outside range from 32768 to 32767 am lt m 07 zi PID output upper limit set value PID output lower limit set transpose or is Een mE neon Seow o 6748 Por value PID oper
411. mended to use inductive loads with built in protection circuits When using loads without built in d protection circuits insert an external contact protection circuit etc to reduce noise and extend the product aS life s 1 DC circuit Connect a diode for commutation parallel to the load The diode for commutation must comply with the I inductive load Han following specifications SES PLC output o2 eue contact Diode EU Reverse voltage 5 to 10 times of the load voltage for commutation 2 2 Q Forward current Load current or more 2 AC circuit 1 9 Connect the surge absorber combined CR x93 components such as a surge killer and spark killer inductive load 2S O etc parallel to the load ss Select the rated voltage of a surge absorber that is PLC output J contact suitable for the load being used Refer to the table Surge oo absorber 1 6 below for other specifications Guide S uS S26 Static electricity capacity Approx 0 1uF EE 2 0 Forward current Approx 100 to 2000 E Reference 1 7 Manufacturer Model name Manufacturer Model name CC Ul Okaya Electric Industries Co Ltd CR 10201 Rubycon Corporation 250MCRA104100M B0325 222 23 O 3 Interlock z For loads such as forward reverse contactors etc where enue a hazardous condition could result if switched ON Interlock limit co simultaneously an external interlock should be provided Forward for interlocking the
412. mming Manual Basic amp Applied SON UN SON jndinondu uonejeisu OO Instruction Edition Connector conversion 1 D oO Supplied FX3G CNV ADP Procedures for handling the conversion function E o with JY997D32301 expansion adapter for connectors for connecting Dm Installation Manual s a product communication and analog special adapters 5 o E Battery maintenance option Supplied with FX3U 32BL Battery JY997D14101 Battery life and handling procedures 1 0 product 2 Ei E 25 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 1 Introduction User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 1 Introduction of Manuals Manual Model name Contents number code E Memory cassette supplied FX3G EEPROM 32L Specifications and operating procedures of the with JY997D32401 product Installation Manual memory cassette i Display module Supplied i with FX3G 5DM JY997D33801 Procedures for mounting and handling the display Installation Manual module product E Extension power supply unit Supple FX3U 1PSU 5V Specifications and operating procedures of the with JY997D22501 i i product Installation Manual extension power supply unit 26 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 1 Introduction User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 2 Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals 1 2 Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals Abbreviation generic name Description
413. mming tOOl cccccccccsecccceeeeecceeeeeeeeceeeeeceeseeeeeseeeeeseeeeesseseeseneeeeeaes 58 5 2 2 In the case of programming tool version not applicable seeeeeseseeeeeneeeeeee 59 5 2 3 Program transfer speed and programming tools sesessssseeeeeeeeeen eene 59 5 2 4 Cautions on connecting peripheral equipment by way of expansion board or special adapter 60 92 9 amp autions on wrie duning ISIN asocio et d ota ce pe ee Sod uaa ra ase acd fu ces dau 60 5 3 Use of Built in USB Programming Port cssc a E E A 63 9 9 T Installation Or SB OIVel eranste pte UOS Bette cede teats sedun Qo ote Deui dam NOU e m Ries pir Eddter duds 63 592 jelungImoX DeveloBer uiu dicc rane au se Ca reve IN EM ee te ee 63 5 4 Cautions on using transparent function by way of USB in GOT1000 Series 64 5 5 Cautions on using transparent port 2 port function of GOT F900 Series 65 5 6 Other Peripheral Equipment Applicability eeeeseseesseeeseeeeeneeeennnnnnn nnn 66 5 6 1 Other Peripheral Equipment Applicability esseeessseseseseeeneeennnnnnn n 66 6 Examination of System Configuration 67 6 1 Configuration of a Whole System ssssssssssssssseseeeeeee nennen nnne nnne nnne nnn nnne 67 6 1 1 Expansion board connector conversion adapter memory cassette display module configuration 68 6 2 Rules o
414. mounting function block and special adapter e Install the product on a flat surface If the mounting surface is rough undue force will be applied to the PC board thereby causing nonconformities Make sure to affix the expansion board with tapping screws Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Loose connections may cause malfunctions 99 When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure that cutting and wiring debris do not enter the ventilation slits 353 Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Besure to remove the dust proof sheet from the PLC s ventilation port when installation work is completed Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Connect the extension cables peripheral device cables input output cables and battery connecting cable securely to their designated connectors Loose connections may cause malfunctions e Connect the display module memory cassette and expansion board securely to their designated connectors Loose connections may cause malfunctions e Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices Failure to do so may cause device failures or malfunctions Peripheral devices display modules expansion boards and special adapters Extension units blocks and FX Series terminal blocks Battery and memory cassette Connect the memory cassette securely to the appropriate connector Loose connections may
415. movable terminal block M3 screw Output unit Relay External power supply 250V AC 30V DC or less Output circuit insulation Mechanical insulation Indication of output operation When power is applied to relay coil LED is lit 2A point The total load current per common terminal should be the following value 4 output points common terminal 8A or less e 8 output points common terminal 8A or less 80VA Inductive load For the product life refer to Subsection 14 4 3 For cautions on external wiring refer to Subsection 12 1 3 Open circuit leakage current Min load 5V DC 2mA reference value OFF ON Approx 10ms Response time ON OFF Approx 10ms 2A point The total load current per common terminal should be the following value Max load e 8 output points common terminal 8A or less Resistance load Output circuit configuration A common number applies to the of COML 15 5 2 External dimensions FX2N 32ER 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches UUUUUUUUUUU Sy esses XC DO es e es es es e eS e 9 69 o A SS AES CSIC KES KES KES CICI ES ES ES ES ES Amm L I ILcOMMIX IX I X I X6 X019 I X4 1 X6 L m 00000000 Q MITSUBISHI 1868883886 oD z 0723456 PEN LO O LO vc EZ D 2 858848880 Oo MELSEC FXan 32ER T232 cO o TTI ILY LXL L oe E O E 140 5 52 mounting
416. mparison instruction if the comparison result is necessary at counting Use these instructions only when high speed processing is not required because these instructions are processed in the operation cycle of the PLC and operation delay is generated before the comparison output result is obtained Use the comparison instructions for high speed counters HSCS HSCR and HSZ described below if it is necessary to execute comparison and change the output contact Y at the same time when the current values of high speed counters change 2 Use of Comparison instruction for high speed counters HSCS HSCR HSZ instruction Comparison instructions for high speed counters HSCS HSCR and HSZ instructions perform comparison and output the comparison results with the relevant high speed counting operation These instructions have limitations on the number of simultaneously driven instructions as shown in the following table When the output relay Y has been designated for comparison results the ON OFF status of the output is affected directly until the END instruction output is refreshed When the PLC is a relay output type a mechanical delay in operation approx 10ms is caused Therefore it is best to use a transistor output type PLC Applied instruction Limitation in number of instructions driven at same time HSCS HSCR 6 instructions HSZ 1 The overall frequency changes when the HSCS HSCR or HSZ instruction is used For details on the
417. n 337 19 14 3 Program example1 when monitoring testing a tiMer ccccccceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaaeeeeeesaeeeeeeeas 337 19 14 4 Program example2 when monitoring consecutive timers using operation keys 338 19 14 5 Program example3 when monitoring non consecutive timers using operation keys 339 19 14 6 Monitor operation on specified device monitor screen eesseeesseeeseeeeeenee 340 19 14 7 Specified device monitor screen for monitoring seeesssseeseeeeneeeen 340 19 14 8 Test operation on specified device monitor screen ccceececeeeceseeceeeeceececeececeeeeseneeneeeenees 341 19 15 Screen Saver TUNGU isrener anri on5 00055016 92220900002 I oso 1A e od cR gu aD NR SRM CD US OR DA RUE 342 19 15 1 System information Screen saver function seeesssssssssssseeeeennenenn nennen 342 19 15 2 SS CHOON saver display doute dedo a ribus debe eire a a iau tcu Cugda dul iau tos dU dE 342 19 15 3 Program example screen saver time SettiNg cccccceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaas 342 19 16 Display Screen Protect FUNCTION ccccccseccccceseeeceesseeceeseeceeseeseeueeesseaeeessaseeessegeeesseseeeeees 343 19 16 1 System information display screen protect function seeseeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeee 343 19 16 2 Program example screen protect function setting
418. n Positioning Control 150 DOG Search Zero Return 152 TBL Batch Data Positioning Mode 155 ABS Absolute Current Value Read 156 ZRN Zero Return 157 Variable Speed Pulse Output 158 Drive to Increment 159 Drive to Absolute Real Time Clock Control 160 RTC Data Compare 161 RTC Data Zone Compare 162 RTC Data Addition 163 RTC Data Subtraction 166 Read RTC data 167 Set RTC data 169 Hour Meter FNC No External Device 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 GRY GBIN RD3A WR3A Data Comparison 220 to 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 LD r Z LD lt gt LD lt LD gt AND AND gt AND lt AND lt gt AND lt AND gt O O OR lt gt OR lt OR gt D D R R Function 9jlesse2 NO JOUJOJN Decimal to Gray Code Conversion Gray Code to Decimal Conversion N apeg IND Read from Dedicated Analog Block Write to Dedicated Analog Block gt sooo Jeloeds co c ce e gJ Co ce ce e Load Compare S1 2 S2 gt Load Compare S1 gt S2 lt Load Compare S1 S2 O S Load Compare S1 S2 A Load Compare S1 S2 C Load Compare S1 2 CS2 29 Qao oS AND Compare S1 S2 z D AND Compare S1 C S2 AND Compare S11 S2 D ES AND Compare S1 2 S2 B 8 o o E AND Compare S1
419. n be identified AHABSIANIL For X050 1 0 NUMBER LABEL JY818D25401B 10 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 FX2n 16EX 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 92 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 7 Assignment of Input Output Numbers and Unit Numbers User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 2 Unit Numbers of Special Function Blocks 7 2 Unit Numbers of Special Function Blocks UONnOnpoJjU 7 2 1 Concept of assigning NO When power is turned on the main unit CPU automatically assigns the numbers 0 to 7 to special function blocks starting from the one closest to the main unit Unit numbers are not given to input output powered extension units blocks SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee 1 Special function blocks connected to main unit The numbers 0 to 7 are assigned to the special function blocks starting from the one closest to the main unit OO 2 Products to which unit numbers are not assigned Input output powered extension units FX2N 32ER FX2N 48ET etc 38 Input output extension blocks FX2N 16EX FX2N 16EYR etc 58 Connector conversion adapter FX3G CNV ADP FX2N CNV BC Expansion boards FX3c 232 BD etc Special adapters FX3U 232ADP MB FX3U 4AD ADP etc 4 Extension power supply unit FX3U 1PSU 5V 3 7 2 2 Example of assign
420. n block 18 1 4 FX3uU 4DA 288 External Dimensions Terminal Layout 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches POWERCO 90 3 55 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch FX3U 4DA 4 0 167j 9 0 36 55 2 17 87 3 43 e MASS Weight Approx 0 2kg 0 44lbs e Installation DIN rail of 35mm 1 38 in width or screws Accessories Label for indication of special unit block number Dust Proof sheet Manual supplied with product Terminal block M3 screws The extension cable is already connected to the extension block FX3G Series Prog rammable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 1 Special Function Units Blocks 18 1 5 FX2N 4AD o ST ce o External Dimensions Terminal Layout 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches POWERCO Buum inding NS 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch a 10 buum OO Ses snoueA e MASS Weight 0 3kg 0 66lbs e Installation DIN rail of 35mm 1 38 in width or screws I dmg Accessories Label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product TE Terminal block M3 screws 33 The extension cable is already connected to the extension block amp 18 1 6 FX2N 4DA 9 UE Ofc TE External Dimensions Terminal Layout 9 2E c 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches zl uda 6 c o UJ ITI 5 E O oO o o o0oc POW
421. n cable C in the above figure of the block to be con 4 nected right side to the existing unit block A in the above figure 3 e When FX2N Series input output powered extension units or FX3U 1PSU 5V units are connected connect the unit to be added right side and the existing unit left side with the supplied extension cable 5 Fit the top cover B in the above figure PSF 8 6 7 Connecting method F connection of extension cable and FX2N CNV BC a This subsection explains the procedures for connecting an extension cable and FX2N CNV BC to the 6 extension cable of the powered extension unit block eO Separate the case of FX2N CNV BC into two 23 pairs as shown right S To separate the case use a precision flathead screw 7 driver Slightly insert the tip of the screwdriver into the part A Ss shown in the right figure and the hook B in the right fig ae ure will come off 4 places e Connect the extension cable on the upstream side C in the right figure uonejeisu Connect the extension cable on the down stream side D in the right figure 9 syy Fit the upper cover E in the right figure i e 2 3 and the lower cover F in the right figure S and press down the upper cover until it is 10 hooked 119 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 6 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices 8 6 8 Connecting method G connection of inp
422. n cable or the optional Az extension cable to the connector under this top cover S P Sa Ww 2 DIN rail mounting hooks The input output powered extension unit can be installed on DIN rail e 5 2D 2 places 35mm 1 38 wide 9 o 3 Model name The model name of the input output powered extension unit is indicated 4 Input display LEDs red When an input terminal X0 X1 etc is turned on the corresponding LED lamps are also turned on The input numbers change depending on input output allocation The input output powered extension unit 48 points type assigns input numbers in ascending order from A gt B gt C below peJewog jndinogindu A OOOOOOOO 0 1 2 4 5 6 7 T uH sun uoisuejx3 s syoo g UOISU9 X3 dnoandu C ur U U M 5 Terminal block covers The covers can be opened about 90 for wiring Keep the covers closed while the PLC is running the unit power is on 6 Extension device connecting Connect the extension cable of input output powered extension unit block or special 1 i connector cover function unit block to the extension device connecting connector under this cover FX3U Series extension devices FX2N Series extension devices are compatible and can 222 be connected For details on extension devices refer to Chapter 15 Chapter 16 and e S Section 18 1 2 7 POWER LED green The LED lamp is on green while the power supply terminal is on 8 Output display LED
423. n configuration 1 SG 2 Notused 3 SDA Ld 4 RDB 2 poles 5 RDA 6 SDB 8 1 7 Not used 8 Notused MASS Weight Approx 20g 0 05lbs Two M3x8 tapping screws for installation of board Side cover Label for indication of link station number 2 types Manual supplied with product Accessories Terminal block European type for grounding Connector RJ45 Terminal resistance 330Q 110Q built in Wiring circuit Terminal resistance changing switch 2PAIR 1PAIR setting switch 110Q OPEN 3300 FX3G Series Prog rammable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 3 Expansion Board 18 3 7 FX3G 2AD BD QF External Dimensions amp Unit mm inches e MASS Weight Approx 20g 0 05lbs Accessories Two M3x8 tapping screws 1 2 for installation of board O Side cover 8 S Manual supplied with product z e Terminal block European type a SS o8 cS Terminal Layout l4 t 4 i v IN E di Lo 5 poles I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1S9 peJeMod adnoandu OQ 18 3 8 FX3c 1DA BD spun uoisuejx3 External Dimensions Unit mm inches e MASS Weight Approx 20g 0 05lbs Accessories Two M3x8 tapping screws for installation of board Side cover Manual supplied with product uda 490 UOISU9 X3 ndinoandu C Terminal block European ty
424. n m is possible 15 Registered x Ok Ok koX mos o c ALS This operation Registered gas is protected Keyword 2nd keyword If keyword is incorrect x o by the Keyword Please input uda Keyword Incorrect I los 6k kn n dir Keyword k kk kkk k k syoolg UOISU9 X3 dnoandu C Make Keyword C U m Ier valid S S 2m OK gt Execute EE ESC gt Cancel co suondo pue Sun UOISUS X3 JOUIO UJ 62 nex D lt o 2 D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO 329 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 11 Keyword 19 11 5 Canceling a keyword 1 Atthe menu screen use the buttons to move the cursor to the Keyword item then press OK to display the keyword input screen If a keyword has been registered one of the following screens is displayed Ifa 16 digit keyword is registered an 8 digit x 2 line screen shown at left below is displayed f an 8 digit keyword is registered an 8 digit x 1 line screen shown at right below is displayed 16 digit keyword 8 digit keyword Please input Please input Keyword Keyword 0 KKK KKK EN 2nd keyword i k KKK KK X 0 Kk kK RK KK 2 Use the buttons to specify the first digit of the keyword then press OK to proceed to the next digit To cancel the operation and return to the menu screen press ESC 16 digit keyword
425. n power Chapter 17 FX3U 1PSU 5V supply unit and external dimensions P bou aa MUR dal This chapter contains explanations for the external dimensions and terminal functions such as analog control Chapter 18 AC layout For details refer to the manual for each extension device and communication 3 Optional products Chapter 19 to Chapter 22 Display module This chapter contains explanation of the specifications external dimensions Chapter 19 mounting procedures and operating procedures for display modules FX3G 5DM FX Series terminal blocks This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for wiring FX 16 32bELI TB Chapter 20 Marmory eassetie This chapter contains explanations of the specifications for the memory cassette Chapter 21 and the installation procedures Battery This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for replacing the battery and Chapter 22 detecting battery voltage drop 4 Others Appendix A to Appendix E This chapter contains an explanation list of the special auxiliary relays M8000 to List of special devices M8511 and special data registers D8000 to D8511 Appendix A For details refer to the programming manual This chapter contains an explanation list of the basic instructions and applied List of instructions instructions Appendix B For details refer to the programming manual stokdisseninmed models The discontinued MELSEC F Series PLC models and programming tools Appendix
426. n unit Example of program M8000 Example of wiring 1 In the case of sink wiring When inputs are used for sink only and outputs are the transistor sink type in the used input output powered extension unit Digital switch of 109 103 BCD Z7 IN AN AYN AN NN ZN AA A AAAA MAAA 0 1A 50V ohhh ihhh Inh RN 0 1A 60 Mee E E necessary 8 First input group Input output powered extension unit FX2N 32ET FX2N 48ET Transistor output sink 2 In the case of source wiring When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor source type in the used extension unit Digital 10 10 switch of BCD N WV VV WV V NV WV W V NV NM W V NV NM W 0 1A 90V puc oe diode is i roS oS B e First input group Input output powered extension unit Transistor output source FX2N 32E T ESS UL FX2N 48ET ESS UL 190 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 2 Digital Switch DSW Instructions FNC72 BIN Instructions FNC19 13 2 2 When BIN instructions are used QF Examples of wiring for capturing values from a 2 digit digital switch to the data register D102 are given below BS Example of program M8000 K2X010 D102 1 Example of wiring O O S 1 In the case of sink wiring When inputs are used for both sink and source in the used main unit or input output p
427. nal block 1 6 IUE 13 1 Notes about Examples of Wiring 2E S The examples of wiring are given under the following conditions For the example of positioning wiring refer to the Positioning Control Edition oh j e The input output numbers are the actual numbers on the program They may differ from the numbers shown on the product terminals com eal e Product input output specifications gt D Check the product input output specifications when using any example of wiring z 3 Products only for sink input and products both for sink input and for source input are available Products for sink output and products for source output are available co e The examples of programming applied instructions are given based on the allocation of the input output numbers for wiring suondo For the applied instructions refer to the Programming Manual pue shun 3X3 Jeujo eipoyy ejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 187 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 2 Digital Switch DSW Instructions FNC72 BIN Instructions FNC19 13 2 Digital Switch DSW Instructions FNC72 BIN Instructions FNC19 13 2 1 When DSW instructions are used Examples of wiring for capturing values from a 4 digit digital switch to the data register D100 are given below 1 Main unit Example of program M8000 Example of wiring 1 In
428. nd a built in BCD decoder 196 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 4 Seven Segment with Latch SEGL Instructions FNC74 BCD Instructions FNC18 13 4 2 When BCD instructions are used QI This subsection gives examples of wiring for displaying the current value of D100 on the 2 digit 7 segment CE display gt 1 Main unit 12 Example of program E M8000 Example of wiring 1 In the case of sink wiring s When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor sink type in the used main Se unit ca 7 segment display to be used for sink wiring in the case of transistor output I Main unit Ex FX3G 40MT ES Jz SEX es Sy C m z Transistor output sink zB 9 9 n Q xoz Dc aS D S 8 z 3 o s 2 In the case of source wiring When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor source type in the used main unit 90 UOISU9 X3 dnoandu C 7 segment display to be used for source wiring in the case of transistor output o gt yun A ddng Jewog Main unit Ex FX36 40MT ESS PLC 7 segment display UOISU9 X3 Transistor output source co suondo pue spun 1X3 JeuiO eipojyy Aedsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 197 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardwa
429. nd input sensitivity of these PLCs are shown in the following table Item Specifications Input voltage 100 to 120V AC 10 15 50 60Hz insulam 6 2 mA 110V 60Hz Percentage of simultaneous power on 7096 or P 4 7 mA 100V 50Hz less ON 3 8mA 80V AC Input sensitivity oon OFF 1 7mA 30V AC 152 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 3 100V AC Input 10 3 3 Examples of external wiring 100V AC input UONnOnpoJjU Main unit NO SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee OO 24V DC input type Sink wiring a J D T uononpoJu jonpoug Input 5V ov 24V impedance Input extension block suoneoyiods I i Two wire _ sensor TA Input output powered extension unit d o FX2N 48ER UA1 UL NO e EE EN E 6 e3 v S 100V AC Hes T input type 3 bd DAY 5y ov 24V co Input Ic T T terminal ge Input extension block FX2N 8EX UA1 UL 8 S D 3 1 Handle the power supply circuit correctly in accordance with Chapter 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures E 2 Foran input device having a parallel resistance or a two wire proximity switch a bleeder resistance E may be required 3 Do not take input signals from loads generating surge 4 The 24V and OV terminals are located on the output terminal side For details on the terminal layout refer to Section 4 7 UA o QS
430. ndicator lamp on panel 2A point The total load current of resistance loads per common terminal should be the following value e 4 output points common terminal 8A or less e 8 output points common terminal 8A or less 80VA Inductive load For the product life refer to Subsection 14 4 3 For cautions on external wiring refer to Subsection 12 1 2 Resistance load Max load Open circuit leakage current Min load 5V DC 2mA reference value OFF ON Approx 10ms Response time ON OFF Approx 10ms Output circuit configuration A common number applies to the of COM 15 8 2 External dimensions 4 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches MITSUBISHI MESEC FX2n 48ER UA1 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch Y m a U a Tr IH tod Yi I Y3 Ico T Y T Y I T Tcovar Y1 v3 Ico T Y TY T T Teoesrvyvir Yy3 T Y I Yr I 7 fe3yE9ESG3 E9 E GS E GS G9 E GS G3 E ES G9 E E G3 G9 9 CO EISSSSSESSSSSSSSSSESSESI R 210 8 27 mounting hole pitch UUUUUUUUUUU je 15 8 3 Terminal layout CE Eovpouxo xz x4 xe TXop2 pa xe T DX pe pa xe Pe ENT I Xt xo xe x7 xt xa x6 x7 gt xt x5 x7 87 3 43 FX2N 48ER UA1 UL YO Y2 Y4 v6 YO Y2 YA YO YO Y2 YA Ye cow Y1 Y3 cow YS Y
431. ndle the power supply circuit correctly in accordance with Chapter 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures 2 Foran input device having a parallel resistance or a two wire proximity switch a bleeder resistance may be required 3 In the case of sink input wiring short circuit the terminals of the extension units as well as the S S terminal and the 24V terminal of the main unit 4 The 24V and OV terminals are located on the output terminal side For details on the terminal layout refer to Section 4 7 146 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 2 24V DC input Sink and source input type UONnOnpoJjU Use of input output extension units blocks of sink input type Main unit Fie NO SOWeN ed pue seJnjee Sink and source input type 3 Three 5 U wire o O Qo Sensor 2g Q m ao S 1 gt CUI MA w TO D fo S Two wire o proximity Qi seone Jeyeudueg pue uoISJ9A wasis CO Sink input type m uoneJn6ijuo SON UN SON jndinondu 24V uonejeisu OO terminal 1 Handle the power supply circuit correctly in accordance with Chapter 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures 2 For an input device having a parallel resistance or a two wire proximity switch a bleeder resistance may be required e Q py I D d ms co Bi
432. ne menn nnn nnne nnn nnne nnn 223 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units 224 Vet OUTING E EO I E E UTUUEMM 225 15 11 3Product conltigHiraliOEisad s ner oo exa eked a a ase sda Sh Sages 225 LS UAE Produc EIS m 225 15 2 Power supply specifications elssessssessssesssseseeeennenne nennen nennen nnne nnn rns nnns 226 15 2 1 Weight accessoires co 226 IS A2 PAEAN I NR TRE o Ep 227 15 3 FX2N 32ER ES UL FX2N 48ER ES UL FX2N 48ER DS seeseeesseeeeeneennennnnn 229 15 9 4 Product specliicalliODS xc eS 00 55 904 e a nea ne es eh Ns eh Lee 229 T5 9 2 EXE Mal dI eslOfis 23 359 2 0 cca a uod dcs dax lacalausids cnl ash chs a 230 Iosa MOTIVE NAY OUI re a pL XXC U E 231 15 4 FX2N 32bET ESS UL FX2N 48ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET DSS eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen 232 15 4 1 Product SO CCINICAN OMS aei eseodtde iio Dee sci oa oder nno ende pue teitbea Su duse De meu basn teca ended 232 15 4 2 ExiermaldimersloFiS 39 15 1 I esie cc ee oni voe ad au teehee Oe st hate eine Ma Copas teda oed aes 233 OE Termina AY OU uocieontescnure domat a a tectis Des apdeb c tud qat at nae etn idt oap M d MD E 234 15 5 FX2N 32ER FX2N 48ER FX2N A48ER D esseessssssessssssseseeesenn nennen nenne sna sra nnns 235 15 9 1 PrGd uctspeclifICalloOls oo rate e EE o nunca oe Ge ee eee e Lei e
433. nection type Input output powered extension units 1 3 53 oS Power supply Number of points Input form Output form Connection type o E S D 100 to 240V AC 24V DC Terminal block sink source 4 I sink zu Transistor sink zi zi 100V AC B35 g Transistor o 9 source a peJewog jndinogindu Each model of input output powered extension unit has a sink and source type and a sink type If you intend to add input output powered extension units we recommend you to add the same types of units as the main unit or the sink and source type spun uoisuejx3 Sink common Source common uda Connection Model Number Common wiring Number Common wiring t Type D Type ype of points system of points system AC power supply common to 24V DC sink and source input Relay 24V DC sy ojg UOISU9 X3 jdnoandu C N Transistor Sok 0 z OD FX2N 48ET ESS UL Sink ETs Source o AC power supply only for 24V DC sink input lt co Terminal Transistor AC power supply only for 100V AC DC power supply common to 24V DC sink and source input FX2N 48ER DS termina 24V DC 24 24 block DC power supply only for 24V DC sink input 24V DC 24 24 Es 225 suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO FX2N 32ET FX2N 48ET Relay 24V DC ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisua yoojg euw CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware
434. ng RUN is supported in FX3G PLCs FX PCS WIN E 2 Ver 3 06 or later o the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX1N PLCs 60 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability 5 2 Programming Tool Applicability e Japanese version Programming tool Version Writing in the instruction di earlier than Ver 1 40 GX Works2 Remarks and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX3G PLCs uononpoJu SWEDNC GXW2 J NO Ver 1 56J or later Writing in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX3G PLCs Ver 1 40 Ver 200A or later Writing in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX2N PLCs Ver 1 00 Ver 5 00A or later MA the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX1N PLCs SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee GX Developer SWLID5C GPPW J Ver 8 72A Gr later Writing in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX3G PLCs earlier than Ver 1 10 OO Ver 8 76E or later heer the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX3G PLCs 55 EX PCS WIN 2 Ver 4 00 or later Vg the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX1N PLCs S 1 Write during RUN is not possible with a SFC program 2 Write during RUN is not possible with a list program or a SFC program 4 Cautions on write during RUN D D Item Caution
435. ng the following devices Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions Peripheral devices display module expansion boards and special adapters Extension units blocks and FX Series terminal blocks Battery and memory cassette 5 DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Please contact a certified electronic waste disposal company for the environmentally safe recycling and disposal of your device 199 When disposing of batteries separate them from other waste according to local regulations For details of the Battery Directive in EU countries refer to Appendix E 6 TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE PRECAUTIONS NCAUTION When transporting the FX3G Series PLC incorporating the optional battery turn on the PLC before shipment confirm that the battery mode is set using a parameter and the ALM LED is OFF and check the battery life If the PLC is transported with the ALM LED on or the battery exhausted the battery backed data may be unstable during transportation 199 The PLC is a precision instrument During transportation avoid impacts larger than those specified in the general 385 specifications section 4 1 Failure to do so may cause failures in the PLC After transportation verify the operations of the PLC When transporting lithium batteries follow required transportation regulations For details of the regulated products refer to Appendix D FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware
436. ning torque to 0 5 to 0 6 Nem 2 Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above mentioned range o Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions Caution 5 When tightening a grounding terminal use a screwdriver suitable for the terminal screw The screwdriver OS which does not suit the thread groove is used tightening torque will not be able to be achieved To achieve 29 S the appropriate tightening torque shown in the above use the following screwdriver or an appropriate S replacement lt Reference gt 6 Manufacturer Model name OL Phoenix Contact SZF 1 0 6x3 5 23 S E co 3S m P 5 o ye a D o 129 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 2 Cable Connecting Procedures 9 2 5 Grounding terminal of the FX3u ENET ADP The grounding terminal of the FX3U ENET ADP is a M2 5 screw 1 Applicable cables Electric wire size 0 5 to 1 5 mm AWG 20 to 16 2 Treatment of electric wire ends When using a stranded cable or solid cable as it is Twist the end of the stranded cable so that loose wires will not stick out Do not solder plate the end of the cable Approx 8 mm 0 31 3 Tightening torque Set the tightening torque to 0 4 to 0 5 Nem Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above mentioned range Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or
437. nit Top cover S Ze 3o ZF o8 2 i i Attach the provided side cover B in the right 2 figure as shown in the right figure 3 Caution 5 Attachment of the side cover is not necessary when 99 connecting the expansion board only under the top cover S Oz S of a 40 60 point type main unit 25 FX3G 4EX BD FX3G 2EYT BD FX3G 8AV BD cannot attach in the top cover S side of a main unit 6 22 Connect the expansion board to the option 28 connector C in the right figure S eg DE ES ze Fix the expansion board E in the right figure with provided M3 tapping screws D in the right figure to the main unit Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 6 N m uonejeisu Bui A ddng Jamod ue uonesedaid h Buum ndu CO p 115 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 Installation In Enclosure 8 6 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices 8 6 3 Connecting method B connection of connector conversion adapter 116 The FX3G 24MT ES is used as the main unit in this example Remove the top cover A in the right figure and peripheral device connector cover B in the right figure from the front face of the main unit Caution The peripheral device connector cover has the possibility of being damaged when removed Please remove by pressing on the attaching tab a in the figure to the right Attach the provided side cover C in the right fi
438. nk input connect the 24V and S S terminals For source input connect the OV and S S terminals In the case of DC power supply type e For sink input connect the and S S terminals e For source input connect the and S S terminals Connect sensors and switches to the terminals For details refer to Chapter 10 Wire the output Y terminals Connect loads to the terminals For details refer to Chapter 12 Removal and installation of quick release terminal block Removal Unscrew the terminal block mounting screws both right and left screws evenly and remove the terminal block Installation Place the terminal block in the specified position and tighten the terminal block mounting screws evenly both right and left screws Tightening torque 0 4 to 0 5 N m Do not tighten the terminal block mounting screws with a torque outside the above mentioned range Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions Pay attention so that the center of the terminal block is not lifted 123 seone Jeyeudueg pue uoISJ9A UONnOnpoJjU NO SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee OO uononpoJu jonpoug suoneoyiods I oO wasis OD uoneJn6ijuo jndingandu Jl SON HUN SON 5 62 ye 2 D z o FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 2 Cable Connecting Procedures 9 2 Cable Conn
439. nnect it to the last adapter position leftmost position Connecting method D connection of powered extension units blocks to main unit The procedures for connecting an powered extension unit block to the main unit are explained below Remove the extension device connector cover A in the right figure on the right side of the main unit Connect the extension cable B in the right figure from the extension block to be con nected right side to the extension device connector of the main unit e When connecting FX2N Series input output powered extension unit or FX3U 1PSU 5V connect the unit to be added right side and the existing unit main unit with the supplied extension cable Fit the extension device connector cover A in the right figure 118 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 6 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices 8 6 6 Connecting method E connection of powered extension units blocks z This subsection explains the procedures for connecting FX2N Series input output powered extension units z blocks or FX2N FX3U Series special function blocks j Remove the top cover B in the right figure 2 of the existing unit block left side A in the AN SE right figure u C F When connecting FX3u 1PSU 5V remove the top cover of Z o3 FX3U 1PSU 5V A A SS A 3 NS ag SE i 88 NS S8 Connect the extensio
440. not connect with OV and 24V terminals FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 4 FX2N 32ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET DSS 3 Output specifications transistor output type OF 37 TO Item FX2N 32ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET DSS ae D Output Points 16 points 24 points Connection type Removable terminal block M3 screw Output unit type Transistor source output 1 2 External power supply 5 to 30V DC Oo Output circuit insulation Photo coupler insulation 8 Indication of output operation Activation of the photo coupler will light the LED indicator lamp on panel 0 5A point t 0 5A point The total load current per common terminal The total load current per common terminal should be the following value 13 Resistance load should be the following value 4 output points common terminal 0 8A or 4 output points common terminal 0 8A or less sz less 8 output points common terminal 1 6A or ei less mes Max load ee 12W 24V DC D 12W 24V DC The total of inductive loads per common The total of inductive loads per common terminal should be the following value Inductive load terminal should be the following value 4 output point common terminal 19 2W or 14 4 output point common terminal 19 2W or less 24V DC less 24V DC 8 output points common terminal 38 4W or 3 a 2 less 24V DC vg D EN Open circuit leakage current 0 1mA 30V DC a pos o 9 Min lo
441. ns Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed Make sure to properly wire to the FX Series terminal blocks in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block 100 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 1 Installation location 8 1 Installation location Use the PLC under the environmental conditions complying with the generic specifications Chapter 4
442. ns of the procedures for preparing for wiring Chapter 9 z5 power supply specifications and instructions for wiring ut 7 Sa a 7 CO Input wiring This chapter contains explanations of the input specifications and instructions for Chapter 10 J wiring ZS High speed counter This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for using the high speed Chapter 11 counter examples of programming 8 This chapter contains explanations for the output specifications and instructions Output wiring i Chapter 12 for wiring 3 Examples of wiring for each use This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for wiring input output Chapter 13 a devices for main uses o i This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for test operation and Test operation adjustment adjustment maintenance and error check items and measures to be taken upon Chapter 14 maintenance and error check occurrence of error 9 Sos QoS TE 3s 5 e 3 TO E Q 19 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 1 Introduction User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 1 Introduction of Manuals 2 Extension devices Chapter 15 to Chapter 18 Input output powered extension inta This chapter contains explanations for the input output specifications external Chapter 15 dimensions and terminal layout for each product Input output extension blocks Chapter 16 Extension power supply unit This chapter contains explanations of specifications for the extensio
443. nsions oc EN TO FX2N 8EYR a 2 04 5 mounting 1 9 i O lt c z amp FX2n 8EYR mo CD POWER at c 5668 2D oO cO 3 13 E SS 2a cg s I FX2N 16EYR Ele oLa 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches C 2 Ras o2 PES o D S a oS a 1 5 o m mM US oO oi f FE c 3 SEE O 2 o c c a 17 yu A ddng Jamod UOISUS XF co suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 275 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 11 FX2N 8EYT FX2N 16EYT FX2N 16EYT C Transistor Output 16 11 FX2N 8EYT FX2N 16EYT FX2N 16EYT C Transistor Output 16 11 1 Product specifications The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications For external wiring refer to the following chapters Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring 1 Power supply specifications Item FX2N 8EYT FX2N 16EYT FX2N 16EYT C Product type FX2N extension block FX2N connector type extension block Rated voltage 24V DC supplied from main unit and input output powered extension unit 2 Weight and Other specifications External dimensions are described later Item FX2N 8EYT FX2N 16EYT FX2N 16EYT C MASS Weight 0 2kg 0 44lbs 0 3kg 0 66lbs The extension cable is already connected to the extension block Other Ac
444. o D18135 PLSY FNC 57 PLSR FNC D 8136 Lower 59 instructions 7 Accumulated total number of D 8137 Upper pulses output to YOOO and Y 001 D 8138 Not used D 8139 Accumulated number of D 8140 Lower pulses output to YOOO for PLSY FNC 57 and PLSR D 8141 FNC 59 instructions Accumulated number of D 8142 Lower pulses output to Y001 for i PLSY FNC 57 and PLSR D 8143 FNC 59 instructions D 8144 D 8145 z D 8146 3 Not used D 8147 D 8148 p D 8149 398 Number and Correspond name Content of register ing special device Inverter Communication Function D 815095 Response wait time of inverter communication ch1 Step number of instruction during D 8151 inverter communication ch1 M8151 D Default 1 ve Error code for inverter 4 5 D 8152 communication ch1 Md Inverter communication error step D 8153 number latched ch1 M8153 Default 1 Da D 815525 Response wait time of inverter 25 communication ch2 Step number of instruction during D 8156 9 inverter communication ch2 M8156 Default 1 Error code for inverter 4 5 Petr communication ch2 Butt Inverter communication error step D 8158 number latched ch2 M8158 Default 1 D18159 3 Cleared when PLC power supply from OFF to ON 4 Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN 5 Supported in Ver 1 10 or later Advanced Function D 8160 D 8161 D 8162 D 8163
445. o wily sers Manual YSSHIDUS4UT whan using refer to FX2N 64CL M Users Manuale i product Hardware Volume Details FX2N 64CL M A Separate Users Mantal JY997D08501 Details of the CC Link LT master special function 09R706 ay volume block m Detailed Volume o Supplied pemole He SANON TAMIGI As for the remote I O station remote device station power supply device station power supply with adapter and dedicated power supply for CC Link LT refer to the roduct adapter anc cenicated power relevant manuals and related documents P supply for CC Link LT 9 E 228 c 0 oz ss lt 2 E E FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 1 Introduction User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 1 Introduction of Manuals Manual Contents number Manuals for analog temperature control Model name code Common FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Details of analog special function block FX3U 4AD Series User s Manual JY997D16701 FX3U 4DA FX3UC 4AD and analog special adapter 09R619 Analog Control Edition FX3U ADP E Analog input temperature input and temperature control When using each product refer also to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed Supplied Procedures for handling the 2 ch analog input wn FX3G 2AD BD JY997D33501 expansion board i produt Installation Manual When using refer to FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Series User s Manual Analog Control Edition Procedures for h
446. o 17 M ut com oO f O LEG zs 3 2g Hy e 9 0 36 ch tm REN 75 2 96 mounting hole pit lt 87 3 43 OCO 85 3 35 E gt 28 m e MASS Weight 0 4kg 0 88lbs zi e Installation DIN rail of 35mm 1 38 in width or screws 3 Accessories Label for indication of special unit block number 1 9 Terminal resistor 2 resistors for CC Link dedicated cable 2 resistors for CC Link dedicated O high performance cable Manual supplied with product e Terminal block M3 screw for power supply terminal M3 5 screw for signal terminal The extension cable is already connected to the extension block o 2 yoojg euw CO 293 FX3G Series Prog rammable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 1 Special Function Units Blocks 18 1 15 FX2N 32CCL External Dimensions Terminal Layout 2 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches FX2N 32CCL C POWER LRUN LERR RD SD dd 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch e MASS Weight 0 2kg 0 44lbs e Installation DIN rail of 35mm 1 38 in width or screws Accessories Label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product Terminal block M3 screws The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 18 1 16 FX3u 64CCL 294 External Dimensions Terminal Layout 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm
447. o M8299 and D8280 to D8299 Operation and function Number FX3U 4AD PT W ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP FX3U 4AD PNK ADP uds us Ver 1 00 or later Ver 1 00 or later Ver 1 00 or later Versions 1st analog special adapter Ch1 temperature Ch1 temperature Ch1 temperature D 8280 measurement data measurement data measurement data Ch2 temperature Ch2 temperature Ch2 temperature D 8281 measurement data measurement data measurement data Ch3 temperature Ch3 temperature Ch3 temperature D 8282 measurement data measurement data measurement data Ch4 temperature Ch4 temperature Ch4 temperature D 8283 measurement data measurement data measurement data D 8284 Averaging time for Ch1 Averaging time for Ch1 Averaging time for Ch1 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 D 8285 Averaging time for Ch2 Averaging time for Ch2 Averaging time for Ch2 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 D 8286 Averaging time for Ch3 Averaging time for Ch3 Averaging time for Ch3 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 D 8287 Averaging time for Ch4 Averaging time for Ch4 Averaging time for Ch4 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 Model code PT K20 i D 8289 PTW K21 Model code K10 Model code K11 PA EEUE E AEE o F To C38 Ch1 temperature Ch1 temperature Ch1 temperature D 8290 measurement data measurement data measurement data Ch2 temperature Ch2 temperature Ch2 temperature D 8291 measurement data measurement data measurement data Ch3 temperature Ch3 temperature Ch3 temperature D 8292 measurement data
448. o circuit blocks including the following instructions results in the following operation MEP instruction Conversion of operation result to leading edge pulse instruction When completing Write during RUN to a circuit including the MEP instruction the execution result of the MEP instruction turns ON conducting state if the operation result up to the MEP instruction is ON e MEF instruction Conversion of operation result to trailing edge pulse instruction When completing Write during RUN to a circuit including the MEF instruction the execution result of the MEF instruction turns OFF nonconducting state regardless of the operation result ON or OFF up to the MEF instruction When the operation result up to the MEF instruction is set to ON once and then set to OFF the execution result of the MEF instruction turns ON conducting state Operation result up to MEP MEF instruction MEP instruction MEF instruction OFF OFF nonconduct OFF nonconduct ing ing SN ON conducting OFF y d When writing during RUN with GX Works2 Ver 1 08J or later GX Developer Ver 8 72A or later the program is as follows When the number of program steps is reduced by deletion of contacts coils and applied instructions the program capacity becomes smaller by as many as the reduced number of steps Errors cannot be detected in write during RUN even in a circuit which causes errors Errors are detected after the PLC is stopped once and then run a
449. o water bring near fire or touch liquid leakage or other contents directly Incorrect handling of the battery may cause heat excessive generation bursting ignition liquid leakage or deformation and lead to injury fire or failures and malfunctions of facilities and other equipment Before modifying or disrupting the program in operation or running the PLC carefully read through this manual and the associated manuals and ensure the safety of the operation An operation error may damage the machinery or cause accidents Do not change the program in the PLC from two or more peripheral equipment devices at the same time i e from a programming tool and a GOT Doing so may cause destruction or malfunction of the PLC program GEER ciety Precautions NEEDS Read these precautions before use NCAUTION m Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the memory cassette If the memory cassette is attached or detached while the PLC s power is on the data in the memory may be destroyed or the memory cassette may be damaged Do not disassemble or modify the PLC Doing so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions For repair contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Las i 307 Turn off the power to the PLC before connecting or disconnecting any extension cable 375 Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions 385 Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detachi
450. o wire proximity sensor aT 5VIOVI 24V impedance E terminal Sink input type 5VIOV 24V Input terminal 1 Handle the power supply circuit correctly in accordance with Chapter 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures 2 For an input device having a parallel resistance or a two wire proximity switch a bleeder resistance may be required 3 Inthe case of sink input wiring short circuit the S S terminal and the terminal of the main unit 4 Do not connect 24 terminal 150 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 2 24V DC input Sink and source input type 10 2 6 Examples of external wiring source input DC Power Supply Type Sink and source input type Main unit l Fuse 1 1 ET EE E Class D grounding S S SE UONnOnpoJjU NO SOWeN ed pue seJnjee Three wire 3 sensor zo o l 2 WM E Two wire Q proximity S sensor Qi Sink and source input type r I I i I seone Jeyeudueg pue uoISJ9A ues C uoneJn6ijuo SON UN SON jndinondu uonejesu OO SVIOV 24V Input terminal 1 Handle the power supply circuit correctly in accordance with Chapter 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures e Q py I D d m co Bi O O zol lt S Q 2 For an input device
451. oISJ9A ues C uoneJn6ijuo jndinoandu i SON HUN SON uonejesu OO DUUM A ddng Jewog ue uoneJedaJg h Buum ndu CO p FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 Features and Part Names 2 1 Major Features 30 Pulse output function When output terminals in the transistor output type main unit are used pulses of up to 100kHz can be output simultaneously to 3 axes YOOO Y001 and Y002 1 2 axes YOOO and YO01 in 14 point and 24 point type main units Using a number of instructions programming is simplified Refer to Positioning Control Edition Various positioning instructions Refer to Positioning Control Edition Instruction Description Mechanical zero return instruction with DOG Dedi search function Instruction to read the current value from our ABS servo amplifier with absolute position ABS detecting function Positioning relative positioning to specify the xL movement from the current position Positioning absolute positioning to specify DRVA the target position based on the current value 0 Instruction to change the pulse train output PLSV frequency Instruction for positioning based on batch TBL setting of positioning operation moving distance and speed Display functions display module Supported in Ver 1 10 or later FX3G 5DM Display Module option can be incorporated in the PLC Monitor test function
452. ock 8 points FX3U 64CCL 8 points FX2N 2AD 8 points Priority 3 Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 1 Priority 2 Judge whether extension to the main unit is possible Judge the possibility of extension to the main unit for all extension blocks in turn starting from a block having the highest priority confirmed in step 1 In this example due to the restriction two special function blocks only the FX3U 64CCL priority 1 and FX2N 2AD priority 1 can be connected to the main unit Check whether extension from the 24V DC service power supply is possible Check using the quick reference matrix whether 8 input points and 16 output points whose exten sion is judged as impossible in step 2 can be added emm Number of gt added points 16 8 250 150 56 400 soo 200 zoo 5 0 8 16 24 32 gt Number of added points After 8 input points and 16 output points are connected the remaining current of the 24V DC service power supply is 50mA or less Accordingly it is possible to add 8 input points and 16 output points FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 6 Expansion of FX2N Series I O Powered Extension Unit 6 6 Expansion of FX2N Series I O Powered Extension Unit UONnOnpoJjU When extension is not possible due to the main unit connection restrictions described in the preceding section and extension of input output is requir
453. odel name 2 Version 19 4 2 Top screen time display Following the title screen display the Current Time screen is then displayed 01 10 08 23 59 59 Wed The specified device monitor screen is displayed instead when the specified device monitor function is used Refer to Section 19 14 for details of the specified device monitor function Although the year displays in a 2 digit format 08 this can be changed to a 4 digit format 2008 by revising the program Refer to Subsection 19 10 3 for the 2 digit year to 4 digit year change procedure 19 4 3 Menu screen As shown in the figure at right the menu screen displays 4 lines of the total menu Press the button to scroll downward through the menu Mo n to r T e s t ErrorCheck Button operations at this menu screen are explained below LANGUAGE Contrast Button Operation Description ESC Returns to the top screen time display ClockMenu Scrolls upward through the menu Keyword Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed scrolling This button is disabled when the cursor is located at the beginning of the Cassette menu Scrolls downward through the menu Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed scrolling This button is disabled when the cursor is located at the end of the menu OK Selects the item where the cursor is blinking 312 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User
454. oe a Und oaks 112 8 5 3 Installation of main unit llseeesssseesssssssssessseeeene enne nnne nennen nnne nnne nsns anna sanis 113 8 5 4 Installation of input output powered extension unit block and special function block 113 8 6 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices ssesseeeeeennne 114 8 6 1 Connection of extension devices ssessssssssssssssssssseeeene nennen nnne nnns nans sn nnns nn nass 114 8 6 2 Connecting method A connection of expansion board seessseessseeenenenee nnn 115 8 6 3 Connecting method B connection of connector conversion adapter 116 8 6 4 Connecting method C connection of special adapter seessesesseeeeeeeeneeen 118 8 6 5 Connecting method D connection of powered extension units blocks to main unit 118 8 6 6 Connecting method E connection of powered extension units blocks 119 8 6 7 Connecting method F connection of extension cable and FX2N CNV BC eeeesee 119 8 6 8 Connecting method G connection of input output powered extension unit 120 8 6 9 Connecting method H connection of extension block to input output powered extension unit 120 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures 121 SM Preparation Tor WINO eiorinn
455. of those on the input output powered extension units blocks To obtain the total number of input output points count the input points X000 and more and output points YOOO and more of the main unit and input output powered extension units blocks The number of input output points of each type of device is shown on the list below The list of numbers of input output points is shown in Section 6 8 Count the input output points of the remote I O stations connected on FX2N 64CL M network Add the number of remote I O points to the number of input output points from the main unit and input output powered extension units blocks calculated in the above step For the remote I O point calculation method refer to the FX2N 64CL M manual Count the number of input output occupied points of special function blocks The number of occupied input output points per unit is 8 The number of occupied input output points of each type of device can be obtained by the following formula or from the list shown below For a list of occupied input output points refer to Section 6 8 Number of points per unit Number of occupied input output points units 8 points points Total number of Each special function block m Number of special function blocks i i occupied input Number of special function used for FROM TO instructions panes blocks dps output points occupies eight input or output points eS Observe the following instr
456. of FX3U ENET ADP Ver 2 20 is supported Special auxiliary relay of FX3G 4EX BD FX3G 2EYT BD is added Appendix A Description of the programming tool is changed accompanied by change of the programming tool from GX Developer to GX Works2 Errors are corrected FX3G SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS USER S MANUAL Hardware Edition MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN HIMEJI WORKS 840 CHIYODA CHO HIMEJI JAPAN 09R521 JY997D31301J Effective Sep 2013 MEE Specifications are subject to change without notice
457. og ue uoneJedaJg h Buum ndu CO p 87 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 8 Number of Input Output Occupied Points and Current Consumption 6 8 Number of Input Output Occupied Points and Current Consumption The following tables show the number of input output points or the number of input output occupied points for each type of device along with the power supply type and current consumption values needed for selecting a product e Number of input output points or input output occupied points on each type of device Output current of 24V DC service power supply of main units Output current of 5V DC power supply and 24V DC service power supply of input output powered extension units Current consumed by input output extension blocks and special function blocks The current consumption is determined differently in the following cases e Inthe input output powered extension unit 5V DC and internal 24V DC are supplied via extension cables It is necessary to calculate the current consumption Subtract the current consumption of the internal 24V DC from the 24V DC service power supply e The special function units blocks connected to the AC power supply type main unit or to the 24V DC service power supply terminal of the input output powered extension unit consume the external 24V DC Include the current in the calculation of current consumption Wh
458. ohibited in the AC power supply type main unit due to restrictions in connection described above it is possible to add extension blocks using the 24V DC service power supply of the main unit For adding extension blocks using the 24V DC service power supply it is necessary to examine again whether extension is possible for all of extension blocks selected in the preceding subsection and extension blocks to be selected in this subsection Note that only up to two network related special function blocks can be connected including extension to the main unit Confirm the priority of all extension blocks to be connected to the main unit The priority is set to each extension block to be connected and required to judge the possibility of extension to the main unit The priority is determined by the extension block type without regard to the connection position When the extension power supply unit FX3U 1PSU 5V is used and the nearest upstream unit to the extension power supply unit is the main unit the priority should be considered also for input extension blocks including the FX2N 8ER ES UL and FX2N 8ER extended to the extension power supply unit Priority Priority High Priority Low Output extension FX2N 8ER ES UL Input extension Special function block block FX2N 8ER block Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 4 Judge whether extension to the main unit is possible Judge the possibility of extension to the main unit for
459. ole pitch FX2N 16EX ES UL 2 64 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches T LO k eo o co mounting hole pitch 256 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 5 FX2N 8EX FX2N 16EX and FX2N 16EX C 16 5 FX2N 8EX FX2N 16EX and FX2N 16EX C oz 16 5 1 Product specifications The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications 1 2 Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications O For external wiring refer to the following chapters E Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring z 1 Power supply specifications Item FX2N 8EX FX2N 16EX FX2N 16EX C 1 3 Product type FX2N extension block PAER pu UL 5S5 F Rated voltage 24V DC supplied from main unit and input output powered extension unit am o gt D o 2 Weight and Other specifications External dimensions are described later Item FX2N 8EX FX2N 16EX FX2N 16EX C I MASS Weight 0 2kg 0 44lbs 0 3kg 0 66lbs red The extension cable is already connected to the extension block S 2 2 Other e Accessories Label for indication of input output number P T 2 The DIN46277 rail width 35 mm 1 38 or direct installation zz O 3 3 Input specifications Item FX2N 8EX FX2N 16EX FX2N 16EX C 1 5 Connection type Vertical terminal block M3 screws Connector terminal block Z3 O o c Input form Sink B Input signal voltage 24V DC 10 Input signal current 5mA
460. oles ZTN Oo E Oo xr Oo C o Q o O C O c c 2 O E mN CO pe co wa CN N ba 15 6 3 Terminal layout FX2N 32ET x5 x7 Xr Xe xo x2 x4 xe x pxi xs xs x Ig ae 23 BE SI E E l FX2N 48ET FX2N 48ET D xT X6 XO X2 X4 X6 x5 2 ik ay lt dx o lt 2 vc ag 3 ik ay lt ag Oo lt an zia a a l FX2N 48ET D 240 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 7 FX2N 32ES 15 7 FX2N 32ES oz 15 7 1 Product specifications The generic specifications are the same as those for the main unit 1 2 Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications O For external wiring refer to the following chapters E Refer to Chapter 9 for power supply wiring Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring a Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring 1 Power supply specifications 1 3 For the power supply specifications refer to Section 15 2 E c a 2 Input specifications sink input Ed o Item FX2N 32ES Input points 16 points 1 4 Connection type Removable terminal block M3 screw sex Input form sink 25 Input signal voltage 24V DC 10 2 5 Input signal current 5mA 24V DC E Input impedance 4 3 KQ E Input response Input ON current 3 5mA or more 24V DC time Input OFF current 1 5mA or less mos See Input response time A
461. on corrections for battery s lot number The following products are added Input output extension block FX2N 8EYR S ES UL Special function block FX3U 4LC Ver 1 40 is supported One instruction is added Appendix B 3 GX Works2 is added Errors are corrected The following product is added Special function block FX3U 16CCL M Errors are corrected Ver 2 00 is supported Supports parameter setting in the FX3U 16CCL M Supports accessing the other station from CC Link Special parameter error M8489 and D8489 is added Description of special auxiliary relays and special data registers is added Appendix A The error code for parameter error is added Subsection 14 6 4 The error code for special block error is added Subsection 14 6 4 419 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers Revised History User s Manual Hardware Edition 420 Date 9 2013 Revision J Description The following products are added Expansion board FX3G AEX BD FX3G 2EYT BD FX3G 485 BD RJ Special adapter FX3U ENET ADP Ver 1 30 is supported Supports the MODBUS communication function Special device and special data register of MODBUS communication is added Appendix A One instruction is added Appendix B 3 Ver 2 00 is supported Special auxiliary relay and special data register of FX3U ENET ADP is added Appendix A Ver 2 10 is supported Supports the IP address change function
462. on deceleration setup PLSR instruction pulse width modulation PWM instruction DOG search zero return DSZR instruction batch data positioning mode TBL instruction pulse outputs absolute current value read ABS instruction zero return ZRN instruction variable speed pulse output PLSV 1 3 instruction drive to increment DRVI instruction drive to absolute DRVA instruction lt lt CON Time division inputs Input matrix MTR instruction digital switch DSW instruction Eu Time division output Seven segment with latch SEGL instruction cg D o 20 8 1 Specifications I T E Transistor output eza Item SoD FX 16EYT TB FX 16EYT H TB us 2g e 2 naaa Couper 7 a TP ya SKO coupler ES 15 Input output AEST m eS circuitry E 20 O ges m External External wiring wiring Load voltage 5 to 30V DC 1 6 0 5A point 1A point OS Resistance The total load current of resistance loads per common The total load current of resistance loads per common A S terminal should be the following value terminal should be the following value 5 2 v 4 output points common terminal 0 8A or less 4 output points common terminal 3A or less E ax load 12W 24V DC 24W 24V DC The total of inductive loads per common terminal should The total of inductive loads per common terminal should be the following value be the following value 4 output point common terminal 19 2W or less 24V 4 output point common
463. on unit z 7 2 Output extension block D D Transistor output sink o8 mM US AOS 1 To use the input terminal X of the input output powered extension unit wire the terminal as shown by the dotted line S S 2 The terminals in the shaded areas are provided on input output powered extension units ex FX2N 32ET of S Output extension blocks do not have the terminals S gt 2 In the case of source wiring When the main unit and a transistor output source type input output powered extension unit block are 1 6 used Om occ ALBOS 0 oO 3B Digital 10 108 switch of BCD V VV WV V VY V V V WV NV WV VY NV N WV 1 T M A pt a O r Ie iode i eal cid i md EX LM a 3g ry pue DS 2 S S OV 24V Input output powered extension unit Output extension block Transistor output Source 1 To use the input terminal X of the input output powered extension unit wire the terminal as shown by the dotted line 2 The terminals in the shaded areas are provided on input output powered extension units ex FX2N 32ET ESS UL Output extension blocks do not have the terminals co suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 189 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 2 Digital Switch DSW Instructions FNC72 BIN Instructions FNC19 3 Input output powered extensio
464. or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed e Make sure to properly wire to the FX Series terminal blocks in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block 4 STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS NWARNING e Do not touch any terminal while the PLC s power is on Doing so may cause electric shock or malfunctions Before cleaning or retightening terminals cut off all phases of the power supply externally Failure to do so may cause electric shock Use the battery for memory backup correctly in conformance to this manual Use the battery only for the specified purpose Connect the battery correctly Do not charge disassemble heat put in fire short circuit connect reversely weld swallow or burn the battery or apply excessive forces vibration impact drop etc to the battery Do not store or use the battery at high temperatures or expose to direct sunlight Do not expose t
465. orized Representative in the European Community Mitsubishi Electric Europe B V Gothaer Str 8 40880 Ratingen Germany FX3G Series Programmable Controllers Standards User s Manual Hardware Edition Type Programmable Controller Open Type Equipment Models MELSEC FXs3G FX3U series manufactured from June 1st 2005 FX3U 232ADP FX3U 485ADP FX3U A4AD ADP FX3U 4DA ADP FX3U 4AD PT ADP FX3u 4AD TC ADP from April 1st 2007 FX3U 232ADP MB FX3U 485ADP MB from December 1st 2007 FX3U 4AD PTW ADP FX3U 4AD PNK ADP from November 1st 2008 FX3G MT ES Where x x indicates 14 24 40 60 FX3G 232 BD FX3G 422 BD FX3G 485 BD FX3G EEPROM 32L FX3G CNV ADP FX3G 2AD BD FX3G 1DA BD FX3G 8AV BD FX3G 5DM from December 1st 2008 FX3G Xx MR ES Where xx indicates 14 24 40 60 from March 1st 2009 FX3G X MT ESS Where x x indicates 14 24 40 60 from June 1st 2009 FX3U 3A ADP from December 1st 2009 FX36 Xx x MR DS FX3G XMT DS FX3G x MT DSS Where x x indicates 14 24 40 60 from February 1st 2012 FX3U ENET ADP from September 1st 2013 FX3G 4EX BD FX3G 2EYT BD FX3G 485 BD RJ Standard Remark EN61131 2 2007 Programmable controllers Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard Equipment requirements and tests EMI e Radiated Emission e Conducted Emission EMS e Radiated electromagnetic field e Fast transient burst Electrostatic discharge e High energy surge e Voltage drops and interruptions e Conducted RF Power frequency magne
466. orted with the ALM LED on or the battery exhausted the battery backed data may be unstable during D transportation When transporting lithium batteries follow required transportation regulations S D 3 For details of the regulated products refer to Appendix E B E S o mat Sm o The battery is not incorporated in the PLC main unit at shipment from the factory zog Order it if necessary 7 g 22 1 Batte ry Purpose 3EZ 3gd The battery backs up the following contents against power interruption be Proper parameter setting is required to back up the device memory and current time gm For the parameter setting method refer to Section 22 3 Item Data Retained By Backup Battery Auxiliary relay M1536 to M7679 state S1000 to 84095 data register D1100 to D7999 EVIE TUER extended register RO to R23999 Current time Current time clock 1 The data is backed up by the large capacity capacitor built in the PLC at shipment from the factory For backup by the capacitor refer to Section 4 5 22 2 Specifications Item Specifications Remarks Nominal voltage Battery voltage can be monitored with PLC data register D8005 385 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 22 Battery User s Manual Hardware Edition 22 3 Setting for Battery 22 3 Setting for Battery The battery is not incorporated in the main unit at shipment from the factory It is necessary to attach the optional battery if backup is requ
467. ov ptooze D51 displayed is specified END N RUN monitor yu A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun UOISUS X3 JOUIO J 77 pes D lt o 2 c D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO 339 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 14 Specified Device Monitor Function 19 14 6 Monitor operation on specified device monitor screen The monitor operation on the specified device monitor screen is common for all devices It is not possible to monitor extension file registers ER and DER file registers D and index registers V and Z Refer to Subsection 19 14 5 for a display example of the specified device monitor screen Refer to Section 19 18 for the procedure used to display the timer counter and data register current values as hexadecimal values 1 Press the ESC button to return to the menu screen D1000 32767 Specified Selected Device Type Operation Description ESC Returns to the menu screen Disabled All devices except Disabled OK Disabled 19 14 7 Specified device monitor screen for monitoring Refer to Section 19 18 for the procedure used to display the current values as hexadecimal values 1 Data register D 16 bit extended register R 16 bit D1000 32767 Specified 2 Data register DD 32 bit extended register DR 32 bit D1001 1000 File register D 32767
468. overall frequency refer to Section 11 7 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 Use of High speed Counters 11 7 Response Frequency and Overall Frequency 11 7 Response Frequency and Overall Frequency 1 Response Frequency and Overall Frequency When any of the following functions instructions is used the overall frequency is restricted without regard to the operand of the instruction Consider this restriction when examining the system or creating programs and observe the specified overall frequency range When two or more high speed counters are used e When the HSCS HSCR HSZ PLSY PLSR DSZR TBL ZRN PLSV DRVI or DRVA instruction is used When the pulse width cycle measurement function is used Overall frequency determined by condition of used instruction Response Frequency When HSCS HSCR or HSZ When HSCS HSCR or HSZ instruction is not used instruction is used C235 C236 C238 1 phase 1 C239 C241 SUE count input put C237 C240 C242 10kHz C243 C244 C245 60kHz Counter type 200kHz Number of positioned axes 60kHz Number of positioned axes x 5kHz Number of pulse width cycle measurement inputs x 20kHz C246 C248 OP 1 phase 2 count input MAE C248 C249 10kHz C251 C253 OP 30kHz 2 phase 2 count input C252 C253 C254 C254 OP C255 1 Number of axes used in the following positioning instructions PLSY FNC57 PLSR FNC59 DS
469. owered extension unit 10 BuutM Ses snoueA I S S Main unit Input output powered extension unit 2 E o 2 Inthe case of sink wiring mos When inputs are used for sink only in the used input output powered extension unit E S eae c uda syoolg UOISU9 X3 dnoandu C Input output powered extension unit N Soy 3 In the case of source wiring es When inputs are used for both sink and source in the used main unit or input output powered extension No unit El co suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO sis OV 24V ROTO ROT Xo 12x01 xo1a XO t5 XO 16DX017 Main unit Input output powered extension unit ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 191 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 3 Input Matrix MTR Instructions FNC 52 13 3 Input Matrix MTR Instructions FNC 52 This section gives examples of wiring for capturing the ON OFF status of 24 switches to M30 to M37 M40 to M47 and M50 to M57 using MTR instructions 1 Main unit Example of program M8000 Example of wiring 1 In the case of sink wiring When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor sink type in the used main unit ap v N co LO co NM 0 1A 50V LO LO LO LO LO LO LO LO dodes omm OE OE xz necessary X021 V X022 V X023 V X024 V X025 V X026 V X027 c N co lt
470. p Nvv Monrose 5VIOV 24V Special function block Power supply for loads to be connected to PLC output terminals As for the details of Sink and emergency stop SOUICE operation see DESIGN input PRECAUTIONS at type Safety Precautions field Input extension block Special function block Output extension block 5VIOVI 24V 1 Connect DC power to and terminals The same power 2 Do not connect with OV and 24V source for the main unit extension units special function terminals unit blocks and special adapters is preferable When using the 9 24V DC supplies power to the S S different power source from the main unit turn ON the terminal at the input extension block peripheral devices power simultaneously or earlier than 4 Some special function units blocks special the main unit s When turning OFF the power confirm the adapters do not have a power supply terminal safety of the system and then turn OFF the power of the PLC including special extension equipment at the same time 138 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 Input Wiring Procedures DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NWARN ING DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION uononpoJu NO Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause se
471. patte Eeceluaeuiieset tau E ueniet tb dun uen A diio dene Red u de SE it ende du 373 20 9 3 Example of output external wiring elsseeesssessseseeeeeeene nennen nnne nnn nne rn 373 20 94 External wiring DPrECAULIONS ssxinesdscivercsudxepiesdoudurFrestrolucbua iiron e trio inne e teu snes temecdaserasdeadedtienteaa 374 21 Memory Cassette 375 TANE GI ETE 375 Pa Be ae DGCIIC CHIOTS uetus nis eee eee ne uem astu du tendu teen euni dte uide tole basse eR 375 21 2 1 Electrical specifications llseessssssssssesssssesseeeenennennn nennen nennen nnn nn annee nnns nnn 375 21 2 2 Part names and External dimensions sess nnns 375 21 9 ISLAM ALON cranes ceseccns shana suns est n fct e dO Seu utes sh bencl ant 000 H0 0S2 06 ech chee IS oe UNLOR arene CEDE CUPS SR US DAD Deos tas 376 21 3 1 Installation when the expansion board connector conversion adapter is not used together 376 21 3 2 Installation when the expansion board connector conversion adapter is used together 377 21 4 PROM ION alles chance taresncenysbancunt abenGiatt hana ota nee suite ace S EE EA eet oan cubes 2 DOCU a 379 21 4 1 Removal when the expansion board connector conversion adapter are not used together 379 21 4 2 Removal when the expansion board connector conversion adapter are used together 380 21 5 SAVER Dale COME o doidcttvepiiti xot epit a bdo tush ised deatsvedeane oes 381 2135 EISOTEG
472. pe E U o D CD c xe i lt UOISU9 X3 suondo pue shun 3X3 Jeujo ainpoyy Aedsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 303 FX3G Series Prog rammable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 3 Expansion Board 18 3 9 FX3G 8AV BD External Dimensions e MASS Weight Approx 20g 0 05lbs Accessories Two M3x8 tapping screws for installation of board Side cover Trimmer layout label Manual supplied with product Unit mm inches 51 2 2 02 Trimmer Layout i ears nr 304 FX3G Series Prog rammable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 4 Power Supply 18 4 Power Supply SF 2 18 4 1 FX2N 20PSU External Dimensions Terminal Layout 12 2 04 5 A E mounting holes lo S bd 3 O 8 13 moO s o e E e c 5o Oe D om 5 7 eif E joe fene 14 1 4 0 16 92 2 05 9 0 36 zs mounting hole pitch 75 2 96 53 60 2 37 2 3 5 MASS Weight 0 3kg 0 66lbs a e Installation DIN rail of 35mm 1 38 in width or screws 1 5 Accessories Manual supplied with product x93 Terminal block M3 5 screws 2 3 18 5 Connector Conversion Adapter 4 6 TH 18 5 1 FX3G CNV ADP TE External Dimensions Unit mm inches e MASS We
473. pecial parameters 6420 Special parameter sum check error Set special parameters correctly turn OFF the power and then turn ON the power Check the contents of the special parameter error code D8489 confirm troubleshooting for special adapters 6421 Special parameters setting error special blocks and set special parameters correctly Set special parameters correctly turn OFF the power and then turn ON the power 216 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes PLC Oz Error operation ST Contents of error Action m code at error ma occurrence 2 Syntax error M8065 D8065 0000 feer O 12 Incorrect combination of instruction device symbol and device 6501 O number El O 6502 No OUT T or OUT C before setting value 6503 No setting value after OUT T or OUT C Insufficient number of operands for an applied instruction 2 Same label number is used more than once 6504 Stops Same interrupt input or high speed counter input is used more D ring programming each netruciionis checked it aene 1 3 than once operation error is detected modify the instruction correctly se 6505 Device number is out of allowed range ai c d 6506 Invalid instruction 2 ie 6507 Invalid label number P D 6508 Invalid interrupt input I 6510 MC nesting number error z
474. peration even during external power supply problems or PLC failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents 1 2 Most importantly have the following an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that the output current of the 24V DC service power supply varies depending on the model and the absence presence of extension blocks If an overload occurs the voltage automatically drops inputs in the PLC are disabled and all outputs are turned off External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that when an error occurs in a relay triac or transistor output device the output could be held either on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case NCAUTION Do not bundle the control line together with o
475. ply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to properly wire the FX3G Series main unit and FX2N FX3U Series extension equipment in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block European type in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the d
476. points points points points CC Link network Remote I O Remote I O Remote I O 32 points 32 points 32 points Number of input output points occupied by special function blocks 16 points 0 points 96 112 128 160 256 points Number of input output points ZZ 96 points Y Number of input output points excluding remote I O points on CC Link Number of input output occupied points Up to 128 points Number of SSESSS remaining 32 pointsx3 units 96 points Quum points OY Re m m me am e am o ae Number of CC Link input output points 128 points or less in total 256 points or less in total 74 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 4 Number of Connected Extension Devices Including Extension Cable 6 4 Number of Connected Extension Devices Including Extension Cable 6 4 1 Number of connectable expansion boards and special adapters The number of connectable expansion boards and special adapters varies depending on the number of points in the main unit The connector conversion adapter FX3G CNV ADP is required to connect the special adapter For assignment of communication channels refer to Section 7 3 e n the case of Main units 40 60 point type Number of connectable special adapters of each type Use of expansion board E SETS Communication Analog special adapters special adapters Commun
477. pply unit 6 The 24V and OV terminals are located on the output terminal side For details on the terminal layout refer to Section 4 7 135 ue uoneJedaJg Buum indu CO p FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 4 Examples of External Wiring AC Power Supply Type 9 4 5 An external wiring example for the extension power supply unit source input common This example shows a source input wiring common including the extension power supply unit Sink and source input type AC power supply of 100 to 240V Breaker Glass D APEEMEEMEIC DUE m Power supply ON Sink and Source input type MC rf LM MC b E Emergency o i stop 24V DC service pupa i Power supply for loads to be connected to PLC output terminals Input extension block 5V 0V 24V 244 block j As for the details of emergency stop operation see DESIGN PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions field Wiring precaution Grounding and power cables should be positioned Sink and Input extension to exit the unit from above as shown in the figure eius block Mo 0 pT00000000eo0 0000000000000 lbs 5V 0V 24V E Grounding and type power cables Special function 24 block d 24
478. pprox 10ms a g S TM No voltage contact input S E P g NPN open collector transistor S 2 wn Input circuit insulation Photo coupler insulation Indication of input operation LED on panel lights when input 1 Sink input wiring 490 UOISU9 X3 ndnoandu C Input circuit diagram N yu A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 co suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO eipoyy ejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 241 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 7 FX2N 32ES 3 Output specifications triac output type Item FX2N 32ES Output Points 16 points Connection type Removable terminal block M3 screw Output unit Triac output SSR External power supply 85 to 242V AC Output circuit insulation Photo thyristor insulation Indication of output operation Activation of the photo thyristor will light the LED indicator lamp on panel 0 3A point Resistance load The total load current per common terminal should be the following value Max load 4 output points common terminal 0 8A or less 15VA 100V AC 30VA 200V AC Open circuit leakage current 1mA 100V AC 2mA 200V AC Min load 0 4VA 100V AC 1 6VA 200V AC OFF ON 1ms or less Response time ON OFF 10ms or less Output circuit configuration A common number applies to the of COML 15 7 2 External dimensions 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches ire l
479. pt the ground terminal For the dielectric withstand voltage test of each terminal refer to the generic specifications for the product refer to Section 4 1 3 Measure the dielectric withstand voltage and insulation resistance between each terminal and the ground terminal Dielectric withstand voltage 1 5kV AC or 500V for 1min The terminals vary in dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance 500V DC 5MQ or more 14 1 2 Connection to built in programming connector RS 422 1 When connecting a peripheral device Connect and disconnect the communication cable for the peripheral device At connection align the positioning mark between the cable and the main unit Programming connector RS 422 Positioning mark Communication cable P Positioning mark 2 For continuous use of a peripheral device such as GOT Cut off the area shown in the left figure below of the peripheral device connector cover main unit using a nipper etc and connect the peripheral device as shown in the right figure below Peripheral device connecting Connection example connector cover Communication Cut off the dotted cable line area 200 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 1 Preparation for Test Operation 3 For continuous use of a peripheral device such as GOT using the connector conversion ada
480. pter Cut off the area shown in the left figure below of the connector conversion adapter using a nipper etc and connect the peripheral device as shown in the right figure below Connection example Communication cable Cut off the dotted line area 14 1 3 Connection to built in programming connector USB Connect and disconnect the communication cable for the peripheral device personal computer At connection confirm the cable and connector shape Programming connector connector 201 SJojunoo wh peedg uDi e Buum nding N 10 Buum Q9 Ses snoueA o c D nN p o o ES Q paiemog yndynonjnduy OQ sun uoisuejx3 s syoo g UOISU9 X3 dnoandu C oh j yu A ddns Jewog UOISUS X3 co suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 1 Preparation for Test Operation 14 1 4 Writing of program and program check power ON and PLC stopped Turn on the PLC power Make sure that the RUN STOP switch of the PLC is set to STOP and turn the power on Check the program Check for circuit errors and grammatical errors with the program check function of the program ming tool Transfer the sequence program Write the program to the PLC with the progr
481. put allocation Counter type Counter No NL D ME NENNEN NNNM ee cw WEM 00 0 i cy 21 NEN 0 0 ee NEN 0 0 id k 8 pes input ao 0l Lll Oo NE MN 1 phase 2 count ee ee nout o emaon TESTS OE w 2 PH cmo C O boe c BM DUENC Ye PASS A mee 1 E LLLI c5 EBENEN The high speed counter numbers are allocated to the input terminals X000 to X007 as shown in the following table The input terminals not allocated for high speed counters can be used as general input terminals U Up count input D Down count input A A phase input B B phase input R External reset input S External start input X000 X001 X002 X003 X004 X005 X006 X007 EEE E EE B S 1 When a special auxiliary relay is driven in a program the input terminals and their associated functions are switched For the function switching method refer to Subsection 11 9 2 11 4 2 Restriction of redundant use of input numbers 162 The input terminals X000 to X007 can be used for high speed counters input interruption pulse catch SPD ZRN and DSZR instructions and general purpose inputs Take care not to overlap the input numbers FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 Use of High speed Counters 11 5 Handling of High speed Counters 11 5 Handling of High speed Counters 11 5 1 1 phase 1 count input Examples of prog
482. r details on the terminal layout refer to Section 4 7 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 4 Examples of External Wiring AC Power Supply Type Output extension block uoneleysuly OO 9 4 4 Anexternal wiring example for the extension power supply unit sink input common O Q This example shows a sink input wiring common including the extension power supply unit When adding gt an input extension block check the signal name on the terminal block since the sink source type and sink type differ from each there Sink and source input type AC power supply of 2 4 100 to 240V ae Special adapter 94 an SMoVi2av 2 a E Breaker a Class D grounding Power supply ON 3 2 MC El Sink and MC ej Source i Emergency input is 4 Stop type 24V DC service 4 power a supply output S S Special function 5 block Sos a a Power supply for loads to be connected to PLC output terminals 6 B As for the details of emergency stop oe operation see DESIGN ac PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions 3 field ej Wiring precaution l Grounding and power cables should be positioned Pecariuncion 24 to exit the unit from above as shown in the figure T
483. r lay it close to the main circuit or power line As a guideline lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to peripheral device connectors Failure to do so may result in wire damage breakage or PLC failure Reference Reference GEER ciety Precautions NEEDS Read these precautions before use 2 INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS NWARNING Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work 98 Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product 352 NCAUTION a Use the product within the generic environment specifications described in section 4 1 of this manual Never use the product in areas with excessive dust oily smoke conductive dusts corrosive gas salt air Cl2 H2S SO2 or NO2 flammable gas vibration or impacts or expose it to high temperature condensation or rain and wind If the product is used in such conditions electric shock fire malfunctions deterioration or damage may occur Do not touch the conductive parts of the product directly Doing so may cause device failures or malfunctions Install the product securely using a DIN rail or mounting screws Terminal block DIN rail DIN rail ony Main unit FX2N Series I O extension unit block FX2N FX3U Series special DIN rail or direct
484. r s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A 4 Analog special adapters M8280 to M8299 and D8280 to D8299 When analog special adapters are connected operations and functions are assigned to the devices shown in the tables below in accordance with the number of connected analog special adapters Devices which cannot be written are shaded in Operation and function column For details refer to the Analog Control Edition Appendix A 4 1 Special auxiliary relays M8280 to M8299 Operation and function Number FX3U 4AD ADP FX3U 4DA ADP FX3U 3A ADP compatible Ver 1 00 or later Ver 1 00 or later Ver 1 20 or later Versions 1st analog special adapter M 8280 Input mode switching Ch1 Output mode switching Ch1 Input mode switching Ch1 M 8281 Input mode switching Ch2 Output mode switching Ch2 Input mode switching Ch2 M 8282 Input mode switching Ch3 Output mode switching Ch3 Output mode switching M 8283 Input mode switching Ch4 Output mode switching Ch4 Not used M 8285 Nomised Output hold mode cancel EEA Ch2 M 8286 eR HOI MORE pange Output hold mode cancel M 8287 FOIS Cd Output hold mode cancel Sets whether or not input Ch4 channel 1 is used M 8288 Not used Not used Sets whether or not input channel 2 is used M 8289 Not used NOISE Sets whether or not output channel is used PA TES Lo EI eT Ted ER o F To C38 M 8290 Input mode switching Ch1 Output mode switching Ch1 Input mode switching Ch1 M 8291 Input mode switching
485. r s Manual Hardware Edition 19 6 Monitor Test Mode 19 6 Monitor Test Mode OF 19 6 1 Relevant devices Monitoring and testing can be performed from the Monitor Test menu for the devices listed below 1 2 Monitoring testing is not possible for the file register D and the index register V Z O v Possible A Possible under certain conditions B LI Not possible Item not supported by this device Current Device Operation Current Setting Forced Setting umm RET T ur Em xm mm 13 ss input X ox qoc oc boc boc jc 7 7 F ud De oo pc 7 17 JA 7 7 dd Timer T i i i P NO rN da 9 0 Q i mM US 2 30 1 A forced ON or OFF is executed for only one operation cycle and therefore has a considerable effect 38 on the SET RST and self retaining circuits when the PLC is running 2 Moreover a forced ON OFF result is retained for devices Y M S which are not being driven by an OUT instruction etc in the program 16 2 Setting values of timer and counter can be changed when the PLC status is as shown below oms QOc Program Memory Type RUN STOP Status Setting Change Enabled Disabled BAO Suc RUN Enabled 8 Internal EEPROM 5s STOP Enabled RUN Disabled PROTECT switch ON STOP Disabled Memory cassette RUN N Enabled JaN PROTECT switch OFF E STOP Enabled m eg 3 The C200 to C255 32 bit up down counters and the high speed counters have counting directions 4 Extended file regi
486. ra noise from switch chattering or contact bounce The input filter of an input terminal for a high speed counter in the main unit is automatically set to 10 us X000 X001 X003 X004 or 50 us X002 X005 X006 X007 Accordingly it is not necessary to use special data register D8020 input filter adjustment The input filter for input relays not being used for high speed counters remains at 10 ms initial value he inputs X000 to X007 are used for high speed counters input interrupt pulse catch SPD DSZR ZRN instructions and general purpose inputs There should be no overlap between each input number e Make sure that the signal speed for high speed counters does not exceed the response frequency described above If an input signal exceeds the response frequency a WDT error may occur or the communication functions such as a parallel link may malfunction The response frequency changes depending on the number of used counters but the input filter value is fixed to 10 us X000 X001 X003 X004 or 50 us X002 X005 X006 X007 Note that noise above the response frequency may be counted depending on the filter value of the used input 171 SJejuno2 peeds ubiH Buum nding N 10 Buum OO Ses snoueA I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1S9 pejowog adnoandu OQ spun uoisuejx3 uda syoolg UOISU9 X3 dnoandu C N yu A ddns Jewog UOISUS X3 co suondo pue
487. ram 336 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 14 Specified Device Monitor Function 19 14 2 Differences between specified device monitor screen and monitor test screen The figure below shows differences between the specified device monitor screen and the monitor test screen Refer to Subsection 19 14 5 for a display example of the specified device monitor screen Refer to Subsection 19 6 3 for a display example of the monitor test screen Specified Device Monitor Screen Monitor Test Screen When D1000 is specified When D1000 is monitored D1000 D1001 D1000 32767 D1002 D1003 In the case of a specified device monitor screen specified is displayed 19 14 3 Program example1 when monitoring testing a timer In this program example the device type to be displayed on the specified device monitor screen is set to timer T Sets the device No to T10 For testing the timer T10 turn ON MO to enable the test operation In this program example system information is assigned from D50 to D54 and from M50 to M64 D8300 1 System information system No 1 is set at D50 to D54 Initial pulse T oed e D8301 System information system No 2 is set at M50 to M64 Sets the device type to Timer lett D51 Sets the device No to T10 Test operation enable command MO C M50 When MO turns ON the test operation for T10 is enabled 337
488. ram 1 For C235 X010 e C235 counts the number of times the input terminal X000 switches from OFF to ON while X012 is on Down count up count X011 e While X011 is on the counter resets when RST instruction RST C235 Reset is executed X012 The counters C235 to C245 switch to the down count or G5 up count mode by turning on or off M8235 to M8245 Count input e C244 starts counting immediately when the input terminal X006 turns on while X012 is on The count input terminal t bueddco te ais xu is X000 The setting for this example is the data of the C244 Reset indirectly designated data register D1 D0 a e C244 can be reset by X011 on the sequence For C244 DO D1 X001 is allocated as the external reset input The counter resets immediately when X001 turns on e The counters C235 to C245 switch to the down count or The seung DLRI up count mode by turning on or off M8235 to M8245 External start input External reset Count input input Main unit Example of operation The above counter C235 operates as shown below X010 Up count Down count Up count X011 Reset input A X012 Start input X000 Count input 4 9 4 C285 5 25 Current 1 1 value YQ 0 0 TE I E E o EEA ao nese aed 1 23 3 When output has 4 5 sd operated i 6 Dl C235 output contact UN 163 SJejuno2 peeds ubiH Buum nding N 10 Buum OO Ses snoueA I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure
489. ransistor Output Sink Source Type 12 2 2 Handling of transistor output 178 1 Output terminals One 4 or 8 transistor output points are covered by one common terminal Sink output Connect each COMU number terminal to the minus side of the load power supply The COMU terminals are not connected internally Sink output type Source output Connect each VL1 number terminal to the plus side of the load power supply The VU terminals are not connected internally External power supply For driving the load use a smoothing power supply of 5 to 30V DC that can output current two or more times the rated current of the fuse connected to the load circuit Insulation of circuit The internal circuit of the PLC and the output transistor are insulated with a photocoupler The common blocks are separated from one another Display of operation Operation indicator LEDs are built into the main unit and output extension blocks and turn ON when photocouplers are actuated FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 2 External Wiring of Transistor Output Sink Source Type 5 Response time oz The time from when the PLC drives or shuts down the photocoupler until the transistor is turned on or off is 2 shown in the following table o 3 Classification Load current time 5 to 24V DC When using an instruction related to pulse train output or Main un
490. re Edition 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM 19 12 Memory Cassette Transfers Result and measures to take The transfer is not executed if a PLC is running message appears In this case set the PLC to the STOP state then perform the step 3 operation described above The transfer is not executed if a Transfer failed message appears In this case turn the power off check the memory cassette connection then attempt the operation again from the first step A Transfer completed message appears when the transfer is completed When this message appears press OK or ESC to display the memory cassette transfer screen 5 Press ESC to display the menu screen 334 PLC is running Cassette PLC Transfer failed Cassette PLC Transfer completed FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 13 System Information Restrictions From PLC 19 13 System Information Restrictions From PLC Some of the display module functions require system information settings in order to enable program control of these functions Functions which require the use of system information are listed below e Specified device monitor function Operation button ON OFF information Refer to Section 19 14 for details Refer to Section 19 17 for details e Screen saver function Monitor test function Refer to Section 19 15 for details For hexadecimal disp
491. re Edition 13 4 Seven Segment with Latch SEGL Instructions FNC74 BCD Instructions FNC18 2 Input output powered extension unit Example of program M8000 D100 K2Y020 Example of wiring 1 In the case of sink wiring When inputs are used for sink only and outputs are the transistor sink type in the used input output powered extension unit 7 segment display to be used for sink wiring in the case of transistor output Input output powered extension unit FX2N 32ET FX2N A8ET Transistor output sink Je Js Ji J 2 In the case of source wiring When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor source type in the used extension unit 7 segment display to be used for source wiring in the case of transistor output Input output powered extension unit l FX2N 32ET ESS UL PLC 7 segment display FX2N 48ET ESS UL Transistor output source Je Js J 2 198 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and 8 Troubleshooting O S g STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS WARNING 3 Do not touch any terminal while the PLC s power is on Doing so may cause electric shock or malfunctions 1 3 Before cleaning or retightening terminals cut off all phases of the power supply externally lt lt Failure to do so may cause electri
492. ries Label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product 1 6 om5 e Terminal block M3 screws See The extension cable is already connected to the extension block E 18 1 2 FX2N 2DA 17 External Dimensions Terminal Layout SOR 0 5 2 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches No S lt T g isi FX n 2DA moO iD 6 See POWER cC OO 2 5 e goo 5S E oo E os a O e E S i wn p jab lt lt MASS Weight 0 2kg 0 44lbs A D e Installation DIN rail of 35mm 1 38 in width or screws Accessories Label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product 20 Terminal block M3 screws g e The extension cable is already connected to the extension block zi UJ ex 287 FX3G Series Prog rammable Controllers 19 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 1 Special Function Units Blocks 18 1 3 FX3uU 4AD External Dimensions Terminal Layout 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches POWERCO 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch 4 0 16 55 2 17 87 3 43 e MASS Weight Approx 0 2kg 0 44lbs Installation DIN rail of 35mm 1 38 in width or screws Accessories Label for indication of special unit block number Dust Proof sheet Manual supplied with product Terminal block M3 screws The extension cable is already connected to the extensio
493. rious accidents 1 Most importantly have the following an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee OO positioning limits zx 2 Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off a 3 Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be Ere disabled S External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that the output current of the 24V DC service power supply varies depending on the model and the absence presence of extension blocks If an overload occurs the voltage automatically drops inputs in the PLC are disabled and all outputs are turned 4 off External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that when an error occurs in a relay triac or transistor output device the output could be held either on or off S For output signals that may lead to serious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe S machinery operation in such a case oO Sas Sg d Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power
494. rogrammable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 4 Maintenance and Periodic Inspection 14 4 3 Maintenance product life of relay contacts The product life of relay contacts varies considerably depending on the load type used Take care that loads generating reverse electromotive force or rush current may cause poor contact or deposition of contacts which may lead to considerable reduction of the contact product life 1 Inductive load Inductive loads generate large reverse electromotive force between contacts at shutdown which may cause arcing At a fixed current consumption as the power factor phase between current and voltage gets smaller the arc energy gets larger 1 Main units and Input output powered extension units and input output extension blocks For the applicable models refer to Chapter 3 The standard life of contacts used for Inductive loads such as contactors and solenoid valves is 500 000 operations at 20VA The following table shows the approximate life of a relay based on the results of an operation life test Test condition 1 sec ON 1 sec OFF Load capacity Contact life 0 2A 100V AC 0 1A 200V AC 0 35A 100V AC 0 17A 200V AC 0 8A 100V AC 0 4A 200V AC 20VA 3 000 000 times 35VA 1 000 000 times 80VA 200 000 times 2 FXSeries terminal blocks For the applicable models refer to Chapter 3 The standard life of contacts us
495. rollers Standards User s Manual Hardware Edition Caution for compliance with EC Directive 18 1 Installation in Enclosure Programmable logic controllers are open type devices that must be installed and used within conductive control boxes Please use the FX3G Series programmable logic controllers while installed in conductive shielded control boxes Please secure the control box lid to the control box for conduction Installation within a control box greatly affects the safety of the system and aids in shielding noise from the programmable logic controller Caution for Analog Products in use The analog products have been found to be compliant to the European standards in the aforesaid manual and directive However for the very best performance from what are in fact delicate measuring and controlled output devices Mitsubishi Electric would like to make the following points As analog devices are sensitive by nature their use should be considered carefully For users of proprietary cables integral with sensors or actuators these users should follow those manufacturers installation requirements Mitsubishi Electric recommends that shielded cables be used If NO other EMC protection is provided users may experience temporary loss or accuracy between 10 10 in very heavy industrial areas However Mitsubishi Electric suggests that if adequate EMC precautions are followed for the users complete control system Sensitive an
496. ry of Y M S T and C and present values of T C D special data registers and R are cleared to zero However file registers D in program memory and extension file registers ER in the memory cassette are not cleared When PLC is switched from RUN to STOP image memory and data memory are retained All external output contacts of PLC are turned OFF Refer to Programming Manual for details D8176 to D8180 Communication parameter setting flag for N N network setting When M8039 is ON PLC waits until scan time specified in D8039 and then executes cyclic operation D8039 To Executed at END instruction Step Ladder and Annunciator M 8040 Transfer disable M 8041 2 Transfer start M 8042 Start pulse M 8043 2 Zero return complete M 8044 2 Zero point condition M 8045 All output reset disable M 8046 STL state ON M 8047 STL monitoring enable M 8048 Annunciator operate M 8049 Annunciator enable While M8040 is turned ON transfer between states is disabled Transfer from initial state is enabled in automatic operation mode Pulse output is given in response to a start input Set this in the last state of zero return mode Set this when machine zero return is detected Disables the all output reset function when the operation mode is changed ON when M8047 is ON and either of SO to S899 or S1000 to S4095 is active M80
497. s 82 3 23 82 3 23 122 4 81 167 6 58 with screws M4 x 2 0 50 1 10 Ibs 0 55 1 21lbs 0 70 1 54 Ibs 0 85 1 87 Ibs FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 7 Terminal Layout 4 7 Terminal Layout UONnOnpoJjU The terminal layout in the main unit is shown below 4 7 1 Interpretation of terminal block layout NO Power supply terminals Input terminal SOWeN ed pue seJnjee e S X1 X3 X5 X7 X 1513 X15X1 1X2 1 X23X25 X27 AL Ly XO X2 X4 X6 X10X12X14X16 X20 X22iX24X26 OO Output terminals FX3G 40MT ES connected to COM5 Vacant terminal Do not use jov vo v1 Y2 J 4 Ye jYt10jv12 v14iY16 a g4v powgcow cova Y3 Joos Y5 Y7 cow 1 1 Y 13 cows Y 15 Y 17 24V DC service Common terminal Output Partition power supply 4 points common terminal terminal Indication of Power supply terminals The AC power supply type has L and N terminals The DC power supply type has and o terminals For external wiring make sure to read the power supply wiring described later suoneouyioeds oO Refer to Chapter 9 hs Indication of 24V DC service power supply ES S The AC power supply type has OV and 24V terminals whereas the DC power supply type shows 25 since the DC power supply type does not have the service pow
498. s number code E Analog output When using each product refer also to the Use s Manual Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed Supplied Procedures for handling the 1 ch analog output m FX3G 1DA BD JY997D33601 expansion board i Installation Manual When using refer to FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Series User s Manual Analog Control Edition Supplied Procedures for handling the 4 ch analog output n FX3U 4DA ADP JY997D44001 special adapter i User s Manual When using refer to FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC uononpou N product S WEN Hed pue seJnjee product Series User s Manual Analog Control Edition Supplied Procedures for handling the 4 ch analog output Wn FX3U 4DA JY997D20801 special function block i product Installation Manual When using refer to FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC OO 5D Series User s Manual Analog Control Edition S ac aus suppliga FX2N 2DA Procedures for handling the 2 ch analog output EU with JY992D74901 o User s Guide special function block product E Analog input output mixed When using each product refer also to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed 4 Supplied Procedures for handling the 2 ch analog input and 1 Co m FX3U 3A ADP JY997D35601 ch analog output special adapter E odid User s Manual When using refer to FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC p Series User s Manual Analog Control Edition m Supplied E
499. s red When an output terminal YO Y1 etc is turned on the corresponding LED lamps are also 1 8 turned on The output numbers change depending on input output allocation The input output powered extension unit 48 points type assigns output numbers in ascending order from A gt B gt C below suondo pue spun 1X3 JeuiO A OOOOOOOO 0123456 7 He u u u u u u U u M M eipojyy ejds g QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 227 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 2 Power supply specifications When the terminal block covers are open 10 Input X terminals 11 Terminal block fitting screws 9 Power supply terminal i i REL 12 Terminal names 13 Terminal block covers es Se E 12 Terminal names IEEE S SISIBIISIS BIST E SISBIBISISIE 15 Protective terminal 14 Output Y terminals COVers 11 Terminal block mounting screws 9 Power supply terminal Connect the power supply to the input output powered extension unit at this terminal 10 Input X terminals Wire switches and sensors to these terminals 11 Terminal block mounting screws If the input output powered extension unit must be replaced loosen these screws to remove the upper part of the terminal block For anchoring the terminal block refer to Subsection 9 1 2 12 Terminal names The signal names for the power
500. s Guide sensor input special function block product Supplied Procedures for handling the 4 ch Pt1000 Ni1000 with FX3U 4AD PNK ADP JY997D29201 temperature sensor input special adapter f product User s Manual When using refer to FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Series User s Manual Analog Control Edition End Procedures for handling the 4 ch thermocouple input Jm FX3U 4AD TC ADP JY997D14801 special adapter i product User s Manual When using refer to FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Series User s Manual Analog Control Edition euppied FX2N 4AD TC Procedures for handling the 4 ch thermocouple input with JY992D65501 User s Guide special function block product Supplied FX2N 2LC Procedures for handling the 2 ch temperature control with User s Guide JY992D85601 special function block product When using refer to FX2N 2LC User s Manual L Separate eee JY992D85801 Procedures for handling the 2 ch temperature control 09R607 volume User s Manual special function block Supplied FX3U 4LC Procedures for handling the 4 ch temperature control with hstallation Mantal JY997D38901 special function block product When using refer to FX3U 4LC User s Manual P Separate oe JY997D39101 Procedures for handling the 4 ch temperature control 09R625 volume User s Manual special function block 24 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 1 Introduction User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 1 Introduction of Manuals Manual Model name Content
501. s performed The results are displayed on the error display screen shown to T EE nave occured the right Pressing the ESC button on the menu screen cancels the ErrorCheck operation and returns the screen to the top screen time No errors display 3 If some errors have occurred the pages can be switched with the or button Button Operation Description When 1 error has occurred The screen returns to the Menu screen ErrorCheck ESC Ineffective operation less 2 errors The previous page of the error display screen is or more displayed 1 error or Ineffective operation less When multiple errors have occurred 2errors The following page of the error display screen is or more displayed 3 1 2 1 2 OK The screen returns to the Menu screen Displayed data Display Content 1 Flag of occurred error 2 Error code 3 1 2 3 Number of simultaneously occurring errors displayed only when more than one error has occurred 4 Pressing the ESC button cancels the operation and returns the screen to the Menu screen 213 SJojunoo wh peedg uBi Buum nding N a 10 Buum OO S O c o c o D o uny 1S9 eoueua ule N Bunoouse qnoi pejowog adnoandu OQ sun uoisuejx3 s syoojg UOISU9 X3 jn noandu C N yun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 co suondo pue spun 1X3 JeuiO eipojyy Aedsiq QO uoisue 2
502. s possible to add 16 input points and 8 output points The remaining power supply capacity 50mA can be used as a power supply for external loads such as sensors special adapters and special function blocks by the user gt added points o uonejeisu OO DUUM A ddnsg Jewog ue uoneJedaJg h Buum ndu CO p 79 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 5 Expansion of Main Unit 6 5 3 Selection example 2 using the 24V DC service power supply of the main unit 80 This subsection explains an example in which FX2N 2AD and 8 output points are added to the following system configuration using the 24V DC service power supply of the main unit Example of configuration Input extension Special function Output extension Special function Output extension Main unit block block block block block 8 points FX3U 64CCL 8 points FX2N 2AD 8 points Range extendible to main unit Extension blocks to be added Special function block unit Input output 16 points Special kde e Tunit output Confirm the priority of all extension blocks to be connected to the main unit The priority is determined by the extension block type without regard to the connection position from the main unit as shown below Priority Input extension Special function Output extension Special function Output extension Main unit block block block block bl
503. screen time display and top screen specified device monitor functions are disabled DOO 3 The following functions are disabled monitor test s test function contrast setting time change menu display language setting and memory cassette transfer All functions are enabled values 2 System signal 2 System signal 2 is unrelated to this function 19 16 2 Program example screen protect function setting In this program example the display screen protect function is set to level 2 Use this program as a reference when other level settings are specified In this program example system information is assigned from D50 to D54 and from M50 to M64 D8300 1 System information system No 1 is set at D50 to D54 Initial pulse Lu D8301 System information system No 2 is set at M50 to M64 wis D53 Sets the display screen protect function to level 2 MOV 343 SJojunoo wh peedg uDi Buum nding N 10 Buum OO Ses snoueA I I oD Dn es Sy TL 5 E 090 2 2357 oo 2 0 5 Q mM US Xx oo ozc 2 pc 2 oO Ooc 2 5 s a e uda syoolg UOISU9 X3 dnoandu C N yun A ddng Jamod UOISUS X3 co suondo pue sun UOISUS X3 JOUIO J 77 nes D lt ES o c D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 16 Display Screen Protect Function 19 16 3 Key
504. sed When another high speed counter number is used wire the counter referring to the following diagrams It is recommended to use shielded twisted pair cables for connection cables Ground the shield of each shielded cable only on the PLC side 4 1 NPN open oollector transistor output rotary encoder In the case of sink wiring Buum nding N Rotary encoder Fuse 24V DC mm P Class D 28 S S H grounding OV i EH OOO D Cent E ES The grounding resistance should be 100 or less 2 PNP open collector transistor output rotary encoder msc eee a n5 2 Oe In the case of source wiring 239 Rotary encoder E ie 24V DC a 24V a Class D ss grounding uda 490 UOISU9 X3 jnd noandu C oh j E E Spy 0 lt The grounding resistance should be 100 or less co suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 169 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of High speed Counters User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 9 Related Devices and Function Switching Procedures 11 9 Related Devices and Function Switching Procedures 11 9 1 Related devices 1 For switching 1 phase 1 count input counter mode to up count or down count 1 phase 1 count input OFF ON 2 For monitoring of up count down count counting direction of 1 phase 2 count input and 2 phase 2 count input counters Up counting Down counting 2 phase 2 count
505. setting e D 8217 Code of communication error at Uo D 8180 Comms time out setting slave station No 6 z D 8181 Not used Code of communication error at E D 8218 Index Register Z1 to Z7 and V1 to V7 slave station No 7 Js uononJjsu UJ seoi eq jeroeds D 8182 Value of Z1 register R D 8219 to D 8259 D 8183 Value of V1 register Analog Expansion Board Refer to Appendix A 3 for details D 8184 Value of Z2 register D8260 to D8269 1st expansion board D 8185 Value of V2 register D8270 to D8279 2nd expansion board D 8186 Value of Z3 register Analog Special Adapter Refer to Appendix A 4 for details D 8187 Value of V3 register D g D 8280 to D 8289 1st special adapter C D 8188 Value of Z4 register Epa DIS 7 O i D 8189 Value of V4 register spacia a3 D 8190 Value of Z5 register 1 Supported in Ver 1 10 or later ns l 2 1st expansion board becomes an expansion board 919191 Malle or V TegisIer connected to BD connector of main units 14 24 point type a D 8192 Value of Z6 register B or BD1 connector of main units 40 60 point type D 8193 Value of V6 register 3 2nd expansion board becomes an expansion board D D 8194 Value of Z7 redisier connected to BD2 connector of main units 40 60 point type ios 4 Connected analog special adapters are counted from the Boa D 8195 Value of V7 register main unit side 298 D 8196 S D 8197 D
506. sion power supply unit 23 25 Calculate the current to confirm whether the selected extension devices can be connected RU 1 Calculate the current consumption of the built in 5V DC power supply i erae Current consumption Calculation result 4 Extension power Total of current consumed g supply unit by extension devices si 2 ui E 1 gt Qi 2 Calculate the available current supply from the internal 24V DC power supply DIS ER Power supply EE capan vee Moma Current consumption Calculation result Extension power Total of current consumed supply unit by extension devices 2 g _ 3 Calculate the available input output occupied points excluding the occupied input output by special function blocks Connectable I O Number of I O T occupied points occupied points Calculation result p Extension power Total of I O occupied points gZ supply unit by extension devices co ze points points points If the calculation result for the 5V DC power supply is a negative value the current consumption exceeds the power supply capacity If the calculation result for the internal 24V DC is a negative value the current consumption exceeds the power supply capacity If the calculation result for the number of occupied input output points is a negative value the available number of input output points is exceeded Reconfigure the system with an input output powered extension unit uonejesu OO DUUM A ddnsg Jew
507. splay the Error Check screen again and check if the Fatal error occurred message appears 1 Ifthe Fatal error occurred message appears The main unit hardware may have failed Contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative 2 Ifthe Fatal error occurred message does not appear Turn the power OFF connect the extension devices then operate the system again to check for errors If the problem persists there may be main unit or extension device hardware failure Contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 20 Menu Display Characters Japanese and English Display Character Correspondence Table 19 20 Menu Display Characters Japanese and English Display Character OF Correspondence Table Menu Screen English t 5 7Ah Monitor Test 1 2 I7 j41 97 ErrorCheck o LANGUAGE LANGUAGE E Menu l NAN Contrast y ty ClockMenu E i g NM Keyword XtUhty 7779 Cassette 1 3 I7 j19 7 ErrorCheck D ss I Y No errors a ErrorCheck Z I2 71 97 ErrorCheck c d I2 1 N Error code a LANGUAGE LANGUAGE LANGUAGE Japanese Japanese 14 Engl ish English 42 Contrast TY NA Contrast S g 2 o0 052 yy 4v M Current time ag y Way Clock setting ea ClockMenu y Way Clock setting 1 5 y yy 4y 37 Current time mos SA X Oo tyr477 is set 25S TE ae 7 Please input ZN AITIT 1M Keyword z sebo kkkkkkkk ok kkkkkkkk 1 6 t g
508. ss Circuit isolation Photocoupler isolation Operation Activation of the photo thyristor will light the LED indicator lamp on panel indicators Power 2 7W 112mA 24V DC consumption 1 In systems where frequent large load ON OFF switching occurs due to rush currents the root mean square current should be 0 2 A or less Example 0 4A 4 x 0 02 0 42 x 0 7 Y Maius MR MOL MNT E HS 0 02 0 7 10 0 02 0 7 10 Sec Sec Sec 2 This response time does not include the response delay at the PLC FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 9 EX 16EYS TB 20 9 2 Internal circuit 3 3kO Photo Photo r thyristor thyristor 1 3 3kO i4 3 3kQ pe Photo Ew thyristor thyristor O00 to N07 Lower numbers AAO to AA7 Higher numbers Surge absorbers are connected to each output D00 1 2 3 004567 440123 4567 AV AVI MI AV AVI MI AV AVI MI AV Surge absorbers are connected to each output PLC output Dno 1 2 3 D4 567 440 123 444567 No Photo coupler 4 power supply 373 SJojunoo wh peedg uDi Buum nding N 10 Buum OO Ses snoueA I Es OD D S Sy Xr EN 090 2 erg O O S Q mM US aoe O c 2oc 2 oO Ooc 2 S S a op sy ojg UOISU9 X3 jd noandu C yu A ddng Jewog UOISUS Xj oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO D o o gt wn o sad lt o Q E D
509. ss Make sure that the screwdriver I does not touch the partition part of the terminal block E Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block European type in accordance with the following precautions E 5 4 Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product 23 E The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual el 2 Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires mi Do not solder plate the electric wire ends 1 5 Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed nos Make sure to properly wire to the FX Series terminal blocks in accordance with the following precautions oF z Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product S D e The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual ie Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block 1 6 SKS Qoc
510. ss High order D 8423 Subnet mask High order D 8424 Default router IP Address Low order D 8425 Default router IP Address High order 4 Connection condition of the Ethernet Dae DE ERE 1 Supported in Ver 2 00 or later Error Detection RS2 FNC 87 ch2 and Computer Link ch2 D18439 Error Detection D18440 t Dp 3 Da B44 D8450 t Djs 7 Positioning D18460 to D18463 DSZR FNC150 and ZRN DUO T a MORO specification DSZR FNC150 and ZRN dic on eer ae iau specification DSZR FNC150 and ZRN DOO ad pee M MUTO specification 2 Cleared when PLC power supply from OFF to ON 402 Correspond Correspond Number and 3 Content of register ing special name device Error Detection D 8468 to D 8488 Error code for special parameter error 3 Supported in Ver 2 00 or later D 8489 3 D 8490 to D 851 1 FX3U ENET ADP ch1 ch2 D 84924 IP address setting Low order D 84934 IP address setting High order D 84944 Subnet mask setting Low order D 84954 Subnet mask setting High order x Default router IP address setting 4 D 8496 Low order x Default router IP address setting 4 D 8497 High order x Error code for IP address storage 4 Error code for IP address storage 4 4 Supported in Ver 2 10 or later FX3G Series Programmable Controllers Appendix A Special Device List User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix
511. ssed This would cause 6706 Device number range or data value for operand of applied an operation error since there is no T400 device available instruction exceeds limit 6707 File register is accessed without parameter setting of file register This error occurs in the execution of operation Review the program and check the contents of the operands used in applied instructions ome PROM TO IMSMUCHOM SMOE e Verify that the specified buffer memories exist in the counterpart equipment e Verify that extension cables are correctly connected This error occurs in the execution of operation Review the Continues program and check the contents of the operands used in operation MD applied instructions Even if the syntax or circuit design is correct an operation 6709 Other e g improper branching error may still occur For example T3002 itself is not an error But if Z had a value of 100 the timer T400 would attempt to be accessed This would cause an operation error since there is no T400 device available This error occurs when the same device is used within the 6710 Mismatch among parameters ere ay source and destination in a shift instruction etc 6730 Incorrect sampling time TS TS lt 0 Incompatible input filter constant a da a Oor 100 lt a I PID instruction is stopped 6733 Incompatible proportional gain KP KP 0 This error occurs in the parameter setting value or operation 6734 Incompatible integral ti
512. stem 1 2 Relay output type FX2N 8EYR S ES UL Rel T block z FX2N 8EYR Relay Terminal block E Dedicated to sink output only s c d 0 D 62 I FX2N 16EYS ae io O Terminal block TES Dedicated to source output only o E iSIS D og Dc 2285 gas C amp 3 o 17 yu A ddng Jamod UOISUS XF co suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 247 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 2 FX2N 8ER ES UL 24V DC Sink Source Input Relay Output 16 2 FX2N 8ER ES UL 24V DC Sink Source Input Relay Output 16 2 1 Product specifications 248 1 The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications For external wiring refer to the following chapters Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring Power supply specifications Item FX2N 8ER ES UL Product type FX2N extension block Rated voltage 24V DC supplied from main unit and input output powered extension unit 2 Weight and Other specifications External dimensions are described later Item FX2N 8ER ES UL MASS Weight 0 2kg 0 44lbs The extension cable is already connected to the extension block Other e Accessories Label for indication of input output number The DIN46277 rail width 3
513. sters stored in the EEPROM in the main unit or extended file registers stored in the EEPROM inside the memory cassette when the memory cassette is attached co suondo pue sun UOISUS X3 JOUIO J 77 nes D lt ES o c D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO 315 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 6 Monitor Test Mode 19 6 2 Monitor mode operation This section explains the procedure for monitoring the input X output Y auxiliary relay M state S timer T counter C data registers D DD extended registers R DR and the extended file registers ER DER The file register D and the index registers V Z cannot be monitored Refer to Subsection 19 6 3 for a monitor screen display example Refer to Section 19 14 for specified device monitor operation procedures Refer to Section 19 18 for the procedure used to display the timer counter and data register current values as hexadecimal values 1 At the menu screen use the and buttons to move the cursor to the Monitor Test item then press OK to display the device lt 16 bit E selection screen shown at right To cancel the operation and return to the top screen time dai eed display press ESC at the menu screen T 2 Use the and buttons to move the cursor to the device which is C to be monitored R 16bit To cancel the operation and r
514. structions 2 instructions Applied instructions 125 kinds Standard mode 0 21us instruction Basic instructions Processing Extension mode 0 42us instruction speed 53 i Applied instructions Standard mode 0 5us to several hundred us instruction Extension mode 1 2us to several hundred us instruction 1 Extension combined number of input points 128 points or less 1 2 lt 3 total number of points is 128 or less 3 Total points 2 Extension combined Number of input umber of output points output points 4 Remote I O number of points CC Link 3 4 total number of points Input output Input relay X000 to X177 The device numbers are octal relay Output relay Y000 to Y177 EEPROM keep M384 to M1535 1152 points Auxiliary relay M1536 to M7679 6144 points 100ms for subroutine interruption T192 to T199 8 points 0 1 to 3 276 7 sec subroutine Timer on delay 40ms T200 to T245 46 points 0 01 to 327 67 sec timer 1ms accumulating type EEPROM keep T246 to T249 4 points 0 001 to 32 767 sec 100ms accumulating type EEPROM keep T250 to T255 0 1 to 3 276 7 sec LEN o7 64 points 0 01 to 327 67 sec Available as analog timers Variable analog potentiometers VR1 D8030 VR2 D8031 Counter AS DIE Up CO to C15 16 points Counting from 0 to 32 767 For general 128 points or less 128 points or less 256 points or less FX3G Series Programmable Contro
515. sun 1X3 JeuiO ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 Output Wiring Procedures DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NWARN ING e Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents 1 2 Most importantly have the following an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that the output current of the 24V DC service power supply varies depending on the model and the absence presence of extension blocks If an overload occurs the voltage automatically drops inputs in the PLC are disabled and all outputs are turned off External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note th
516. supply input terminals and output terminals are shown 13 Terminal block covers Protects the upper and lower stages of the terminal block 14 Output Y terminals Wire the intended loads contactors solenoid valves etc to these terminals 15 Protective terminal covers A protective terminal cover refer to the following drawing is fitted to the lower stage of each terminal block to prevent fingers from touching terminals thereby improving the safety FX2N x ELI ES S UL FX2N 48ER UA1 UL FX2N x x ELI DS S O000000000000000 2 Side 1 Nameplate mE 2 DIN rail mounting groove 1 Nameplate The product model name control number and power supply specifications are shown 2 DIN rail mounting groove The unit can be installed on DIN46277 rail 35mm 1 38 wide 228 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 3 FX2N 32ER ES UL FX2N 48ER ES UL FX2N 48ER DS 15 3 FX2N 32ER ES UL FX2N 48ER ES UL FX2N 48ER DS oF 15 3 1 Product specifications The generic specifications are the same as those for the main unit 1 2 Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications O For external wiring refer to the following chapters E Refer to Chapter 9 for power supply wiring Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring a Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring a 1 Power supply specifications For the power supply speci
517. switch of the EEPROM memory cassette was set to ON when data was transferred to the EEPROM memory This error occurs in the execution of operation Review the program and check the contents of the operands used in applied instructions e Verify that the specified buffer memories exist in the counterpart equipment e Verify that extension cables are correctly connected Check the cable connection between the programming panel PP programming device and the PLC e Verify that extension cables are correctly connected The unit number O to 7 of the special function unit block error is put in LT 220 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting PLC operation at error occurrence Special parameter error M8489 D8489 Error code Action Contents of error 4001 Turn OFF the power and check the power supply and connection of special adapters special blocks Special parameters are set improperly Confirm troubleshooting for special adapters special o002 Special parameter setting error blocks and set special parameters correctly Set special parameters correctly turn OFF the power and Continues then turn ON the power operation Special parameters are set but special adapters special rir03 Special parameter transfer target unconnected error IOCS GONO
518. t BOO disable 4 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP Error Detection M 8060 I O configuration error D8060 M 8061 PLC hardware error D8061 M 8062 Serial communication error chO D8062 M 8063 5 6 Serial communication error 1 D8063 ch1 M8064 58068 D8065 D8069 M 8065 Syntax error D8314 D8315 D8066 D8069 M 8066 Ladder error D8314 D8315 D8067 D8069 T M 8067 Operation error D8314 D8315 D8068 M 8068 Operation error latch D8312 D8313 M 8069 8 I O bus check 5 Cleared when PLC power supply from OFF to ON 6 Serial communication error 2 ch2 PLC is detected by M8438 f Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN 8 When M8069 is ON I O bus check is executed Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M851 1 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 3E o3 o os Correspond Correspond Number and i Number and i Operation and function ing special Operation and function ing special name name device device Parallel Link FX3G 2EYT BD Parallel link BYO output M 8070 Set M8070 when using master 22 station BY1 output E Parallel link M 8118 oad M 8071 Set M8071 when using slave M 8119 3 station 3 Supported in Ver 2 20 or later MI8072 Parallel link i ON when operating RS FNC 80 and Computer Link ch1 DIO WRCR MAUTE
519. t comes with the installation manual or the User s Manual except the input output powered extension units blocks Installation manual The manuals for FX3G Series will be The part names installation procedures and available in or after September 2008 specifications are shown As for the functions and program examples refer to User s Manual Positioning Control Edition the separate User s Manual OOO Edition JY997D16801 Model FX3U U POS E FX3S FX3G Details of wiring instructions and FX3GC FX3U operations of positioning functions in FX3UC PLC main unit User s manual The procedures for wiring and installing specifications and functions are explained To use some products separate manuals may be necessary separate manual The manuals for FX3G Series will be available in or after September 2008 21 uononpoJu NO SeuJeN Hed pue seJnjee OO uononpoJu jonpoud suoneoyiods I oO seone Jeyeudueg pue uoISJ9A ues C uoneJn6ijuo SON UN SON jndinondu uonejesu OO DUUM A ddnsg Jewog ue uoneJedaJg h Buum ndu CO p FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 1 Introduction User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 1 Introduction of Manuals 1 1 3 List of manuals FX3G Series PLC main units supplied only with the hardware manual For the details of the hardware of FX3G Series refer to this manual For instructions for programming and hardware informat
520. t efie tare No voltage contact input NPN open collector transistor Input circuit insulation Photo coupler insulation Indication of input operation LED on panel lights when input AC power supply type DC power supply type Sink input wiring Sink input wiring Input circuit diagram 1 Do not connect with 24 terminals FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 6 FX2N 32ET FX2N 48ET FX2N 48ET D 3 Output specifications transistor output type Item FX2N 32ET FX2N 48ET FX2N 48ET D Output Points 16 points 24 points Connection type Removable terminal block M3 screw Output unit type Transistor sink output External power supply 5 to 30V DC Output circuit insulation Photo coupler insulation Indication of output operation Activation of the photo coupler will light the LED indicator lamp on panel 0 5A point 0 5A point The total load current per common terminal The total load current per common terminal should be the following value Resistance load should be the following value 4 output points common terminal 0 8A or 4 output points common terminal 0 8A or less less e 8 output points common terminal 1 6A or less Max load 12W 24V DC 12W 24V DC The total of inductive loads per common The total of inductive loads per common terminal should be the following value Inductive load terminal should be the following value 4 output point common terminal
521. t forced ON OFF The contact ON OFF status is highlighted when OK is pressed Numeric value begins blinking Button Operation Description ESC Returns to the test subject selection screen Disabled Disabled OK Highlights the contact ON OFF status meaning the current value can not be changed b For current value change setting value change Use the buttons to change the value as desired then press OK to register the changed value Button Operation Description Cancels the operation and returns to the test subject ESC W selection screen Reduces the value Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed reduction Increases the value Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed increase Registers the current value or the setting value and returns to On the test subject selection screen 6 After the setting operation is completed return to the test subject selection screen where the ESC button can then be pressed to return to the monitor screen 320 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 6 Monitor Test Mode 3 Output Y auxiliary relay M special auxiliary relay M state S QI Forced ON OFF operations are possible for the output Y auxiliary relay M special auxiliary relay M p state S contacts o 3 1 Perform a monitor mode operation to display the device whose ON 1 2 OFF status is to be
522. t format The Year data displays as 2 digit value with a default This can be changed to a 4 digit display by the following programming PE rov ram ossa It is also possible to set the current time with a sequence program Refer to the time setting special devices D8013 to D8019 section of the Programming Manual 327 SJojunoo wh peedg uDi e Buum nding N 10 Buum Q9 s sN snoueA I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1S9 peJeMod jindinoandu Ql sun uoisuejx3 uda syoolg UOISU9 X3 dnoandu C N yu A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 suondo pue sjun gt uoisuex3 240 OO 77 nes D lt ES o c D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 11 Keyword 19 11 Keyword Keywords registered at the PLC can be canceled from the Keyword menu When canceled all operations are enabled Registering or changing keywords is not possible at the display module The programming tool must be used in advance to register new keywords 19 11 1 Keyword types and levels Keywords can be entered in 2 ways 8 digit or 16 digit depending on the peripheral device in question Fora keyword 8 digit 2nd keyword 8 digit 16 digit input Processing is possible only with a peripheral device version compatible with the FX3G PLC e For an keyword 8 digit input only
523. t signal form No voltage contact input NPN open collector transistor 1 7 Input circuit insulation Photo coupler insulation Indication of input operation LED on panel lights when input g 4 E Oo Sink input wiring 5 Main unit co Input circuit diagram suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 251 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 3 FX2N 8ER 24V DC Sink Input Relay Output 4 Output specifications Relay output type Item FX2N 8ER Output Points 4 points Connection type Vertical terminal block M3 screws Output type Relay 30V DC or less External power supply 240V AC or less 250V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE UL or cUL standards Output circuit insulation Mechanical insulation Indication of output operation Supplying power to the relay coil will light the LED indicator lamp on panel 2A point Resistance load The total resistance load current per common should be as follows 4 output points common 8A or less Max load 80VA Inductive load For the product life refer to Subsection 14 4 3 For cautions on external wiring refer to Subsection 12 1 3 Open circuit leakage current Min load 5V DC 2mA reference values OFF ON Approx 10ms Response time ON OFF Approx 10ms T DC power Output circuit configuration supply unit 16 3
524. tact The input current of this PLC is 7mA 24V DC 5mA 24V DC in X010 or later Use input devices applicable to this minute current If no voltage contacts switches for large current are used contact failure may occur Input current 7mA 24V DC 5mA 24V DC Input number X000 to X007 X010 or more Example Products of OMRON Type Model name Type Model name Microswitch Models Z V and D2RV Operation switch Model A3P Proximity switch Model TL Photoelectric switch Model E3S 2 In the case of input device with built in series diode The voltage drop of the series diode should be approx 4V or less For example when lead switches with a series LED are used up to two switches can be connected in series Also make sure that the input current is over the input sensing level while the switches are ON source input sink input 1 In the case of a type only for sink input connect the device to the COM terminal 144 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 2 24V DC input Sink and source input type 3 In the case of input device with built in parallel resistance Use a device having a parallel resistance Rp KQ of 15kQ or more If the resistance is less than 15kQ connect a bleeder resistance Rb kQ obtained by the following formula as shown in the following figure lt ARp 15 Rp UONnOnpoJjU NO Rb kQ SOWeN ed pue seJnjee
525. tance For details on the common terminal for each model load refer to the Section 4 7 Terminal Layout Max load e 1 output point common terminal 2A or less 4 output points common terminal 8A or less Inductive SAVA load For the product life refer to Subsection 14 4 3 For cautions on external wiring refer to Subsection 12 1 4 Min load 5V DC 2mA reference value Open circuit leakage i current Response OFF gt ON Approx 10ms time ON OFF Approx 10ms Circuit insulation Mechanical insulation Display of output operation LED on panel lights when power is applied to relay coil Output circuit Load configuration suppl COMO Fuse A common number applies to the of COM 1 Each value inside indicates the number of occupied points 48 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 4 Output Specifications A 4 4 2 X Transistor output uononpoJu Transistor output specifications Item FX3G 14MT LI FX3G 24MT O FX3G 40MT O FX3G 60MT O Number of output points 6 points 8 10 points 16 16 points 24 points 2 Um Connecting type Removable terminal block M3 screw S D zS i 0 Output type form Veinsitonshs output FX3G LIMT LIS 3 Transistor source output FX3G LIMT LISS o External power supply 5 to 30V DC 0 5A point 3 The total load current of resis
526. tance loads per common terminal should be the following value Resistance For details on the common terminal for each model 39 load refer to the Section 4 7 Terminal Layout Se 1 output point common terminal 0 5A or less S 4 output points common terminal 0 8A or less S Max load 12W 24V DC The total of inductive loads per common terminal should be the following value Inductive For details on the common terminal for each model load refer to the Section 4 7 Terminal Layout 5 e 1 output point common terminal 12W or less 24V DC E 4 output points common terminal 19 2W or less 24V DC ora Open circuii leakage 0 1mA or less 30V DC e current o ON voltage 1 5 V or less Y000 Y001 5us or less 10mA or more Y000 to Y002 5us or less 10mA or more 5 OFF gt ON 5 to 24V DC 5 to 24V DC swe Y002 or more 0 2ms or less 200mA or more Y003 or more 0 2ms or less 200mA or more 2s a Response at 24V DC at 24V DC m 2 eo time Y000 Y001 5us or less 10mA or more Y000 to Y002 5us or less 10mA or more E ON OFF 5 to 24V DC 5 to 24V DC Y002 or more 0 2ms or less 200mA or more Y003 or more 0 2ms or less 200mA or more at 24V DC at 24V DC 6 Circuit insulation Photocoupler insulation SL Display of output TN 3 5 E LED on panel lights when photocoupler is driven a e S Sink output wiring Source output wiring i Output circuit S e configuration z amp DC power di supply 9 zi A common number applies A common number applies
527. tance should be 100 or less oO 2 When 24V DC external power supply is used seone Jeyeudueg pue uoISJ9A Class D gro Class D gro I nj ueisa OD uoneJn amp ijuo jndinondu The grounding resistance should be 100 or less SON HUN SON uonejeisu OO e py I D d ms co Bi O O zel lt S Q 159 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of High speed Counters User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 1 Outline 11 Use of High speed Counters 11 1 Outline High speed counters use input terminals X000 to X007 of the main unit for inputs and offer counting up to 60kHz 1 phase Input terminals not used for high speed counters are available for general purpose inputs For the input specifications for X000 to X007 of the main unit refer to Section 10 2 11 2 Types of Counting and Operations The main unit has built in 32 bit high speed bi directional counters 1 phase 1 count input 1 phase 2 count input and 2 phase 2 count input For some high speed counters external reset input terminals or external start input terminals start of counting can be selected 11 2 1 Types and input signal forms The types and input signals waveforms of high speed counters 1 phase 1 count input 1 phase 2 count input and 2 phase 2 count input are shown below Counter type Input signal form Counting direction Down count or up count is specified
528. tart Turn it to STOP and the PLC will stop SS cg RUN VR1 FEN 2 Running and stopping with general purpose input RUN terminal o c D nN p o o ES Q Operation with one switch RUN One of the input terminals X000 to X017 of the main unit can be used as a RUN input terminal bya parameter setting refer to the figure below 1 9 When the specified input terminal is turned on the PLC starts When it is turned off the PLC is started or 72 stopped depending on the state of the built in RUN STOP switch 28 S 1 X000 to X007 in 14 point type main units and X000 to X015 in 24 point type main units 5 3 For details refer to Kinds of Parameters and Settings in Programming Manual Zz s dnoandu C General purpose input terminal specified as RUN input by parameter S S xooo xoo1 xoo2 General purpose input terminal RUN specified as RUN input by parameter x Main unit source input 17 Sox 8 Operation with two switches RUN and STOP El The PLC can be started and stopped with individual RUN and STOP pushbutton switches For this operation a sequence program using M8035 to M8037 is necessary For details refer to Operations of Special Devices in Programming Manual co suondo General purpose input terminal specified as RUN input by pue shun 3X3 Jeujo General purpose input terminal specified as RUN input b
529. tative 14 7 2 24V DC input does not operate main unit and input output extension blocks 1 Input does not turn on Disconnect the external wiring and connect the S S terminal and the OV terminal or the 24V terminal Short circuit the OV terminal or 24V terminal not connected to the S S terminal and the input terminal then check the input display LED or a peripheral device to confirm that the input turns on Measures Check that the input device does not have a built in diode or parallel resistance When input turnson if So refer to Subsection 10 2 2 Measure the voltage between the OV terminal or 24V terminal not connected to the S S terminal and the input When input does not terminal with a tester to confirm that the voltage is 24V DC turn on Check the configuration of the external wiring and connected devices and the connection of the extension cables Input does not turn off Check for leakage current from input devices If the leakage current is larger than 1 5mA it is necessary to connect a bleeder resistance For details on the measures refer to Subsection 10 2 2 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 7 Troubleshooting 14 7 3 Cautions in registering keyword 1 Cautions in registering keyword The keyword limits access to the program prepared by the user from peripheral devices Keep the keyword careful
530. tem FX2N 32ER ES UL FX2N 48ER ES UL FX2N 48ER DS Output Points 16 points 24 points Connection type Removable terminal block M3 screw Output unit Relay 30V DC or less 240V AC or less 250V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE UL or cUL standards Output circuit insulation Mechanical insulation Indication of output operation Supplying power to the relay coil will light the LED indicator lamp on panel External power supply 2A point The total load current per common terminal p The total load current per common terminal should be the following value Resistance load i i should be the following value 4 output points common terminal 8A or less Max load 4 output points common terminal 8A or less 8 output points common terminal 8A or less 80VA Inductive load For the product life refer to Subsection 14 4 3 For cautions on external wiring refer to Subsection 12 1 3 Open circuit leakage current Min load 5V DC 2mA reference value OFF ON Approx 10ms Response time ON OFF Approx 10ms Output circuit configuration A common number applies to the LJ of COMU 15 3 2 External dimensions FX2N 32ER ES UL 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches d Pome T dide BERE 3 S3 S3 SS SS SSI 3 83 93 93 3 S3 83 S Il Illi OOoOoOOOOO 2 me R MITSUBISHI 186866884 o 15235557 5
531. ter 2 115 2 kbps supported interfaces j Standard built in port RS 422 or expansion board FX3G 422 BD for RS 422 T When the RS 232C RS 422 converter FX 232AWC H is connected Expansion board FX3G 232 BD for RS 232C GE Special adapter FX3U 232ADP MB for RS 232C S E 3 In programming tools not supporting 115 2 kbps Sm Communication is executed at 9 600 or 19 200 bps uonejesu OO Bui A ddng Jamod ue uonesedaid h Buum ndu CO p 59 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 2 Programming Tool Applicability 5 2 4 Cautions on connecting peripheral equipment by way of expansion board or special adapter When connecting peripheral equipment programming tool or GOT CPU direct connection by way of the FX3G 232 BD FX3G 422 BD or FX3U 232ADP MB set the connection channel CH1 or CH2 as follows If the connection channel is not specified with the status below communication error may occur in the connected peripheral equipment For details refer to the Data Communication Edition Set to KO the special data register for communication format setting of the channel connecting the peripheral equipment CH1 D8400 or D8120 CH2 D8420 Setthe communication parameter PLC system 2 of the channel connecting the peripheral equipment to Not set as shown in the window below FX Parameter Memory Capa
532. tered trademark of Schneider Electric SA Phillips is a registered trademark of Phillips Screw Company The company name and the product name to be described in this manual are the registered trademarks or trademarks of each company FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents Table of Contents SAFETY PRECAUTIONS xdacsnd eere edet RECO RE EX QUU NI ere Era tena Feu iR ia beu dS Usar RP asd eS EN I OGE UE 1 Standards 14 Cer ticalornootr UL CUL standards uode s eos cns meine eoe uad esee salu hmc pat bs e ua tt obsolete andes 14 Compliance with EC directive CE IMarKIDQ s asesas tete eua tetra cote Pear tor oat tor Terence emittere dos 14 Requirement for Compliance with EMC dire ctive ccccccccccceececeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeseaeeeeeaes 14 Requirement for Compliance with LVD dIreCtive ccccccccecccseeeceeeseeeeeeeeseeesaeeseeeesseeeeeeeaes 17 Caution for compliance with EC Directive cccccccccceccccseececeeeeeseeceteeeeeseesesseeeeseeessneeesauees 18 1 Introduction 19 T T Introduction ot Manuals taaa essc beads bd sum tuber b e CR Mu epson maaan wear ake 19 1 1 1 Classification of major components in this manual esssseseeeeeeenn 19 1 1 2 Manual organization and position of this manual sessssesssseeeeeeneenneee ens 21 Topo lk alo imag t NUAS sore de eee he ee eee ete ine a Sae Mone o E 22 1 2
533. the RS 232C expansion board or RS 232C communication special adapter Input output high speed processing functions of main unit High speed counter function Input terminals of main unit Input of open collector transistor output 1 phase 60kHz x 4 points 10kHz x 2 points 2 phase 30kHz x 2 points 5kHz x 1 points Refer to 11 Use of High speed Counters in this manual and Programming Manual Pulse catch function Signals with short ON width or OFF width can be captured without a complicated program Refer to 10 Input Wiring Procedures in this manual and Programming Manual Input terminal X000 X001 X003 X004 X002 X005 Signal ON OFF width 10us 50us Input interruption function The PLC can process interruption routines with higher priority using external signals whose minimum ON duration or OFF duration is 10us X000 X001 X003 and X004 or 50us X002 and X005 The timer interruption function is also provided Refer to 10 Input Wiring Procedures in this manual and Programming Manual Pulse width period measurement function Supported in Ver 1 10 or later The width period of pulses from input terminals X000 X001 X003 and X004 of the main unit can be measured in units of 10us Refer to 10 Input Wiring Procedures and Programming Manual 29 5 a o Q c 2 o 2 SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee OO uononpoJu jonpoud suoneoyiods I oO seone Jeyeudueg pue u
534. the battery for memory backup correctly in conformance to this manual Use the battery only for the specified purpose Connect the battery correctly Do not charge disassemble heat put in fire short circuit connect reversely weld swallow or burn the battery or apply excessive forces vibration impact drop etc to the battery Do not store or use the battery at high temperatures or expose to direct sunlight Do not expose to water bring near fire or touch liquid leakage or other contents directly Incorrect handling of the battery may cause heat excessive generation bursting ignition liquid leakage or deformation and lead to injury fire or failures and malfunctions of facilities and other equipment 0008d 0008IN sr uononajsu UJ seoi eq jeroeds STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS NCAUTION Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions Peripheral devices display module expansion boards and special adapters Extension units blocks and FX Series terminal blocks Battery and memory cassette 30 TRANSPORTATION AND 23 STORAGE PRECAUTIONS CAUTION uc D When transporting the FX3G Series PLC incorporating the optional battery turn on the PLC before shipment confirm that the battery E mode is set using a parameter and the ALM LED is OFF and check the battery life If the PLC is transp
535. the connector conversion adapter is used together and the main unit is the 14 24 point type Attach the display module to the option connector of the expansion board connector conversion adapter Attach the display module to the option connector D in the figure on the right of the expansion board connector conver sion adapter while pressing and holding the display module fixing hook C in the figure on the right as shown in the right figure arrow 4 Remove the display module while pressing and holding the display module fixing hook C in the figure on the right as shown in the right figure arrow 4 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 3 Summary of Functions 19 3 Summary of Functions QE The display module functions are summarized below Displays the time indicated by the main unit s internal real time Subsection 12 Top screen time display Button operation clock 19 4 2 O Menu screen functions B Input x 4 output Y auxiliary relay M state S timer T i Fi Monitor Test counter C data register D 16 bit 32 bit extended register R Button operation Section 19 6 ae 16 bit 32 bit and extended file register ER 16 bit 32 bit monitor test function 1 3 ErrorCheck Performs error checks and displays the results Button operation Section 19 7 T LANGUAGE T selects the menu display Selects either Japanese or En
536. the details see WIRING PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions field 2 Connect the 24V terminal of the main unit or the input output extension unit to the S S terminal of the input extension block 3 In the case of the sink input type the S S terminal is used as the 24 terminal 4 Some special function units blocks special adapter do not have the power supply terminal When using an external power supply turn it ON at the same time with the main unit or earlier than the main unit WC l l 5 6 8 Safety Precautions field Sink input type NET See eee asee aa eeeee eae 24V DC i service power supply output When turning OFF the power confirm the safety of the system and then turn OFF the power of the PLC including special extension equipment at the same time Do not connect the 24V terminals 24V DC service power supply of the main unit and the input output extension unit with each other Connect the OV terminal Some special extension units blocks do not have power terminals When using an external power supply turn it ON at the same time with the extension unit or earlier than the extension unit When turning OFF the power confirm the safety of the system and then turn OFF the power of the PLC including special extension equipment at the same time The 24V and OV terminals are located on the output terminal side For details on the terminal layout refer to Section 4
537. the product fails install appropriate backup or failsafe functions in the system When combining this product with other products please confirm the standard and the code or regulations with which the user should follow Moreover please confirm the compatibility of this product to the system machine and apparatus with which a user is using If in doubt at any stage during the installation of the product always consult a professional electrical engineer who is qualified and trained to the local and national standards If in doubt about the operation or use please consult the nearest Mitsubishi Electric representative Since the examples indicated by this manual technical bulletin catalog etc are used as a reference please use it after confirming the function and safety of the equipment and system Mitsubishi Electric will accept no responsibility for actual use of the product based on these illustrative examples This manual content specification etc may be changed without a notice for improvement The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however if you have noticed a doubtful point a doubtful error etc please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric representative Registration Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation MODBUS is a regis
538. ther Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 2 Special Adapters 18 2 9 FX3U ENET ADP o o External Dimensions Unit mm inches MASS Weight 0 1 kg 0 22 Ibs Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in 312 n width or screws O S Accessories Manual supplied with co product SE e Connector 10BASE T 100BASE TX coc RJ45 SE e 13 O e Terminal block External ground terminal 000000 M2 5 terminal block screw E eI 81 5 3 217 I Pin configuration omo 1 TD S 2 qu e 2 TD ao 3 RD 2 2 4 Notused 5 Notused 15 cO 6 RD UPE 7 Not used TZE 8 Not used 250 Qf 38 cs 2 a UJ ITI 5 o Xo 9 TE e T 58 N E U o D zy CD c xe i lt UOISU9 X3 suondo pue shun 3X3 Jeujo ainpoyy Aedsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 299 FX3G Series Prog rammable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 3 Expansion Board 18 3 Expansion Board 18 3 1 FX3G 4EX BD External Dimensions Unit mm inches e MASS Weight Approx 20g 0 05lbs Accessories Two M3x8 tapping screws for installation of board Side cover Manual supplied with product Terminal block European type 4 E SSS SS g
539. tic field 15 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Standards 16 Models from July 1st 1997 FX2N x ER ES UL Where x x indicates 32 48 FX2N 16EX ES UL FX2N 48ER DS FX2N 48ER UA1 UL FX2N 8ER ES UL FX2N 8EYT ESS UL from September 1st 2010 FX2N 8EYR S ES UL from April 1st 1998 from August 1st 1998 from August 1st 2005 For the products above PLCs manufactured FX2N 16EYR ES UL FX2N 48ET DSS FX2N 8EX ES UL MELSEC FX2N series manufactured FX2N Xx X ET ESS UL FX2N 16EYT ESS UL FX2N 8EYR ES UL before March 31st 2002 are compliant with EN50081 2 EN61000 6 4 and EN50082 2 from April 1st 2002 to April 30th 2006 are compliant with EN50081 2 EN61000 6 4 and EN61131 2 1994 A11 1996 A12 2000 after May 1st 2006 are compliant with EN61131 2 2007 Standard EN61000 6 4 2007 Generic emission standard Industrial environment EN50081 2 1993 Electromagnetic compatibility EN50082 2 1995 Electromagnetic compatibility Generic immunity standard Industrial environment EN61131 2 1994 A11 1996 A12 2000 Programmable controllers Equipment requirements and tests EN61131 2 2007 Programmable controllers Equipment requirements and tests Remark Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard Emission Enclosure port e Emission Low voltage AC mains port e Emission Telecommunications network port Compliance with all relevant aspects of the stand
540. ting 14 7 Troubleshooting For the procedures on running and stopping the PLC refer to Section 14 2 For the procedures on operating peripheral devices refer to the manuals for the peripheral devices 14 7 1 Output does not operate main unit and input output extension blocks 1 Output does not turn on Stop the PLC and forcibly turn the inoperable output on then off with a peripheral device or the display module to check its operation Check for troubles with external wiring e When the output operates The output may be turned off unintentionally in the program Reexamine the program Duplicate coil or RST instructions e When the output does not operate Check the configuration of the connected devices and the connection of the extension cables If the configuration of the external wiring and connected devices and the connection of the extension cables are acceptable the output circuit may be damaged Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Output does not turn off Stop the PLC and check that the output turns off Check for trouble with external wiring For the procedures on running and stopping the PLC refer to Section 14 2 e When the output turns off The output may be turned on unintentionally in the program Check that there are no duplicate coils in the program e When the output does not turn off The output circuit may be damaged Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric represen
541. tion 9 2 Cable Connecting Procedures In the case of M3 5 terminal screw e When one wire is connected to one terminal Terminal Crimp b 3 7 0 15 screw terminal 6 8mm 0 27 or less b 3 7 0 15 6 8mm 0 27 Terminal or less e When two wires are connected to one terminal b 3 7 0 15 6 8mm 0 27 Terminal Crimp Or E Gig screw terminal 6 0mm 0 24 or more 3 7 0 15 6 8mm 0 27 m Terminal or less I 6 0 Omm 0 24 or more 126 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 2 Cable Connecting Procedures 9 2 2 Input output connectors 1 The input output connectors of FX2N Series input output extension blocks connector type conform to MIL C 83503 Prepare the input output cables referring to the following tables Applicable products Classification Model names Input output extension blocks FX2N 16EX C FX2N 16EXL C FX2N 16EYT C Preparation of input output connectors 1 Compliant connectors commercially available connectors Use 20 pin 1 key sockets conforming to MIL C 83503 In advance make sure that no interference is caused with peripheral parts such as the connector cover 2 Input output cables our options Input output cables with attached connectors are available Single wire Wire color red FX 16E 500CAB S 5m 10 4 General purpose input output cable
542. tion for Installing Method in Enclosure 8 3 Examination for Installing Method in Enclosure Examine the installation location of PLC in consideration of the environmental conditions generic specifications 8 3 1 Installing methods The PLC can be installed by the following two methods 1 Installing on DIN rail The PLC can be installed on a DIN46277 rail 35 mm 1 38 wide The PLC can be easily moved and removed The PLC is installed higher by the height of the DIN rail For details on the procedures on mounting and removing the DIN rail refer to Section 8 4 2 Direct installing with screws he PLC can be installed directly in the enclosure with M4 screws For the mounting hole pitch refer to Section 8 5 8 3 2 Cautions on examining installing method Refer to Section 8 2 1 Cautions when FX3u A4LC or FX2N 8AD is used When the system is laid out in two stages do not mount the FX3U 4LC or FX2N 8AD at the start of the second stage or else the FX2N CNV BC cannot be secured properly 8 3 3 Examples of installation 1 Example of installation on DIN rail 1 ee 2mm 0 04 to 0 08 FX3G Series FX2N FX2N main unit 16EX 16EYT DIN rail 1 to 2mm uu iem 04 to 0 08 Extension cable FXoN 65EC FX2N CNV BC FXoN 30EC FX2N FX2N DIN rail 16EX 64CL M r indicates an M4 screw 1 FX2N CNV BC can be installed directly in the enclosure but cannot be installed on the DIN rail
543. tion of input output number 1 4 The DIN46277 rail width 35 mm 1 38 or direct installation E 252 3 Input specifications or 592 Item FX2N 16EXL C 83 Input points 16 points a Connection type Connector terminal block 1 5 Input form TTL level Nc Input signal voltage 5V DC 5 82 E Input signal current 40mA at 5V DC maximum S i e TO Input impedance 2 2kQ e aw ON input ON Low 1mA or more sensitivity current OFF High 0 4mA or less Input sensing ON Low 1 5V DC or less voltage OFF High 3 5V DC or more OFF ON 1ms 1 ms 0 5 ms Input response High Low time ON OFF 1ms 1 ms 0 5 ms Low High 1 7 Input signal form TTL input ROSE z cum Input circuit insulation Photo coupler insulation 2 0 2 Indication of input operation LED on panel lights when input x D S lt External unit oo Input circuit diagram suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 261 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 6 FX2N 16EXL C 5V DC Input 16 Points 16 6 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement When an input X number is assigned 8 points on side A will be used for the lower input numbers and 8 points on side B will be used for the higher input numbers Side Side Xo 1 74 XO With cover Without cover Input indicator lamps LED lamps Connector type ooa cono O
544. tment Maintenance and Troubleshooting 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes PLC Error operation code at error occurrence Contents of error Operation error M8067 D8067 6757 6758 6759 6760 6762 Continues operation 6763 6764 6765 6770 6772 lt Limit cycle method gt Auto tuning result exceeds proportional gain KP outside range from 0 to 32767 lt Limit cycle method gt Auto tuning result exceeds integral time TI outside range from 0 to 32767 lt Limit cycle method gt Auto tuning result exceeds derivative time TD outside range from 0 to 32767 ABS data read from servo sum check error Port specified by inverter communication instruction is already used in another communication Input X specified by DSZR or ZRN instruction is already used in another instruction Pulse output number is already used in a_ positioning instruction or pulse output instruction PLSY PWM etc Number of applied instruction exceeds limit Memory access error EEPROM memory cassette is protected against writing Special block error M8449 D8449 1020 1021 r1022 1025 1026 Continues operation 1080 1090 ea Verify that extension cables are correctly connected Message error in other station via CC Link FROM TO error Peripheral equipment access error Action Auto tuning is finished KP 32767
545. to Section 19 7 for the error check procedure If a program error is active The fatal error was probably activated due to a program error Use the programming tool to correct the program Refer to Section 14 6 for error codes and corrective actions Refer to Subsection 14 5 3 for watchdog timer error corrective actions If no program error is active There may be a problem with the PLC s memory content Perform the following procedure 1 Use the programming tool to perform a program memory all clear 2 Rewrite the program 3 Stop the PLC turn the power ON display the Error Check screen and check to refer to if the Fatal error occurred message appears Ifthe Fatal error occurred message appears perform the corrective action described at item 2 below Ifthe Fatal error occurred message does not appear set the PLC to a RUN state then check again if the message appears If the message appears a watchdog timer error has probably occurred In this case the program should be re examined Refer to Subsection 14 5 3 for watchdog timer error corrective actions If the Fatal error occurred message still appears after performing the corrective actions described in item 1 above perform the following procedure to check for symptom changes Turn the power OFF and disconnect all extension devices extension connectors extension cables and expansion board connectors Turn the power ON again at the main unit di
546. to display the selection screen shown at right To cancel the operation and return to the top screen time display press ESC Use the buttons to move the cursor to the Clock setting item To cancel the operation and return to the menu screen press ESC Press the OK button to display the Clock setting screen To cancel the operation and return to the selection screen press ESC Use the buttons to change the blinking data as desired then press OK to register the change Settings are performed in the following sequence Year Month gt Day Hours Minutes Seconds After pressing OK to register the final seconds setting a Current time is set message is displayed completing the current time setting procedure Button Operation Description Returns to the previous setting item ESC Returns to the selection screen when at the Year item Year is blinking position Reduces the value Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed reduction Increases the value Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed increase Proceeds to the next setting item OK Current time is set message displays if pressed at the Seconds item Seconds is blinking Press OK or ESC to return to the selection screen Press ESC to return to the menu screen aM EOD LUE p E Log od boda Current timer A9 0 d o og t bt bt o d dg d d V Clock setting Current
547. to the of COM to the J of V a S 1 Each value inside indicates the number of occupied points zin TE as 2 oz 3s 3 Ei E 49 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 5 Performance Specifications 4 5 Performance Specifications 50 The main unit performance specifications are explained below Item Performance Operation control system Stored program repetitive operation system with interruption function Batch processing system when END instruction is executed pub Outpubconbobeyetem Input output refresh instruction and pulse catch function are provided Programming language Relay symbol system step ladder system SFC notation possible 32000 step EEPROM memory Max allowable write 20 000 times 32000 step EEPROM memory with loader function Max allowable write 10 000 times Max memory capacity type Memory cassette Option Program memory Writing function during Provided Program can be modified while the PLC is running running For the writing function during running refer to Subsection 5 2 5 Keyword function With keyword Customer keyword function Built in Real time clock Clock function 1980 to 2079 with correction for leap year 2 or 4 digit year accuracy within 45 seconds month at 25 C Sequence instructions 29 Kinds of Sasic INStrucHong Step ladder in
548. tput change E Cycle or set a larger value for the input filter constant After changing the setting execute auto tuning again 6753 Limit cycle method 1 T Auto tuning operation direction mismatch Auto tuning is forcibly finished PID operation is not Limit cycle method started SSG 6754 Abnormal PV threshold hysteresis set value for auto tuning Check whether the target setting contents are correct x D SHPV lt 0 5 5 lt Limit cycle method gt Auto tuning is forcibly finished PID operation is not x 6755 Abnormal auto tuning transfer status started Data of device controlling transfer status is abnormally Ensure that devices occupied by PID instruction are not overwritten overwritten in the program co Auto tuning is forcibly finished PID operation is not started The auto tuning time is longer than necessary Increase the difference ULV LLV between the upper limit and lower limit of the output value for auto tuning set a smaller value to the input filter constant a or set a smaller value to the PV threshold SHPV for auto tuning and then 1 check the result for improvement suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO Limit cycle method 6756 Abnormal result due to excessive auto tuning measurement time ton gt t ton 0 t O ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisua yoojg euw CO 219 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 Test Operation Adjus
549. ts User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 1 Generic Specifications 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units This Chapter explains the specifications external dimensions and terminal layout of the main units For the specifications for the input output powered extension units refer to Chapter 15 For the specifications for the input output extension blocks refer to Chapter 16 4 1 Generic Specifications Item Specifications Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C 32 to 131 F when operating and 25 to 75 C 13 to 167 F when stored Ambient humidity 5 to 95 RH no condensation when operating Frequency Hz Acceleration m s Half amplitude mm When installed on 10 19 97 ENSE en des Sweep Count for sos 98 jJ 147m s Acceleration Action time 11ms 3 times by half sine pulse in each direction X Y and Z Shock resistance Noise resistance By noise simulator at noise voltage of 1 000Vp p noise width of 1us rise time of 1ns and period of 30 to 100Hz Dielectric withstand 1 0kV AC for one minute voltage 900V AC for one minute Between each terminals and ground terminal Insulation resistance 5MQ or more by 500V DC megger Grondin Class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less Common grounding with a heavy electrical system is not allowed Working atmosphere Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dust Working altitude lt 2000m 4 1
550. ttery REDIAGCIN GM iia e 388 22 6 Battery Related Precautions cccccccccscecseseeceeeeceneecseseecseseecsueeeceueessseeceueesseseessaeeseaeeeessaees 388 Appendix A Special Device List 389 Appendix A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 cece ceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeens 389 Appendix A 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 esee 396 Appendix A 3 Analog expansion boards M8260 to M8279 and D8260 to D8279 403 Appendix A 3 1 Special auxiliary relays M8260 to M8279 cccccccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeeeeeaas 403 Appendix A 3 2 Special data registers D8260 to D8279 ec cecccccseeeceeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaas 404 Appendix A 4 Analog special adapters M8280 to M8299 and D8280 to D8299 405 Appendix A 4 1 Special auxiliary relays M8280 to M8299 ccccceccsseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaas 405 Appendix A 4 2 Special data registers D8280 to D8299 ec eccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeseeeeaeaeeeeseeeeeeeeaas 407 Appendix B Instruction List 409 Appendix B 1 Basic Instructions cccccccccesccseeeceeseceeeeeseeeceaeeesaueeeegeeseueeseseesseeseeeeseeeesaeeess 409 Appendix B 2 Step Ladder Instructions cccccccceeccesceceeeceeecaeeceseceueceueecuecseeecaeesueeseeesnans 409 Appendix B 3 Applied Instructions in Ascending Order of FNC Nu
551. ture due to load short circuiting 2 represents vacant terminals WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not wire the vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product 182 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 3 External Wiring for Triac SSR Output Type 12 3 External Wiring for Triac SSR Output Type This section explains the procedures for handling triac output and external wiring here are not triac output type of main units Select from the input output powered extension units blocks Forthe triac output specifications refer to the following For the specifications on the input output powered extension unit refer to Chapter 15 For the specifications on the input output extension block refer to Chapter 16 12 3 1 Handling of triac output 1 Output terminals On the triac output type units blocks one common terminal is used for 8 points Therefore the common terminal blocks can drive loads of different circuit voltage systems for example 100V AC and 200V AC Example FX2N 16EYS 2 Circuit insulation The PLC internal circuit and the output element triac are insulated with a photo thyristor The common terminal blocks are separate from one another 3 Display of operation When the photo thyristor is driven the LED is lit and the output triac is turned on 4 Response time The time from when the photo th
552. uctions when using the following products e FX3U 16CCL M CC Link master Only one FX3U 16CCL M unit can be connected to a single PLC main unit This master cannot be used together with FX2N 16CCL M FX2N 16CCL M CC Link master When more than one master station is connected a remote I O station cannot be connected to the 2nd and following master stations This master cannot be used together with FX3u 16CCL M e FX3U 64CCL Only one FX3U 64CCL unit can be connected to a single PLC main unit FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 3 Number of Input Output Points and Maximum Number of Input Output Points Calculate the total number of input output points UOnOnpoJjU Total the number of points counted in Steps 1 2 and 3 and check that it does not exceed 128 points maximum number of input output points Maximum number of Number of input output points Number of input output occupied input output points points 128 points A C E units x 8 points Maximum number of gt Each special function unit block used for FROM TO instructions points controllable on N SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee OO system Total number of input output points of input occupies eight input or output v output powered extension units and input output points aS extension blocks cS A Number of input output points of main unit D Number of remote I O points of
553. udo ru co tecta ten b ds 39 3 1 10 Extension cables and connector conversion adapter Battery Memory cassettes 39 3 1 11 FX Series terminal blocks cables and connectors ccccecseeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeesaeeeeeeesaeeeeeesseeeeeeeaas 40 SAA Reme O M TD 40 OTS T20Wer SUDDIV UM Teasa a a a a a aa a 40 3 2 Connector Types and Cables for Program COMMUNICATION ccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseaeeeeeeas 41 S22 Mt te FOAMING LOOM sax axle sores cR 42 3 22 COMMUMIGALION Cables iesitot Vic ntc t esie enu uisu Ue detains ao Eaa ede tele 42 3 23 GONVENMETS and Interface ueque a cate so estu as este Se V etae demuvi Sates ea owned Ane reet Ue Nerei 42 3 2 4 The accessing path to the FX3G from CC LINK essesssssssssseseeseeen nennen 43 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units 44 4 1 Genee S DECIICALONS eT OTT DETENER 44 4 1 1 Dielectric withstand voltage test and insulation resistance test ssseeeeeeeeeeeeessss 45 42 Power Supply SpecillCdllOfis seuc eb e E eiie etui eet ere baute aper ede Secale 46 42 AAG POWEPr SUDDIY TYPE ccs eee eal tite tame Sd beta tere ta Rave pM M DUE DC 46 4 2 2 DC Power SUD DIY DVD xcd ac RE States ab eh ier senate tue eae cues eUabo aeo uuu i pz wads an EAD Lar ee 46 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents 4 9 Inpat SDOCHICSIDIS scies ed isnt
554. uit for load short circuits A short circuit at a load connected to an output terminal could cause burnout at the output element or the PCB 1 2 To prevent this a protection fuse should be inserted at the output Use a load power supply capacity that is at least 2 2 times larger than the total rated fuse capacity E 2 Transistor protection circuit for inductive loads nducive The transistor output circuit in the terminal block is load 13 equipped with a Zener diode 50V for protection Fusell lt lt When an inductive load is connected however a diode a should be connected parallel to the load when required as The diode must comply with the specifications shown D below Terminal block Reverse voltage 5 to 10 times of the load voltage I Forward current Load current or more EESTI 252 3 Interlock 228 Og For loads such as forward reverse contactors etc where ERU 8 3 a hazardous condition could result if switched ON limit Interlock a simultaneously an external interlock should be provided f Forward 15 for interlocking the PLC s internal programs as shown to the right a Reverse U ga Reverse PLC output 25S limit element S22 5 8 cs a SKS aoe n T 58 N yu A ddng Jewog UOISUSX3 oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO D ES un O gt UJ 62 nor D lt o D yoojg jeuiuJe 371 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s
555. um OO Ses snoueA I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1S9 peJeMod adnoandu OQ spun uoisuejx3 uda 490 UOISU9 X3 jnd noandu C N yun A ddng Jamod UOISUS X3 suondo pue sjun gt uoisuex3 240 OQO 77 nes D lt ES o c D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM 19 6 Monitor Test Mode 318 4 Counter C 1 2 3 4 9 6 d Display Content Device No Contact image ON E OFF Blank Reset image ON E OFF Blank Count direction display UP count H DOWN count Blank 32 bit up down counter and high speed counter only Current value Setting value When not using it in a program a setting value is displayed as 5 Input X Output Y Auxiliary Relay M State S 1 2 Display Content Device No at beginning of line Input X and output Y 8 points per line Auxiliary relay M special auxiliary relay M and state S 10 points per line ON OFF status ON Last digit of device No OFF 5 6 1 2 1 2 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 6 Monitor Test Mode 19 6 4 Test mode operation There are 3 types of test mode operations depending on the device type The 3 operations are explained below
556. umber The DIN46277 rail width 35 mm 1 38 or direct installation 3 Output specifications Transistor output type FX2N 8EYT H 8 points Vertical terminal block M3 screws Transistor sink output 5 to 30V DC Photo coupler insulation Activation of the photo coupler will light the LED indicator lamp on panel 1A point The total load current per common should be as follows 4 output points common 2A or less 24W 24V DC The total of inductive loads per common terminal should be the following value 4 output point common terminal 48W or less 24V DC 0 1mA 30V DC 0 2ms or less 1A 0 4ms or less 1A supply unit FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 Input Output Extension Blocks 16 12 EX2N 8EYT H Transistor Output 16 12 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement With cover Without cover EE Sits FX2n 8EYT H power Output ora 566 indicator 6566 lamps LED lamps Rear line extension connector 16 12 3 External dimensions 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches FX2N 8EYT H CD POWER O0UT0 1 2 3 OOOO 90 3 55 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch 281 SJojunoo wh peedg uDi e Buum nding N 10 buum OO Ses snoueA I mcer Oo amp Dn es Sy TE EN 090 2 erg O O S d Q mM US Aou O c 2oc 2 oO Ooc 2 S a op 17 yu A ddng Jamod UOISUS XF
557. umber of Number of points occupied number of remote I O stations x 32 points uiid input output points by special function blocks The number is multiplied by 32 points controllable on tem regardless of the number of remote I O ed points For details refer to Subsection 6 3 1 A Number of input output points of main unit D Number of remote I O points of FX2N 64CL M B Number of input output points of input output E Number of input output points occupied by special function blocks powered extension units F Number of remote I O stations units connected to CC Link C Number of input output points of input output master extension blocks 1 The number of CC Link points is calculated by the formula 32 points x number of stations even when remote I O stations having less than 32 points are used For details refer to the manual of the CC Link master block used 2 Procedures for calculating number of input output points based on example of system configuration For the main unit input output powered extension units blocks and CC Link remote I O stations the number of input output points and the total number of points are restricted X000 to X027 X030 to X047 X050 to X067 X070 to X077 Input output Input Input Main unit powered extension extension extension unit block block Special function block FU T6CCL M th YO0OO to YO17 Y020 to YO37 24 16 40 16 16 32 16 0 16 8 0 8 points 8 points 8
558. unters pepe of program For C246 While X012 is on C246 increments the value when the input X011 s terminal X000 switches from OFF to ON and decrements the value when the input terminal X001 switches from OFF to ON I 68 D2 D3 The down count up count operations of C246 to C250 can be monitored through the ON OFF operations of M8246 to M8250 The setting is D3 D2 ON Bown counting Up counting Down counting OFF Up counting input input Main unit 2 For C249 X011 E EET e While X012 is on C249 starts counting immediately when the callie see RST C249 input terminal X006 turns on M The up counting input terminal is X000 and the down X012 K1234 counting input terminal is X001 C249 can be reset on the sequence by X011 For C249 X002 is allocated as reset input When X002 turns Down counting External start TP input input on C249 is immediately reset aera in im e The down count up count operations of C246 to C250 can be Ms Tees e monitored through the ON OFF operations of M8246 to M8250 9299 Main unit ON Down counting OFF Up counting 164 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of High speed Counters User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 5 Handling of High speed Counters 11 5 3 2 phase 2 count input These counters are 32 bit up count down count binary counters The operations of the output contact according to the current value are the same as those of the above mentioned 1 p
559. uononpoJu PLCs 2 FX3G Series Generic name for FX3G Series PLCs na FX3U Series Generic name for FX3U Series PLCs am FX2N Series Generic name for FX2N Series PLCs Sg FX3G PLCs or main units Abbreviation of FX3G Series PLC main units P zi Expansion boards Generic name for the following models FX3G AEX BD FX3G 2bEYT BD FX3G 232 BD FX3G 422 BD FX3G 485 BD FX3G 485 BD RJ FX3G 2AD BD FX3G 1DA BD FX3G 8AV BD OO Special adapters Generic name for communication special adapters and analog special adapters 2 3 Communication special Generic name for the following models amp 3 adapters FX3U 232ADP MB FX3U 485ADP MB FX3U ENET ADP Generic name for the following models 7 Analog special adapters FX3U 4AD ADP FX3U 4DA ADP FX3U 3A ADP FX3U 4AD PT ADP FX3U 4AD PTW ADP FX3U 4AD PNK ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 Extension devices Generic name for FX3U Series special function blocks FX2N Series extension devices o EXON Seres ensionidadices Generic name for FX2N Series input output powered extension units FX2N Series input output E extension blocks and FX2N Series special function blocks Generic name for FX2N Series input output powered extension units FX2N Series input output Input output extension devices 5 extension blocks o FX2N Series input output powered extension units Generic name for the following models FX2N 32ER ES UL FX2N 32ER FX2N 32bES FX2N 32bET ESS UL FX2N 32ET FX2N 48ER FX2N 48ER ES UL FX2N 48ET FX2N 48ET
560. upplied to the power supply terminal One of the following problems may have occurred Power of the specified voltage and current is Flashing not being supplied to the power supply terminal External wiring is incorrect Internal error of PLC Check the supply voltage e After disconnecting the cables other than the power cable re apply power to the PLC and check for changes in the state If the problem persists consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative One of the following problems may have Ifthe power is not off check the power supply and the power supply occurred route The power supply is off If power is being supplied correctly consult your local Mitsubishi Off External wiring is incorrect Electric representative Power of the specified voltage is not being After disconnecting the cables other than the power cable re apply supplied to the power supply terminal power to the PLC and check for changes in the state If the problem The power cable is broken persists consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative 14 5 2 ALM LED on off This LED is valid when the optional battery is installed and the battery mode is selected using a parameter State of LED State of PLC Remedies On The battery voltage is low Immediately replace the battery Refer to Section 22 5 Off The battery voltage is higher than the value set with D8006 Moma For details on the battery refer to Ch
561. upply Typel 149 10 2 6 Examples of external wiring source input DC Power Supply Type 151 sO PS mis OTOL dey A Ge a 00 eet PC Hmc 152 10 9 1 Input SDEClTICallOLiS lt aeres att dene sexe soasoec ese eto ande due tenete Re crate cee seaaanebeaus and eros 152 10 3 Z2 Handling of 100V AC Inpul iine ee em a Pe oe ba ee ae 152 10 3 3 Examples of external wiring 100V AC input ssssesssseeseeeeeennennnn nnn 153 104 driput Interruppon lOO to SOLU soi ses ccd sea Dae e e a oed hn etta a Cama p Eois 154 10 4 1 Allocation of pointers to input numbers input signal ON OFF duration 154 10 4 2 Cautions for input interruption 3 25 cnn ott Ene qao ande Yee ege etu ated en to ade Eve pR odere seats tox eee txu cus 154 10 4 3 Examples of external WIFIDg usc ou rore pee Eri eas ee n ico banca ecu Un adeb vr tr ast ades 155 10 5 Pulse Catch M8170 to M8175 i incite est edc etri RE EE o Eti adc A Onda ud IEE 156 10 5 1 Allocation of special memories to input numbers ON duration of input signals 156 10 5 2 Caullons Tr PUSE Cal Dr ie oderat uo bee ctun ioi ebat Oen nated nu cu oua obe bes cusu de uec cu Een dc aeu 156 10 5 3 Examples of exteralWwIPIDO ses sec ce cheek cece baut ur eec qoe t ax ipe rd ee epa cue eee es is iste cosi eaae tend 157 10 6 Pulse width Pulse period measurement function S
562. upply for load Lc YO PS connected to PLC output 0 E YT For details on emergency stop operation refer to DESIGN oo PRECAUTIONS at Safety S9s9 Precautions field d ax D 1 The output circuit of this PLC does not have a built in fuse d Provide a fuse suitable to each load to prevent blowout of the wires on the circuit board caused by Ei output element fracture due to load short circuiting 1 9 2 represents vacant terminals UJ 2 WIRING PRECAUTIONS N S CAUTION 3 Do not wire the vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product 2 yoojg euw CO 181 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 2 External Wiring of Transistor Output Sink Source Type 2 Transistor output Source AC power supply 100 to 240V Main unit transistor output S source Breaker Power ON Emergency Output extension block transistor output um Bu supply Y7 source Input output powered extension unit transistor output source Power supply for load ie connected PLC output 0d LE For details on emergency stop operation refer to DESIGN Load PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions field 1 The output circuit of this PLC does not have a built in fuse Provide a fuse suitable to each load to prevent blowout of the wires on the circuit board caused by output element frac
563. upported in Ver 1 10 or later 158 10 6 1 Allocation of special memories to input numbers cccceccccceeceeceeeeeceeeceaeceseaeeeeseeseeseeeeesanes 158 10 6 2 Cautions for pulse width period measurement FUNCTION cccecceceeeeceeeeeeeeteseeeaneeeeeeeeaeeeens 158 10 6 3 Examples of external WIring cccccccccceseeccceeesececceuseceecceeeeecsesesecseaeeeessaeeeessaeesessseuneeeeseseas 159 11 Use of High speed Counters 160 QUEEN GITE TTE ETE 160 11 2 Types of Counting and Operations ccccccescccccsseeecceeseeceeeeeeeceessecsegeeesseeeessageeessageeessesseeeees 160 TAZA types and input signal TOMMS esmori elut be bonus adr eldest 160 11 2 2 High speed counter device notations sse nennen nnn nnns 160 11 2 3 Cautions in connecting mating device eeessssssessssseeeeeeen eene 160 11 3 List of Device Numbers and Functions seesssssssesssseeeeeennnenn ener nans 161 11 4 Allocation of Device Numbers to Input Numbers seesssesssseeenneeennennenennnn nnns 162 11 41 AllOCATION TADIC us iocos eoi Eoi venu aoe dU Go Set i esd eed Bade eI Kos 162 11 4 2 Restriction of redundant use of input numbers ssessssssssseseseeeee nennen 162 11 5 Handling of High Speed Counters sess 163 11 5 1 Tsphase Count ID DUE s oen eec adeo pe rb oup opo aoi et cease eens wet Doa es Do dero d 163
564. ure N uny 1S9 pejowog adnoandu OQ spun uoisuejx3 uda 490 UOISU9 X3 jnd noandu C oh j yun A ddns Jewog UOISUS X3 co suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of High speed Counters User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 8 Examples of External Wiring Rotary Encoder 11 8 Examples of External Wiring Rotary Encoder 11 8 1 1 phase 1 input C235 to C245 168 The following examples of wiring apply to the cases where C235 is used When another high speed counter number is used wire the counter referring to the following diagrams It is recommended to use shielded twisted pair cables for connection cables Ground the shield of each shielded cable only on the PLC side 1 NPN open collector transistor output rotary encoder In the case of sink wiring Rotary encoder Class D grounding The grounding resistance should be 100 or less 2 PNP open collector transistor output rotary encoder In the case of source wiring Rotary encoder The grounding resistance should be 100 or less FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of High speed Counters User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 8 Examples of External Wiring Rotary Encoder 11 8 2 2 phase 2 input C251 to C255 SJejuno2 peeds u amp iH The following examples of wiring apply to the cases where C251 is u
565. urrent per common should be as follows Max load 8 output points common 0 8A or less 15VA 100V AC 30VA 200V AC Open circuit leakage current 1mA 100V AC 2mA 200V AC Min load 0 4VA 100V AC 1 6VA 200V AC OFF gt ON 1ms or less Response time ON OFF 10ms or less Output circuit configuration A common number applies to the L of COML 282 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 13 FX2N 16EYS Triac Output 16 Points 16 13 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement QI When an output Y number is assigned 8 points on the upper side will be used for the lower output numbers CE and 8 points on the lower side will be used for the higher output numbers With cover Without cover 1 2 ago Output indicator g E E lamps 3 m amp LED lamps j 3 S F B Rear line E a 2 extension Lower E connector i numbers B SE 13 19 Output indicator ls RA o o ig lamps eB sz E LED lamps SOE ea 52 P Z l Higher 14 N numbers TE Oo MEL O 2 25 7 2 16 13 3 External dimensions OS 228 gag c amp 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches zl FXan 16EYS 90 3 55 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch 17 CC U m 530x Eo 40 1 58 S gp NO C y TO oO lt co suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 283 FX3G Series Programma
566. use damage to the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit and extension units with a 1 2 wire 2 mm or thicker O Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems refer to section 9 3 Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product Connect the AC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual ae If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits c Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions a Make sure to properly wire the FX3G Series main unit and FX2N FX3U Series extension equipment in accordance with the following o precautions GS D 62 Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 s
567. use of sink source inputs It is possible to set all input terminals X of the main unit to either sink input or source input mode However a mixture of sink and source input terminals cannot be set within a single unit Itis possible to set sink or source input mode for main units and powered input output extension units The input mode of input output extension blocks is determined based upon the selection of the sink or source input mode of the main unit or powered extension unit power source e Cautions when selecting a model Sink source input type and sink input type only unit models are both available Select the proper type for the application Differences from FX1N PLCs in input specifications reference Sink input type only FX1N PLCs manuals in Japanese are supplied and sink source input type FX1N PLCs manuals in English are supplied have different model names Forsink input type only FX1N PLCs the S S terminal and the 24V terminal are connected internally unlike in FX3G PLCs When replacing a sink input type only FX1N PLC with a FX3G PLC short circuit the S S and 24V terminals and use the OV terminal of the FX3G as the COM terminal of the FX1N for wiring e Sink source input type FX1N PLCs are configured in sink or source input mode using external wiring in the same way as FX3G PLCs 142 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 2 24V DC input Sink an
568. ut Current consumed mA No Type occupied output points 5V DC Internal 24V DC External 24V DC FX2N 2AD ae pau 8 9 poor 8 3 9 59 pae 8 9 M M p FX2N 2DA pmw 8 1 5 9 pac 8 3 9 59 pmac 8s 8 9 8 Base E E mL s 1 The following number of points is added according to the products connected to the network Number of remote I O stations x 32 points 2 The following number of points is added according to the products connected to the network Total number of input output points of remote I O stations 3 When analog special function blocks FX2N 2AD and FX2N 2DA are connected to an input output powered extension unit FX2N 32bEL or FX2N 48EL the following limitation must be taken into consideration When the blocks are connected to the main unit this limitation is not applied The total current consumption of the analog special function blocks FX2N 2AD and FX2N 2DA should be less than the following current values Total current consumption of blocks connected to FX2N 32ELI 190 mA or less Total current consumption of blocks connected to FX2N A8ELI 300 mA or less 6 8 4 D Extension Power Supply Unit D Number of input Current consumed mA No Type occupied output points 5V DC power supply Internal 24V DC 1 The ambient temperature restricts the output current For details refer to the derating curve in Section 6 7 90
569. ut output powered extension unit 8 6 9 This subsection explains the procedures for connecting an input output powered extension unit Remove the top cover A in the right figure on the left side of the input output powered extension unit Connect the connector of the provided extension cable B in the right figure to the extension connector of the unit block on the upstream side left side Connect the connector of the extension cable supplied B in the right figure to the extension connector of the input output powered extension unit to be added Fit the top cover A in the right figure Connecting method H connection of extension block to input output powered extension unit 120 This subsection explains the procedures for connecting an extension block to an input output powered extension unit Remove the extension connector cover A in the right figure on the right side of the input output powered extension unit ASS NS qd 0 0 0h y o QN v 3 Connect the extension cable B in the right figure from the extension block to be added right side to the extension connector of the input output powered extension unit iN NSSNNNSNSSS SSSSSSSSSN e When connecting FX3U 1PSU 5V read input output powered extension unit as the unit When connecting FX2N Series input output powered extension unit FX3U 1PSU 5V connect the unit to be added right side and the
570. utput 20 5 1 Internal circuit LILO to LILI7 Lower Nos A AO to A A7 Higher Nos AA AA2 AA4 AAG AA 443 AA5 AA7 su sos las COM A 7 18 8 007 p AA6 17 7 006 ts Fo 15 5 nod AA 3 14 4 003 E 142 15 ri AA 1 12 2 01 CUm ap see ea ese LIU 0 to OO7 Lower Nos A A0 to A A7 Higher Nos 1 24 when connected to FX2N 16EX C 2 e when connected to FX2N 16EX C FX 32bE TB FX 16E TB 361 SJojunoo wh peedg uDi e Buum indino N 10 Buum OO Ses snoueA I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1S9 peJeMod adnoandu OQ spun uoisuejx3 uda 490 UOISU9 X3 jdnoandu C Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 co suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO D o o gt wn o sad lt o Q E D yoo g jeuiuJe FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 5 FX 16E TB FX 32b TB 20 5 2 Example of input external wiring WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product 1 When connected to an FX2N 16EX C sink input input extension block LIL1O to LIL17 Lower Nos A AO to A A7 Higher Nos Input numbers in the FX2N 16EX C 001 003 005 oof AA1 AA3 AAS AA 24 O00 002 004 006 AAO AA2 AA4 AAG Jara EE ra TES 24V DC 20 5 3 Output external wiring WIRING PRE
571. uw CO 267 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 8 FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX2N 8EYR S ES UL FX2N 16EYR ES UL Relay Output FX2N 16EYR ES UL When an output Y number is assigned 8 points on the upper side will be used for the lower output numbers and 8 points on the lower side will be used for the higher output numbers With cover Without cover Output indicator 2 lamps s Em 8 SE LED lamps um Ei aS E Rear line E E extension Lower E connector en numbers A Se En ig Output indicator 3s EIS e lamps zea 3 LED lamps SOE O Higher lt numbers Z o Er e 268 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 8 EX2N 8EYR ES UL FX2N 8EYR S ES UL FX2N 16EYR ES UL Relay Output 16 8 3 External dimensions SF FX2N 8EYR ES UL 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches 1 2 9 C z 2 FX2N 8EYR ES Es c CD POWER s TE a ERRI 2 Dm S 5886 OS S CO o 13 O z og cS P I FX2N 8EYR S ES UL En SDD Sas l D 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches Bs 5 88 p c Q g S 15 mo O wee mS OD O c O 292 2 0Q FX2N 8EYR S oc Cag 3 S 5 5 r E zi 9 0 36 40 1 58 87 3 43 FX2N 16EYR ES UL 2 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches 1 j yu A ddng Jamod UOISUS XF 8
572. version to Floating Point High Speed Processing 50 REF Refresh T 52 Input Matrix 53 High Speed Counter Set 54 High Speed Counter Reset 55 HSZ High Speed Counter Zone Compare 56 SPD Speed Detection 57 PLSY Pulse Y Output 58 PWM Pulse Width Modulation 59 Acceleration Deceleration Setup Handy Instruction 60 Initial State 61 Search a Data Stack 62 Absolute Drum Sequencer 63 Incremental Drum Sequencer RO a 66 Alternate State 67 Ramp Variable Value a NH NN External FX I O Device o f o n 72 Digital Switch Thumbwheel Input B 74 Seven Segment With Latch B m m 78 Read From A Special Function Block 79 Write To A Special Function Block FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix B Instruction List Appendix B 3 Applied Instructions in Ascending Order of FNC Number FNC No External FX Device Function 80 Serial Communication 81 Parallel Run Octal Mode 82 Hexadecimal to ASCII Conversion 83 HEX ASCII to Hexadecimal Conversion 84 Check Code 85 Volume read 86 Volume scale 87 RS2 Serial Communication 2 88 PD PID Control Loop oT Floating Point 110 Floating Point Compare 112 Floating Point Move 113 to EN 119 120 Floating Point Addition 121 Floating Point Subtraction 122 Floating Point Multiplication 123 Floating Point Division 127 Floating Point Square Root 129 INT Floating Point to Integer Conversio
573. wer supply type main unit varies depending on used extension blocks as described below When connecting only the input output extension block Input output extension blocks of up to 32 points can be connected However when the extension power supply unit FX3U 1PSU 5V is used and the main unit is the nearest upstream unit to the extension power supply unit make sure that the number of points including the input extension block including the FX2N 8ER ES UL and FX2N 8ER extended to the extension power supply unit does not exceed 32 2 When connecting the input output extension block and special function block Input output extension blocks of up to 16 points can be connected However when the extension power supply unit FX3u 1PSU 5V is used and the main unit is the nearest upstream unit to the extension power supply unit make sure that the number of points including the input extension block including the FX2N 8ER ES UL and FX2N 8ER extended to the extension power supply unit does not exceed 16 Only 1 special function block can be connected 3 When connecting only the special function block Up to 2 special function blocks can be connected When extension of the above points 1 to 3 is carried out and further extension is required determine whether extension is possible using one of the following methods Using the 24V DC service power supply 400mA of the main unit Using an input output powered extension unit Using
574. wing quick reference matrix the value at the intersection of the number of input points to be added horizontal axis with the number of output points to be added vertical axis indicates the remaining power supply capacity Select the input output extension block number of points to be connected to the main unit Check that the number of input output points can be added When connecting the FX3u 1PSU 5V extension power supply unit to a system where the nearest T upstream unit to the FX3u 1PSU 5V is an input output powered extension unit include the current Ss consumption by the input extension blocks including FX2N 8ER ES UL and FX2N 8bER connected m to the FX3u 1PSU 5V when calculating the total current consumption of the input output powered Bg extension unit Bo 1 AC power supply DC input type 1 FX2N 32ER FX2N 32ET FX2N 32ES FX2N 32ER ES UL FX2N 32ET ESS UL AC power supply Output DC input type 24 Example uonejesu OO s 0 FX2N 32ED 2 16 100 50 o c 2 O 4 2 epus vni rs 5 RF O 250 200kg 100 50 PI 0 16 24 32 gm E ums of added points Example When a 16 input and O output point extension block is connected to FX2N 32ER ES UL the 1 0 current of the 24V DC service power supply becomes 150mA or less E E 81 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 6 Expansion of FX2N Series I O Powered Extension Unit
575. wn in the quick reference matrix This remaining power supply capacity current can be used as a power supply for external loads such as sensors special adapters and special function blocks by the user For the current capacity of a special adapter refer to the manual for each special adapter For the current capacity of a special function block refer to Subsection 6 8 3 If itis not possible to connect input output extension blocks even using the 24V DC service power supply of the main unit consider adding an input output powered extension unit to the system Refer to 6 6 Expansion of FX2N Series I O Powered Extension Unit FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 5 Expansion of Main Unit 6 5 2 Selection example 1 using the 24V DC service power supply of the main unit This subsection explains an example in which 8 input points and 16 output points are added to the following system configuration using the 24V DC service power supply of the main unit UONnOnpoJjU Example of configuration NO Input extension Special function Output extension Output extension Input extension Main unit block block block block block 8 points FX3U 64CCL 8 points 16 points 8 points SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee Range extendible to main unit l Extension blocks to be added Special function block 1unit Input output 16 points Input
576. word and display screen protect function levels and corresponding restrictions If a keyword has been registered that keyword related restriction takes priority over the display screen protect function v Usable A Timer and counter settings cannot be changed A Only monitor function is usable test function is not available L1 Unusable Display Screen Protect Function Name Keyword All online DE 4 ee Writing Reading writing eae neyo le ese agp SES prohibited prohibited 2 T A All operations sc C Erroneous 8 digit keyword setting level gt e Incorrect write oe prohibited shit write prohibited Spe medala v Tepecosn speciedaeccimenie Jg 4a 1 4 4 eje iil B a a v R aA EON e BH j v J v nj v Dn EU Bn u u isplay screen protect function ee ee r Bn v ee ee ea ee ee v Bnj a me v v v Time oy UN EAEN 1 Customer keyword Permanent PLC lock included However permanent PLC lock does not have a keyword input 2 The test function can be enabled or disabled by setting the specified device monitor 19 16 4 Relationship between keyword and display screen protect function 344 If the PLC s keyword registration function is used that keyword related restriction takes priority over the display module s display screen protect function The relationship between keywords and the display screen protect function is shown below Reyer Keyword Status Display o
577. y parameter parameter S S xooo xoo1 xoo2 S S xooo xoo1 xoo2 Main unit source input ainpoyy Aedsiq QO uoisua 2 yoojg euw CO 203 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 2 Running and Stopping Procedures Power ON 3 Starting and stopping by remote control from programming software The programming software has a function to forcibly start and stop the PLC by remote control remote RUN STOP function However when power is reapplied the remote RUN STOP function is disabled The RUN STOP status is then determined by the RUN STOP switch or RUN terminal For details on the start and stop procedures with remote control from programming software refer to Paragraph 2 of Subsection 14 2 2 14 2 2 Use of several running stopping methods 1 When the built in RUN STOP switch and the general purpose RUN terminal are used without remote running stopping operation from the programming software The RUN STOP status of the PLC is determined by the conditions shown in the following table Condition of built in RUN STOP switch Cendiven of genera purp ese ADDERE nna Status of PLC specified as RUN terminal by parameter RUN STOP Use either built in RUN STOP switch or the general input specified as RUN terminal When specifying the general purpose terminal as the RUN terminal always set the built in RUN STOP switc
578. y cause malfunctions WIRING PRECAUTIONS NWARN ING Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not supply power to the 24 and 24V terminals 24V DC service power supply on the main unit or extension units Doing so may cause damage to the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit and extension units with a wire 2mm or thicker Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems refer to section 9 3 Connect the AC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to
579. yristor is driven or shut down until the output triac is turned on and until it is turned off is 1ms or less and 10ms or less respectively 5 Output current The max current per output point is 0 3A However to restrict temperature rise the max current per one output from four points should be 0 8A average per point is 0 2A When a load with high rush current is turned on and off frequently the root mean square current should be 0 2A or less Example 0 4A 42 x 0 02 0 42 x 0 7 un y 02A 0 02 0 7 10 0 02 0 7 10 Sec SOC Sec 6 Open circuit leakage current A C R absorber is connected for turn off in parallel with the triac output terminal of this type of PLC Therefore when the circuit opens a leakage current will be 1mA at 100V AC and 2mA at 200V AC Since the triac output type devices leak current when the circuits are open small size relays and micro current loads having low rated operating current may keep operating even when the triac output is turned off Therefore use a load of 0 4VA or more at 100V AC or 1 6VA or more at 200V AC If the load is less than this value connect a surge absorber as stated below in parallel with the load For the connection of the surge absorber refer to 12 3 2 External wiring precautions 183 oz 2 op 25 N D D ok BuutM 1ndino 10 Buum OO s sN snoueA I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1S9 pejewog adnoandu OQ sun uoisuejx3
580. zi 20 6628 Invalid instruction is used in main program um M interrupt pointer SRET or IRET 6629 No P or I interrupt pointer S No SRET or IRET instruction a STL RET or MC MCR instructions in subroutine 1 9 6631 SRET programmed in invalid location g 6632 FEND programmed in invalid location 2 S e D 2 yoojg euw CO 217 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes PLC Error operation code at error occurrence Contents of error Action Operation error M8067 D8067 No jump destination pointer for CJ or CALL instruction Label is undefined or out of PO to P4095 due to indexing 6701 Label P63 is executed in CALL instruction cannot be used in CALL instruction as P63 is for jumping to END This error occurs in the execution of operation Review the instruction program and check the contents of the operands used in 6702 CALL instruction nesting level is 6 or more applied instructions mE Even if the syntax or circuit design is correct an operation 6703 Interrupt nesting level is 3 or more error may still occur 6704 FOR NEXT instruction nesting level is 6 or more For example 6705 Operand of applied instruction is inapplicable device T3002 itself is not an error But if Z had a value of 100 the timer T400 would attempt to be acce

1 - Omni Ray AG

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents